Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar, Karnataka
Sponsor
Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructural Development Corporation Ltd., Bangalore
CCSSIIRR--NNaattiioonnaall EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg RReesseeaarrcchh IInnssttiittuuttee
NNeehhrruu MMaarrgg,, NNaaggppuurr-- 444400 002200
AAuugguusstt 22001144
(QCI-NABET Accredited Consultant Organization - Listed on Aug. 05, 2014 at Sr. No. 104)
Karnataka
Tadadi
Port
Draft Report
Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,
Karnataka
Sponsor
Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructural Development Corporation Ltd., Bangalore
CCSSIIRR--NNaattiioonnaall EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg RReesseeaarrcchh IInnssttiittuuttee
NNeehhrruu MMaarrgg,, NNaaggppuurr-- 444400 002200
AAuugguusstt 22001144
Draft Report
Project Personnel
Component Functional Area Expert/ (QCI/NABET)
Scientific Staff
Project Assistants
Air Environment
Meteorology, Air Quality Monitoring & Prediction (AQ)
Dr. Rama Krishna, T.V.B.P.S.
Mr. Gaikwad, G. Mr. Kadu, R. Mr. Guddhe, S. Mr. Meshram, R. Mr. Sahare, S. Air Pollution Monitoring
Prevention and Control (AP) Ms. Padma Rao Dr. Srivastava, A. Mr. M.K. Sen Mr. Hariram Samudrala
Noise Environment
Noise & Vibration (NV)
Dr. Bodhe, G.L.
Mr. Gaikwad, G. Mr. Kadu, R. Mr. Guddhe, S.
Water Environment
Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention Control (WP)
Dr. Shastry, S. Dr. Krupdam, R.J. Mr. Baseshankar, Y.J.
Ms. Ladwani, Kiran Ms. Ladwani, Krishna
Land Environment
Land-use (LU)
Mr. Deshbhratar, P.B. Dr. Singh, H.V. Mr. Ritesh Vijay Dr. Pujari, P.
Ms. Lakde, P. Ms. Mahadik, P. Ms. Bhannare, P. Ms. Shinde, P. Ms. Rafat, A.
Solid Hazardous Waste Management (SHW))
Dr. Vaidya, A.N. Dr. Patil, M.P.
Biological Environment
Ecology and Biodiversity (EB)
Dr. Sangolkar, L.N. Dr. Shalini Dhyani Dr. Kanchan Kumari Mr. Deshpande, S. (Project Advisor)
Ms. Bhannare, P. Ms. Shinde, P. Mr. Indurkar, M. Mr. Patil V.
Socio-economic Environment
Socio-Economic Aspects (SE) Dr. Deshmukh, R. (Project Advisor)
Ms. Nagrare, V. Ms. Patil, V. Ms. Waghmare, S.
Component Functional Area Expert/ (QCI/NABET)
Scientific Staff
Project Assistants
Risk Assessment (RA) Mr. Ghuge, S. Mr. Gadbail, S. Mr. Nagarkar, S.
Project Leaders
Dr. Ramteke, D.S. Mr. P.B. Deshbhratar
Dr. S.K. Goyal (March 1, 2013 onwards)
Project Coordinator
Dr. S. R. Wate
Director
TITLE : Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,
Karnataka
TITLE : Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,
Karnataka
CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that M/s. National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
has carried out Environmental Impact Assessment Study titled “Environmental Impact
Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar, Karnataka”.
The primary baseline data was collected by NEERI during Post-monsoon 2010
within the 10 km radial distance from the port. The data was further supported by the
secondary data collected from various govt. agencies, like forest department, census
office and meteorological department. The data were used for the prediction of impacts
for air, noise, water, land, biology/ecology and socio-economics environments. It was
observed that with implementation of suggested environmental management plan, the
project does not have any major negative impacts on the receiving environment and shall
help in development of the region.
M/s. National Environmental Engineering Research Institute is a constituent
laboratory of Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR), New Delhi working in the
field of environmental science and technology. The Institute has accreditation under “EIA
Consultant Organizations Accreditation Scheme” of Quality Council of India under sector
33 (Sr. No. 9) for “Ports, harbours, jetties, marine terminals, break waters and dredging”.
The Institute has ISO 9001-2008 accreditation.
REGD. OFFICE:
CSIR-National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
Nehru Marg, Nagpur 440020 (India) Ph.: 0712-2247844 ; Fax: 0712-2249896 E-mail: [email protected]
DISCLAIMER
The information contained in the report is based on the
scientific analysis of data/information/drawings provided by the sponsor
as also collected from other sources during the time of the study. While
efforts have been made to ensure accuracy of information in the report,
NEERI shall not own, in any manner, any legal, financial or consequential
responsibility for any event of occurrence of any accident/hazard or direct
or indirect damage/ loss to any third party or to sponsor due to the use or
inability to use the information contained in the report.
The sponsor shall exercise due diligence and make their own
decision to implement the content of the report. The report shall not be
construed as any guarantee or warranty from NEERI.
Abbreviations and Acronyms
AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Official
AAS Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer
ACGIH American Conference of Govt. Industrial Hygienists
ADCP Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler
ANM Auxiliary Nurse Midwife
APHA American Public Health Association
AWC Aviation Weather Center
BCD Bival Collecting Days
BDL Below Detectable Limit
BHH Bivalve Collecting Households
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BOOST Build Own Operate Share & Transfer
BOT Build Operate Transfer
CD Chart Datum
CDMG Central Disaster Management Group
CEA Central Electricity Authority
CEC Cation Exchange Capacity
CERC Central Electricity Regulatory Commission
CFU Colony Forming Unit
CREP Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection
CMFRI Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute
CMMS Computerized Maintenance Management Systems
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CODAR Coastal Ocean Dynamics Application Rader
CRZ Coastal Regulation Zone
CSR Corporate Social Responsibility
DGTD/CCI & E Directorate General of Trade and Development
DHH Department of Health & Hospitals
DMP Disaster Management Plan
DO Dissolved Oxygen
DWT Dry Weight Tonnage
EAC Expert Appraisal Committee
EC Electrical Conductivity
ECF Environmental Consultancy Fund
Abbreviations
A2
ECO Emergency Co-ordinating Officers
EFLS Equivalent Finite Line Source
EGS Education Guarantee Scheme
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EMS Environmental Management System
ENE East North-East
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPABX Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchanges
EPO Emergency Planning Officer
EPP Environmental Planning Process
ERDMP Emergency Response Disaster Management Plan
ESDV Emergency Shutdown Valves
ESE East South-East
ESH Environment Safety Health
ESP Exchangeable Sodium Percentage
EW Estuary Water
EWS Early Warning System
FCC False Colour Composite
FDM Fugitive Dust Model
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FTIR Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy
FWC Family Welfare Center
GSE Ground Support Equipment
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GIS Geological Information System
GLC Ground Level Concentration
GoK Government of Karnataka
GPS Global Positioning System
HDPE High Density Polyethylene
HM Harbour Master
Hs Significant Wave Height
HSE Health, Safety & Environment
HTL High Tide Line
ICP Inductive Coupled Plasma
Abbreviations
A3
IDD Infrastructure Development Department
IMD India Meteorological Department
IMO International Maritime Organization
INCOIS Indian National Central for Ocean Information Service
INS Indian Naval Ship
IRC Indian Roads Congress
ISCST-3 Industrial Source Complex Short Term -Version 3
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITI Industrial Training Institute
IWT Inland Water Transport
Kd Disturbance Coefficient
KEB Karnataka Electricity Board
KIADB Karnataka Industrial Areas Development Board
Kr Reflection Coefficient
KSIIDCL Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd.
LGP Length of Growth Period
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LRF Laboratory Reserve Fund
LSD Long Store Drift
LTL Low Tide Line
MARPOL Marine Pollution (The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships)
MAV Manually Actuated Valve
MCA Maximum Credible Accident
MCW Maternal & Child Welfare
MDO Marine Diesel Oil
MHHW Mean Highest High Water
MHLW Mean Highest Lower Water
MLHW Mean Lower High Water
MLLW Mean Lowest Low Water
MOS Ministry of Shipping
MoEF Ministry of Environmental and Forests
MSL Mean Sea Level
MTPA Million Tonnes Per Annum
Abbreviations
A4
NAAQ National Ambient Air Quality
ND Not Detected
NE North-East
NEERI National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
NGO’s Non-Governmental Organizations
NH National Highway
NMHCs Non Methane Hydrocarbons
NMP New Mangalore Port
NMPT New Mangalore Port Trust
NNE North and North-East
NNW North and North-West
NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit
NW North-West
OHT Overhead Tank
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PAH Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon
PAH Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons
PCU Progressive Care Unit
PHC Primary Health Center
PHI Roadway – Wind Angle
PHS Primary Health Sub-center
PMC Pollution Monitoring Committee
PPBV Parts / Billion (by Volume)
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PPP Public Private Participation
PPTV Parts / Trillion (by Volume)
QoL Quality of Life
RMP Risk Management Plan
SATCOM Satellite Communication
SAV Submerged Aquatic Vegetation
SDI Simpson’s Diversity Index
SDV Switched Digital Video
SECR Site Emergency Control Room
SEE Soil Excavated Earth Material
SHH Shell Selling Households
Abbreviations
A5
SODAR Sonic Detection and Ranging
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
SSE South South-East
SW Sea Water
SWBH South-Western Boreholes
SWDI Shannon Weaver Diversity Index
TCLP Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure
TSHD Trailling Suction Hopper Dredge
TC Total Cloud
TPD Tonnes Per Day
THC Total Hydrocarbon
TOC Total Organic Carbon
TOR Terms of Reference
UNEP United Nations Environment Programme
USDA United States Department of Agriculture
USEPA United State Environment Protection Agency
VOC Volatile Organic Compound
WTP Water Treatment Plant
Contents
Item Page No.
List of Figures (xiv) List of Tables (xx) Abbreviations A1-A5 Executive Summary E1-E51 Compliance to ToR Points C1-C4 Chapter 1 : Introduction 1.1-1.34
1.0 Introduction 1.1
1.1 Port Function 1.1
1.2 Indian Ports Scenario 1.1
1.3 Cargo handled by the Major and the Non Major Ports 1.2
1.4 Maritime Agenda 2010 - 20 1.2
1.5 Preamble 1.3
1.6 Details of Existing Port in the State 1.4
1.6.1 Major Ports 1.4
1.6.1.1 New Mangalore Port 1.5
1.6.2 Minor Ports 1.5
1.6.2.1 Karwar Port 1.6
1.6.2.2 Belekeri Port 1.7
1.6.2.3 Tadri Port 1.7
1.6.2.4 Honnavar Port 1.8
1.6.2.5 Bhatkal Port 1.8
1.6.2.6 Kundapura Port 1.8
1.6.2.7 Hangarakatta Port 1.8
1.6.2.8 Malpe Port 1.8
1.6.2.9 Padubidri Port 1.8
1.6.2.10 Old Mangalore 1.8
1.7 Rationale for Development of the Proposed Port at Tadadi 1.9
1.8 Purpose of the Report 1.9
1.9 Justification of the Project 1.10
1.10 Alternative Sites (Locations) for Tadadi Port 1.11
1.11 Objectives of Study 1.12
1.12 Scope of Work (Proposed ToR) 1.12
1.13 Additional ToR 1.14
1.14 Detailed Work Plan 1.16
1.14.1 Air Environment 1.16
1.14.2 Noise Environment 1.16
1.14.3 Water Environment 1.17
1.14.4 Marine Environment 1.17
ii
Item Page No.
1.14.5 Land Environment 1.18
1.14.6 Biological Environment 1.19
1.14.7 Socio-economical Environment 1.19
1.15 Risk Assessment 1.20
1.16 Methodology for EIA 1.20
1.16.1 Air Environment 1.21
1.16.2 Noise Environment 1.21
1.16.3 Water Environment 1.21
1.16.4 Land Environment 1.22
1.16.5 Biological Environment 1.22
1.16.6 Socio-economical Environment 1.22
1.17 Environmental Management Plan 1.23
1.18 Risk Assessment 1.23
Chapter 2 : Project Description 2.1-2.33
2.1 Introduction 2.1
2.2 Project Location 2.3
2.3 Topography and Port Layout 2.3
2.4 Existing Port 2.4
2.5 Proposed Facility 2.4
2.6 Traffic Projections 2.4
2.7 Hinterland Connectivity 2.4
2.7.1 Road Connectivity 2.4
2.7.2 Rail Connectivity 2.5
2.7.3 Inland water connectivity 2.5
2.8 Design of Ship Sizes 2.5
2.9 Number of Berths 2.6
2.10 Details of Mechanized Iron Ore/Coal Berths 2.6
2.11 Cargo Handling Equipment at the Berths 2.6
2.12 Iron Ore Export Circuit 2.7
2.13 Coal Import circuit 2.7
2.14 Iron ore Handling System on the Berth 2.7
2.15 Coal Handling System on the Berth 2.8
2.16 Steel Product & General Cargo loading/unloading on the Berth 2.8
2.17 Stacker / Reclaimers 2.9
2.18 Iron Ore unloading System 2.9
2.19 Coal Loading System at the Station 2.10
2.20 Storage Areas 2.10
2.21 Port Railway 2.11
iii
Item Page No.
2.22 Salient Features of Berths 2.11
2.23 Dredging Requirement 2.12
2.23.1 Capital Dredging Requirement 2.12
2.23.2 Annual Maintenance of Dredging requirement 2.15
2.24 Navigational Aids 2.16
2.24.1 Navigational Buoys 2.16
2.24.2 Leading Line 2.16
2.24.3 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) 2.17
2.25 Mooring of Vessel 2.17
2.26 Tugs and other floating crafts required for berthing /un-berthing of Vessels 2.17
2.27 Utilities 2.17
2.28 Water 2.17
2.29 Power 2.18
2.30 Control System 2.18
2.31 Communication System 2.18
2.32 Information Technology and Communication 2.19
2.32.1 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) 2.19
2.33 Fire Protection and Alarm System 2.19
2.34 Facilities for Treatment or Disposal of Solid Waste / Liquid Effluent 2.19
2.35 Dust Control System 2.20
2.36 Cost Estimates 2.20
2.37 Clearances Required for the Project Implementation 2.20
Chapter 3 : Baseline Environmental Status 3.1-3.158
3.1 Background 3.1
3.1.1 Climate and Meteorology 3.1
3.1.2 Micrometeorology of Port Site 3.4
3.2 Air Environment 3.6
3.2.1 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 3.6
3.2.2 Baseline Status 3.6
3.3 Noise Environment 3.18
3.4 Water Environment 3.22
3.4.1 Bathymetry and Geophysical Study 3.22
iv
Item Page No.
3.4.2 Hydraulic Data 3.23
3.4.2.1 Tides 3.23
3.4.2.2 Currents 3.24
3.4.2.3 Waves 3.24
3.4.2.4 Aghanashini River : Sedimentation 3.25
3.4.3 Water Quality Status 3.25
3.4.3.1 Methodology of Water Quality Assessment 3.25
3.4.3.2 Surface Water Quality (Sea and Estuary Water of River Aghanashini) 3.26
3.4.3.3 Heavy Metals in Surface Water Samples 3.27
3.4.3.4 Ground Water Quality 3.27
3.4.3.5 Bacteriological Characteristics 3.27
3.4.3.6 Biological Characteristics 3.28
3.5 Sediment Quality Assessment 3.46
3.5.1 Sediment Characterization – Baseline Status 3.46
3.5.2 Physical and chemical Characteristics of sediment 3.46
3.5.3 Heavy Metals 3.47
3.5.4 Oil and Grease and Hydrocarbon 3.47
3.6 Land Environment 3.52
3.6.1 Reconnaissance 3.52
3.6.1.1 Land Form 3.54
3.6.1.2 Agro Climate Zone 3.54
3.6.1.3 Agro-Ecological Sub region 3.54
3.6.1.4 Natural Vegetation 3.54
3.6.2 Physiography 3.54
3.6.2.1 West Coast Plain 3.55
3.6.2.2 Soils of Coastal Plain 3.55
3.6.3 Geology 3.55
3.6.4 Climate 3.55
3.6.5 Soil Type of the Study Area 3.56
3.6.6 Baseline Status 3.56
3.6.6.1 Soil Characteristics 3.56
3.6.6.2 Physical Properties of Soil 3.57
v
Item Page No.
3.6.6.3 Chemical Properties of Soil 3.57
3.6.6.4 Fertility/Nutrient Status of Soil 3.58
3.6.6.5 Heavy Metal Content in the Soil 3.58
3.6.6.6 Soil Microbiology 3.59
3.6.6.7 Landuse Pattern 3.59
3.6.6.8 Cropping Pattern 3.59
3.6.7 Remote Sensing Studies 3.60
3.6.7.1 Remote Sensing Data Used 3.60
3.6.7.2 Landuse / Landcover Classification 3.61
3.7 Biological Environment 3.74
3.7.1 Study Area 3.74
3.7.2 Sampling Locations 3.75
3.7.2.1 Vegetation – Holistic Site 3.75
3.7.3 Survey Methodology 3.76
3.7.4 Quadrate study in proposed study area 3.77
3.7.5 Biodiversity in Study Area 3.77
3.7.6 Medicinal Plant in the Study Area 3.78
3.7.7 Wetland flora 3.79
3.7.8 Coastal Vegetation: Mangrove vegetation 3.80
3.7.9 Economic and Social Forestry 3.81
3.7.10 Faunal Biodiversity 3.82
3.7.10.1 Mammals 3.82
3.7.10.2 Avifauna (Birds) 3.83
3.7.10.3 Insect 3.86
3.7.10.4 Butterfly 3.88
3.7.11 Agriculture 3.88
3.7.11.1 Marketable Produce 3.89
3.7.11.2 Agricultural Customs 3.89
3.7.12 Fisheries Resources 3.90
3.7.13 Gaonkar Mines 3.91
3.8 Socio-economic Environment 3.131
3.8.1 Baseline Status 3.131
3.8.2 Demographic Structure 3.131
vi
Item Page No.
3.8.2.1 Infrastructure Resource Base 3.132
3.8.2.2 Economic Attributes 3.133
3.8.2.3 Health Status 3.134
3.8.2.4 Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes 3.135
3.8.3 Socio-Economic Survey 3.137
3.8.3.1 Public Awareness and Opinion 3.139
3.8.4 Quality of Life 3.141
Chapter 4 : Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures 4.1-4.62
4.1 Introduction 4.1
4.2 Air Environment 4.2
4.2.1 Micrometeorology 4.2
4.2.2 Air Quality Models Description 4.3
4.2.2.1 Fugitive Dust Model (FDM) 4.3
4.2.2.2 SCREEN-3 Model 4.4
4.2.2.3 CALINE-4 for mobile sources 4.4
4.2.3 Air Emissions 4.5
4.2.3.1 Air Emissions during Construction Phase 4.5
4.2.3.2 Air Emissions during Operation Phase 4.6
4.2.3.3 Impacts of Air Emissions during Construction Phase 4.7
4.2.3.4 Impacts of Air Emissions during Operation Phase 4.7
4.2.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase 4.8
4.2.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase 4.10
4.3 Noise Environment 4.17
4.3.1 Noise Sources 4.17
4.3.1.1 Prediction of Noise Levels during Construction Phase 4.17
4.3.1.2 Prediction of Noise Levels during Operational Phase 4.18
4.3.2 Noise due to Transportation 4.18
4.3.3 Impact of Noise on Occupational and Community Health 4.19
vii
Item Page No.
4.3.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase 4.19
4.3.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase 4.20
4.4 Water Environment 4.23
4.4.1 Water Requirement for Port 4.23
4.4.2 Source of Water 4.23
4.4.3 Marine Ecology 4.23
4.4.4 Estuarine Environment 4.24
4.4.4.1 Vertically homogenous 4.25
4.4.4.2 Physicochemical variation 4.25
4.4.4.3 Implications for marine life 4.25
4.4.5 Impact on Water Body 4.26
4.4.6 Water Quality 4.27
4.4.6.1 Impacts on Fishing and Salt Pan 4.27
4.4.6.2 Mitigation Measures for Impacts of Maintenance Dredging 4.29
4.4.6.3 Measures for Fish and fish Habitat Protection 4.29
4.4.6.4 Measures for Ship Operations 4.30
4.4.6.5 Other Mitigation Measure 4.30
4.4.7 Construction Phase 4.31
4.4.8 Operation Phase 4.33
4.4.9 Potential Impact on Surface Water 4.33
4.5 Land Environment 4.37
4.5.1 Littoral Drift and Impact on the Shoreline 4.37
4.5.2 Construction Phase 4.37
4.5.3 Operation Phase 4.38
4.5.4 Mitigation Measures due to dredging and Dust Emission Iron Ore/Coal Handling 4.39
4.5.5 Mitigation Measures 4.42
4.6 Biological Environment 4.45
4.6.1 Construction Phase 4.45
4.6.2 Operation Phase 4.45
4.6.3 Potential Impact on Marine Biology 4.45
4.6.4 Potential Impacts on Marine/Coastal Ecology 4.47
4.6.4.1 Impact of Mangrove Vegetation and Mitigation Measure 4.47
viii
Item Page No.
4.6.4.1.1 Mangrove vegetation 4.47
4.6.4.1.2 Importance of Mangroves 4.48
4.6.5 Impact of Bivalves 4.49
4.6.6 Mitigation of impacts of port development 4.49
4.7 Socio-economic Environment 4.54
4.7.1 Mitigation Measure 4.55
4.7.2 Region / Community Development Plan 4.55
4.7.2.1 Positive Impact 4.57
4.7.2.2 Negative Impact 4.57
4.8 Current Facilities at Tadadi 4.62
4.9 Sensitive (Holy) places in the study area 4.62
Chapter 5 : Environmental Monitoring Plan 5.1-5.9
5.1 Introduction 5.1
5.2 Environmental Monitoring 5.2
5.3 Training 5.4
5.4 Summary of Impacts and Monitoring Plan 5.4
Chapter 6 : Environmental Management Plan 6.1-6.39
6.1 Environmental Management Plant (EMP) 6.1
6.1.1 Environmental Policy 6.2
6.2 Environmental Management System 6.2
6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP 6.3
6.4 Construction Phase 6.4
6.4.1 Preparation of Site and Creation of Basic Facilities 6.4
6.4.1.1 Basic Facilities 6.4
6.4.1.2 Construction Equipments and Waste 6.5
6.4.1.3 Transportation of Materials and Waste 6.5
6.5 Operation Phase 6.6
6.5.1 Air Environment 6.6
6.5.1.1 Discharge of pollutants due to operation of ships 6.6
ix
Item Page No.
6.5.1.2 Management of Ambient Air Quality 6.7
6.5.2 Noise Environment 6.8
6.5.2.1 Management of Ambient Noise Quality 6.8
6.5.3 Water Environment 6.9
6.5.3.1 Disposal of Dredge Spoil 6.9
6.5.3.2 Disposal of Material 6.10
6.5.3.3 Alternative Plan for dredged Material Management 6.11
6.5.3.4 Ship Generated Wastes 6.11
6.5.3.5 Sediment Transport and Quality 6.11
6.5.3.6 Marine Environment 6.12
6.5.3.7 Marine Water Quality 6.12
6.5.3.8 Development of Marine Facility and Environmental Management 6.13
6.5.3.9 Water Facility and Site Sanitation 6.13
6.5.4 Land Environment 6.14
6.5.4.1 Landuse/Landscape 6.14
6.5.4.2 Soil Quality 6.15
6.5.4.3 Quarry Material Sources 6.15
6.5.4.4 Hydrology 6.16
6.5.4.5 Morphology 6.16
6.5.4.6 Greenbelt Development 6.16
6.5.5 Biological Environment 6.18
6.5.5.1 General Marine Ecosystem 6.19
6.5.5.2 Fisheries 6.19
6.5.5.3 Terrestrial Biology 6.19
6.5.5.4 Aquatic Biology 6.19
6.5.6 Socio-economic and Public Interest 6.20
6.5.6.1 Loss of Land, Livelihoods, Health and Safety 6.20
6.5.6.2 Status of the Fishing activities around the 6.21 Port Site and Management Plan
6.5.6.3 Management Plan (Resettlement and Rehabilitation)6.23
6.5.6.4 General Recommendations 6.25
6.6 Occupational Safety 6.26
6.6.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo 6.27
x
Item Page No.
6.6.2 Safety Requirements for Port Area 6.29
6.6.3 Fire-Fighting Requirements 6.30
6.7 General Mitigation Measures Proposed 6.30
6.8 Cyclone Contingency Plan 6.31
6.8.1 Cyclone Watch 6.32
6.8.2 Cyclone Warning 6.32
6.9 Post-Project Monitoring 6.33
Chapter 7 : Project Benefits 7.1-7.3
7.1 Project Benefits 7.1
Chapter 8 : Disaster Management Plan 8.1-8.29
8.1 Preamble 8.1
8.2 Objectives 8.2
8.2.1 Purpose of Disaster Management Plan 8.2
8.2.2 Disaster Management Cycle 8.2
8.2.3 Different Phases of Disaster 8.3
8.3 Key Elements 8.3
8.3.1 Basis of the Plan 8.4
8.3.2 Emergency Planning and Response Procedures 8.4
8.3.3 On-site Disaster Management Plan 8.5
8.3.3.1 Central Disaster Management Group 8.7
8.3.3.2 On-site Action Group 8.8
8.3.4 Offsite Disaster Management Plan 8.9
8.4 Disaster Prevention Measures 8.12
8.5 Action Plan for Natural Disasters 8.13
8.5.1 Earthquake 8.13
8.5.2 Flood / Cyclones 8.14
8.5.3 Tsunami 8.15
8.6 Oil Spill Contingency Management Plan 8.17
8.6.1 Response Strategies – Onsite Spills 8.18
8.6.2 Response Strategies – Off-Site Spills 8.20
xi
Item Page No.
8.7 Shoreline Response Operations 8.21
8.7.1 Main Steps in Shoreline Clean-up Methods 8.21
8.7.2 Shoreline Clean-up Methods 8.22
8.7.2.1 Pumping and Skimming Techniques 8.22
8. 7.2.2 Flushing Techniques 8.23
8. 7.2.3 Sediment Removal Techniques 8.23
8. 7.2.4 Biodegradation Techniques 8.24
8.8 Reporting Oil Spills 8.24
Chapter 9 : Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary 9.1-9.38
9.1 Introduction 9.1 9.2 Oysters 9.2 9.2.1 Occurrence 9.2 9.3 Molluscs 9.3 9.4 Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia) 9.3 9.5 Economic Importance of Bivalves 9.6 9.5.1 Harmful Molluscs 9.7 9.6 Morphology of Bivalves 9.8 9.7 Economic Valuation 9.10 9.8 Objective 9.11 9.9 Materials and Methods 9.11 9.9.1 Study Area 9.11
9.9.2 Methods 9.12
9.10 Results 9.12
9.10.1 Distribution of bivalves 9.13
9.10.2 Bivalve harvesting and trade 9.13
9.10.3 Processing 9.14
9.10.4 Shell Mining 9.15
9.10.5 Dried Meat 9.16
9.10.6 Valuation of estuary based only on bivalve production 9.16
9.11 NEERI Work 9.17
9.11.1 Management 9.17
9.11.2 Study 9.17
xii
Item Page No.
Chapter 10 : Traffic and Demand Study 10.1-10.11
10.1 Traffic Study and Demand Assessment 10.1
10.2 Export of Iron Ore 10.1
10.3 Import of Coal 10.2
10.4 Export of Steel 10.2
10.5 Complementary traffics 10.2
10.6 Analysis of Connectivity to Port 10.3
10.6.1 Connectivity by road 10.3
10.6.1.1 Existing connections 10.9
10.7 Connectivity by Railway 10.4
10.7.1 Existing Connection
10.7.2 Conclusion 10.4
10.7.3 Road and rail layout within the port 10.5
10.7.4 Connectivity with the mainland 10.5
Chapter 11 : Hydrodynamic Study 11.1
Chapter 12 : Sediment Dispersion Study 12.1-12.9
12.0 Dispersion Study 12.1
12.1 Introduction 12.1
12.2 Methodology 12.1
12.2.1 Definition of the Sediment 12.2
12.2.2 Definition of the Climate Condition 12.2
12.2.3 Modelling 12.3
12.2.4 Analysis of the Result 12.4
Chapter 13 : Disclosure of Consultants Engaged 13.1-13.17
13.1 NEERI Profile 13.1
13.1.1 NEERI Mission and Vision 13.1
13.1.2 Mandate of NEERI 13.2
13.1.3 NEERI Activities 13.2
13.1.4 NEERI Services & Goods 13.3
13.1.5 NEERI Human Resources 13.3
13.1.6 Organisational Chart of CSIR and NEERI 13.4
xiii
Item Page No.
13.1.7 Financial Resources of NEERI 13.5
13.1.8 Analytical Instruments, Computer Systems and Software at NEERI 13.6
13.1.8.1 Analytical Instrumentation Resource 13.6
13.1.8.2 Computer Hardwares & Prepherials 13.7
13.1.8.3 Supporting Software 13.7
13.1.9 Clients of NEERI 13.11
13.1.9.1 Clients: International 12.11
13.1.9.2 Clients: Central Government 13.11
13.1.9.3 Clients: State Government 13.12
13.1.9.4 Clients: Private Industries (National) 13.12
13.1.9.5 Clients: Private Industries (Multi-National) 13.13
13.1.10 Studies with International Funding 13.14
13.1.11 US-EPA AWARD TO NEERI 13.15
13.1.12 Conformity to ISO 9001:2008 13.16
13.1.13 Contact Persons 13.16
xiv
List of Figures
Figure No. Title Page No.
1.1 Location of Tadadi Port 1.24 1.2 Minor Ports in Karnataka 1.25 1.3 National Highway 66(17) – Karwar to Mangalore 1.26 1.4 Basic Components of EIA Study 1.27 1.5 Map of Coastal Regulation Zone 1.28 1.6 Multi-Criteria Analysis of the Alternatives for the Location of the 1.29
Tadadi Port 1.7 Location Map of Tadadi Port on Toposheet 1.30 1.8 10 km Study Area around the Proposed Port Site 1.31 2.1 (a) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary
near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.21 2.1 (b) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary
near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.21
2.1 (c) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.22
2.1 (d) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary
near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.22 2.1 (e) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary
near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.23 2.2 Area available for the development of Tadadi Port 2.23 2.3 Location of the Proposed Berths 2.24 2.4 Typical Ship Loader 2.24 2.5 Typical Ship Unloader 2.24 2.6 Typical Harbour Mobile Crane 2.25 2.7 Navigational Channel Alignment and Turning Circles 2.25 2.8 Typical Reclamation Area with Overflow Weir 2.26 2.9 Typical Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger 2.26 2.10 Typical Cutter Suction Dredger 2.27 2.11 Typical Grab Dredger 2.27
xv
Figure No. Title Page No.
2.12 Typical Back Hoe Dredger 2.27 2.13 Arrangement of leading lines for Tadadi Port 2.28 2.14 Typical 100 Tonne Bollard 2.28 3.1.1 Windrose during Post-monsoon season at Tadadi 3.4 3.2.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3.12 3.3.1 Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring Locations 3.19 3.4.1 Water Sampling Locations 3.31
3.5.1 Sediment Sampling Locations of the Study Area 3.48 3.6.1 Soil Sampling Locations 3.63 3.6.2 Soil Textural Class 3.64 3.6.3 Land Use Pattern (as per Census Records) 3.64 3.6.4 False colour composite of Study Area around proposed
Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka 3.65 3.6.5 Landuse/Land cover Classification of Study Area around proposed
Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka 3.66 3.7.1 Biological Sampling Locations in Study Area 3.92 3.7.2 Vegetation near the Om Beach at Gokarna 3.93 3.7.3 Cocao Plantation (Kumta) 3.93 3.7.4 Scrub Vegetation near Agnashini river 3.93 3.7.5 Scrub Vegetation near Tadadi sea coast 3.93 3.7.6 Quadrate study at Kumta 3.93 3.7.7 Quadrate Study at Tadadi 3.94 3.7.8 Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Kumta Road 3.94 3.7.9 Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Sirsi site 3.94 3.7.10 Medicinal Plant (Typha sp.) 3.94 3.7.11 Medicinal Plant (Entada Sp.) 3.94 3.5.12(a) Mangroves Plant Species, Tadadi 3.95 3.7.12(b) Mangroves Vegetation 3.96
xvi
Figure No. Title Page No.
3.7.13 Mangroves Vegetation Gokarna 3.96 3.7.14 Social Forestry Programme (a, b, c, d) 3.96 3.7.15 Semnopithecus sp (Langur) 3.97 3.7.16 Spotted Deer 3.97 3.7.17 Common Birds observed in the Study Area (a, b, c, d, e, f) 3.98 3.7.18(a) Termite hills 3.99 3.7.18(b) Termite sp. 3.99 3.7.19 Camponotus compressus 3.99 3.7.20 Tramea limbata 3.99 3.7.21 Bark Mantis 3.99 3.7.22 Mantis Nymph 3.99 3.7.23 Vanessa cardui (Butter fly) 3.100 3.7.24 Colotis amata (Butter fly) 3.100 3.7.25 Paddy Field 3.100 3.7.26 Loligo sp. (Gokarna beach) 3.100 3.7.27 Fishes Collection at Tadadi Jetty 3.101 3.7.28 Trash Fishes used for Manure 3.101 3.7.29 Species of Fishes Observed at Kumta Market 3.101 3.7.30(a) Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine 3.101 3.7.30(b) Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine 3.101 3.8.1 Survey Village for Socio-economic Study 3.144 3.8.2(a) Employment Pattern 3.145 3.8.2 (b) Employment Pattern 3.145
3.8.3(a) Representative of Gram Panchayat Office at Gokarna 3.146 3.8.3(b) Data Collection in Agarvayangani Gram Panchayat Office 3.146 3.8.4(a) Fish Caching in Study Area 3.146 3.8.4(b) Fish Caching in Study Area 3.146
xvii
Figure No. Title Page No.
3.8.5 Source of Drinking Water in Study Area 3.146 3.8.6 Educational Institution 3.146 3.8.7 PHC Primary Health Center at Ankola Taluka 3.146 3.8.8 Road Condition of the Villages 3.146 4.2.1 Impact Network for Air Environment 4.12 4.2.2 Incremental GLCs of PM10 during the Construction Phase 4.13 4.2.3 Incremental GLCs of SO2 due to simultaneous operation of
ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.13 4.2.4 Incremental GLCs of NOx due to simultaneous operation of ships/
vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.14 4.2.5 Incremental GLCs of PM10 due to simultaneous operation of ships/
vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.14 4.3.1 Impact Network for Noise Environment 4.21
4.4.1 Impact Network for Surface Water Environment 4.35 4.4.2 Impact Network for Ground Water Environment 4.36 4.5.1 Impact Network for Land Environment 4.44 4.6.1 Impact Network for Biological Environment 4.53 4.7.1 Impact Network for Socio-economic Environment 4.59 5.1 Development of Environmental Monitoring Program 5.5 6.1 Environmental Planning Process 6.35 6.2 Environmental Management Plan 6.36 8.1 Disaster Management cycle 8.26 8.2 Conceptual Plan Framework for Disaster Management 8.27 8.3 Conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency Planning Process 8.28 8.4 Onsite Port Disaster Management Organization 8.29 9.1 Paphia malabarica 9.20 9.2 Perna viridis attached to stone by thread-like byssus. 9.20 9.3 (a) Bivalve shells burnt along with coconut shell to make lime powder 9.20
xviii
Figure No. Title Page No.
9.3 (b) Lime powder packing 9.20 9.4 General features of a bivalve 9.21
9.5 Sampling points in Aghanashini Estuary 9.22 9.6 Spatial distribution of Calm, Mussel and Oysters in the
Aghanashini Estuary 9.23 9.7 Oyster bed 9.24 9.8(a) Perna viridis 9.24 9.8(b) Crassostrea sp. 9.24
9.8(c) Paphia malabarica 9.24
9.8(d) Katelysia opima 9.24 9.8(e) Meretrix meretrix 9.24
9.8(f) M. Casta 9.25 9.8(g) Arca granosa 9.25 9.8(h) Vellorita cyprinoides 9.25 9.9 (a) Bivalve collection 9.25 9.9 (b) Bivalve collection 9.25 9.10 Women removing empty and dead shells from the collection 9.25 9.11(a) Harvester selling the bivalves to the wholesaler 9.26 9.11 (b) Women selling the bivalves in Kumta market 9.26 9.12 (a) Shell mining people 9.26 9.12 (b) Shell transporting people 9.26 9.13 Dried meat 9.26 9.14 Edible portion of bivalves 9.26 9.15 Bivalve harvesting and shell mining areas 9.27 9.16 Bivalves (calms, mussels and oysters) 9.27 10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Traffic Study and Demand Assessment 10.5 10.2 Iron Ore Export Traffic Scenarios 10.6
xix
Figure No. Title Page No.
10.3 Coal Import Traffic Scenario 10.6 10.4 Steel Export Traffic Scenario 10.7 10.5 Road connections between Bellary – Hospet and Tadadi 10.8 10.6 The Road and Rail Layout within the Port Premises 10.9 10.7 The Road and Rail Connection to the Existing Rail / Road
Infrastructure 10.10 12.1 Grain Size Distribution of Seabed in the Outer Approach Channel 12.5 12.2 Grain Size Distribution of Seabed at the Estuary 12.5 12.3 Annual Frequency of Wind speed by Direction 12.6 12.4 Horizontal Displacements of the Particles during the
Sedimentation Process 12.7 12.5 Areas of Dumping and Sedimentation 12.7 12.6 Identified Areas for Dumping and Sedimentation of Dredged Material 12.8
xx
List of Tables
Table No. Title Page No.
1.1 Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Major Ports 1.32 1.2 Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Non-Major Ports 1.32 1.3 Traffic Projections of Major and Non Major Ports as per
Maritime Agenda 2010-20 1.33 1.4 Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the Locations of the Tadadi Port 1.33 1.5 Summary of Environmental Parameters and Frequency of Monitoring1.34 2.1 Design Vessels for the Tadadi Port 2.29 2.2 Total Quantity of Maintenance Dredging 2.29 2.3 Preliminary Bill of Quantities and Cost Estimates 2.30 2.4 Clearances Required from Central / State Govt. Departments 2.31 3.1.1 Climatological Data – IMD Honavar, Karnataka (1951-1980) 3.5 3.2.1 Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 3.13 3.2.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations at Study area 3.14 3.2.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring at Study Area (Post monsoon 2010) 3.15 3.2.4 Levels of Particulate Associated (Pb, Ni, As and BaP)
Toxic Pollutants (Post monsoon 2010) 3.16 3.2.5 Ambient Air Quality status of CO, Benzene and HC (Post monsoon 2010) 3.17 3.3.1 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Locations 3.20 3.3.2 Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring at Study Area 3.21 3.4.1 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Sampling Locations
(Summer 2010) 3.32 3.4.2 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Physical Parameters
(Summer 2010) 3.33 3.4.3 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters 3.34 3.4.4 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters 3.35
3.4.5 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality-Heavy Metals 3.36 3.4.6 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton 3.37
xxi
Table No. Title Page No.
3.4.7 Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Sample 3.37 3.4.8 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton 3.38 3.4.9 List of Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples 3.38 3.4.10 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Meiobenthos 3.39 3.4.11 List of Meiobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples 3.39 3.4.12 Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Macrobenthos 3.40 3.4.13 List of Macrob enthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples 3.40 3.4.14 Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations 3.41 3.4.15 Ground Water Quality - Physical Parameters 3.41 3.4.16 Ground Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters 3.42 3.4.17 Ground Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters 3.42 3.4.18 Ground Water Quality-Heavy Metals 3.43 3.4.19 Ground Water Quality-Bacteriological Parameters 3.43 3.4.20 Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton 3.44 3.4.21 Phytoplankton Species Observed In Water Sample 3.44 3.4.22 Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton 3.45 3.4.23 List of Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples 3.45 3.5.1 Sediment Sampling Locations 3.49 3.5.2 Particle Size Distribution of Sediment in the Study Area 3.49 3.5.3 Chemical Characteristics of Sediment in Study Area 3.49 3.5.4 Organic Carbon and Nutrient Content in Sediment 3.50 3.5.5 Heavy Metal content in the Sediment 3.50 3.5.6 Heavy Metals Content in the Sediment by using (TCLP) 3.51 3.5.7 Hydrocarbons and Oil and Grease Content in Sediments 3.51 3.6.1 Soil Sampling Locations 3.67 3.6.2 Textural Class of Soil in the Study Area 3.67 3.6.3 Physical Characteristics of Soil in the Study Area 3.68
xxii
Table No. Title Page No.
3.6.4 Chemical Characteristics of Soil Extract in the Study Area 3.68 3.6.5 Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) Exchangeable Cations
Content and Exchangeable Sodium Percentage (ESP) of Soils in Study Area 3.69
3.6.6 Relationship of CEC with Productivity 3.69 3.6.7 Relationship of CEC with Adsorptivity 3.69 3.6.8 Fertility Status of Soils in Study Area 3.70 3.6.9 Heavy Metals Content of Soil in Study Area 3.71 3.6.10 Microbiological Characteristics of Soil in Study Area 3.71 3.6.11 Land Use Pattern 3.72 3.6.12 Land use Land cover of the proposed area of Port at Tadari
(Tadadi) Karwar Karnataka. (3 May 2010, 10 Km radius) 3.73 3.7.1 Details of Biological Sampling Locations with Agricultural Crop 3.102 3.7.2 List of Forest Flora - Common Trees of Honnavar Division (Kumta) 3.103 3.7.3 List of Common Shrubs and Climbers of Honnavar division (Kumta) 3.108 3.7.4 List of Common Bamboos and Canes - Honnavar division
near Kumta 3.110 3.7.5 Characteristics of Trees - Morba Forest 3.111 3.7.6 Characteristics of Trees - Mithal Gazani Forest 3.111 3.7.7 Characteristics of Trees - Hiregutti Forest 3.112 3.7.8 Characteristics of Trees - Gokrna Forest 3.112 3.7.9 Characteristics of Trees - Bargi Gazal Forest 3.113
3.7.10 Characteristics of Trees - Hittal Makki Forest 3.113 3.7.11 Characteristics of Trees - Kimmani Forest 3.113 3.7.12 Characteristics of Trees - Yennamadi Forest 3.114 3.7.13 Characteristics of Trees - Korebail Forest 3.114 3.7.14 Characteristics of Trees - Khurigadda Forest 3.114 3.7.15 Characteristics of Trees - Haskari Forest 3.115 3.7.16 Characteristics of Trees - Balole Forest 3.115
xxiii
Table No. Title Page No.
3.7.17 Characteristics of Trees -Yettinbail Forest 3.115 3.7.18 Characteristics of Trees - Madangeri Forest 3.116 3.7.19 Simpson’s Diversity Index 3.116
3.7.20 List of Medicinal Plants recorded in Conservation Area (MPCA) at Devimane - Honnavar division 3.117 3.7.21 List of Common Wild animals of Honnavar division (Kumta) 3.122 3.7.22 List of Common Birds of Honnavar Division (Kumta) 3.123 3.7.23 Hotspots of Uttar Kannada District (Kumta) 3.128
3.7.24 Fish Production by Different Types of Boats at Tadadi
Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) – Kumta 3.129 3.7.25 Fish Production at Kumta Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) 3.130 3.8.1 Village Location: Socioeconomic Survey 3.147 3.8.2 Summary of Demographic Structure of Study Area 3.148 3.8.3 Demographic structure of study area 3.149 3.6.4 Infrastructure Resource Base of the Study Area 3.152 3.8.5 Employment Pattern of the Study Area 3.155 3.8.6 (a) Health Statistics - Gokarna (2009-2010) 3.156 3.8.6 (b) Health Statistics - Gokarna (From Jan 2010 to June 2010) 3.156 3.8.7(a) Information on Fisherman 3.157 3.8.7 (b) Fisherman Houshold Census – 2010 (Ankola Taluk) 3.157 3.8.7(c) Fisheries Co-operative Society 3.157 3.8.8 Quality of Life Existing in the Villages surveyed 3.158 4.2.1 Meteorological data used for Air Quality Predictions 4.15 4.2.2 Stack Details with Pollutant Emission Rate 4.16 4.3.1 Typical Noise from Construction Equipment & Machinery 4.22 4.7.1 Prediction of Likely Impacts on Socio-economic Environment 4.60 4.7.2 Expected Change in Subjective and Cumulative Quality of Life
Before and After EMP & Welfare Measures 4.61
xxiv
Table No. Title Page No.
5.1 Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan : Construction Phase 5.6
5.2 Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan : Operation Phase 5.8 6.1 Plant Species for Greenbelt Development at Port 6.37 9.1 Some edible species of bivalves in India 9.28 9.2 Chemical composition of a few important edible Indian Bivalves 9.29 9.3 Medicinal uses of Molluscs 9.29 9.4 Species-wise habitat and distribution of edible bivalves in Aghanashini estuary and elsewhere in India 9.30 9.5 Taxonomic hierarchy of Paphia malabarica (Chenmitz),
Katelysia opima (Gmelin), Meretrix meretrix (Linne), M. casta, Villorita cyprinoides (Gray.), Perna viridis (Linne), Area granosa (Lamarek), Crassostrea sp. 9.31
9.6 Village-wise estimated number of bivalve collecting (BC)
households (HH) and number of individuals involved in bivalve harvesting 9.32
9.7 Village and season-wise average quantity (Kg. wet weight
with shells) of bivalves harvested per day 9.33 9.8 (a) Village and season-wise average quantity of bivalves
harvested (in Kg. wet weight with shells) by men 9.34 9.8 (b) Village and season-wise average quantity of bivalves
harvested (in Kg. wet weight with shells) by men 9.35 9.9 Village and season and gender-wise income per year
from bivalve collection 9.36 9.10 Village-wise income (Rs.) per year from shell sale 9.37 9.11 Village-wise income (Rs.) per year from dried meat sale 9.38 10.1 Projected Total Traffic Generated at the Tadadi Port 10.11 12.1 Wind Speed (m/s) Vs. Annual Exceedance Probability 12.9
Executive Summary
1.0 Introduction
Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
(KSIIDC) has proposed to develop a port at Tadadi. The port is to be constructed in the
PPP (Public Private Partnership) mode on DBFOT (Design, Build, Finance, Operate &
Transfer) basis. The port is being designed to handle about 62.360 MTPA of Cargo.
For development of port at Tadadi, the Karnataka Industrial Area Development
Board (KIADB) had acquired a total of about 1416 acres (560 hectares) of land in 1970s.
The land acquired from different villages is as follows:
Sr. No. Village Acres Guntas
1 Hilalmakki 288 36
2 Yemme Madi 126 26
3 Midla gazani 364 03
4 Hiregult 475 30
5 Morba 151 01
6 Torke 12 06
1.1 Project Setting
The proposed port at Tadadi will be located at latitude 14032.40’ and longitude
74022.03’E. The backwaters of the river have a huge waterfront area, which make the
location a natural harbour. At present, it is a fair weather lightrage fishing port situated on
the estuary of the Aghanashini River at a distance of about 50 km from Karwar, about 24
km from Belekeri and approximately 35 km from Honnavar.
The Konkan Railway Line and National Highway (NH-66) pass very close to
the port site. The nearest station on the Konkan Railway line is Ankola, which is at a
distance of about 25 km from Tadadi.
Executive Summary
E-2
1.2 Port Details based on Preliminary Design
1.2.1 Traffic/ Cargo Handling
The port of Tadadi is proposed to start its activities with traffic of 2.87 million
tonnes in the year 2015-16. Over the following years, this volume of traffic will increase
until the year 2040-42, where it is estimated to reach 62.36 million tonnes. For rail, it is
estimated to reach 27.952 million tonnes in 2040-41.
Sea ports are important gateways for effective trading amongst countries.
Currently there is a huge gap between available capacities of port in the State vis-à-vis
the demand for service development of the port at Tadri. The port should be strategically
located so as to provide the required advantages of land. Since the Bellary-Hospet region
is rich in iron ore mines and most of the produced ore is exported out of the country, this
area has been considered as the hinterland for the analysis. The port at Tadri could form
a gateway for trade in the Bellary-Hospet region to handle cargo transport facilities of
ultimate capacity of 50.51 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of coal and iron ore as well
as 11.85 MTPA of steel products, general cargo and containers as under.
Iron Ore Export - 27.17 MTPA
Coal Import - 23.34 MTPA
Steel Products Export - 8.78 MTPA
General Cargo and Containers - 3.07 MTPA
To meet this requirement, seven berths are proposed as under.
Iron ore export - 2 berths
Coal import - 2 berths
Steel products export - 2 berths
General Cargo and containers - 1 berth
Tadadi port has been designed to have seven berths as under.
Two berths for export of iron ore
Two berths for import of coal
Two multipurpose berths for export of steel products
One multipurpose berth for general cargo and containers
Executive Summary
E-3
The berths will be an open type R.C.C (M 40 Grade) bored cast in situ piles
socketed into hard rock. The super structure will be R.C.C beam and slab construction.
1.2.2 Dimension of Berth
The berth will be an ‘L’ shaped structure with a long arm of four berths of total
length of 1,192 m long for handling of iron ore and coal capable of handling 100,000 DWT
bulk carriers and a short arm of 866 m long for handling multipurpose cargo vessels of
40,000 DWT (steel products, general cargo and containers). However, the berth
structures have been designed to accommodate 100,000 DWT vessels in the future.
1.3 Purpose of EIA
EIA is an exercise to be carried out before any project or major activity is
undertaken to ensure that it will not in any way affect the environment on either a short-
term or a long-term basis. Any development endeavour requires not only the analysis of
the need of the project, the monetary costs and benefits involved but also most
importantly, it requires a consideration and detailed assessment of the effect of the
proposed developmental activity on the environment.
Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation
(KSIIDC) Ltd. has committed that it will implement the proposed project in a manner
consistent with sustainable development, which would be based on openness,
cooperation and in consultation with local communities. The approach and methodology
in executing this EIA has been to comply with Indian national legislation, standards,
guidelines and regulatory requirements.
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for ports and harbours is a
mandatory requirement as per the Ministry of Environmental and Forest (MoEF) EIA
Notification of September 14, 2006 and is also governed under CRZ Notification of
February 1991 (as amended on January 25, 2005 and in 2011). Port and Harbour
projects fall under activity No. 7(e) and handling of cargo greater than 5 Million Tonnes
Per Annum are classified as category 'A'.
Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
(KSIIDC) retained CSIR-National Environmental Engineering Research Institute (NEERI),
Nagpur to undertake Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study, which will include
baseline data for various environments components, viz. air, noise, water, land, biological
environment and socio-economic to delineate Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to
ultimately minimize the adverse impacts based on studies of one season.
Executive Summary
E-4
2.0 Baseline Environmental Quality Status
The baseline environmental quality was assessed for various components of
the environment, viz. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic through field
studies within the impact zone. The baseline environmental quality was assessed during
October-November 2010 for post monsoon season in the study area of 10 km radial
distance from the proposed project site, in support with the secondary data collection
within the 15 km radial distance from the proposed project site.
2.1 Air Environment
The 24 hourly wind rose diagram for post monsoon season indicates that the
predominant winds are from east and west direction with speed ranging between 1.0 m/s
and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly, the impact zone will be spread over W-SE-NE-E sector during
the post monsoon season.
Keeping in view the prevailing meteorological conditions for the study area, air
quality monitoring at 10 locations was conducted following the CPCB guidelines. At all the
sampling locations, PM10 and PM2.5 as well as gaseous pollutants like SO2, NOX, NH3 and
heavy metals (Pb, Ni, As), CO, Benzene, Hydrocarbon, Benzo-a-pyrene (BaP) were
monitored within the study area. The data collected was subjected to statistical analysis
for finding out the range (minimum-maximum), average and standard deviation.
The 24 hourly averaged particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5) concentrations in
the rural/residential areas were observed to be 49-62 µg/m3 for PM10 and 23-28 µg/m3 for
PM2.5. The values of all the parameters were found to be well within the CPCB limits,
prescribed in the National Ambient Air Quality Standard notified in November 2009.
2.2 Noise Environment
The spot noise levels were monitored at residential, commercial, silence zones
and roadside in the study area. The noise levels observed during day and night time
varied in the range of 39-47 dBA and 33-41 dBA respectively in the residential area,
whereas in the commercial zone, the noise levels varied from 44-56 dBA and 40-48 dBA
during day and night times respectively. The noise levels in the silence zones (school,
temple and hospitals) were found closer to those observed elsewhere in the villages and
were observed in the range of 32-40 dBA and 25-35 dBA during day and night time
respectively. The noise levels monitored on roadside during day and night time ranged
between 48-60 dBA and 42-55 dBA respectively. A higher noise level at road crossing of
Executive Summary
E-5
NH-66 is attributed to vehicular movement. The noise levels in general are observed to
be well within the stipulated standards of CPCB.
2.3 Water Environment
2.3.1 Hydraulic Data
The tides at the site are semi-diurnal, which means that the tidal cycle is
approximately of 12 hours. There are two types of tides: high tides and low tides.
According to the information from the Navigation chart number 2024 the main tide levels
are as follows:
MHHW (Mean Highest High Water): + 1.8 m above CD (Chart Datum)
MLHW (Mean Lowest High Water): + 1.7 m above CD
MSL (Mean Sea Level): + 1.2 m above CD
MHLW (Mean Highest Low Water): + 1.0 m above CD
MLLW (Mean Lowest Low Water): + 0.4 m above CD
GTS Bench Mark was established with brass plate fixed on cement concrete,
0.4m below ground level in premises of Tadadi port office building. The MSL value of this
BM is RL: 1.556 m (which means + 2.756 m CD)
2.3.2 Bathymetric and Geophysical Surveys
From the Bathymetric and Geophysical survey, it is noted that the offshore
area of the sea bottom is quite regular and flat with gentle slopes of 1:300 to 1:500. The
(-) 10 m CD depth is located approximately 3000 m from the coastline and the (-) 20 m
CD is located at about 8000 m from coastline. The depth of the sea-bed gradually varies
from the 5 m contour in the North-Eastern corner to (-) 21 m CD on the South-Western
boundary of the offshore block. The maximum water depth of (-) 21.4 m CD is observed
along South Western boundary while the minimum water depth of (-) 3.9 m CD is noted in
the North-Eastern corner. Sea-bed features include fine sediments, coarse to very coarse
sediments, boulders, cobbles and scar marks. A minor rocky patch is exposed on the
sea-bed in the North East corner of the block.
The seabed sediment grain size distribution pattern reflects the exposure of
the sea-bed to winnowing process which is driven by the stress put on the sea bed by sea
wind, tidal currents and by non-directional or oscillatory forms of winds and waves. The
morphological features within the survey area indicate that there is constant reworking of
Executive Summary
E-6
sediment by the tidal action. Fine-grained clay sediment was observed on the sea floor
throughout the offshore survey block. The clay sediment also contains gravel fraction
consisting of shell fragment of various sizes in some places.
At the river estuary, there exist some shallow areas that emerge at the lowest
low tides. The bathymetric contours of the inner block reveal a considerable steep slope
along the channel of the proposed Tadadi port, oriented Northwest-Southeast within the
Tadadi creek. The sea-bed exhibits a very gentle to negligible slope in the areas away
from the channel on both sides. The depth of water column varies from negative values to
5 m. The sediments vary from sand to cobbles and gravel with bioclasts.
2.3.3 Current
The general currents in the area are of monsoonal origin but tend to follow the
trend of the coast in December and January. Currents are North-Westerly with velocity
rate up to 1 knot (1 knot=0.51 m/s). In July and August, when South-West monsoon is
well established, South-Easterly current sets in when rates of up to 2 knots are
experienced.
The existing currents at the mouth of the Aghanashini River (very close to the
proposed Tadadi port location) have a double component or origin: the flow of the river
itself and the tides. Moreover the speed of the current component due to the river
depends directly on the flow carried, getting its maximum during the rainy season.
2.3.4 Waves
The wave’s distribution along the year present two clear periods: the calm/fair
from (November-April) and rough (corresponding to the South-West monsoon). The
significant wave height in the rough period exceeds 1 m for more than 90% of the time
and it exceeds 2.5 m for 60-80% of time. During the fair period the significant wave height
seldom exceeds 1.58 m and 8% of the time the height is less than 1.2 m and the median
significant height is about 0.8 m.
2.3.5 Dredging Requirement & Quantity
Based on the results of the bathymetric survey and the navigation channel
dimension the total dredging quantity was estimated to be about 50 million m3, out of
which about 27 million m3 corresponds to the outer navigation channel and about
23 million m3 to the inner navigation channel & turning circles.
Executive Summary
E-7
Near the location of the proposed site, the bed was found at a depth of (-) 0.80
m CD and at the proposed location of the multipurpose terminal berth, the depth
observed was from (-) 0.40 to (-) 1.2 m CD. To handle vessels of 1,00,000 DWT, the
water depth needs to be increased to (-) 16 m CD allowing enough keel clearance. Hence
a dredging depth of (-) 16 m CD has to be maintained along the inner channel and
mooring area to accommodate 1,00,000 DWT Vessels. The multipurpose berth is
currently expected to receive 40,000 DWT vessels, for which the draft is to be increased
to (-) 14.5 m CD allowing enough keel clearance. Based on the results of the bathymetric
survey, the total dredging quality for the mooring area is estimated to be about
10 million m3.
From the analysis of results of the boreholes falling in the area of dredging, the
quantity of dredging of hard material worked out to be about 69,00,000 m3. Out of the
total dredged material of about 5,00,00,000 m3, about 1,80,00,000 m3 will be used for the
purpose of reclamation and the balance is proposed to be disposed offshore.
2.3.6 Surface Water
2.3.6.1 Sea and Estuary Water
A total of 18 water samples were collected, which included 8 were surface
water samples [3 from Arabian Sea & 5 from Aghanashini river estuary water], and 10
ground water samples (3 from dug wells & 7 from bore wells).
The pH, Temperature, Turbidity and Total Suspended Solid ranged from 6.5-
7.5, 26-300C, <1-9 NTU and 15-104 mg/l respectively in sea water samples. Inorganic
parameters like Chloride, Total Alkalinity, Sulphate and Total Salinity were in the range of
10598-21769 mg/l, 106-122 mg/l, 342-390 mg/l, 18-66% respectively. DO and BOD were
found to be in the range of 2.9-6.8 mg/l and <5 mg/l respectively. Nitrate-nitrogen and
total phosphate were found to be in the range 0.014-0.032, 0.05-0.27 mg/l respectively.
Surface water contained 4.8-13.2 mg/l oil & grease and 0.12-2.46 mg/l hydrocarbon. The
heavy metals contents were within permissible limit. Shannon Wiener Diversity Index
(SWDI) values for phytoplanktons and zooplanktons varied from 0.9 to 1.9 indicating
moderate productivity. The Shannon-Weiner diversity represents the proportion of
species abundance in the population. It’s being at maximum when all species occur in
similar number of individuals and the lowest when the sample contains one species. So,
observed values reflect that in dug wells meio-benthos were more diverse than macro
benthos and phytoplanktons respectively.
Executive Summary
E-8
2.3.6.2 Ground Water
The pH, Temperature, Turbidity, Total Suspended Solids and Conductivity of
surface water varied in the range of 5.7-7.8, 28-310C, <1-3 NTU, 70-180 mg/l and 100-
315 us/cm respectively in ground water (Dug well and Bore well). Total Dissolved Solids,
Total Hardness, Chloride; Sulfate, Sodium, and Potassium were found in the range of 70-
180 mg/l, 16-92 mg/l, 4-30 mg/l, 8-19 mg/l, 8-59 mg/l and 1-5 mg/l respectively. In ground
water samples, DO and COD were observed in the range of 2.8-6.2 mg/l and 12-64 mg/l
respectively. Nitrate as Nitrogen and total phosphate were found in range of ND-0.08 mg/l
and 0.01-0.52 mg/l. Nickel, Lead, Iron, Manganese and Zinc concentration were reported
to be in the range of 0.38-6.05 mg/l, 0.03-0.13 mg/l, ND-7.56 mg/l, ND-0.07 mg/l, ND-0.26
mg/l respectively. In the ground water of dug well and bore well, total coliforms and fecal
coliforms varied between 65-145 CFU/100 ml and ND-54 CFU/100 ml respectively. The
SWDI values for phytoplankton and zooplankton were 0.9-1.5 and 0-1.5 respectively,
indicated poor to moderate productivity.
2.3.6.3 Sediment Quality
Several contaminants on entering the aquatic environment are adsorbed by
suspended solids in water and are transported to the sediment. Thus the sediment of
area received anthropogenic pollutants such as trace metals, organics etc. The collected
sediment samples from Sea, Estuary and Aghanashini river were analyzed. The data
indicated that the particle sizes <0.002mm and 0.02-0.022 mm were prominent. pH of the
sediment was neutral to slightly alkaline and was observed in the range of 7.10-7.83. The
sediment samples were strongly saline in nature (7.30-9.20 dS/m).
The dissolved solids ranged between 4672 to 5760 mg/l. Organic carbon
content in sediment was observed in the range of 0.24-1.60 %. Total nitrogen, Total
Phosphorus and Total Potassium varied from 0.12-0.34%, 0.097-0.169% and 0.018-
0.058% respectively. Organic Carbon content showed lower to higher concentrations
(0.24-1.60%). Concentration of heavy metal (Ni, Cd, Cr, Pb, Fe, Mn, Zn and Co by TCLP
method) was observed as Ni: 0.096-0.115 mg/l, Cd: 0.011-0.017 mg/l, Cu: 0.007-0.025
mg/l, Fe: 6.66-18.13 mg/l, Mn: 3.781-4.361 mg/l, Zn: 0.077-0.114 mg/l, Co: 0.054-0.064
mg/l respectively, whereas, Cr and Pb was not found in the sediment samples. Oil &
grease and hydrocarbon were found in the range of 0.22-0.83 mg/kg and 0.14-0.53 mg/kg
respectively.
Executive Summary
E-9
2.4 Land Environment
2.4.1 Land Use Pattern
The land use pattern in different villages of the study area is dominated by rain
fed area i.e. 31.89% followed by 7.46% irrigated land, 27.44% forest land, 18.32 %
cultivable waste land and 14.89% non cultivable wasteland.
2.4.2 Cropping Pattern
Agriculture being the main occupation in the State, around 65% of the people
of Karnataka are engaged in agriculture and other related agricultural occupation. Coastal
Karnataka is a land of many climates and varieties of soils, providing scope for much
diversity in agriculture. Rice is the popular cropping system in irrigated lands in humid and
coastal ecosystems of Karnataka. Coastal region too has given more importance to the
growing of commercial crops. Locals also grow Ragi (finger millet), sugarcane in small
portions on their agriculture lands. Most of the farmers grow crops like paddy, ragi,
cashewnut jowar, bajra, maize and other cereals and pulses like gram; oilseed crops like
coconut, ground nut, sunflower, etc. Non-food crops like areca nut sugarcane, tobacco,
cotton, etc., are also grown here. Locals prefer growing green vegetables for personal
and commercial purpose in their crop lands.
2.4.3 Soil Characteristics
Physical Properties
In the study area, sandy loam is the prominent soil texture followed by clay,
and sandy clay loam. The clay content in the soils varied from 6.2 to 45.2%. The bulk
density was found to be in the range of 1.20-1.43 g/cm3, which is considered as
moderately good. The porosity and water holding capacity of soil was found in the range
of 38.80-48.84 % and 18.20-55.43% respectively.
Chemical Properties
pH of the soil samples was observed in the range of 4.9-6.1, whereas,
Electrical conductivity was in the range of 0.05-0.21 dS/m. Soils are normal with Calcium,
Magnesium, Sodium and Potassium concentrations in the range of 0.11-0.39 meq/l,
0.015-0.158 meq/l, 0.001-0.007 meq/l and 0.011-0.196 meq/l respectively.
The soil had low to high cation exchange capacity. Exchangeable cations,
Ca++ and Mg++ were found in the range of 2.2-3.6 cmol(p+) kg-1 and 1.2-1.8 cmol(p+) kg-1
of soil respectively. Na+ and K+ were in the range of 0.02-0.18 cmol(p+) kg-1 and 0.08-
Executive Summary
E-10
0.70 cmol(p+) kg-1 of soil respectively. Exchangeable Sodium percentage was in the
range of 0.17-1.96, and soils were observed normal with respect to alkalinity. The
productivity of the soils is very low to moderate on the basis of cation exchange capacity.
Organic Carbon, available Nitrogen, Phosphorous and Potassium were
observed in the range of 0.18-0.75%, 200-297 kg/ha, 10.3-16.5 kg/ha and 113-118 kg/ha
respectively. The soils are poor to medium with respect to the Organic Carbon content,
whereas fertility of soil is poor with respect to available Nitrogen, Phosphorus and
Potassium. The heavy metals contents in the soil are normal. Total viable microbial
population per gram of soil varied from 6-60 x 106 CFU. Different micro floras observed
per gram of soil were fungi (4-53 x 106 CFU), Actinomycetes (1-20 x 104 CFU), Rhizobium
(1-10 x 104 CFU) and Azotobacter (1-12 x 104 CFU).
2.4.4 Remote Sensing Studies
Remote sensing technology has emerged as a powerful tool in providing
reliable information on various natural resources at different levels of details in a spatial
format. It has played an important role in effective mapping and periodic monitoring of
natural resources including environment. Remote sensing data of May 30, 2010 was used
to estimate the land use/ land cover of the study area. The land-use/ land-cover
classification of the 10 km radius study area revels that as much as 38.82% area is
occupied by sea On landside, the land-use classification is: Agriculture: 11.44%, Forests:
15.02%, Barren land: 1.75%, Fallow land: 18.07%, Built-up land: 0.70%, river: 4.58%,
saltpans: 0.64%, creek land: 2.22%, mangrove: 0.87% and 5.77% other water bodies
such as wetland/ submerged area: 5.77% .
2.5 Biological Environment
The study area comes under Uttar Kannada District, which is known for its
dense forests, covering about 80% of the area of the district. Depending on phyto-
sociological conditions and other ecological factors, the forests of the Uttar Kannada are
broadly divided into moist and dry types.
The Moist Forest type is subdivided into Evergreen, Semi evergreen and Moist
deciduous types in the study area. The dry type is divided into dry deciduous and thorny
forest. These forests have semi evergreen species in the upper canopy and evergreen in
the lower storey. These forests have predominance of bamboo. On the red soil, xylia is
present.
Executive Summary
E-11
2.5.1 Biodiversity
Floral biodiversity of the area comprises of several species of medicinal and
aromatic plants. However, there was no commercial utilization of these plants. Major
reasons are lack of awareness about the medicinal value of plants and lack of market
access. The daily requirement of local inhabitants for fuel wood is fulfilled from their
orchards, agro-forests and nearby forests. Every household is having a kitchen garden
and orchard comprising of vegetables, fruit trees and some medicinal plants. The major
species observed are:
Evergreen species: Dipterocarpus indicus, Diospyros candolleana,
Artocarpus hirsutum, Vateria indica, Hoppea intergrifolia, Memecylon umbellatum,
Mangifera indica, Actinodaphne agustifolia, Holigarna grahmie, and Calamus rotang.
Semi evergreen species: Cinnamomum malabaricum, Holigarna arnottiana,
Dalbergia latifolia, Ficus spp., Pterocarpus marsupium, and Aglaia roxbhurgiana.
Moist deciduous species: Terminalia paniculata, Terminalia tomentosa,
Xylia xylocarpa Careya arborea, Spondias spp., Tectona grandis, Lagerstroemia
parviflora, Dillenia pentagyna, Strychnos nuxvomica, and Bambusa arundinaceae.
Dry deciduous species: Acacia catechu, Sepium insigne, Anoegissus spp.,
Bauhinia racemosa, and Bombax ceiba.
Plantations: Tectona grandis, Areca catechu, Cocos nucifera, Casuarina
equisetifolia, Acacia auriculiformis, Acacia nilotica, and Eucalyptus sp.
2.5.2 Wetland Flora
The study area is covered with 15.02 % forest. The estuarine systems support
fisheries of great regional importance. The mangroves forests provide a wide range of
useful forest product. The study area is located on seashore line of Arabian Sea. Out of
the total study area of 314 km2, about 191 km2 area is having terrestrial habitat, which is
rich in flora and fauna. Fisheries and agriculture are the main occupation and source of
livelihood for local people. Total 14 sampling locations were selected for in-depth
exploration of floral biodiversity based on topography, landuse, vegetation pattern etc. In
the study area studied, 211 plant species were recorded, comprising 145 trees, 61
shrubs, and 5 bamboos. In the study area, 156 medicinal plants were recorded, of which
61 plants are known for their peculiar medicinal values. Further, 20 species of mangroves
belonging to 7 families were identified.
Executive Summary
E-12
Schoenoplectus lateriflorus was the most widely occurring species followed by
Cyperus halpan, and Geissaspis cristata. Cyperus halpan has 2 sub-species C.
halpan subsp. halpan and C.halpan subsp. juncoides. Species of Schoenoplectus and C.
halpan are found in shallow temporary waters, fringes of permanent water bodies and in
slow running streams. G. cristata occurs mostly in wet soils along the marshes, ponds
and river banks and hence, it is commonly observed in many localities. These were
associated with species of Lindernia, Fimbristylis, Eriocaulon, etc. Deeper waters were
mostly harbored by species of Nymphea, Nymphoides and other rooted floating species.
2.5.3 Mammals
The commonly found mammals in the study area were Spotted Dear (Chital)
(Axix axis), Jungle Cat (Felis chaus), Common Langur (Presbytis entellus), Leopard (Felis
bengalensis), Mongoos (Anropunctatus species) etc.
2.5.4 Birds
Due to prevailing extreme climatic conditions, sighting and recording the
presence of birds was restricted to only 55 bird-species. This included birds of prey and
common passerine species. Dominant birds spotted at remaining sites were spotted dove
and Jungle Crow. Common birds observed at various places were Cattle egret, Indian
Parakeet, Nightjar & Common Babbler, Common Swift, Large Egret, Little Cormorant.
2.5.5 Insects
The termites are a group of eusocial insects usually classified at the taxonomic
rank of order Isopteran. Along with ants and some bees and wasps which are all placed
in separate order hymenoptera were recorded. Termites are major detrivores, particularly
in the subtropical and tropical region and their recycling of wood and other plant matter is
of considerable ecological importance.
2.5.6 Agriculture
In the order of importance the main agriculture crops are paddy, coconut, ragi
and areca nut. Betel nut, black pepper and cardamoms are other prominent cash crop
species. Sandalwood carving is a famous craft for which this tract is well known and
Sandalwood trees are also present in the area.
2.5.7 Marketable Product
The marketable products consist of timber, firewood, bamboos and minor
forest products such as Catechu (Katha), Honey and Wax, Shikakai Pods, Hylgal Seeds,
Executive Summary
E-13
Jumri leaves, Wild pepper, Dalchinni bark, Canes, halamaddi and Cashew nut. The most
common species of timber extracted are Teak (Tectona grandis), Sisam (Dalbergia
sissoo), Honne Pterocarpus marsupium), Matti (Terminalia elliptica), Nandi (Spathodea
campanulata), Kalam (Mitragyna parvifolia), Kindal (Terminalia paniculata), Heddi,
Bharangi (Clerodendron serration), Surhonne, Dhaman (Grewia tiliifolia), Neral, Lare,
Bilakhambi and Sagadi.
2.5.8 Fisheries Resources
Tadadi and Kumta are the major fish landing centres in the study area with
annual total fish production of 3265 MT and 389 MT respectively. Trash fishes are used
for making poultry food and manures. The dominant fish species observed at market
place of Kumata are Oil sardines, Mackerels, Carrangids, Pomfrets and Seer fishes.
2.5.9 Shell Mine
Nearly 500 m from the Tadadi Jetty, sea-shells mining was being done by M/s
Gaonkar. The basic purpose of the mine was to drain sea-shells and Molluscan species
found near seashore as raw material. Sea-shells are crushed for separating flesh and
shells. The flesh is used for making fish & poultry food, and the dead shells were used for
making sweet lime.
2.6 Socio-economic Environment
The socio-economic profile of 21 villages falling in the study area was
analyzed with respect to demography, infrastructural facilities, economy, health, literacy,
cultural and aesthetic attributes. The demographic structure of the study area is given
below:
Total population of the region as per 2001 census is 68,390 out of
which 34,539 are male and 33,851 are female
Total number of households in the region are 13,140
Sex ratio (number of female per thousand male) in the region is 980;
this shows that male population is higher in the region as compared to
the female
Out of the total population, SC and ST populations are 6.41 % and
0.06% respectively
Executive Summary
E-14
Total main workers are worked out to about 30.25 %, 10.88 % comes
under marginal worker category and 58.86 % belongs to non workers
category
Literacy rate of the population in the study area is about 68.85%
The socio-economic indicators for QoL assessment are income, employment
and working conditions, housing, food, clothing, water supply, sanitation, health, energy,
transportation, communication, education, environment and pollution, recreation, social
security and human rights.
Based on the status of various infrastructure and amenities present in the
surveyed villages, quality of life index was estimated to be satisfactory.
3.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts
3.1 Air Environment
In order to predict Ground Level Concentration (GLC’s) of SO2, NOX and PM10
for different temporal variations during the construction and operational phase, Fugitive
Dust Model (FDM), SCREEN-3 and CALINE-4 models were used.
3.1.1 Impacts during Construction Phase
The particulate emission and meteorological data were used for predictions.
The 24 hourly average maximum GLCs of PM10 were found to be 72.4 µg/m3. The
maximum GLC is less than the NAAQS for PM10 (100 µg/m3). As construction is a
temporary activity the impacts, will die down soon.
3.1.2 Impacts during Operation Phase
(a) Ships/Vessels and Dock/Port operations
The air pollution impact due to ships movement and berthing at the proposed
berths (7 nos.) in the Tadadi port on air environment is studied. The berths are designed
for operating ships with capacity ranging from 40,000 DWT to 100,000 DWT. It is
assumed that all 7 berths will be occupied with one ship each with two auxiliary engines
and are under operation continuously during berthing. The pollutant emissions from the
ships are estimated based on the emission factors for the pollutants SO2, NOx and PM10
with ships having four main (> 2000 KW) and four auxiliary (600 KW) engines in operation
moving with medium speed (SKM, 2007: Air quality impact assessment; DEH, 2001;
National pollutant inventory emission estimation technique manual for marine operations
Executive Summary
E-15
v1.1). The estimated emissions of SO2, NOx and PM10 from 7 ships simultaneously
berthed at all berths along with the standard stack characteristics of auxiliary engines
(SKM, 2004: Port botany upgrade EIS-Air quality impact assessment commission of
inquiry) and the emissions of SO2, NOx and PM10 from different dock/port operations are
considered for computing the incremental ground level concentrations of pollutants.
The 24 hrly maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8
µg/m3 and 3.0 g/m3 respectively due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each
berth along with dock/port operations during post-monsoon season. The predicted 24
hourly GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are found to be less than the 24 hourly
concentrations of 228 µg/m3 for SO2 and 50 µg/m3 as given in ground level impact
assessment criteria (DECC, 2005; Approved methods for the modeling and assessment
of air pollutants in new South Wales, ISBN 1 74137 488 X). However, the 24 hourly
concentrations of NOx are found to be higher than the ground level impact assessment
criteria of 98 µg/m3.
(b) Vehicles Movement on State Highway (SH)
Apart from the Ship and dock emissions, movement of vehicles and trucks will
result in exhaust emissions as well as fugitive emissions and re-suspension of road dust.
Around 4000 truck trips will be in operation per day to transport material from the
proposed port on SH-63 with existing lane (2 lanes), which will be increased to about
12000 truck trips per day after widening of road to 4 lanes. CALINE-4, a line source
model developed by California Transport Department is used to predict the pollutant
concentrations from mobile sources that transport materials, etc. It is found that the 1-
hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are 74 µg/m3, 46 µg/m3
and 76 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63 with existing 2-lane
road. However, the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are
185 µg/m3, 115 µg/m3 and 192 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63
with 2+2-lanes or 4-lane road. The pollutant concentrations on 24-hourly basis will be less
than the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS).
The baseline maximum concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 were monitored
to be 8 µg/m3, 18 µg/m3 and 65 µg/m3 respectively near the proposed site. The
incremental concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and
dock/port operations would be 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3 and 3.0 µg/m3 on 24- hourly
basis. The cumulative concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at
Executive Summary
E-16
berths and dock/port operations superimposed over the baseline values would be
36.4 µg/m3, 144.8 µg/m3 and 68.0 µg/m3 on 24 hourly basis.
3.2 Noise Environment
3.2.1 Impacts during Construction Phase
The major noise generating sources will be DG sets, crusher excavators,
crane, blasting, concrete mixer / dredgers etc., which produce noise level in the range of
70-90 dBA. Depending upon the placement, operation schedules etc., these activities at
the site are likely to increase the background noise levels by 2-3 dBA at distance of 0.5
km. Since the major human settlements are more than 2.5 km away from the site, hence,
there will not be any impact of noise on the community.
3.2.2 Impacts during Operational Phase
The cumulative noise levels due to the combined operation of booster pumps,
power generating units, dredgers, ships loading/unloading and generators at the port
could be in the range of 70-75 dBA, which is predicted to be 50 dBA at a distance of 250
m and 44 dBA at a distance of 500 m from the sources. Thus there will be an incremental
noise level of 1-2 dBA over the baseline at a distance of 500 m from the proposed on-
shore terminals. As no major settlement is located within 2.5 km from the storage
terminals, impact of noise is not envisaged on the community.
3.2.3 Noise due to Transportation
The equivalent noise level due to traffic is estimated using FHWA (Federal
Highway Administration) Traffic Noise Model. It is predicted that maximum contribution of
vehicles during construction period at 10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road will be
about 60 dBA and 56 dBA respectively. Considering the background noise level of 60
dBA along the roads, the incremental noise level will be 1-2 dBA. There may be marginal
increase in noise level in residential area situated at 100 m, and beyond it will be
insignificant.
3.2.4 Impact of Noise on Occupational Community Health
Sound pressure level (Leq) generated by various equipment, averaged over 8
hours is used to describe noise exposure in work place environment. The damage risk
criteria for hearing ascertained by CPCB and OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health
Administration) stipulate that the noise level upto 90 dBA are acceptable for 8 hour
exposure per day.
Executive Summary
E-17
3.3 Water Environment
The impacts on water environment typical to a port and harbor project can be
classified into two broad categories.
Resource Availability
The nearest water source identified is from the river Ganga Valli that is within
8 km from the Tadadi port. The total consumption will be about 1.5 lakhs liters per day.
Marine Ecology
The location of port affects aquatic fauna and flora through changes of water
quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Impact on bottom biota is usually
linked to a reduction in fishery resources. Deteriorations of water quality usually give rise
to change in biota. The proposed construction is mainly on landward side where the land
is under water.
3.3.1 Impacts during Construction Phase
Construction work in water would cause re-suspension of sediment and turbid
water. Re-suspension of sediments in water leads to an increase in the level of
suspended solid (SS) and the concentration of organic matter possibly to toxic or harmful
levels. It also reduces sunlight penetration. Work vessels are a possible cause of oil spills
and leakage of other substances into water.
Dredging may lead to changes in current pattern and flow as well as salt
wedge intrusions into river mouth or littoral drifts in the shore zone. Disposal of dredged
material on land/sea may possibly cause leakage of harmful substances. Dredging
activity disturbs bottom sediments and induces re-suspension of dispersed material.
Dumping of dredged material directly alters bottom configuration and biota may disperse
toxic or harmful chemicals around the disposal site.
3.3.2 Impacts during Operation phase
Possible discharges from ships that could be sources of water pollution are
bilge water, ball ash water oily wastes, sewage, garbage and other residues in a ship spill
of oils, lubricants and fuel may be the source of water pollution.
Executive Summary
E-18
3.4 Land Environment
3.4.1 Impacts during Construction Phase
For the construction of the multipurpose sea port, about 1400 acres of land
has been acquired. In fact, the land was acquired way back in early 1970’s for industrial
development. However, with the passage of time and due to proximity of estuary, the
area got submerged and slowly-slowly various commercial activities like fishing, mining of
shell and mangrove growth took place. The development of port will require reclaiming of
the whole submerged area, and the present activities will require to be restored suitably in
the possible adjoining area.
Since, most of the land is under water before the construction, more land
would be reclaimed. The movement of vehicles and heavy construction may also result in
minor consolidation of top soil and sub soil.
Soil contamination may take place due to movement of vehicles and solid
waste generated from the labour camp setup during pre-construction phase stage. The
impact would be significant at locations of construction phase primarily due to allied
activities and adequate measure would be taken to ensure that all operations avoid
potential land contamination. The solid and hazardous wastes generated from ship and
from port operations will have to be disposed off properly to avoid land contamination.
3.4.2 Impacts during Operation Phase
Operational activities would comprise construction of buildings, laying of
roads, electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated
with port development project. Therefore no change is anticipated on the land use due to
such activities in the study area, except at the project site.
The impact on soil would be due to disposal of solid wastes such as
construction material, rubble, composite garbage and discarded topsoil.
3.5 Biological Environment
3.5.1 Impacts during Construction Phase
The project site area does not cover any reserved or protected forest in Tadadi
port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild animals. Mangrove plantation of about 217 ha
exists within the 5 km radial area. The mangroves existing in the project site area will be
affected, which will need to be suitably compensated by re-afforestation.
Executive Summary
E-19
3.5.2 Impact during Operation phase
Ship traffic and discharges may directly cause damage to fishery resources,
aquatic biota and coastal habitat. Indirect damages to bottom biota and habitat may also
be caused. Dust dispersion on land may cover plants and change terrestrial habitats.
Water pollution and bottom contamination resulting from these effluents lead to
deterioration of aquatic biota and fishery resources.
3.5.3 Impact on Marine Environment
Dredging activities may affect flora and fauna biodiversity due to:
Re-suspension and settlement of sediment
Increase in turbidity, thereby decreasing the light penetration and photo
synthetic activity
Reduction in dissolved oxygen levels
Changes in species diversity and structure of benthic communities
Loss of benthic habitat due to disturbance of the bottom sea floor
Reduction in bottom biota which is usually linked to a reduction in
fishery resources
Heavy construction and dredging activities in the intertidal and sub-tidal areas
proposed for the development of the port will influence the local ecology and impact on
the intertidal biota of the affected areas, loss of bottom habitat, number of bacteria,
phytoplankton, zooplankton, and benthic organism.
Effective sediment control measures would be needed before starting work,
more to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body. Monitor and
inspect sediment control measures regularly to ensure that they are functioning properly.
3.5.4 Impact on Fishing Activity
Tadadi village is traditionally important village for fishing and marketing of fish.
Aghanashini river flowing through Tadadi is one of the major sources for fishing. There
are two groups of villages dependent on fishing and shell-fish collected in Aghanashini
river. During the construction of port, the fishing activity will be shifted to some other
location. It will also affect the salt production of the region at Sanekatta and Nagarbaillu.
Alternative locations for fishing activities will need to be found out in due course of time, if
possible.
Executive Summary
E-20
3.6 Socio-Economic Environment
The proposed project would lead to some beneficial as well as some adverse
effects on the Socio-Economic Environment.
3.6.1 Positive impacts
New jobs will be created during construction phase, mostly on temporary
basis, for skilled and unskilled workers.
General growth in commercial activities will take place in the project
area.
The civil amenities like medical facilities, market, education, sport and
cultural activities are expected to improve in the study area.
Improvement in infrastructure facilities by way of transport,
communication and other basic requirements is envisaged.
Overall, it is expected to contribute general improvements of quality of
life in the region.
3.6.2 Negative Impacts
Traditional navigation routes in the vicinity may get affected.
Air pollution levels may increase marginally.
Increase in traffic flow and congestion in and around the project site.
Increase in transient population in the project area, migration of
workers may cause economic, social and cultural conflicts or
displacement of local populations.
The fishing and related activities, the livelihood of the locals dwelling in
and around the project area will be definitely affected.
4.0 Mitigation Measures
4.1 Air Environment
4.1.1 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase
The environmental pollution during construction phase is purely temporary,
localized and of shorter duration.
To control fugitive emissions, the following measures are suggested:
Executive Summary
E-21
Methods for controlling dust emissions include water sprinkling at the
construction site, use of proper transport methods, such as a conveyor
belt, for excavated material and screens around the construction site to
prevent the materials from beings spilled / scattered or wind blown on
public streets
Temporary pavement of roads at construction site would considerably
reduce dust emission
Nose masks or earmuff should be provided to construction workers
while carrying out operations that may entail potential for dust
inhalation
There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any
construction activities
Engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipment will be
maintained in accordance with manufactures guidance and the exhaust
emissions do not reach statutory limits
The storage and handling of soil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will
be carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and
dust, e.g., by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets
Fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by application of water
sprinkling on unpaved roads properly.
4.1.2 Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase
Routine operational activities at berth would have the potentially significant
environmental impacts.
The air quality surveillance program should be undertaken for
proposed multipurpose sea port, and iron ore & coal handling systems.
However, keeping in view the combined maximum impacts from post-
project activities, particularly in critical downwind directions, the air
quality surveillance program may be strengthened properly. Moreover,
in view of the industrialization in the region, the possibility of an
integrated ambient air quality monitoring program together with
surrounding industries may be explored in consultation with SPCB
Executive Summary
E-22
The estimated NOX emissions for the proposed iron ore & coal
handling trucks and dumpers would result in marginal increases in
SPM, NOX and SO2 concentration in ambient air quality. However, the
post-project ground level concentrations would be well within the
prescribed air quality standards.
Natural gas will be normally used as fuel in power generating sources.
However, standby DG sets of equivalent capacities will be made
available to meet the emergency power requirements. Engines should
operate with maximum efficiency to minimize fuel consumption and
hence NOx emissions.
The following options shall be considered during detailed engineering
to mitigate NOX emissions from fuel combustion:
Low NOX / tangential burners
Multistage combustion engines
Regular inspection of tank roof seals
Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipment
To mitigate adverse impacts due to fugitive emissions, about 31% of
the total area of storage terminals will be developed with plantation.
Ambient air quality monitoring stations would be installed at four
sampling locations within the proposed project area. PM10, PM2.5, SO2,
NOX, methane and non-methane hydrocarbons considering the
proximity of the port and other industries should be continuously
monitored to establish ambient air quality data base.
Bulk material should be transported in closed trucks to avoid wind
entrainment.
Proper bag filters in conveyor belts must be used for collection of dust
and use of conveyor belts should be minimized.
No vehicle should be allowed without proper Pollution Under Control
certificate in the port area and highly polluting vehicles (especially
heavy trucks) should be avoided.
Executive Summary
E-23
4.2 Noise Environment
4.2.1 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase
From the noise modeling, the peak noise levels from construction
activities have been predicted to be 65 dBA at a distance of 500 m
from the construction site. Since, the populated areas are located at
more than 2.5 km away from the project areas, the noise levels are
considered to have insignificant impact on community. The following
noise mitigation measures shall be followed to further attenuate noise
levels.
Noise could be considerably reduced by adoption of low noise
equipment or installation of sound insulation fences.
Plants are good barrier of noise. Adequate plantation will be done in
the port premises.
Limitation of working hours may be considered to mitigate the nuisance
from construction activities, particularly during night time.
Earth movers and construction machinery with low noise levels should
be used.
Transport of construction material to the site should be restricted in
daytime.
Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc.
should be enforced wherever necessary.
Periodic maintenance of construction machinery and transportation
vehicles should be undertaken to reduce the noise generation.
Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment is likely to be
insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and mainly confined to the day
hours as sufficient noise control measures would be undertaken
4.2.2 Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase
For the high noise generating equipment/zones, proper acoustic
barriers/ enclosures/ shelters shall be provided.
Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc.
shall be enforced, wherever necessary
Executive Summary
E-24
Plantation and vegetation are expected to reduce noise impacts within
the project premises.
4.3 Water Environment
4.3.1 Mitigation Measures during Dredging Activity
The main environmental impact is envisaged from the capital as well as
maintenance dredging activity/process, which will affect marine water quality by increase
in suspended solid concentration due to re-suspension of sediment. This may result in
decrease in dissolved oxygen concentration. Further, accidental release of untreated
sewage bilge water or other wastewater and Oil/Coal spills (including those resulting from
collisions or groundings) may happen.
Some of the measures to protect fish and fish habitat during dredging are:
Minimize the riparian area disturbed by activities along the adjacent
upland
Carryout routine maintenance dredging to protect spawning fish and
incubating eggs
Adopt effective sediment control measures before starting work to
prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body
Ensure proper functioning of sediment control measures
Restrict dredging quantity and avoid bottom stock piling or side casting
during dredging
Promulgation of regulations on discharge of oily residues, and proper
detection are keys to successful control of ship discharges
Discharges from repair docks would also be connected to appropriate
waste treatment systems
Appropriate regulations on ship discharges and provision of reception
facilities for proper control of emissions and effluents from ships
Proper contingency plans and a prompt reporting system are keys to
prevention of oil dispersal. Periodical clean-up of floating wastes is also
necessary for preservation of port water quality
Executive Summary
E-25
Recycling / reuse of wastewater and modification of equipment for
water conservation
Treated effluent would be used for floor washings and plantation
development etc.
Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase
Monitoring of salinity concentration will be undertaken as part of the
regular water quality and biodiversity monitoring programs.
Geotechnical studies, including coring of sediments to design depth will
be undertaken as part of detailed dredging design studies.
Samples of cored sediments will be sent for chemical analysis to
confirm suitability for deep sea disposal.
Suspended solid load and turbidity levels will be monitored during
dredging and disposal operations.
A sewage treatment unit will be provided on all vessels to treat sewage
to the sewage discharge standards of the SPCB or CPCB prior to
discharge.
Bilge water from the floating transfer vessel will not be directly released
into the surrounding environment. Instead, a holding tank will be
installed to retain any “bilge” water on board unit. It will be pumped into
a waste barge and taken for treatment to wastewater treatment plant.
Solid and hazardous waste will be segregated and stored in
appropriate containers before transfer to an appropriate landfill site.
An awareness programme will be conducted to educate crew about the
need for water conservation and pollution control.
Regular monitoring of discharged effluent will be undertaken to ensure
compliance with CPCB standard.
4.3.2 Sediment Transport and Quality
The potential sources of impacts on sediment transport and quality during the
construction phase will be due to excavation, filling & disposal of capital dredging spoil.
Executive Summary
E-26
The disposal of capital dredge spoil will be carried out in accordance with the
dredged disposal scheme based on modeling simulations so that the impact on sediment
quality is minimal. The selection and operation of dredging equipment and coincidence of
dredging schedules with low flow periods will be considered wherever practical, to reduce
turbidity and sediment re-suspension.
The sediment dispersed in the water column during construction may settle
elsewhere thereby causing minor change in the texture of the sediment.
4.4 Land Environment
4.4.1 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase
Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land
during construction phase:
The adverse impacts of disposal of contaminated dredged material or
other wastes from construction activities could be offset by using such
materials in land reclamation.
Appropriate design, according to the characteristics of the wastes, is a
basic requisite for retaining walls, settling ponds, capping of landfills,
and land use after completion.
Temporary drainage channels would be provided to minimize soil
erosion due to solid / hazardous waste.
A record with respect to quantity, quality and treatment / management
of solid / hazardous waste shall be maintained.
Centralized waste management facility is recommended to collect all
wastes during construction phase.
The stockpiles, construction camps etc. will be located on barren land
to the extent possible.
On completion of construction works, all temporary structures, surplus
materials and wastes will be completely removed to avoid future land
use incompatibility.
The impact on soil due to land disposal of construction debris,
composite garbage and discarded top soil is likely to be insignificant in
view of the appropriate measures to be undertaken.
Executive Summary
E-27
Standard construction procedures will be followed to ensure that the
impact on surface drainage pattern and soil erosion is minimal.
4.4.2 Disposal of Dredged Material on Land
The material dredged will be partly used for filling or reclamation of the backup
area of port. The area to be reclaimed will be enclosed with a retention bund and an
overflow weir for discharge of excess water. The dredged material contains clay, silt and
fine sand (soil). Hence, it can be used for nutrient enrichment of degraded land for
promoting life and vegetative growth.
4.4.3 Use of Dredged Materials
The dredged material can be used for production of construction materials e.g.
bricks clay aggregate and for construction works e.g. foundation fill dykes. Further,
dredged material can be used for soil composting.
4.5 Biological Environment
4.5.1 Mitigation Measures
The project site area does not cover any reserved and protected forest in
Tadadi Port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild life flora and fauna. Potential impact on
marine biological environment during the port construction may result because of
alterations in the wetland zone. However, measures should be undertaken to ensure that
there are minimum disturbances to mangroves and other coastal vegetation. Additional
measures would be taken to protect, preserve and proliferate mangrove growth.
4.6 Socio-economic Environment
4.6.1 Mitigation Measures
The following measures will be undertaken for socio-economic upliftment of
the region:
Preference shall be given for employing the local people during
construction phase as well as during the operation phase.
Drinking water requirements during the construction phase will be met
from packaged water or water transported through tankers to the
construction sites.
Executive Summary
E-28
Suitable arrangements shall be made at the construction camps for
water, power supply, sanitation and fuel consumption to ensure that
there are no undue pressures on the local resources
4.7 General Mitigation Measures to be adopted during Port
Development
During construction and operation of the Port, the following general aspects of
mitigation measures shall be to minimize any adverse environmental impacts.
During construction, the activities shall be confined to the minimum
area required for the specific jobs/works.
During construction and port operation, best practices shall be followed
to minimize the risk any disturbance/damage to species/habitats
present in the area.
Habitats will be restored and rehabilitation tasks will be carried out after
construction works are over.
Dredging and reclamation would not extend beyond the designated
areas.
Good practices in dredging will be adopted, and continuous monitoring
for the same would be conducted at regular time intervals.
The development work will be carried out considering the requirements
of the National Environmental Management Protected Areas Act
(2003), Biodiversity Act (2004) and Integrated Coastal Management
Act (2008), and all the relevant coastal management policies,
strategies and plans.
Adequate measures would be taken to prevent beach erosion, e.g.
construction of sea walls, jetties, offshore breakwaters and beach
nourishment.
The dumping sites will be selected carefully and scientifically for
dredged material
A port environmental management master plan will be developed
Executive Summary
E-29
Regular monitoring will be undertaken to ensure compliance with the
port environmental management master plan and any relevant project
specific requirement.
Regular water quality monitoring of port water sources will be done to
protect estuarine ecosystem health
5.0 Environmental Monitoring Programme
Continuous environmental monitoring will be carried out in the impact
zone with suitable sampling stations and frequency with respect to
different environmental components.
An Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) shall
be constituted to review, assess and monitor the progress and
implementation of Environment Management Plan.
6.0 Environmental Management Plan
6.1 Air Environment
Measures proposed for mitigating impact on ambient air quality during the port
operations include the following:
Continuous sources of emissions such as DG sets and boilers will be
installed with sufficient number of stacks and of sufficient height
(Karnataka State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB) norms) to ensure
adequate dispersion of pollutants. Further, pollution control systems
such as low NOX burners and Sulfur free fuels will be used.
Gas powered or low sulfur diesel and unleaded petrol in conventional
vehicles will be used within the port area.
Burning of solid or oil wastes in the open will be avoided.
Storage areas and conveyor systems will be adequately covered
during the handling of materials, to reduce or completely eliminate
fugitive emissions. Free fall of materials shall be minimized by
installation of telescoping arm loaders and conveyors, to further
minimize the fugitive dust emission.
Executive Summary
E-30
It will be ensured that transport vehicles are covered and as far as
possible idling of vehicles will also be minimized during transport and
handling activities
On-loading/Off-loading and storage areas will be paved to reduce dust
emissions
Release of air emissions from operation of ships/ dredgers will be reduced by
using the following control measures:
Efforts will be taken to encourage the use of alternative fuels and fuel
mixture in ships/dredgers and keep fuel control systems in proper
working conditions
Fuel leaks will be prevented from on-land equipment, vehicle fueling by
considering installation and maintenance of vapour recovery systems
wherever required and/or appropriate. Further, installation of leak
detection systems and conducting leak detection tests on fuel systems
including distribution lines and tanks shall be done.
The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicle and equipment will be
maintained so that exhaust emissions should not reach statutory limits
(set for that vehicle/equipment type and mode of operation by KPCB),
and that all vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with
manufacturers guidelines
The exhausts of other equipment used for construction (e.g.
generators) will be positioned at a sufficient height to ensure dispersion
of exhaust emissions meet in accordance with the standards set by
KSPCB
6.2 Noise Environment
Considering the impact scenario on ambient noise levels due to operation of
transport vehicles and construction equipment, some of the mitigation measures
proposed for noise environment during the construction phase are:
Noise from DG set shall be controlled by providing acoustic
enclosures, which shall be designed for minimum 25 dB(A) insertion
loss. The performance of acoustic enclosure shall be checked by
measuring noise levels in different directions.
Executive Summary
E-31
Each item of powered machinery used on site will be properly
maintained and serviced so as to prevent unnecessary noise
emissions. All items of plant operating on the site in intermittent use will
be shut down in the intervening periods.
Any item on equipment found to be emitting excessive noise levels due
to a faulty silencer, broken or ill-fitting engine covers or other reasons,
will immediately be taken out of service and be adequately serviced,
repaired or replaced.
The design of the port will be such that the sound pressure level in the work
area will not exceed 85 dB(A). Restricted areas will be those locations where it is not
reasonably practicable to reduce the noise level below the work area limit. Wherever
practicable, attempts shall be made to reduce the noise level below 90 dB (A). The noise
levels will not exceed 60 dB (A) at the perimeter of the port area. The equipment will be
chosen in such a way that the above noise limit shall not be exceeded.
6.3 Water Environment
6.3.1 Ship Generated Wastes
The IMO stipulation requires that port/berth that regularly handles deep-sea
ships should be equipped with facilities to accept and dispose off up to 100 Tonnes of oily
ballast and bilge water. These pump trucks will transport the wastes to the treatment
facility where the oil is separated from water in a standard grit/oil separator.
The IMO guidelines permit the discharge of water contaminated with oil, in
harbor area provided the oil content is less than 15 mg/l. Such facilities will be created at
the project site and the effluent will be released in the coastal water at the location
identified for disposal of treated sewage.
6.3.2 Marine Water Quality
There is a distinct advantage of reduction in time of marine construction
operations by fabricating the structures such as beams, modules, slabs etc. in a yard on
land and transporting them to the site for assembling. Given that this is also economically
efficient, it is expected that marine operations for construction will be as limited and short
as possible. As a part of the management strategy, it is advantageous to coordinate
various activities to avoid time-overruns, and complete the project within an agreed time
schedule.
Executive Summary
E-32
The intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the port area will be
restored to their original contours, once the construction activities are completed. General
clean-up, adjacent to intertidal areas, creeks etc. will be undertaken and entire discarded
materials will be removed from the site and aesthetic quality of the surroundings will be
restored, once the construction operations are over.
The sewage from the ships will be treated within the ships, in the absence of
such facilities (e.g., in older vessels, barges), the sewage will be brought for treatment in
the sewage treatment plant on land. Therefore, it is not likely that there would be any
risks of contamination of surface or groundwater as a result of the effluent or waste
discharge from the ships. Oily wastes from the ships will also not affect any surface or
groundwater, as ships will not be allowed to release any oily bilge waste or ballast water
within port limits. Regular monitoring of water quality will be carried out at the port site
and in nearby surface bodies to keep track of environmental changes.
Port will provide sufficient facilities to receive residues and oily mixtures
generated from ship operations, according to provisions of the International Convention
for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 (MARPOL, 1978) as amended by the
1978 Protocol (MARPOL, 1973/78). Besides oily residues, reception of sewage and
garbage is also required in accordance with the needs of ships.
6.4 Land Environment
Adequate preventive measures would be undertaken to ensure that there are
no disposal of solid wastes generated from port or ship operations and no unconfined
spillages occur which may contaminate the soil.
Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land
activities:
Development of greenbelt with carefully selected plant species with
due consideration to the requirement of local inhabitants of the area in
terms of their fuel wood, fodder and livelihood demands is of prime
importance due to their capacity to reduce noise and air pollution
impacts by attenuation/assimilation, as food and habitat for local macro
and micro fauna and source for subsistence life style of locals. This
will not only overcome the socio-economic problem but will also
enhance the aesthetic significance of the area. A well-developed green
belt will solve many objectives and will also attract birds, insects and
Executive Summary
E-33
other pollinator species and thus, ecology of the area can be protected
and conserved sustainably.
Survival of the planted tree seedlings and saplings will be closely
monitored for their survival and mortality and equal number of trees
should be replaced for dead saplings.
The rainwater harvesting would be done. Treated sewage and effluent
can be the best combination to be used for greenbelt development.
Provision of water for irrigation purpose would be made as an
important part of proposed project
6.5 Biological Environment
There are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biology during berth
operation. However, coal and iron ore dust from transport system need to be properly
controlled and managed throughout its operation phase.
6.5.1 Marine Biology
The construction of berth should be planned to minimize the number of
construction days, so that the effect will be minimized. Though project area is ecologically
very sensitive and spillages of material during loading/unloading operations and other
such impacts are likely to influence the marine biological environment adversely,
appropriate technology and contemporary standards and procedures would be adopted to
minimize possibility of such an occurrence. The guiding principle of marine environment
management is to ensure that the perturbations due to the proposed coastal activities are
within the assimilative capacity of the coastal marine environment of harbour area.
6.5.2 Fisheries
Adverse impacts on fish or fisheries are expected during construction and
operation phase of port. However, these impacts would be closely monitored and a
suitable compensation scheme will be provided for the fishermen affected.
A separate fishing harbour may be developed with more facilities like cold
storage, space for parking for more boats and other materials required like diesel, ice, fish
tray etc.
6.5.3 Terrestrial Biology
The measures enumerated earlier will be entrusted in all contractual and
procedural obligations of the contractors and the team deployed at site for the
Executive Summary
E-34
construction. This will ensure that the measures are enforced. However, there are no
potential sources of impacts envisaged on terrestrial biology during the berth operations.
6.5.4 Aquatic Biology
The impacts on marine ecology due to such activities would largely be
confined to the duration over which the activities are spread. The marine biota would
recover and regenerate over a period of time once construction activities are completed.
Environment friendly construction technologies would be used so as to follow
internationally acceptable standards of construction. Though, deforestation of mangrove
patches during construction phase is not envisaged and if damage to mangrove patches
occur, it would be compensated by planting double number of mangrove plants at
appropriate locations around port and affected villages. All efforts will be made to
reinstate the site.
6.6 Socio-economic
It is envisaged that implementation of welfare measures including provision of
the basic facilities/amenities would result in better quality of life of the people in the
region. However, the fishing related activities and the livelihoods of people living in the
area surrounding Aghanashini River will definitely be affected. People from the nearby
villages (Sangama region) where the port is proposed are scared of losing their houses.
Local inhabitants are concerned about their relocation, if their residential area would not
be far away from the sea, as they fear of loosing the fishing occupation.
A separate fishing harbour having more facilities like cold storage space for
parking more boats and required materials like diesel, ice fish tray etc. would be
constructed for the affected villagers. The harbor would be equipped with latest
technologies that would assist fishermen with satellite information etc. regarding fishing
harbor. For marketing of fish, marketing network would be expanded through the new sea
port.
Salt production workers in Sanekatta (using the backwater from sea) i.e. about
350 families will be majorly affected in terms of their livelihood. The affected people must
be given appropriate and adequate compensation for loss of their settlements and
occupation as per State/Central R & R regulation.
The farmers and the fishermen from whom the land is acquired would be given
appropriate and adequate compensation as per the Resettlement and Rehabilitation Plan
of the State/Central Government.
Executive Summary
E-35
7.0 Occupational Safety
The main safety hazards involve oily spills, splashes and fugitive emissions,
while handling iron ore and coal. Proposed safety measures would be made to prevent
and reduce accidents during construction and operation:
Electrical equipment will be grounded and checked for defective
insulations.
The maintenance personnel would be provided with special footwear,
masks and dust proof clothing.
Electricity and maintenance work would be carried out in the presence
of a supervisor.
The noise levels within the port development facility would be kept
lower than 90 dB(A). If possible, those working with the equipment
would have alternative in-house measures to reduce noise levels
below 75 dB(A).
7.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo
The organization structure would be well defined to ensure proper and
safe handling of cargo material.
Weather prediction updates from the IMD would be acquired daily
during the operation periods.
The port limits would be clearly marked and the movement of other
traffic would be appropriately controlled during operations. The
Department of Fisheries needs to be notified for further information to
local fishermen.
Safe operation plans (SOP) would be prepared for every operation.
According to the SOP, a checklist would be prepared. These checklists
would be completed prior to any transfer operation. All operating crew
would be required to be familiar with such procedures. No procedure
would be by-passed to expedite unloading / loading of ship.
Barges used would be double-hulled barges as per MARPOL
requirements, suitably designed for each chemical/material duly
approved by a competent authority.
Executive Summary
E-36
Pigging operations, flushing, washing, conditioning of pipelines, etc.,
will be performed under the supervision of a qualified safety
professional.
Adequate security for the area would be provided to avoid risks due to
vandalism, theft, riots, etc. Efforts would be made to declare the area
as a "Prohibited Area".
Smoking at the operating areas viz., Port area tank farm, barge and
ship would be prohibited.
All employees must wear cotton clothes. Synthetic clothes would not
be permitted. Shoes would not have nails or metallic components.
All vehicles entering into operating area would be fitted with automobile
spark arrestors.
All employees would be properly trained and experienced. Annual
training and refresher training lessons/courses would be provided to re-
emphasize the need for safety procedures and handling of emergency
releases.
Adequate caution boards would be prominently placed to highlight the
hazards of the Chemicals. Notices such as 'No Smoking', 'No Naked
Lights', and 'No entry to unauthorized Persons' would be placed at
different locations of the premises.
The flexible hoses would have appropriate color codes for easy
identification of products to be handled.
All hoses, pipelines and fittings would be inspected and monitored
during operation for evidence of leakage.
Wireless communications between operating personnel would be
provided.
First aid kits would be provided at all locations. For emergencies,
protective clothing such as neoprene gloves, boots, safety goggles,
self breathing apparatus, fire fighting suits, safety shower and eye
wash fountain, combination units, canister gas masks for the different
organic vapour would be readily available at the location.
Executive Summary
E-37
Unauthorized persons would not be permitted in the premises under
any circumstances. Drugged or intoxicated persons would be kept
away from the premises.
No person with ignition materials (like matchsticks, lighters etc.) would
be permitted in the area of operation.
Buoys marked with appropriate navigational symbols would be placed
along the port area.
Restricted areas would be clearly marked.
There would be a proper environmental monitoring plan.
8.0 Summary and Conclusions
8.1 Summary
Development of ports and harbour contribute substantially to the successful
economic development of the country by way of reducing dependence on air
transportation and providing many others associated economic benefits. Water based
transportation is the key component of many coastal areas.
The area identified for development of port at Tadadi was acquired by
Karnataka Industrial Areas Development Board way back in 1970s. It was a barren land
at that time, however, over the years, the area got submerged due to the proximity of the
estuary and due to damage to the bund, biological growth including mangroves took
place. Subsequently, fishing and shell mining activity started taking place, which became
a source of livelihood for the people of the nearby villages.
Development of port shall initially have some adverse impacts depending upon
the extent of activity being carried out. Accordingly, the impact characteristics will vary in
nature (positive, negative, direct, indirect), magnitude (small/large scale, incremental),
timing (construction / operation phase), duration (short-term, long-term), extent
(area/volume), uncertainty (frequency) and reversibility. A combination of the above
criteria with the location of receptors determines whether an impact can be considered
significant or not. The major activities associated with development of port are given in
Table 1.
Executive Summary
E-38
Table 1: Major Activities Proposed during Different Stages of Port Development
Stage Activity
Construction Phase
Proposed construction activities
Proposed capital dredging activities
within the port area and deepening of
navigational channel
o Construction material handling/ transportation of construction materials
o Construction activities (marine terminals, railway tracks, roadways)
o Labour force
o Construction of jetty on piles
o Capital dredging
o Land reclamation / dredge spoil dumping at sea/ shoreline
Operation Phase
Operations of Iron ore & coal terminals o Vehicular traffic
o Storage & stacking of iron ore
o Loading / unloading of iron-ore and coal through conveyors
o Ship Operations
o Maintenance dredging
Operations of container terminals o Vehicular traffic
o Ship Operations
Details of the parameters likely to be affected by each of the activities taking place
during construction and operation phases of the port, with their impact characteristics and
level of significance with low cost EMP are summarized in Tables 2 and 3 respectively.
Table 2: Summary of Impacts with Significance Level and EMP: Construction Phase
Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic
Significance Level with low cost EMP
Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility
Construction material handling/ transportation of construction materials/ quarrying
Air Generation of dust from handling and transport of fine & coarse aggregate in uncovered trucks
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, by covering the trucks with tarpaulin sheets or by using water sprays
Noise Vehicular noise, use of excavation equipment
Short term Negative Reversible
Medium when there are noise sensitive receptors
Low when there are no noise sensitive receptors in the vicinity
Executive Summary
E-39
Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic
Significance Level with low cost EMP
Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility
Construction activities
Air Fugitive dust emissions and dust generation from concrete mixing, cement handling, welding, operation of construction machinery
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, by sprinkling water and wearing masks
Noise Use of construction equipment and power tools
Short term Negative Reversible
Low when workers are provided with ear plugs
Water Water utilisation for construction
Turbid runoff from construction site washings
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, as groundwater shall not be tapped
Turbid runoff from construction site can be minimized by construction of small bunds
Labour force Water Exploitation of water resources for domestic usage
Disposal of untreated waste
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, when workers are local, current usage pattern is maintained and when groundwater is not be tapped
Low, when wastewater is disposed with basic treatment such as soak pits.
Land / Aesthetics
Springing up of temporary buildings / dwellings. Generation of solid wastes
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, when proper collection and disposal is practised
Low, when hutments are within premises
Socio-Economics
Increased employment opportunities
Short term, Positive Reversible
Low, since employment is temporary
Capital dredging
Noise Use of dredging equipment and power tools
Short term Negative Reversible
Low when soil is soft, silty clay
Medium when noise sensitive marine species are present
Water Sediment resuspension Short term Negative Reversible
Medium for turbidity when the material is clay
Sediment Release of toxic substances and nutrients
Short term Negative Reversible
Low for toxicity when sediment toxicity is minimal
Benthic Ecology
Disturbance of bottom sediments and/or destruction of spawning grounds
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, when commercially valuable species/ breeding/spawning grounds are not present
Land reclamation
Water Sediment resuspension Short term Negative Reversible
Medium for turbidity when the material is clay
Sediment Release of toxic substances and nutrients
Short term Negative Reversible
Low for toxicity when sediment toxicity is minimal
Executive Summary
E-40
Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic
Significance Level with low cost EMP
Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility
Ecology Loss of inter tidal area Long term Negative Irreversible
Low since the area is a barren salt marsh with no vegetation
Shoreline Material dumping Long term Positive /Negative Irreversible
Low when the site is km away from the water front or when the dumping provides nourishment to the existing shoreline
Construction of berths on piles
Noise Use of pile drivers, boring equipment, power tools, drill bits etc.
Continuous for a Short period Negative Reversible
Medium when noise sensitive receptors are in the vicinity
Low when ear protection devices are used
Water Increased suspended solids and turbidity
Short term Negative Reversible
Low, since area of impact is localised and negligible
Table 3: Summary of Impacts with Significance Level and EMP: Operation Phase
Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic
Significance Level with low cost EMP
Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility
Handling of iron ore & coal, stacking and loading through conveyors
Air Fugitive dust emissions from stockpiles and conveyors due to dislodging of fine particulate matter by wind
Short-term Negative Reversible
Low, when dust suppression is done using water sprinklers
Low, when wind direction is towards sea-side
Water Spillage into the marine environment
Short term
Low, since quantity of spill is expected to be negligible with Standard Operating Procedures
Sediment Accumulation in sediments
Short-term Low, as spills will be minimum and localised
Iron-ore/coal is not toxic or hazardous to cause sediment toxicity
Land / groundwater table
Infiltration from stockpiles into the ground
Short term, negative, irreversible
Low, as groundwater table is low or potable water resource is not within the vicinity.
Low, when the stockpile area is lined and infiltration is minimum
Executive Summary
E-41
Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic
Significance Level with low cost EMP
Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility
Ecology Concentration of heavy metals from spillage on the sediments
Long term Negative Irreversible
Low, since commercially valuable species are not common and iron-ore/coal is not hazardous or toxic
Maintenance dredging
Water Sediment re-suspension, release of toxic substances and nutrients
Short term Negative Reversible
Medium for turbidity when the material is clay
Sediment Movement of dredge spoils
Short term Negative Reversible
Low for toxicity when sediment toxicity is minimal
Benthic Ecology
Disturbance of bottom sediments and/or destruction of spawning grounds
Short term Negative Irreversible
Low, when commercially valuable species/ breeding/spawning grounds are not present
Shipping Operations
Air Exhaust emissions Short term, Negative Reversible
Low, with well maintained vehicles with proper covering
Water Discharge of bilge, cargo residues, operational wastes, waste water
Short term Negative Irreversible
Low as there shall be strict adherence to MARPOL convention
8.2 Conclusion
The construction phase impacts on different environmental
components shall be mostly intermittent and of short-term duration with
reversible in nature. The extent of influence shall mostly be confined to
the construction activity area, except transport related impacts, which
shall be managed by the transport agency. The impacts on ecology
would be of long term duration, which though will be irreversible in
nature, however with green belt development and other measures
taken shall be restored and improved in due course of time.
The impacts during operation phase shall also be of short-term
duration and confined mostly to the port premises area. The severity of
impacts shall be minimized by the strict implementation of relevant
standards/ procedures, adoption of mitigation measures, environmental
management plans and following good working practices for each
activity.
Further, environmental monitoring shall be undertaken during the
construction and operation phases of the project. The responsibility of
Executive Summary
E-42
implementation shall lie with the construction contractor during the
construction phase and the Port Operating Agency during the
operations phase, while the overall responsibility of monitoring shall
always lie with Port Authority.
Adequate budgetary provision shall be made towards implementation
of suggested management plans towards control of air, noise & water
pollution, solid waste management, green belt development, CSR
activities etc. including regular environmental monitoring/auditing and
continual improvement leading to sustainable development of the
region.
Though with the implementation of suggested measures and EMP, the
port development can be undertaken, yet the port area itself is
considered ecologically sensitive and needs special attention. The
critical issues related to the port area with some preliminary
management plans are summarized in the Annexure. Current status of
these port area related critical issues needs to be further assessed and
addressed in detail to draw a sound management plan ensuring port
development with minimal losses to the ecology and environment of
the region. This will set an example of development in harmony with
the nature for the socio-economic development not only for the region
but also for the whole Karnataka State and the Country.
Executive Summary
E-43
Annexure
Critical Ecological Issues related to the Proposed Tadadi Port Area Site
Development philosophy that needs to be followed is ‘Infrastructure-led
sustainable development’, which seeks to cut through the argument of whether industry
first or infrastructure/development first and proactively establishes that infrastructure is
the primary driver for demand and growth. Significant developments in the country have
happened with governments embracing this philosophy. Clearly, there is need for
development of port infrastructure that would act as enablers for the growth of industry/
business/employment opportunities in Karnataka.
The land use pattern of the 10 km radial study area (314 km2) around the
proposed port shows water bodies (such as wetland/ submerged area) of about 5.77%,
whereas sea area is 38.82%. The river and saltpan land cover 4.58% and 0.64%, while
agriculture and forest land cover 11.44% and 15.02% area, respectively. The creek land
covers 2.22% of the study area. The mangroves cover 0.87% area. The barren and fallow
lands are covered with 1.75% and 18.07% respectively, whereas the built-up land covers
0.70% of the study area.
The area identified for development of port was acquired by Karnataka
Industrial Areas Development Board way back in 1970s. It was a barren land at that time,
however, over the years, the area got submerged due to the proximity of the estuary and
due to damage to the bund, biological growth including mangroves took place.
Subsequently, fishing and shell mining activity started taking place, which became a
source of livelihood for the people of the nearby villages. The major issues related to the
site are:
Flora and fauna (biodiversity)
Oyster bed
Fishing activity
Saltpans
Impact on marine biota
Impacts on the above are briefly discussed along with the mitigation
measures/ management approach.
Executive Summary
E-44
1. Flora & Fauna
Mangrove, Insects, Invertebrates and Other Fauna
Insects and invertebrates that are associated with mangrove habitats for food and
shelter will be impacted by the direct loss of habitat. There may also be some direct
mortality of insects and invertebrates during the clearing of mangrove vegetation during
construction works and although important, this is considered a relatively minor impact
since the area to be cleared is small. Generally, it is expected that mobile species and
individuals will move away from the project area during construction, particularly in the
case of some species of mangrove crabs and mudskippers. For non- or less mobile
species, it is considered that any direct mortality will be localised and restricted to the
project area. Furthermore, surrounding mangrove habitat that will not be cleared is
expected to support sustainable populations of all species such that there will be no long-
term impacts on populations or species in the Tadadi Port region. It is unlikely that
implementation of the proposed development would result in regional or sub-regional
affects to the conservation status of any Schedule fauna species.
During construction as well operation of the port, deposition of dust on mangroves
and other vegetation can be expected, which may affect the faunal species. Accumulation
of dust on mangrove leaves adjacent to the proposed development may impact insects
inhabiting mangrove canopies. Dust impacts on mangrove canopy insects are not well
known, although it is expected that insects will avoid leaves with dust accumulation, if it
interferes with their foraging, breeding or habitat provision, and will utilise nearby areas
that are unaffected by dust accumulation. If insects do exhibit avoidance behaviour in
relation to dust, it is not known whether the absence of particular insects will affect the
ecology of the mangroves themselves, e.g. with respect to pollination, herbivory, etc. It is
also likely that different species will have different tolerance levels to dust on leaves,
which in turn may result in compositional changes to the assemblage of canopy insects in
mangroves adjacent to the proposed development. It is expected that accumulation of
dust will be transient and dust will tend to be washed away by rainfall, therefore any
impacts on insects due to dust deposition will be temporary.
Indirectly, the proposed development may also have impact on avifauna through
noise disturbance during construction and operational phases of the project. Construction
and traffic noise have been shown to reduce densities and feeding behaviour of wetland
birds and water birds (Hirvonen 2001; Burton et al. 2002), and similar effects may be
Executive Summary
E-45
expected, if the proposed project is implemented. Observations in Port Hedland Harbour
were that activities such as pile-driving appeared to result in no observable changes to
the behaviour of white-breasted whistlers, which continued foraging nearby despite high
noise levels. It is possible that local bird populations are acclimatized to high levels of
background noise and as such it is not considered necessary to manage potential noise
disturbance impacts. It should be noted, however, that there are no published estimates
of what level of cumulative noise may result in avoidance behaviour.
Management of Mangroves
India follows set of legal norms, based on the recommendations of NATCOM
(National Mangrove Committee) through MoEF (Ministry of Environment and Forest) for
effective management of mangroves. The CRZ rules prohibit any development activities
in mangrove having an area of 100 m2 or more, with a buffer zone of at least 50 m along
the coast, from the highest high tide line (HTL). Although Aghanashini estuary in Kumta
taluk, Uttara Kannada is proposed to be declared as biological heritage site, sound
management plan for sustaining the biodiversity of this region would help in the
development of new infrastructure in this region.
The primary mechanism for management of mangrove loss will be to confine
areas of direct loss due to the proposed infrastructure. Construction machinery will
remain within the infrastructure area only to minimise any unplanned loss or damage of
adjacent areas of mangrove. Direct impacts with respect to the removal of the mangroves
within the infrastructure area will be managed to avoid disturbance to areas outside the
project site. The provisions to minimize the disturbance include:
where practical, cleared material that is lost into the harbour should be
collected;
the disturbance area should be surveyed and delineated using
coloured flagging (where practical); and
clear briefings and instructions to relevant contractors regarding the
clearance procedures to minimise the disturbance in the area.
Executive Summary
E-46
Control of Dust Deposition on Mangroves
Management measures for minimising dust generation include:
watering of unsealed roads, exposed surfaces, active construction
areas and stockpiles;
use of environmentally safe dust suppressants;
restriction of vehicle movements and vehicle speeds to reduce dust
emissions;
general housekeeping practices to manage waste materials within the
construction site that may generate dust;
an awareness program to ensure that all persons onsite are made
aware of the need to minimise dust emissions; and
reporting of any community complaints regarding dust levels.
Impacts on insects, invertebrates and other fauna will primarily be managed by
restricting loss of habitat confined to the area meant for infrastructure development.
Mobile fauna are generally expected to move away from the disturbance area and no
local species extinctions are expected. Indirect impacts on fauna resulting from dust
accumulation on mangrove plants will be mitigated by the dust management measures
outlined above. Management of indirect impacts on mangrove avifauna will be by
restricting direct habitat loss to the defined project footprint.
Regeneration of Mangrove
The mangrove land cover of the study area is 0.87% only which could be
compensated by:
i. Creation of additional mangrove habitat to help counter development
disturbances.
ii. Mangrove propagation, creek creation and trial planting for mangrove
rehabilitation.
Regeneration of mangrove forest could be divided into natural and artificial
process. Natural regeneration involves natural process of establishment of seeds of
mangrove. This activity is cost effective and causes no disturbance to the habitat and
Executive Summary
E-47
develops the forest pattern, in the similar way to the original forest. Artificial regeneration
could be carried out by nursery development and transplanting seedlings or mangroves in
degraded or new areas. Some of the lands, which are presently abandoned, may be
utilized for the afforestation of mangrove. The technical know-how developed for nursery
development and afforestation on mangroves, by various organizations including National
Institute of Oceanography (NIO), could be implemented for the restoration of mangroves
by afforestation. The fallow land, which is being influenced by tides, and is not utilized for
any purpose, could also be utilized for afforestation of mangroves. Continuous monitoring
of newly established seedlings, either by natural or artificial means, is required as they
are subjected to major threats by domestic cattle and fishing activities. They are also
threatened by insects and fungal infestation, therefore, limited use of insecticides and
fungicides may be applied. The nursery development and transplantation operations are
economically quite feasible. Natural seedlings of Rhizophora spp., Avicennia spp.,
Sonneratia spp., Kandelia spp., Ceriops spp. and Bruguiera spp. could be practiced for
plantation. Vegetative propagation forms a useful technique to overcome the inadequate
supply of seedlings of some of species, as their propagates do not occur throughout the
year. Conservation and afforestation of species like Bruguiera gymnorhiza, Cariops tagal,
Kandelia candal and Aegiceras coruicnlatum may help preserving rich mangrove diversity
in the country.
The spacing between seedlings remains important factor during the plantation
process. Zonation also forms another important factor in afforestation operations,
naturally a particular specie prefer right kind of ecological and geomorphological setups.
The Rhizophoraceae may be planted in front line along the waterways. S. alba could also
be considered planting towards water fronts in polyhaline and mesohaline zones, while S.
caseolaris in oligohaline zones. Other species should be planted behind them. Spacing
can be maintained at 1x1 – 2x2 m (Chai, 1980). Suitable plots may be made depending
on area of availability. Distance of about 10 m should be maintained between each two
plots each measuring 100 m2 (Jagtap, 1985).
Utilisation of Dredged Material for Mangrove Habitat Development
Use of dredged material as the substrate for habitat development is one of the
most common and most important beneficial use. The use of dredged material for habitat
development offers a disposal technique that is an attractive and feasible alternative to
more conventional disposal options. Within various habitats, several distinct biological
Executive Summary
E-48
communities may occur. For example, the development of a dredged material, creation of
an island or nourishment sediment to eroded creeks banks may initiate a wide variety of
wetland, upland, island, and aquatic habitats. Potential developments include such
communities as tidal flats, oyster beds, clam flats, fishing reefs, and aquatic plant and
plantation of mangroves. The excavated dredged material can be used as the substrate
for mangrove habitat development. The development of a dredged material can reinforce
eroded banks by providing coastal nourishment.
2. Oyster bed
As per the topo sheet, the oyster bed area is covered with approximate 1.1 Km2,
at latitude 140 32’ 58.02” N and longitude 740 22’ 16.06” E. Since the area is proposed to
be used for the development of port, there is possibility of disturbance to the oyster bed
area on account of port activities. Therefore an ideal area/location will be identified for the
transplanting the existing oyster area. Mangrove ecosystems are considered to be a
suitable site for culturing oysters. The ecosystem provides protection against excessive
wind and wave actions; sufficient tidal and current flow to change the water of the oyster
farm; supply adequate amounts of nutrients for the production of phytoplankton for the
growth and fattening of oysters; suitable temperature and salinity; and adult oyster stock
are available in large numbers in the vicinity of culture site for ensuring continuous supply
of oyster seeds. All the above-mentioned factors are essential for establishing oyster farm
to make culture profitable (Santhanam et al., 1990).
Management of natural oyster beds is important to ensure the long-term
sustainable yield. Annual survey provides critical information on the abundance of oysters
in each bed. It also helps in providing continuous monitoring of these beds to investigate
the temporal changes of the population. Increasing public awareness of local people is
essential in controlling oyster overexploitation. Guiding fishermen about the time they
should halt collecting oysters allows small specimens to grow to the recommended
marketable sizes for better benefits. It is also necessary to teach them the suitable
techniques for culturing oysters in their respective areas. Several techniques have been
established centuries ago. The pole (stick) method, stake method, and rack and
tray/string cultural methods, are advisable techniques for mangrove’s shallow and muddy
areas. Factors that adversely influence the health of oysters should be monitored.
Abnormal temperature and salinity, food, predators (carnivorous flatworms and oyster
Executive Summary
E-49
drills), parasites, diseases, entrophication and pollution may be dangerous for the
oysters, and lead to their mass mortality (Santhanam et al., 1990).
Planting of clean shells revitalizes the natural oyster beds, expands and improves
habitat for dependant marine life and provides critical habitat for juvenile oyster (spat)
recruitment, ultimately increasing oyster abundance. Shell planting and regulated
harvesting practices, based on sound biological data, will enable the mangrove’s oyster
resources to continue contributing to the well being of the people that depend on this
resource for part of their livelihood.
3. Fishing Activities
There is no significant adverse impact on fishes and fisheries expected as a result
of dredging, however in case of high turbidity, fishes may asphyxiate and die and for this
proper control measures have been suggested. A fishing centre could also be planned
opposite to one or two jetties. During the rainy season, all the villagers, including those
who depend on the sea fishing, use the 1400 acres of land region, engage in land fishing
for Prawn, Crabs and other fish and get a good income. This will stop once the port
construction starts. A separate fishing harbour should be developed with more facilities
like cold storage, space for parking more boats ancillary facilities and marketing support.
4. Salt pans
There is about 600 acres of land used for salt production in Sanekatta using the
backwaters from the sea and more than 300 workers in the salt factory are engaged in
this activity. This 600 acre area is also covered with the boundaries of other villages
namely Mudangi, Gudkagal and Kimani all around the estuary and the Tadari harbour.
Due to the activities of port development, salt-manufacturing activities will also get
affected. This may result in reduced production of salt. If oil leakage occurs, the salinity of
the water will change and the production of salt will get affected. These families and
particularly the workers do not have any idea about other alternative livelihood activities.
They assume that they may get some job in the port, if it comes up. Provision will also be
made to provide sea water flows to these lands for salt production.
5. Impact on Marine Biota
Construction and operation of port activities will certainly impact the marine biota.
The following mitigatative measures will address the potential effects on the marine
environment and marine organisms from increased suspended sediments. Vessels during
Executive Summary
E-50
the construction phase should operate outside of biologically sensitive areas (close
proximity to mangrove vegetation) and outside of periods of critical fish, shrimps life
stages i.e. SW monsoon season (June-September). The construction should ideally be
during the winter monsoonal months (i.e. November, December, January) timing. This
period is best suited as it lies outside of biologically sensitive temperature ranges for fish
gonadal maturation. Implement acoustic restrictions during construction phase, in
biologically sensitive areas during breeding and spawning periods and critical fish life
stages. Timing of dredging to avoid key biological processes (migration, spawning, etc.),
and minimize sediment transport and mixing. Uprooted and dislocated mangrove trees
during the construction phase must be replanted in location best suited for their growth.
This should be done under the aegis of independent environmental monitoring
organisation. Minimize use of lights during night. There is a need to develop a
preparedness, prevention and hazardous materials spills protocol. An Environmental
Protection Plan and an Emergency Response Plan for oil spill. Treatment of the dredged
material may be considered if this would facilitate beneficial use of the material. A variety
of treatment processes are available to reduce contamination of the toxic components in
the dredged material solids or slurries. Low-cost treatment alternatives include
bioremediation. Bioremediation (use of bacteria, fungi, or enzymes to break down organic
contaminants), chemical treatment (e.g., oxidation, reduction, chelation, hydrolysis,
detoxification, thermal (e.g., incineration) can be utilized.
References:
Burton, N.H.K., Rehfisch, M.M. and Clark, N.A. 2002. Impacts of disturbance from
construction work on the densities and feeding behavior of water-birds using the intertidal
mudflats of Cardiff Bay, UK. Environmental Management 30: 865-871.
Chai, P. K. 1980. Mangrove Forests of Sarawak; [In: Workshop on Mangrove and
Estuarine Vegetation; (Ed.): Srivastava, B. P. L]; December, 1977; Faculty of Forestry,
University of Pertanian, Serdang, Malaysia; pp. 1-5.
Hirvonen, H. 2001. Impacts of highway construction and traffic on a wetland bird
community. In: CL Irwin, P Garrett and KP McDermott (eds.) Proceedings of the 2001
International Conference on Ecology and Transportation. Centre for Transportation and
the Environment, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC: 369-372.
Executive Summary
E-51
Jagtap, T. G. 1985. Ecological Studies in Relation to the Mangrove Environment along
the Goa Coast, India; a Ph. D. Thesis Submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur.
Santhanam, R.; Rmanathan, N. and Jegatheesan, G. 1990. Coastal Aquaculture in India;
CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi; 180 pp.
Kathiresan, K. and Qasim, S. Z. 2005. Biodiversity of Mangrove Ecosystem; Hindustan
Publishing Corporation (India), New Delhi; 251 pp.
Compliance to ToR Points
The EIA study has been conducted as per the proposed ToR and the
additional ToR suggested by MoEF Letter No. F.no. 11-28/2011-IA.III dated 26th
September, 2011 and details are presented in following chapters.
C1
Compliance to TOR Points
The Expert Appraisal Committee during 104th EAC meeting held on 17th /19th
August 2011 reviewed the documents of the proposed port project. The committee
approved the proposed ToR with additional terms of reference points vide MoEF Letter
No: F. No.11-28/2011-IA.III dated. 26th September, 2011.
Compliance to Additional ToR points is summarized in the following Table.
Sr. No.
Terms of Reference (ToR) Compliance Status
i. Submit the details of the site selection studies with justification pertaining to all the three alternate sites examined with particular focus on environmental issues
A Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three alternative sites has been carried out, considering both the inner and the outer locations viz. (i) an inner harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary (ii) an outer habour on the northern side and (iii) an outer habour on the southern side. Eventually the outer harbour locations of the port on both the sides of the Aghanashini mouth have to be so aligned / located that the river and tidal flow is not affected. The study is summarized in Table 1.4 and layout is shown in Fig. 1.6. Based on the above ranking criteria, location number 1 is chosen as the most feasible alternative viz., inner harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary.
ii. Submit the details of the eco-sensitive areas, if any
As per the study carried out by CSIR-NIO, Goa, the proposed project site exists in CRZ I, II and III. The project area is being used for fishing and bi-valves collection. The site area presents rich biodiversity, sparse mangroves and oyster bed. Details of bi-valves are given in Chapter 9 and overall summary of eco-sensitive areas is given in Executive Summary, along with possible management plan.
iii. Examine and submit the details of water bodies including the seasonal ones within the corridor of impacts along with their status, volumetric capacity and quality, likely impacts on them due to the project
The water quality status of various water bodies including marine environment are given in Chapter 3, Section 3.4.3. Impacts on water environment are presented in Chapter 4, Section 4.4, along with mitigation measures. Detailed hydrodynamic study has been conducted by M/s Prointec, as Feasibility Study for the project.
iv. Submit the details of the fishing activity and likely impact due to the activity
Fishing is one of the major activity taking place within the proposed site belonging to the Govt. of Karnataka, and also in the nearby area. This will be directly affected
Compliance of ToR
C2
Sr. No.
Terms of Reference (ToR) Compliance Status
by the development of the port, however, alternative plans shall be developed to compensate for the fishing activity at some other location, as suggested in Section 4.4.6 and 6.5.6).
v. Submit the details of the Hydrodynamic study with particular reference to the estuarine location and its stability due to natural processes
A detailed Report on Hydrodynamic studies has been presented in Appendix F-“Hydrodynamics and Coastal Processes” of the Feasibility Study report. The report has dealt at length the esturine location and its stability. The Report has established that there are no adverse effects due to the construction of the port.
vi. Submit the details of anticipated impact due to the growth scenario/ induced developments because of the green field Port. Impact due to influx of people due to port and all other associated activities or otherwise may be carefully projected and estimated. Commitments for environmental and ecological protection shall be made quantitatively and chronologically
Port induced developments in the region are expected during construction and operation phase of the project. Influx of people and all other associated activities are expected. Environmental concerns and ecological stress on the area shall be taken care with proper mitigation measures and management plans, delineated for each environmental component in Chapter 4 and 6.
vii. Submit details of Risk Assessment, Disaster Management Plan including emergency evacuation during natural and man-made disaster like floods, cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc
The emergency evacuation during the man made and natural disasters like floods, cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc., have been detailed in the following Chapters.
Chapter 4 -Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
Chapter 6 -Environmental Management Plan
Chapter 8- Disaster Management Plan
Once the Port is commissioned, a Disaster Management Plan, covering both on site and off site emergencies will be drawn up and will be updated from time to time.
viii. Submit the details of Oil Spill Contingent Management Plan
No liquid Cargo is proposed to be handled in the port. However the oil spill contingency plan for minor spills is detailed in Chapter 8, Section 8.6.
Compliance of ToR
C3
Sr. No.
Terms of Reference (ToR) Compliance Status
ix. The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed in case disturbance on account of port activity
The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed has been dealt in detail in Chapter 9, and also summarized in Executive Summary.
x. Submit the details of dredging sludge quantity quality in terms of its toxic metals (at least Cr+6, Arsenic, Mercury, and lead) and its disposal with quantity (reclamation/dredging disposal site) If disposal is in sea, location, the justification for selecting such location, the dispersal of dumping material, its effect on marine environment, effect of fishes
A total quantity of 500,00,000 m3 of soil will be dredged as capital dredging, out of which 180,00,000 m3 will be used for reclamation and the balance of 320,00,000 m3 will be disposed offshore.
A total quantity of 50,90,000 m3 will be dredged as maintenance dredging and the material will be disposed offshore.
The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the trailing suction hopper dredger has been carried out by means of the program titled “DUMP” and the disposal ground have been located accordingly.
A detailed dredging management plan will be drawn up at the time of the actual execution of the work to have minimum impact on the environment.
Sediment samples were collected from River, Estuary and Sea, where dredging is to be carried out and analyzed for various heavy metals using TCLP method. The details are given in Section 3.5.3 (Page 3.47) and Table 3.5.6 (Page 3.51). Cr & Pb were not detected in the sediment samples, whereas other metals were found in small quantities.
xi. Submit the details of change in estuarine environment such as salinity intrusion, existence of saline wedge phenomenon etc
The change in the esturine environment viz, salinity intrusion, existence of salt wedge has been dealt in Chapter 4 - Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures and Appendix F-“Hydrodynamics and Coastal Processes” of the Feasibility Study report. There are no adverse impacts due to the construction of the port.
xii. Submit the details of study on connectivity and its carrying capacity (both road and railway)
The detailed study on connectivity of Road and Rail has been dealt in Chapter 10, Traffic and Demand Study.
xiii. Submit the details of existing port and proposed new ports in west coast on either side of Tadadi
The existing port at Tadadi is only a fisheries harbour. The details of existing ports in the Karnataka State has been furnished in Chapter 1, Section 1.6.
Compliance of ToR
C4
Sr. No.
Terms of Reference (ToR) Compliance Status
with in a distance of 200 Km Some preliminary studies were carried out some time back for the development of a new port near Honnavar. However, due to the crisis in the mining industry in the Karnataka State, no further progress could be made. There are no other proposals for development of new ports on the west coast of India on either side of the Tadadi within a distance of 200 km.
xiv. Submit the details of impact on salt pan existing in the surrounding area.
Salt pans exist in the study area, close to the project site, which uses backwater from the sea for salt production in Sanekatta village. More than 300 workers are engaged in salt production. Due to port development, salt production may be affected, however proper care shall be taken to maintain the saltpans (Chapter 4, Section 4.4.6.1, Page 4.7).
xv. Confirm that the proposed development does not involve court cases
No court case is expected with respect to the development of this project.
xvi. The mangrove exists about 10 km from the project site. Because of the anthropogenic activities and human settlement, mangroves are likely to spread in the area. A study on possible, alteration of flora and fauna over long term may be taken up
Mangroves exist in about 2.73 sq km area of total study area of 314 sq km. At the project site, these are sparsely located, however, recognizing the importance of mangroves in maintain the ecological system, proper care shall be taken to enhance the mangrove vegetation in the study area through re-plantation. Details are given at Pages 3.80, 4.47, and also in Executive Summary.
xvii. Although it was mentioned that there is no forest land in the project area but the area is very green. No of trees to be cut may be estimated with photographic record
The project site does not involve any forest land. However, if any tree is required to be cut, it will be counted, and necessary compensatory afforestation shall be done, as per the guidelines.
xviii. Quantitative and chronological CSR plan shall be delineated in detail
Port authority is committed to take care of its Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). A detailed CSR plan shall be prepared in consultation with the local village Panchayats / Sarpanchs as also local administration to ensure its proper and effective utilization for the people of the region. Adequate funds will be allocated for the various activities under CSR.
CChhaapptteerr 11
IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Port Function
Ports are the principal conduits through which the economic life of a maritime
nation flows. As maritime gateways, ports serve as interface between sea and land links
and have to handle enormous flow of goods, which are broken down into smaller flows for
distribution to the hinterland by road, rail and inland water ways. Thus the port is a crucial
sub-system of the total transport chain. Ports handle 82% of the world’s trade and hence
its capacity and efficiency will determine the growth and economic potential of the region
or the country.
Thus, the primary function of a port is to provide for efficient low cost transfer of
cargo from ship to shore and vice-versa, inspection, storage and transportation. Hence
the port should act as an integral part of a complete chain of transport link of moving the
cargo from origin to destination.
1.2 Indian Ports Scenario
India is fast becoming the global epicenter of economic growth and external
trade as well as the second fastest growing economy in the world after China. India has
an extensive coastline of more than 7500 km on the east and west coast and around 95%
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.2
of the country’s external merchandise trade by volume and 70% by value, is transported
through maritime transport.
In the Indian context the ports are classified as ;
Major and
Non major
At present there are 12 Major Ports and 176 notified Non Major Ports. Out of
the Non Major Ports, only around 60% are operational.
The major ports are administered by the Ministry of Shipping (MOS) of the
central government and are governed by the Major Port Trusts Act 1963, except the
Ennore Port which is run by the provisions of the Companies Act 1956.
The Non major ports are under the jurisdiction of the state governments.
1.3 Cargo handled by the Major and the Non Major Ports
The Commodity-wise traffic handled by the Major Ports during the first four
years of 11th plan period and the estimated for the year 2011-12 are presented in the
Table 1.1 .
The Commodity-wise traffic handled by the Non-Major Ports during the first
four years of 11th plan period and the estimated for the year 2011-12 are presented in
Table 1.2.
1.4 Maritime Agenda 2010 - 20
The Ministry of Shipping, Govt. of India had prepared a perspective plan for the
next ten years during January 2011, called as the “Maritime Agenda 2010-20”.
The main highlights of the agenda are:
To create a port capacity of around 3200 million tonnes to handle the
expected traffic of about 2500 million tonnes by 2020
To put India’s ports on par with the best international ports in terms of
performance and capacity.
To increase the tonnage under the Indian flag and Indian control and also
the share of Indian ships in India’s export trade.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.3
To promote coastal shipping as it is economical and will help in
decongesting our roads and is environment friendly.
To increase India’s share in global shipbuilding to 5 % from the present
1 %.
To increase the percentage of Indian seafarers in the global shipping
industry from between 6 -7 % to at least 9 % by 2015.
It was also projected that two new major ports, one each on the east and west
coast and the development of two hub ports on each of the two coasts will be developed.
Further, it was contemplated that Mumbai (JNPT), Kochi, Chennai and Visakhapatnam
are to have drafts of not less than 14m and hub ports of 17m.
The projected traffic for the major and the non major ports as contemplated in
the Maritime Agenda 2010-20 are presented in Table 1.3.
1.5 Preamble
The Maritime Agenda 2010 -2020 contemplates two new major ports, one on
the West Coast of India and the other on the East Coast of India. The development of
Tadadi as a major port on the West Coast of India fits well into the development of major
port on the West Coast of India.
Karnataka State is targeting an industrial growth rate of 12% per annum and
there has been an increased emphasis on the expansion and growth of infrastructure
sectors. In this regard, the Infrastructure Development Department (IDD), Government of
Karnataka (GoK) has identified various projects in the State for development. One such
project identified is the development of a Sea Port at Tadadi in Uttar Kannada district in
Karnataka State. As a preliminary step in the project development activities, IDD has
undertaken a prefeasibility study to ascertain the project’s amenability for development
under PPP framework. As the project has been found to be feasible, a detailed feasibility
report including detailed technical studies have been taken up. The total project area is
approximately 566 hectares (1400 acres). The total land area is available for the
development of port with no requirement of Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) plan.
The land identified for the project has been acquired for industrial / infrastructural
purposes, quite few decades ago and now vests with the Government of Karnataka. This
land is presently inundated, which can be utilized for development of Sea Port and related
facilities at Tadadi. The location of the port is shown in Fig. 1.1.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.4
Karnataka vision 2020 document strategizes a 9% industrial growth per
annum. It also emphasizes on development in infrastructure sectors viz, ports, railways
and road. During the year 2007-08, the annual growth of industrial production and mining
activities was 6.36% and 18% respectively. A substantial portion of the iron-ore mined
and other products in the State is transported by rail to the ports at Goa, Mangalore,
Chennai, Krishnapatnam and Ennore in the neighbouring States.
Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
(KSIIDCL) envisages setting up an all-weather Multi-Cargo Sea Port at Tadadi (Tadri), for
handling about 62.36 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of cargo in Taluk Kumta in Uttara
Kannada District, Karnataka. KSIIDCL has been designated as the nodal agency of the
State Government for development of port at Tadadi in Uttar Kannada district of
Karnataka on Public Private Partnership (PPP) framework. The port at Tadadi would form
a gateway for trade in the Bellery-Hospet region which is rich in iron ore mines with
number of power plants and steel mills requiring coal. The Tadadi port is located in the
backwaters of the Aghanashini River with a huge waterfront area, which makes the
location a natural choice for a Port / Harbour. The developer (private sector) will be
selected through a transparent international bidding process.
1.6 Details of Existing Ports in the State
An overview of the ports in the State and specifically the ports competing for the
off take from the hinterland are analyzed which presents rationale for developing the port
at Tadadi.
Karnataka is endowed with a vast coastline of around 300 km between Karwar
(at the North) and Mangalore (at the South) flanked by Uttara-Kannada, Udupi with
favorable and strategic port locations. The entire coastal belt as well as the adjacent
districts are rich with mineral and natural resources and hence offer good scope for
industrial investment. This belt is well connected by National Highways and the Konkan
Railway broad-gauge line, both running parallel to the coastline.
1.6.1 Major Ports
At present, in Karnataka there is only one Major Port viz., The New Mangalore
Port. This is located at the southern end of the coastline and hence is predominantly
being utilized by the southern districts of the State.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.5
1.6.1.1 New Mangalore Port
This port is a modern all weather port and is the largest LPG handling port in the
country. The present total capacity of the port is 38 million tonnes with 14 berths. The
other facilities at the port include transit sheds, open stockyards and liquid storage areas.
The total traffic handled at the port in 2009-10 was 35.53 million tonnes of which iron ore
traffic handled at the port was about 6.71 million tonnes. The present road connectivity of
the Port is through NH-48 (Bangalore-Mangalore), NH-66(17) (Cochin-Goa-Mangalore)
and NH-13 (Sholapur-Mangalore). NHAI is implementing projects for four lane of NH-
66(17) (Suratkal-Nantur section), NH-48 (Padil-Bantwal section) and a bypass from
Nantur junction on NH-66(17) to Padil junction on NH-48.
The port is connected to the hinterland of the State via the Hassan Mangalore
Rail line. The line provides a shorter and more convenient outlet for the cargo from the
iron ore rich Hospet – Bellary and Chitradurga – Tumkur belts of Karnataka to the New
Mangalore Port. The improved connectivity to the gateway port of Mangalore through the
Hassan - Mangalore line has given a boost to the industrial activity in the hinterland
centers - Tumkur, Tiptur, Ammasandra, Tornagallu and Davanagere.
1.6.2 Minor Ports
The coastline of the State is lined with ten minor ports between Karwar in the
North and Mangalore in the south. The ten minor ports of the State are:
Karwar
Belekeri
Tadadi
Honnavar
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.6
Bhatkal
Kundapur
Hangarkatta
Malpe
Padubidri
Old Mangalore
The location of the ports is shown in Fig. 1.2. National highway from Karwar to
Mangalore is shown in Fig. 1.3. All these ports are under the administrative control of the
State Ports and Inland Water Transport (IWT) Department. These ports are broadly
classified into three categories:
a) One all-weather Intermediate Port having direct berthing facilities for
vessels of 9 m. draft and declared for handling all type of commodities for
export and import viz., Karwar.
b) One Intermediate Port (seasonal) having direct berthing facilities for
coastal vessels of 4.50 m. draft/ lighterage/ mechanized fishing vessels
viz., Mangalore Old Port.
c) Remaining seven Ports are seasonal functioning as fair weather lighter
age/ fisheries Ports, capable of handling sailing/ mechanical sailing
vessels. These Ports also possess lighterage wharves, transit sheds and
suitable stacking areas.
1.6.2.1 Karwar Port
The port at Karwar is an all-weather intermediate port with an available draft of
6.5-9.5 m. The prestigious SEABIRD Naval Project is located adjacent to this port. The
total traffic volume handled was 3.84 lakh tonnes, of which 2.64 lakh tonnes was import
and 1.2 lakh tonnes was export.
This port has been developed as an all weather port in the Karwar bay with 355
m long quay for accommodating simultaneous berthing of two ships with other matching
infrastructure facilities. At present it caters to vessels with draft of 8.5 m only due to under
water physical obstruction in front of the berths. The port is declared for handling of all
types of commodities including class ‘B’ and class ‘C’ petroleum products.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.7
Presently Karwar port handles Import and export of about 24.88 lakhs million
tonnes of various commodities including class ‘B’ and class ‘C’ petroleum products. INS
Kadamba is a naval base at Arga village of Karwar which is used exclusively for berthing
of naval vessels. A naval ship repair yard (dry Docks) (Syncrolift) is also attached to it.
1.6.2.2 Belekeri Port
The Belekeri port is a fair season lighterage port with iron-ore being the main
cargo exported. Currently the following three private operators are operating at the port:
Adani Export Pvt. Ltd
Salgoankar Mining Industries
Mallikarjun shipping Pvt. Ltd
This port is located 26 km south of Karwar on the bank of Hattikeri river
and is a fair weather lighterage port and is open to traffic for about 8 fair weather
months. This port has got a vast stacking area, good network of roads and can be
developed to handle about 3 to 5 million tonnes of cargo.
A number of Shipping agencies have taken interest to upgrade the port
by developing their own infrastructure to handle export of iron ore cargo through the
port.
1.6.2.3 Tadri Port
This port is situated in the estuary of the Aghanashini River. The backwater of
the river forms a vast water front at this port, and there is an opportunity to develop this
port with modern infrastructure. The Konkan railway line and NH 66(17) passes close to
the port area. Also, NH 63 and the proposed Hubli-Ankola railway line and Honnavar
Tumkur NH 206 are infrastructure for all around development of Tadri port.
This port is projected for development under the BOOST (Built, Own, Operate,
Share and Tansfer) concept through private participation. Vast area is available for
development of the port with, negligible rehabilitation problems. Tadri port has an
effective hinterland of about 2.00 lakhs sq. m compared to central and northern port of
Karnataka, which are rich in minerals, forest, agriculture and marine resources. At
present Tadri port is a fishing port.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.8
1.6.2.4 Honnavar Port
Honnavar port located at the place where Sharavati river joins Arabian sea. The
port is near the town of Honnavar in Uttara-Kannada District. Efforts to make this port for
handling of larger ships have not been successful. The National Highway 66(17),
Honnavar railway station on Konkan Railway route is nearby. Honnavar port is a fishing
port.
1.6.2.5 Bhatkal Port
This port is well-protected on the bank of Bhatkal river, presently fishing vessels
are utilizing the facilities of this port. This port could be developed as a modern fishing
harbor with full-fledged fish handling facilities. The port is surrounded by hills around.
1.6.2.6 Kundapura Port
The port is at the confluence of Pancha Gangoli River. The port is near the town
of Kundapura. Even though National Highway 66 (17) and Konkan railway pass near this
port, development of this port has not taken place.
1.6.2.7 Hangarakatta Port
Hangarakatta port is mainly used by fishing boats. This port is on the bank of
Swarna River and Sita River.
1.6.2.8 Malpe Port
Malpe port is situated near town of Udupi. The port is located on the confluence
of Udyavara River and Arabian Sea. The port mostly handles fishing activities and
sometimes cargo also. A shipbuilding yard is in operation in this port.
1.6.2.9 Padubidri Port
Padubidri is located in Udupi distract of Karnataka state. There was a proposal
to develop Padubidri port for handling coal required for thermal power generating station
Udupi Power Plant Company Ltd., (UPCL) being setup in nearby village at Nandikur.
1.6.2.10 Old Mangalore
This port is situated on the left bank of the Gurupur River and is approximately
10 km south of the New Mangalore Port. It is popularly known by the name of Bunder.
The minor port at Mangalore is an intermediate port with a draft availability of 4.5 m. It is
functional only during the fair weather season from September to May. It is well
connected by NH 66 (17), 48 & 63 and the Konkan Railway and Southern Railways.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.9
1.7 Rationale for Development of the Proposed Port at Tadadi
Out of the ports of the State, NMPT, the major port currently caters to the cargo
requirements in the southern districts of the State and is operating at 89% capacity (in
2008 – 2009). Further petroleum products and import of coal form a significant part of the
cargo at the port. The northern districts of the State, especially the Bellary–Hospet region
is home to significant resources of iron-ore which is currently being exported. Part of this
iron ore is exported through the minor ports at Karwar and Belekeri. However, the draft
available at these ports is less and therefore bigger vessels cannot operate at these ports
and loading is normally done through barges.
Further the capacity at these ports is also not adequate to cater to the demand
of this region. Due to this, a significant amount of the iron ore is currently being
transported to Ennore (in Tamil Nadu), Mormugao and Krishnapatnam in Andhra Pradesh
for export. Thus, a port developed in the northern coastline of the state could cater to the
districts in North Karnataka especially export of iron-ore and import of coal for the belt in
Bellary-Hospet region, thereby significantly improving the industrial advantage of the
state. Due to these reasons, it is proposed to develop a port at Tadadi.
1.8 Purpose of the Report
All projects related to sea ports, harbour, jetties, marine terminals, break water
and dredging development have been identified as Category-A project in the EIA
notification issued by Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) in September 2006.
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for ports and harbours is a mandatory
requirement as per the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) EIA September 14,
2006 and is also governed under CRZ Notification February 19, 1991 (As amended in
January 25, 2005) as these projects can cause potential environmental impacts. Public
hearing has been made mandatory for all the cases where the environmental clearance is
required. It is, however, not necessary to obtain site clearance or permission to conduct
surveys. The basic components of EIA study are presented in Fig. 1.4.
In the case of projects within the existing port limits except areas classified as
CRZ-I, the power to grant clearance under the Coastal Regulation Zone Notification has
been delegated to the Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport and Highways. The
mangroves, mud flats and uninhabited islands are classified as CRZ-1. The proposed
Tadadi port is classified as CRZ1 providing for operational constructions and operations
for port and harbours. A map of Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) is shown in Fig. 1.5.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.10
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is the process of examining the
environmental, social and health effects of a proposed development. It assesses the
impacts of the proposed development on the environment and enables decision making
with respect to environmental clearance.
The process for obtaining environmental clearance for the proposed
development of port at Tadadi in Karnataka was initiated by submitting project related
information in prescribed Form-1 along with suggested Terms Of Reference (TOR) and
draft project feasibility report. The Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) on CRZ,
Infrastructure and Miscellaneous Projects and New Construction Projects of the Ministry
of Environment and Forest, accorded approval to the TOR, vide letter No/File No.11-
28/2011-1A III dated 26/9/2011 of MoEF and the meeting of the expert Appraisal
committee was held on 18th August, 2011. The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
has been carried out as per the approved TOR.
The report provides description of baseline environmental and social conditions,
predicted impacts, mitigation measures for adverse impacts, management plan
considering good practices, environmental monitoring plan, assessed risks, emergency
management plan, conclusion and recommendations. The report has been structured in
the line of the EIA notification (Guidelines Manual, MoEF, 2009) on generic structure of
Environmental Impact Assessment and EIA Guidelines Manual for Port and Harbours –
February 2010.
1.9 Justification of the Project
Nearly 90% of cargo handled at this Port will be bulk cargo consisting of export
of iron ore and Import of coal. Almost the entire coal traffic will be is moved by rail.
Further, the port is installing a Wagon Handling System for unloading of iron ore from
Bellary-Hospet Region. To meet the demands of traffic to be generated in the coming
years, rail augmentation is proposed to be undertaken.
The port development in the northern coastline of the State would cater to the
districts in North Karnataka especially the iron-ore belt in the Bellary-Hospet, region
thereby significantly improving the industrial advantage of the state.
Tadri is located at a Latitude of 140 13.50' N and Longitude of 740 21.50' E. The
backwaters of the river have a huge water front area, which makes an ideal location for
the development of a natural harbour. The port will be situated on the estuary of the
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.11
Aghanashini River at a distance of about 50 km from Karwar, about 24 km from Belekeri
and approximately 35 km from Honnavar.
The Konkan Railway line and National Highway (NH) 66 pass very close to the
port. The nearest station on the Konkan Railway line from Tadri is Ankola at a distance of
about 25 km.
The port at Tadri appears to be viable on a stand-alone basis. However,
this is contingent upon the various connectivity options that need to be
pursued at government levels, and the concerns of land acquisition would
need to be suitably addressed.
The viability of the port at Tadri would not be affected by various
connectivity issues if an industrial facility is developed near the port which
uses the port for import or export of cargo. The port would then also be
viable on a stand-alone basis.
As a result of the port being developed in Tadri, the bulk cargo currently
being moved from Karwar and Belekeri is expected to be shifted to Tadri
reducing the cargo movement at these ports. Further, given the volume of
cargo which can be moved, it is unlikely that any other port in the northern
part of the coast of the state could be commercially viable after the port at
Tadri is developed.
1.10 Alternative Sites (Locations) for Tadadi Port
A preliminary Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three alternative sites has
been carried out, considering both the inner and the outer locations viz. (i) an inner
harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary (ii) an outer habour on the northern side and (iii) an
outer habour on the southern side. Eventually the outer harbour locations of the port on
both the sides of the Aghanashini mouth have to be so aligned / located that the river and
tidal flow is not affected. A Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three locations is
presented in Fig. 1.6.
The assessment numbers represent the evaluation of each aspect based on the
technical and environmental aspects (need of the breakwaters, need for dredging, road
connection, rail connection, possibilities of extension, impact on beaches, estuary
dynamics and impact on flora and fauna) according to the criteria based on the scores of
rankings (‘3’ for Positive, ‘2’ for Medium and ‘1’ for Negative).
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.12
Based on the above ranking criteria, location number 1 is chosen as the most
feasible alternative (with 18 points), than location 3 (16 points) and location 2 (13 points)
respectively as shown in Table 1.4. The Multi-Criteria Analysis of the three locations
confirm that alternative 1 is the most preferred alternative.
According to the available land for the onshore development and to optimize the
capital dredging, the port basin has been located at the northern side of Aghanashini
estuary. The river at this location flows from SSE to NNW and changes it course by 1350
so that its mouth has an alignment from NNE to SSW. In the northern part of this location,
an estuary has been developed where two creeks can be seen. The existing boundaries
of these creeks define the northern limit of the port basin. In this location, navigational
channel, turning circles and berthing area are proposed to be developed.
1.11 Objectives of Study
The objective of the study is to prepare Environmental Impact Assessment
Study report by incorporating baseline data for one season, identification, prediction and
evaluation of impacts due to the proposed all weather multi-purpose port at Tadadi,
Karnataka leading to delineation of environmental management plan to mitigate the
adverse impacts.
1.12 Scope of Work (Proposed ToR)
The Environmental Impact Assessment study report for the development of Port
facilities is to be prepared as per guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests
(MoEF), Government of India, and applicable regulations and standards of the state
Governments. The report would address relevant aspects including but not limited to the
following:
i. Collection of primary baseline data in the project areas as well as in the
area falling 5 km from the proposed project boundary and collection of
primary data within 10 km radial distance in support with secondary
data collection within 15 km aerial distance from the project boundary
ii. Collation of data from secondary sources and also collection of one
season (excluding monsoon) primary data in the study region for
assessment of the following baseline environmental quality
land based facility
Water front activities
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.13
Marine environment
iii. Collection of existing hydrography data in the creek and offshore region
of the proposed port
iv. Impact of the berths that are proposed to be constructed and the cargo
handling facilities
v. Impact taking into consideration the on-shore and off-shore facilities of
the proposed port
vi. Delineation of proposed activities in the CRZ area as well as between
the low tide line (LTL) and high tide line (HTL) and its superimposition
on the HTL and LTL map
vii. Impact of dredging and reclamation on the marine and terrestrial
ecology
viii. Impact on the marine / terrestrial ecology for the proposed disposal
sites for the dredged material
ix. Hydraulic Studies and the Dispersion Model for the disposed dredged
material at the disposal site
x. Study of existing and proposed drainage patterns including its impact
xi. Satellite Imagery indicating the oyster bed, mangroves, etc
xii. Land use plan in 10 km radius
xiii. Terrestrial and marine ecology to be studied
xiv. List of endangered and rare species if any, specific to the site
xv. The regional development plan if any, should be considered to study
the impact of the project on the existing habitation and infrastructure
xvi. Details of the traffic movement and impact of the project on the existing
transportation system including additional facilities as well as safety
measures required to be developed for catering to the same
xvii. Details of the sewage treatment and disposal and waste management
to be indicated
xviii. Detailed contingency plan for accident scenarios, natural disaster and
accidental oil spills
xix. Existing shore line changes and impact of the proposed project on the
shore line along with remedial measures for prevention of the same
xx. Clearance from Karnataka Coastal Zone Management Authority
(KCZMA)
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.14
xxi. Detailed bathymetry study to be conducted and the tranquility
conditions at the port
xxii. Estimate changes in quality of water, soil, air, noise, etc and suggest
suitable mitigation measures
xxiii. Construction activities on the shore and the impact of such construction
activities on the shoreline and terrestrial environment
xxiv. Details of socially beneficial activities that would be extended to the
local communities along with an implementation plan
xxv. Water requirement and source of water and approval of the competent
authority
xxvi. Details of the environmental quality monitoring programme laid down
xxvii. Details of dust suppression/separation measures
xxviii. Details of green belt development indicating the area along with an
implementation plan
xxix. Identification, prediction and evaluation of significant impacts due to
development activities
xxx. Evaluation and recommendation of appropriate measures/practices for
pollution control so as to minimize impacts on environment during
developmental activities
xxxi. Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for mitigation of adverse
impacts due to construction and operational phases of port
xxxii. Post project environmental quality monitoring programme
1.13 Additional ToR
In addition, the following aspects should be studied:
The above proposal was considered in the 104th EAC meeting held on 17th - 19th
August, 2011. The details were as presented by the project proponents and after
discussions, the following additional "Terms of Reference" were finalized by the EAC.
i. Submit the details of the site selection studies with justification pertaining
to all the three alternate sites examined with particular focus on
environmental issues
ii. Submit the details of the eco-sensitive areas, if any
iii. Examine and submit the details of water bodies including the seasonal
ones within the corridor of impacts along with their status, volumetric
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.15
capacity and quality, likely impacts on them due to the project
iv. Submit the details of the fishing activity and likely impact due to the
activity
v. Submit the details of the Hydrodynamic study with particular reference to
the estuarine location and its stability due to natural processes
vi. Submit the details of anticipated impact due to the growth scenario/
induced developments because of the green field Port. Impact due to
influx of people due to port and all other associated activities or otherwise
may be carefully projected and estimated. Commitments for
environmental and ecological protection shall be made quantitatively and
chronologically
vii. Submit details of Risk Assessment, Disaster Management Plan including
emergency evacuation during natural and man-made disaster like floods,
cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc.,
viii. Submit the details of Oil Spill Contingent Management Plan
ix. The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed in case disturbance
on account of port activity
x. Submit the details of dredging sludge quantity quality in terms of its toxic
metals (at least Cr+6, Arsenic, Mercury, and Lead) and its disposal with
quantity (reclamation/ dredging disposal site) If disposal is in sea,
location, the justification for selecting such location, the dispersal of
dumping material, its effect on marine environment, effect of fishes
xi. Submit the details of change in estuarine environment such as salinity
intrusion, existence of saline wedge phenomenon etc.,
xii. Submit the details of study on connectivity and its carrying capacity (both
road and railway)
xiii. Submit the details of existing port and proposed new ports in west coast
on either side of Tadadi with in a distance of 200 Km
xiv. Submit the details of impact on salt pan existing in the surrounding area.
xv. Confirm that the proposed development does not involve court cases
xvi. The mangrove exists about 10 km from the project site. Because of the
anthropogenic activities and human settlement, mangroves are likely to
spread in the area. A study on possible, alteration of flora and fauna over
long term may be taken up
xvii. Although it was mentioned that there is no forest land in the project area
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.16
but the area is very green. No of trees to be cut may be estimated with
photographic record
xviii. Quantitative and chronological CSR plan shall be delineated in detail
1.14 Detailed Work Plan
The details of work plan under individual components of environment are as
follows:
1.14.1 Air Environment
Assessment of prevailing ambient air quality status with reference to
primary air pollutants, as per the notification issued by CPCB in November
2009 based on one season data (excluding monsoon)
Collection of micro-meteorological data, viz. wind speed, wind direction,
relative humidity and temperature during ambient air quality survey periods
Delineation of air-shed based on topography of the area and identification
of micro-climatic zones
Inventory of point, line and area sources of air pollution, and quantification
of emissions (secondary data sources)
Evaluation of atmospheric emissions and predication of ground levels
concentrations of significant primary air pollutants through appropriate air
quality models incorporating the requirements specified in the publication
of Central Pollution Control Board “Assessment of Impact to Air
Environment: Guidelines for conducting Air quality modeling”
Evaluation of adequacy of the proposed air pollution control measures at
the proposed port development facilities
1.14.2 Noise Environment
Measurement of noise levels and Identification of major noisy areas (Land
use) in the study region
Identification of high level noise zones requiring mitigation measures
Identification of major noise sources at the proposed port development
facilities and predication of impacts
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.17
Prediction of impacts due to other major activities at the port, if any
Prediction of existing and proposed noise pollution control measures
Adequate mitigation measures to control the noise pollution
1.14.3 Water Environment
Assessment of existing status of water quality with respect to physico-
chemical, biological and bacteriological characteristics including surface
(estuary & coastal marine water) and groundwater resources within the
study area through field studies
Preparation of inventory of water polluting sources and quantification of
pollution loads
Assessment of water requirements for port development plans
Evaluation of feasibility of recycle and reuse of treated effluent
Recommendations on water conservation measures
Prediction of cumulative impacts on coastal marine water quality due to
additional discharges of treated effluent
1.14.4 Marine Environment
Study of coastal hydrology involving collection of oceanographic data
covering the following parameters:
Tides
Waves (wind waves and swells)
Storm surges
Currents
Salinity
Sea water temperature
Suspended load, and
Seabed bathymetry
Assessment of marine physical water quality and sea state condition
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.18
Assessment of water quality for biological parameters including plankton’s
and primary productivity
Collection and analysis of bottom sediments and the associated bottom
biota and other physical habitat, at the proposed project area
Assessment of sediment quality in terms of particle size distribution,
organic pollutants and heavy metals
Assessment of sediment quality for biotic parameters such as benthos,
micro and macro fauna
Assessment of mangrove ecosystem, oyster beds, corals in the vicinity of
the project site
Prediction of impacts due to capital and maintenance dredging, disposal of
dredged materials during construction phase and impact of liquid
emissions on biological life during operational phase
Prediction of impacts due to oil spill
Mitigation measures to minimize the impacts due to construction, dredging
and disposal of dredged material, accidental oil spill, operational oil spill,
etc
Environment Management Plan including post project monitoring
1.14.5 Land Environment
Studies on soil characteristics, land use, cropping patterns and vegetation
in the study area
Study the latest land use pattern in the study area through satellite image
analysis
Study the proposed development for its impact
Quantification of pollution loads due to disposal of municipal and industrial
solid wastes
Assessment of impacts on agriculture activities including flood situation
around proposed development activities
Evaluation of solid / hazardous wastes likely to be generated and to
suggest management options for environmentally compatible disposal
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.19
Identification of site and waste-compatible alternatives for solid wastes
management
Identification of sites for greenbelt development
1.14.6 Biological Environment
Inventory of the marine life in the study area
Identification of rare and endangered species in the study area
Collection of ecological information on aquatic ecosystems
Assessment of impacts on aquatic flora and fauna in the surface water
bodies including estuary and coastal water due to effluent discharges
Prediction of impacts on biological (aquatic) environment
Mitigation measures for abatement / reduction of biological stress and
regional management plan
1.14.7 Socio-economical Environment
Compilation of baseline status of the Socio-economic Profile in the impact
zone with reference to:
Demographic structure, viz. total households, total population and
population density, sex ratio, schedule caste and schedule tribe, literacy
and employment
Health status, viz. morbidity pattern with reference to prominent and
endemic diseases (e.g. malaria, filaria etc.) in the study area
Cultural and Aesthetic attributes in the study area including places of
historical / archaeological importance
Inventory of places of historical, cultural and religious importance in the
study region
Assessment of economic benefits to community and environment due to
existing and proposed development activities
Assessment of the prevalent conditions and projection of anticipated
changes due to the proposed port development activities along with
mitigation measures to minimize the adverse impacts
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.20
Assessment of occupational health management system
Assessment of socio-economic impacts on community arising out of the
proposed project
Anticipated changes with respect to Quality of Life (QoL) parameters in
proposed development scenario and delineation of guidelines to minimize
adverse impacts and maximize the beneficial impacts
Delineation of regional socio-economic environment management plan
1.15 Risk Assessment
Risk Assessment study covers the Mitigation Measures and Disaster
Management Plan (DMP). DMP will be delineated covering On-site and Off-site
scenarios. Roles and responsibilities of various key personnel will also be included. Steps
to be taken in case of natural disasters will be included.
1.16 Methodology for EIA
Any development project is expected to cause impact on surrounding
environment at and around the project site during its construction, commissioning and
operational phases. The nature and magnitude of impacts on different components of the
environment depend on the type of project activities and geographical conditions of the
study area. The impact of the project activities on environmental components can be
quantified through Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies within the impact
zone of the project activities. The results of the EIA studies form the basis for preparing a
viable Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for mitigating the potential adverse
impacts.
In view of this, KSIIDCL appointed National Environmental Engineering
Research Institute (NEERI), Nagpur to carry out the environmental impact assessment
studies for the proposed All-weather Multi-Cargo Sea Port at Tadadi (Tadri) setting up the
port for handling cargo about 62.4 million tonnes per annum (MTPA), in order to seek
environmental clearance from the MoEF in accordance with EIA Notification 2006.
This Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) encompasses detailed studies for
various environmental components viz. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-
economic for post monsoon season. The baseline studies were carried out within the
10 km radial distance for all environmental components as per the directives given by the
appraisal committee during the ToR approval.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.21
The location of the proposed port area with study area is depicted in Figs. 1.7
and 1.8. The environmental parameters and frequency of monitoring is summarized in
Table 1.5 and environmental component-wise data collection methodology is briefly
described here.
1.16.1 Air Environment
The topographical information of the project site as well as of the study area
including details about different activities pertaining to the port was collected. Different
pollution parameters like PM, (including PM10 and PM2.5), SO2, NOx, Ozone and CO were
identified as representative parameters of project activities for presenting baseline status
of ambient air quality of the study area. A temporary field centre cum laboratory was set
up at the project site for the purpose of calibration of equipment and chemical analysis
etc.
Data on micro-meteorological parameters viz. wind speed, wind direction and
ambient temperature humidity were collected for the nearest meteorological station of
India Meteorological Department (IMD).
1.16.2 Noise Environment
Noise is defined as unwanted sound. It interferes with speech communication,
causes annoyance / distraction from work, and disturbs sleep, thus, deteriorating quality
of human environment. Noise pollution monitoring has therefore been carried out in and
around the proposed port to assess the impact of the project activities on the acoustic
environment.
Noise levels were measured (A-weighted) at several locations in the human
settlements around the port at different times of the day and night by using Bruel and
Kjaer make type 2230 Precision Integrating Sound Level Meter.
1.16.3 Water Environment
Information on water resources in the study area was collected. The water
resources in the study area are mainly rivers, estuary and groundwater. The parameters
of prime importance for water quality studies were selected under physical, chemical
inorganic, chemical organic, nutrient and heavy metal categories. Samples of surface as
well as ground water (well water) were collected at different locations. Aquatic biology
parameters were also analysed. Marine environment and the quality of sediment were
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.22
studied based on field data and observations, strategies were formulated for water
management.
1.16.4 Land Environment
Soil samples were collected from the study area and the surrounding villages.
Physico-chemical properties of the soils were determined. Information on land use pattern
in the study area was also collected. Information regarding existing cropping pattern, their
types and crop yield was collected from various sources.
1.16.5 Biological Environment
Data was collected from various Government Departments such as forest,
agriculture, fisheries, animal husbandry and other sources to establish the baseline status
of biological environment in the study area.
The parameters of prime importance to both biotic and abiotic factors were
selected to estimate the structural and functional changes in the ecosystem. Information
regarding plantation and mangroves was collected for the proposed port area.
Water samples were also collected during the post monsoon season from rivers,
estuary, ground water sources for estimation of biological parameters viz., zooplankton
and phytoplankton through detailed microscopic examination. Computation of Diversity
Indices was also done for identifying the water quality status.
1.16.6 Socio-economic Environment
A field survey was conducted in the study area of the proposed port. The
parameters selected under socio-economic component were demographic structure of
the study area, provision for basic amenities, industries likely to come up, welfare facilities
provided by the project proponent, safety, training and management, community and
occupational health hazards. Relevant information was collected from randomly selected
villages in the study area and analysed. Information was also collected on Quality of Life
(QoL) parameters to establish QoL indices for the selected villages and also for the study
area as a whole. All the aforesaid environmental parameters have been used for
identification, prediction and evaluation of significant impacts. Modelling of environmental
quality has also been carried out to predict the impact of the project and for its
subsequent evaluation step.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.23
1.17 Environment Management Plan (EMP)
Evaluation of adequacy of existing and proposed pollution control
measures and suggesting modifications.
To propose appropriate additional mitigation measures so as to reduce
adverse impacts of the activities on the marine environment.
Preparation of post development environment quality monitoring program.
1.18 Risk Assessment
A Risk Assessment Study was carried out comprising hazard identification
based on Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis, hazard assessment and
evaluation employing techniques of consequence and vulnerability analysis and
delineation of Onsite Disaster Management Plan (DMP) and Offsite Emergency
Preparedness Plan (EPP) under worst case scenarios due to the proposed
developments.
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.24
Fig. 1.1: Location of Tadadi Port
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.25
Fig. 1.2: Minor Ports in Karnataka
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.26
Fig. 1.3: National Highway 66 (17) – Karwar to Mangalore
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.27
Identification of need for the proposed project
Consideration of alternatives
Description of the project
Description of environmental setting
SCREENING Determination of the type of EIA
SCOPING Identification of significant impacts
Preparation of TOR for the EIA study
Baseline evaluation
Prediction of impacts
Preparation of EMP and Mitigation
Preparation of EIA and Mitigation
Preparation of EIA /Risk Assessment Report
Decision - making
Approved
Safety & DMP
Risk Analysis
Hazardous Cargo
Project Rejected
Rejected
Source: EIA Guidelines for Ports and Harbours (Adapted and modified from United Nations
Environment Programme (UNEP) EIA Training Resource Manual 1997)
Fig. 1.4: Basic Components of EIA Study
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.28
Source: Coastal Zone Management Plan Map of Karnataka
1.5 : Map of Coastal Regulation Zone
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.29
Fig. 1.6: Multi- Criteria Analysis of the Alternatives
for the Location of the Tadadi Port
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.30
Source: Survey of India
Fig. 1.7: Location Map of Tadadi Port on Toposheet
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.31
Fig. 1.8: 10 km Study Area around the Proposed Port Site
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.32
Table 1.1
Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Major Ports
Year Traffic handled (Million Tonnes)
POL & its Products
Iron Ore
Fertilizer and FRM
Coal Container Other Cargo
Total
2007-08 168.75 91.80 16.63 64.93 92.27 84.94 519.32
2008-09 176.14 94.04 18.23 70.40 93.14 78.59 530.54
2009-10 175.09 100.33 17.72 71.71 101.24 95.00 561.09
2010-11 179.17 87.06 19.99 72.73 114.11 96.97 570.03
2011-12 (Estimated
182.28 86.83 20.60 86.06 122.77 102.06 600.60
Table 1.2
Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Non-Major Ports
Year Traffic handled (Million Tonnes)
POL & its Products
Iron Ore
Fertilizer and FRM
Coal Container Other Cargo
Total
2007-08 91.04 34.22 7.11 15.44 11.05 47.52 206.38
2008-09 97.82 35.86 8.86 21.46 11.97 37.25 213.22
2009-10 145.15 49.06 6.33 41.37 14.85 32.56 289.32
2010-11 153.48 42.50 10.98 58.52 17.56 31.60 314.64
2011-12 (Estimated
188.00 51.00 11.00 77.00 19.00 24.00 370.00
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.33
Table 1.3
Traffic Projections of Major and Non Major Ports as per Maritime Agenda 2010-20
Ports Existing Level (million tonnes)
Projections (million tonnes)
CAGR (%) between 2009-10 and
2009-10 2011-12 2016.17 2019-20 2011-12 2016-17 2019-20
Major Ports 561.09 629.64 1031.50 1214.82 5.93 9.09 8.03
Non – Major Ports
288.80 402.50 987.81 1280.13 18.05 19.21 16.06
Overall 849.89 1032.14 2019.31 2494.95 10.20 13.16 11.37
Table 1.4
Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the Locations of the Tadadi Port
Ranking Criteria Locations No.
I II III
Technical Aspects
Need of breakwater 3 1 1
Need of dredging 1 3 2
Road connection 3 1 2
Railway connection 3 1 2
Possibility of expansion 3 1 2
Environmental Aspects
Impact on beaches 3 1 1
Impact of estuary dynamic 1 3 3
Impact of flora and fauna 1 2 3
Total Score 18 13 16
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.34
Table 1.5
Summary of Environmental Parameters and Frequency of Monitoring
Sr. No.
Attribute Parameters No. of Sampling Locations
Frequency of Monitoring / Data
Collection
1. Ambient air quality
PM10,PM2.5,SO2, NOX, NH3, O3, CO, HC, Benzene, Pb, As, Ni, BaP
10 24 hourly samples during study period
2. Meteorology Wind speed and direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall.
Mixing Height
1 The meteorological data has been collected for planning the monitoring network
3. Surface water quality
Physical, chemical bacteriological and biological parameters
8 Once during study period
4. Ground water quality
Physical, chemical bacteriological and biological parameters
10 Once during study period
5. Ecology Existing flora and fauna 21 Through field visits during summer (2010) and substantiated through secondary sources data
6. Noise levels Noise levels in dBA 11 Hourly observation once during the day and night time
7. Soil characteristics
Physical and chemical parameters to assess agricultural and afforestation potential
9 Sub surface composite samples collected once during the study period
8. Land use / Land Cover
Land use for different land use classifications
Study area Land use / Land Cover Analysis using satellite imaging and GIS Technique
9. Socio-economic Environment
Socio-economic characteristics, labour force characteristics, population statistics existing amenities in the study area and quality of life
Study area and 29
stations for survey
Based on field surveys and data collected from secondary sources
CChhaapptteerr 22
PPrroojjeecctt DDeessccrriippttiioonn
2.1 Introduction
In the light of the economic reforms that the Central Government implemented in
the early nineties, and the Karnataka Government also has been making serious efforts
to improve its port infrastructure. In 1997, a port policy was formulated with a view to
develop all ports with private participation. The policy is to develop ports on the BOOST
(Build-Own-Operate-Share and Transfer) concept and primarily seeks to improve cargo
handling capacity. The Karnataka State Government has assigned the responsibility of
developing Port infrastructure under the Public Private Participation (PPP) mode to the
Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited (KSIIDCL).
Scope for further development is strengthened by the new State Infrastructure Policy
2007, which sets out development of infrastructure through the PPP framework.
The advantages attributed to minor ports are many, as they do not come under
any regulatory agency for fixing of tariff by Tarrif Authority for Major Ports (TAMP). Being
in private sector, they could go to any extent to convince a prospective customer by
adopting an aggressive marketing policy with a lot of flexibility. Moreover, the total
automation and 24x7 operations ensure efficient servicing for the minor ports. If the
growth rate persists, it is projected that within a span of few years, viz., by about 2020,
minor ports will overtake the major ports in total cargo handling.
Based on the above, the Government of Karnataka has undertaken the
development of the minor port called “Tadadi” situated in the estuary of Aghanashini
River. The backwaters of the river has got vast water front at the existing port which is
currently being utilized for fishing activities alone. The Government of Karnataka now
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.2
sees a great potential in developing this port with modern infrastructural facilities based
on the following:
A total land area of around 566 hectares (1400 acres) is available for the
development of the port with minimum rehabilitation problems.
Location of mines / industries (mainly steel production) in the hinterland
enable export of iron ore / import of coal and steel products, General Cargo,
Containers etc.,
Location of industries in the hinterland requiring the raw products viz., coal,
which can be imported.
Port requirement for entry of passengers as well as fisheries.
The area though classified as CRZ 1 by MoEF, permits construction of ports.
An effective large hinterland comprising of Central and Northern parts of
Karnataka which are rich in large deposits of minerals such as iron ore etc.,
The Government of Karnataka vide GO No. 100 178/1TSI 2009 Bangalore,
dated 09-02-2009 accorded approval to undertake the implementation of the
Tadadi Port project on a PPP mode and designated KSIIDCL as a nodal
agency.
The projected demand for export of iron ore from Tadadi Port will increase
from 2.87 million tonnes (2015-16) to 27 million tonnes (2040-41).
Also, import of coal will increase from 1.968 millon tonnes (2020-21) to 23.34
million tonnes (2040-41).
With view of the above, KSIIDCL proposes to develop a port at Tadadi initially to
handle cargo transport facilities of capacity of 50.51 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of
bulk cargo consisting of coal and iron ore as well as, 11.98 million tonnes per annum
(MTPA) of steel products, general cargo and containers. To meet this requirement, seven
berths are proposed to be constructed in the PPP (Public Private Partnership) mode on
DBFT basis. Provision for one LNG import terminal has also been made in the master
plan for the proposed location of a thermal plant by National Thermal Power Corporation
Limited (NTPC).
The port will be located inside an estuary, which offers problem-free berthing
facility throughout the year, without the construction of the breakwaters. Construction of
the port involves berths, along with various cargo storage, handling facilities and utilities,
and other allied buildings.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.3
2.2 Project Location
Uttar Kannada, one of the coastal district of Karnataka State has a coastline
length of about 300 km and is home to ten ports which are used for various marine
activities including sea trade as a Naval Base and fishing activities.
Uttar Kannada, also known as North Canara or North Kanara is bordered by the
State of Goa and Belgaum district to the north, Dharwad and Haveri districts to the east,
Shimoga and Udupi districts to the south and the Arabian Sea to the west. The town of
Karwar is the administrative headquarters of the district.
The port is connected by State Highway with Mangalore (240 km) and
Bangalore (450 km) on National Highway (NH-66) and about 50 km from Karwar, which is
the nearest town. Nearest railway station is Ankola (25 km) for movement of iron ore by
roadway / railway. Indian railways serve the port through a direct broad gauge link of
Konkan railway from Mumbai to Bangalore, the commercial hub of the State. Since the
area falls under CRZ, maps of the project area were prepared by Indian Naval
Hydrographic Department, Dehradun, one of the authorized agencies by MoEF. Markings
of the high tide line (HTL), low tide line (LTL) and delineated CRZ boundary is shown in
Figs. 2.1 a, b, c, d, e.
2.3 Topography and Port Layout
The Tadadi port serves a vast hinterland, which is rich in iron ore mineral,
industrial and agricultural resources and is connected through a network of roadways and
railways. The present estate of the Tadadi port stretches over an estuarine area of
Aghanashini River / creek measuring about 681 hectares (1684 acres), which is under the
possession of Karnataka Industrial Area Development Board (KIADB). Approximately 236
hectares of land area has been earmarked for commercial buildings and institutional
utilization. The dock area is restricted by a boundary wall and covers about 265 hectares
in the stage 1 development, which includes area for development of storage facilities and
associated buildings. 25% of the total area is kept for green belt development. The land
surface area to be occupied by the proposed Port at Tadadi is about 559 hectares
(1382.5 Acres) as shown in Fig. 2.2.
There are provisions for expansion of the dock area to meet futuredemand.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.4
2.4 Existing Port
The existing Tadadi fishing harbour is located at Latitude 14º13.50' N and
Longitude 74 º21.50' E in the estuary of the Aghanashini River. The existing facilites
include a Light House structure on R.C.C jetty and a transit shed.
2.5 Proposed Facility
The existing Tadadi fishing harbour is located in the mouth of the Aghanashini
River and has a draft of about 2 m. The proposed facility is in the Aghanashini estuary
east of the existing fishing harbour. The proposed location is in Latitude 14032’40’’N
and Longitude 740 22’03’’ E.
2.6 Traffic Projections
The consultant who had prepared the detailed feasibility study had also carried
out a traffic analysis up to the year 2040-41. Based on the detailed traffic projection, the
proposed cargo to be handled in the port for the year 2040-41 in million tonnes per
annum (MTPA) is smmarised as under.
Export of iron ore - 27.17 MTPA
Import of Coal - 23.34 MTPA
Export of Steel - 8.78 MTPA
Export / Import of
General Cargo and Containers - 3.066 MTPA
Total - 62.360 MTPA
2.7 Hinterland Connectivity
The port has both road and rail connectivity as under.
2.7.1 Road Connectivity
For determining the adequate levels of cargo generation for the proposed port
at Tadadi, the Bellary-Hospet region, the largest producer of the iron ore, has been
considered an important source of cargo generation. The region produces almost 75% of
the mined ore from the State, which is transported primarily by road to the ports on the
Western Coast like Goa, Karwar, Belikere and New Mangalore . A certain volume of
cargo is also shipped through Chennai, Ennore, Krishapatanam and Kakinada. The fact
that a possible port at Tadadi could be much closer to the ore production area is
considered an advantage for considering this development.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.5
The road connectivity link between Bellary – Hospet (B - H) and Tadadi will be
via Hubli on the National Highway (NH-63). At Hubli two options exist for connecting to
Tadadi.
Option 1: NH-63 (Hubli – Ankola) and NH-66 (Ankola - Tadadi)
Option 2: NH-4 (Hubli – Tadas), SH-69 (Tadas - Kumta) and NH-66 (Kumta –
Tadadi)
It is estimated that the traffic of iron ore/steel product is to be exported while coal
is imported as:
70% of the iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi port will arrive by road
10% of the traffic will be transported by road, once the coal terminal starts
operating
50% steel product has been considered by road for the export.
2.7.2 Rail Connectivity
The rail connectivity of the Tadadi port is proposed to be achieved by
construction of a line between Hubli and Ankola by 2019-20. Till then, no railway traffic is
considered for the Tadadi Port. Following is the traffic generated by Tadadi port by
railway:
30% iron ore traffic arrives from Bellary-Hospet to the port for export
90% of the import coal to be transported from Tadadi port to B-H
50% of the steel products traffic arrives from B-H for export
Regarding issue of hinterland connectivity, provision of rail (Hubli – Ankola) is
preferred & pursued as against widening of highways. If Rail line is approved, widening
of highways may have to be dropped.
2.7.3 Inland water connectivity
As analysed in the detailed traffic study, the coal, iron ore and steel products
will arrive and depart from the port through road or railways to the Bellary – Hospet
region. Hence, inland connectivity through the Aghanashini river has not been planned.
2.8 Design of Ship Sizes
An analysis of the shipping trends for the various cargoes proposed to be
handled at Tadadi was carried out and based on the National, International and
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.6
Permanent International Association Navigation Congress (PIANC) standards the design
ship sizes have been considered for the planning of the port facility as under.
2.9 Number of Berths
To handle the projected traffic 62.360 MTPA in 2040-41 as indicated above,
the following number of berths are required.
23.34 MTPA of Import of Coal - Berth Nos.1 & 2 - 2 nos.
27.17 MTPA of Export of Iron ore - Berth Nos. 3& 4 - 2 nos.
3.07 MTPA of General Cargo and Containers - Berth No.5 - 1 no.
8.78 MTPA of Export of Steel - Berth No.6 & 7 - 2 nos.
Total - 7 nos.
The Location of the Proposed Berths is shown in Fig. 2.3.
2.10 Details of Mechanized Iron Ore/Coal Berths
The proposed system for mechanized loading / unloading of iron ore and coal at
the proposed new deep draft berths has been planned keeping in view the probable berth
allocation, the area earmarked for stockyard development as per the Master Plan. The
alignments of the conveyors in the proposed facilities have been carried out, so as to
clear all the existing and proposed structures under the proposed development schemes
in the port area.
2.11 Cargo Handling Equipment at the Berths
The above noted seven berths are equipped with cargo handling equipments as
indicated below.
Berth No. 1 - 2 ship unloaders of average unitary capacity of 1,700 tph.
Berth No. 2 - 2 ship unloaders of average unitary capacity of 1,700 tph.
Berth No. 3 - 2 ship loaders of average unitary capacity of 2,000 tph
Berth No. 4 - 2 ship loaders of average unitary capacity of 2,000 tph
Berth No. 5 - 1 mobile crane with average unitary capacity of 800 tph.
Berth No. 6 - 2 mobile cranes with average unitary capacity of 800 tph
Berth No. 7 - 2 mobile cranes with average unitary capacity of 800 tph
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.7
2.12 Iron Ore Export Circuit
The iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi Port will enter to the Terminal by
means of road and railway.
The main areas to be considered are,
Area for unloading the trucks and railway wagons
Storage area
Operation area (at the berths)
2.13 Coal Import circuit
The operation of the imported coal circuit is very similar to the iron ore circuit
but is in the reverse direction viz.,
Ship Unloading
Transport to the storage area, dumping, collecting, transport to the loaders
and
Loading to trucks and railways
The main areas to be considered are
Operation area (at the berths)
Storage area
Area for loading on trucks and railway wagons
2.14 Iron ore Handling System on the Berth
The main characteristics of the ship loader for loading of iron ore installed in
the Berth are as under.
Number of ship loaders - 4 (2 at each berth)
Traveling gear - rail
Distance between rails - 30 meters
Average / effective capacity - 2,000 tph
Maximum or peak capacity - 4,000 tph
Out reach from berth line - 40 meters
The iron ore transported by 3 conveyor belts from the stackyard will arrive at the
3 transfer towers, from where it will lead to the 2 ship loaders through 2 independent
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.8
systems of conveyor belt and transfer towers. The belt will feed the pair of ship loaders.
The entire conveyor belts will have a capacity of 3700 tph. The average throughput of
each ship loader will be at least 2000 tph. A typical ship loader is shown in Fig. 2.4.
2.15 Coal Handling System on the Berth
The main characteristics of the ship unloader for unloading of coal installed in
the Berth are as under.
Number of ship unloaders - 4 (2 at each berth)
Traveling gear - rail
Distance between rails - 30 m
Average / effective capacity - 1,700 tph
Maximum or peak capacity - 3,400 tph
Out reach from berth line - 40 m
The coal unloaded from the unloaders with an average capacity of 1700 tph.
Two unloaders will be provided in each berth. Two bulk carriers can be unloaded
simultaneously. The unloaded material will be transported through 2 conveyor belts until a
transfer tower, from where it will be transported to the 3 storage areas through a system
of conveyor belts and transfer tower. The conveyor belt must have unitary capacity of
3100 tph. A typical ship unloader is shown in Fig. 2.5.
2.16 Steel Product & General Cargo loading/unloading on the Berth
The main characteristics of the harbour mobile cranes for loading / unloading of
steel products are as under.
Number of harbour mobile cranes - 5
Travelling gear - tyres
Average / effective capacity - 800 tph
Maximum or peak capacity - 1,600 tph
Out reach from berth line - 30 m
Lifting capacity - 75 tonnes (a cycle of 3 min
has been considered)
A typical harbour mobile crane is shown in Fig. 2.6.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.9
2.17 Stacker / Reclaimers
The Stacker / reclaimers for stacking and reclaiming of coal and iron ore are as
under.
Travelling gear - rails
Travelling Speed - 0.2 to 15 m/min (approx)
Average capacity as stacker - 3,700 tph for iron ore and
- 3,100 tph for coal
Average capacity as reclaimer - 3,700 tph for iron ore and
- 3,100 tph for coal
Boom length
(from the bucket wheel to the rail line axle) - 50 m
Boom slewing angle - ± 100º
Boom slewing speed - 0.05 to 0.15 rad /min
(approx.)
2.18 Iron Ore unloading System
The iron ore transported by railway will be dumped at the unloading stations
located inside the port. It will have two lines with one module and can be extended
if necessary. The main characteristics of the wagon unloading station are as under.
Number of lines - 2
Number of modules per line - 1
Throughput - 3,000 tph per module
Total throughput per line - 3,000 tph
The main characteristics of the truck unloading station are the following.
Similarly, the iron ore transported by road will be dumped at the trucks unloading station,
which will have three lines.
Number of lines - 3
Throughput - 1,000 tph per line
Total throughput - 3,000 tph.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.10
2.19 Coal Loading System at the Station
The coal will be loaded onto railway wagons at the loading station, which will
have two lines. The main characteristics of the wagons loading station are as under.
Number of lines - 2
Number of modules per line - 3
Throughput - 550 tph per module (1,650 tph per line)
Total throughput - 3,300 tph
Buffer capacity - 1000 m3 per module
Similarly, the coal will be loaded onto trucks at the truck loading stations.
Initially it will have two modules, but it can be extend to a total of four modules. The main
characteristics of the truck loading station are as under.
Number of modules – 2 (+2 in the future)
Throughput - 300 tph per module
Total throughput – 600 tph ( initially, expandable to 1,200 tph)
Buffer capacity – 1,000m3 per module
2.20 Storage Areas
The storage areas for various cargoes are as under:
Iron ore - To handle the projected traffic of 27.17 MTPA, 2 rows of 9 stacks
each of size, 118 m length, 65m width and 6.5m height of 2.25 MT will be
provided.
A parking area for the trucks with a capacity of 85 posts has been
planned, where they will be waiting to access to the TD’s.
Coal - To handle the projected traffic of 23.34 MTPA 3 rows of 7 stacks
each of size, 148 m length, 80m width, and 17m height of1.95 MT will be
provided.
A parking area for the trucks with a capacity of 85 posts has been
planned, where they will be waiting to access to the TL’s.
The bulk cargo will be transported from the unloading area (wagons and
trucks for the iron ore and ship unloaders for the coal) to the storage area
and from the storage area to the loading area (ship loaders for the iron ore
and wagons and trucks for the coal) by means of a system of conveyor belts.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.11
Steel and General Cargo - A transit shed of size 50 m x 180 m (9000 m2) is
proposed to serve the new multipurpose berth. In addition, with the open
stockyard, warehouses outside the port area will also be provided.
2.21 Port Railway
Tadadi Port will have its own railway system with route length of 25 km from
Ankola to Tadadi Port. More than 20 railway sidings will be required for handling full rakes
of 59 BOXN Wagon.
2.22 Salient Features of Berths
The berth structures for iron ore and coal have been designed as open berth
structures with cast in situ bored piles of 1200 mm and 1500 dia. The berth structure will
be designed using STAAD PRO software using finite element analysis system.
The super structure consists of RCC deck slab supported on longitudinal and
transverse, cross beams. M40 grade concrete will be used for piling and for the super
structure. Reinforcement steel will be Corrosion Resistant Steel (CRS) conforming to IS
1786 -1979 with a specified characteristic strength Fy = 500 / 415 N/ mm2. 50mm thick
wearing coat will be provided on the top slab to take care of normal wear and tear during
the port operations. Service duct slabs are provided on the fender side as well as on the
rear side. CSS rubber fender, which is a hollow cylindrical body with fully rubber –
embedded mounting flanges, designed to deflect in an axial direction will be used. 100
tonne capacity bollards will be used for mooring of the ships.
Taking into consideration the hydraulic flow of the estuary, wave and wind
direction an L shaped berth alignment has been suggested as under.
Southern side longer arm of 1192 m to accommodate 2 iron ore and 2 coal
berths
Western side arm of 866 m at right angle to the southern side to handle steel
in 2 berths and general cargo and containers in 1 berth. This arm will also
provide for berthing facilities for auxiliary vessels/ harbour crafts.
The width of the berths is 50m.
The design vessel considered for the design of iron ore and coal berths is
1,00,000 DWT. The berths will be operated for 330 days / year, 20 hours / day, so that
the maximum theoretical operation time available per berth will be 330 x 20 = 6,600
hours/ year.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.12
The design vessel considered for the western side arm for handling steel,
general cargo and containers is 40,000 DWT. However, the berth structures have been
designed to handle 100,000 DWT in future.
The berths will be operated for 330 days / year, 20 hours / day, so that the
maximum theoretical operation time available per berth will be 330 x 20 = 6,600 hours/
year. Taking into consideration the various standards the operational parameters for the
different types of vessels proposed to be handled are as under.
For General Cargo vessels : Hs = 0.65 m
For Bulk Cargo vessels : Hs= 0.80m (unloading; i.e. coal vessels)
Hs = 0.90 m (loading, i.e. iron ore vessels)
Where, Hs = Significant Wave Height
The depth at the southern berths will be the same as at the inner navigation
channel and the turning circle, which is (-)16mCD, whereas the depth at the western
berth will be (-)14.5 mCD.
A transit shed of size 50 m x 180m is proposed to serve the new multipurpose
berth. Reinforced concrete columns supporting steel trusses form the structural frame
work of the shed. The span of steel truss is 50m.
In some of the backup areas the top soil up to a depth of 10m consist of clayey
soil with SPT value varying from 1 to 4. The ground improvement technique using
Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) will be used.
2.23 Dredging Requirement
2.23.1 Capital Dredging Requirement
The existing depths and the dimensional requirements of the proposed harbour
are detailed below. The Navigational Channel Turning Circles etc., are shown in Fig. 2.7.
The existing depths at the various locations of the port are as under.
Outer approach channel (-) 3.9 mCD to (-) 24.4 mCD.
Inner approach channel (-) 5mCD (varies).
First turning circle (-) 1.07mCD
Second turning circle (-) 0.8mCD
Front of Iron ore and Coal berths (-) 0.8mCD
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.13
Front of General Cargo berths (-) 0.4 to 1.2mCD
From the study of the bore holes taken in the outer sea it is noted that the
medium dense sand with clay having S.P.T value ranging from 6 to 50 was noted
extending up to (-) 6mCD. This is followed by very dense sand with S.P.T value of 40 to
greater than 100 extending up to (-)12mCD. Below this silty clay with SPT value of 2 to 6
was noted extending up to about (-)18mCD. This is followed by disintegrated rock and
then hard rock.
From the study of the bore holes taken in the inner channel of the sea it is noted
that the top soil comprise of very soft clayey sand with S.P.T value of 1 to 2 extending up
to a depth of about (-)8mCD. In certain pockets shell deposits and medium dense sand
pockets were noted. Below the soft layer, medium dense silty sand having S.P.T value of
6 to 26 was encountered extending up to (-)18mCD. This was followed by weathered
rock and then by the hard rock.
The final design dredging depths for the various locations are as under.
Outer approach channel (-) 18mCD
Inner approach channel (-) 16mCD
First & Second turning circle (-) 16mCD
Coal and Iron ore berth (-) 16mCD
General cargo berth (-) 14.5mCD
The width of the approach channel for the various zones are as under.
Outer approach channel 180m
Inner approach channel 200m
Curved portion of the inner channel 217.5m
Dia of the First turning circle 290m
Dia of the Second turning circle 210m
Width in-front of Coal and Iron ore berths 278m
Width in-front of General cargo berths 151m
Radius of the first bend in the channel 2947m
Radius of the second bend in the channel 555m
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.14
A side slope of 1:5 has been assumed.
The total quantity of dredging involved is 500,00,000 m3, out of which the hard
material to be dredged is 69,00,000 m3. Out of the above, 180,00,000 m3 of suitable
material will be used for reclamation and the balance of 320,00,000 m3 will be disposed
off shore, in the designated dumping areas based on the model studies.
The dredged material which is suitable for reclamation is proposed to be used
partly for filling or reclamation of the backup area of the port and unsuitable material will
be disposed off in the offshore disposal area as per the guidelines of MoEF.
The dredged material cut by the cutter suction dredger will be transported to the
reclamation area through a system of floating and shore pipelines.
The dredging alongside the berth and the corners is proposed to be carried out
by the grab and back hoe dredgers.
An efficient containment system for reclamation must
Confine the material within the dredged area
Prevent the damage to surrounding areas by inundation and
Have a sufficient area for maximum rate of drying of the spoil
The containment facility must be so designed that sufficient time is allowed for
the settlement of the solids. The degree of containment will depend upon the type of
material. For coarse granular material, which maintains a slope of 1:3 or 1:4, requires
containment only at the edges of the containment area. However, the fine cohesive
materials must be contained on all the sides. The excess water is drained, either through
an adjustable overflow weir or a drop inlet overflow. A typical reclamation area showing
the overflow weir is shown in Fig. 2.8.
The type of bunds / dikes to be provided for containment of the soil, will depend
upon the site conditions, such as type of soil, environmental conditions, type of foundation
etc. When the bund is under the attack of waves, rip rap or armoring has to be provided.
The types of dredgers proposed to be used are as under.
Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger (TSHD)
Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD)
Grab or Backhoe dredger
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.15
A typical trailing suction hopper dredger is shown in Fig. 2.9.
A typical cutter suction hopper dredger is shown in Fig. 2.10.
A typical Grab dredger is shown in Fig. 2.11.
A typical Backhoe dredger is shown in Fig. 2.12.
The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the
trailing suction hopper dredger has been carried out by means of the program titled
“DUMP”.
2.23.2 Annual Maintenance of Dredging requirement
The annual maintenance dredging requirement of the port has been evaluated
based on the present maintenance dredging quantities in the adjacent major ports on the
west coast of India viz., Mormugao Port, New Mangalore Port and Cochin Port. The ratio
obtained by dividing the average annual maintenance dredging volumes at the outer
channel by the surface area of the navigation channel, represents the average height of
sediment dredged.
These ratios for the three adjacent ports indicated above are as under.
Mormugoa Port - 2.69
New Mangalore Port - 2.64
Cochin – 2.66
From the above, it may be seen that the ratios are quite similar.
At the proposed Tadadi port, the surface area of the outer channel is 9350 m x
180 m = 16, 83, 000 m2. By applying the obtained average ratio of 2.66 m3/m2, of the
channel of the adjacent ports on the west coast of India, the average annual maintenance
of dredging volume for the outer navigation channel would be 16,83,000 m3/m2 =
4,476,780 m3/year. Therefore, the total annual average maintenance dredging volume by
taking into consideration the contribution from the river, south, north and outer approach
channel will be 50,90,000 m3/year as under.
The dredged material obtained from maintenance dredging being mostly silt is
normally not suitable for reclamation will be disposed off in the offshore dumping areas.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.16
2.24 Navigational Aids
For safe navigation of the ships from the fairway buoy through the approach
channel right up to the berth, navigational aids are to be provided.
The aids to navigation are also known as ATON. The important navigational aids are
Navigational Buoys on the sides of the Approach Channel and the Fairway
buoy
Leading lines (Range lines) and
Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)
2.24.1 Navigational Buoys
Various systems for the location of navigational buoys are in use in different
parts of the world. In India IALA’s system is used.
In the case of Tadadi buoys demarcating the channel will have green colours on
the starboard side (right) and red colour buoys on the port side. The buoys will have
green colour day marks for identification during the day and red lights during the night.
These lights are normally solar powered. The marker and the lights are fixed to the buoy
which is normally made of light material such as a FRP. The buoys are moored to the
sea bed through a system of steel chains and anchors. The buoys can be laid 2 km a
part and staggered on either side of the channel.
The beginning of the channel and where the ships come and anchor, also have
a buoy which will have a day marker as well as a light. This buoy has known as the
Fairway buoy.
2.24.2 Leading Line
Leading line /Range lines are provided by the installation of two transit marks for
defining the central line, which will have both day marker and lights. Instead of providing
two transit marks for defining the central line of the channel, a modern system known as a
“Sector Light” can also be provided.
The buoys and the leading lights will have typical flashing characteristics to
identify their location which will be indicated in the National Hydrographic Chart as an
approach to the port.
A typical arrangement of leading lines is shown in Fig. 2.13.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.17
2.24.3 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)
The vessel traffic management system is covered in para 2.30.1
2.25 Mooring of Vessel
The vessels are to be properly tied to the berth structures for safety as well as
smooth operations. The tying operation is known as the mooring of the vessel.
The vessels are fastened to the berth through mooring lines known as hawsers
to a fixed object called Bollard. A 100 tonnes capacity bollard which can safely moor a
1,00,000 DWT vessel have been provided at regular intervals.
The bollards are normally made of cast steel.
A typical 100 tonnes bollard is shown in Fig. 2.14.
2.26 Tugs and other floating crafts required for berthing /un-berthing of Vessels
The assistance of tugs for the turning of the vessels will be utilized during the
approach, berthing and un- berthing vessel.
The main characteristics of the proposed tugs are as under.
Type : Tractor type tug
Power : 4,000 HP
Bollard pull : 40 tonnes
2.27 Utilities
Various utilities like water, power, control system, communication system,
workshop, gate complex, customers, administrative and dispensary buildings etc. will to
be provided at the Tadadi Port.
2.28 Water
Water requirement for various activities of port viz. drinking, sanitation, cleaning
and washing of vehicles and equipments etc. in initial phase will be of the order of 50-100
m3/day. The projected water requirement up to year 2020-21 for the port activities would
be about 150 m3/day. The nearest water source identified is from the river Gangavalli
which is within 8km from Tadadi port.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.18
2.29 Power
Electrical system would be based on latest technology, system stability and
reliability, which could be obtained from the Karnataka Power Transmission Corporation
Limited (KPTCL). The total requirement of electricity will be about 22 MW, which can be
met from Kodasahalli (120- MW hydel power plant) or Khadra Hydel power project (150
MW power). Both of these are about 45 km from the port. The magnitude of connected
load and maximum demand would be 4500 kW and 3000 kW (3350 KVA at 0.9 power
factor), respectively.
Necessary approval for power to be obtained from KPTCL through overhead
single circuit transmission line laid upto main sub-station located within the port boundary.
It is presumed that the incoming supply voltage would be 33 KV, which is the common
practice with electricity authorities for the magnitude of load indicated above. The
overhead transmission lines installed by KPTCL shall be suitable to cater to the load
demand inclusive of projected future load to avoid reinstallation / upgradation of incoming
lines. However, the contractual load shall be initially 2500 KVA (for the present facility).
KPTCL, shall provide a double pole structure near the main substation to receive the
incoming supply.
2.30 Control System
A microprocessor based programmable controller system has been planned to
monitor and supervise the material flow and equipment operations from the control room.
2.31 Communication System
Comprehensive telephone system including EPABX and VHF handsets have
been envisaged for effective communication between control room and the various
sections/ equipment/locations of the port, like: Ship loader / Unloader/ Reclaimer/
Stacker, Main-substation, Control room, Workshop, Gate complex, Customs building,
Administrative complex, Dispensary etc.
Public address system comprising of desk/wall mounted handset stations with
built in amplifier and loudspeaker installation at various locations enroute the material
handling system covering, jetties and back up area has been envisaged.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.19
2.32 Information Technology and Communication
2.32.1 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)
A Vessel Traffic Management Systems will be installed for safe navigation
efficient traffic flow and protection of the environment. The system has a radar for
monitoring and controlling of vessels on real time basis with a state of the art RISC based
Alpha Server. The VTMS will also be useful for dealing with incidents and emergency
situations. It will also assist Coastguard in search and rescue operations.
The system will be interfaced with the port management computer system to
maintain the database of vessel movements, vessel related information and aid in the
scheduling of arrival and departure of vessels at the Tadadi Port.
2.33 Fire Protection and Alarm System
A state of art fire detection system is connected to the pumping line controlled
by an electronic control panel. The fire pumps are designed based on the discharge rate
and throwing distance and alarm system for operational areas, main substation and
electrical / control room. The same will consist of heat / smoke detectors, manual call
points, hooters, sirens and central fire alarm panel located in the control room.
In addition to the above, a firefighting system comprising of external hydrants
lines with pumping line and booster line all around the area will be provided which will
meet the general firefighting standards.
2.34 Facilities for Treatment or Disposal of Solid Waste / Liquid Effluent
Based on the estimated quantity of waste production, the desired treatment and
disposal facilities would be provided at the site of the Tadadi port. The waste streams
generated by ships include bilge water (water that collects in the lowest part of the ship’s
hull and it may contain oil, grease, and other contaminants), sewage, gray water
(wastewater from showers, sinks, laundries and kitchens), ballast water (water taken
onboard or discharged from a vessel to maintain its stability), and solid waste (food waste
and garbage).
Present day wastewater treatment systems for use in marine vessels are similar
to land based applications, where wastewater is separated into two separate sources as
Grey-water and Raw Sewage (Black-water). For Black-water, the treatment system
incorporates five general phases (or zones): (1) screening, (2) clarifying, (3) filtering, (4)
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.20
advanced oxidation, and (5) sludge reducing. For Grey-water, the treatment system
incorporates three general phases (or zones): (1) screening (2) filtering, and (3) advanced
oxidation. Each train of the treatment system (black-water and gray-water) can operate
as a stand-alone system or can be assimilated into an integrated treatment train for both,
Grey-water and Black-water. This system is particularly useful in today’s restrictive
regulatory environment. The treated effluent (the quality strictly abiding by the norms and
notifications set by the regulatory bodies like CRZ and MARPOL would finally be
discharged into the sea.
In the case of solid waste, food waste is macerated and treated with grey water.
Paper and other combustible solids are incinerated on board many of the vessels.
2.35 Dust Control System
The handling of huge quantity of iron ore and coal at the port will generate
fugitive dust emissions from various transfer points.
Since the ship unloading cranes will be used for unloading of coal, and ship
loaders for loading of iron ore, onboard dust suppression system will be provided for
mitigation of dust, if any. Similarly all transfer towers connected to the coal / iron ore
handling will have provision for installing dust suppression system. At each location, bag
filter type dust extraction system will be provided. The emission level through the
installations will be limited to 150 mg/m3.
During the transportation of the coal and iron ore by means of conveyor belts
and transfer towers, a state- of- the- art equipment/facilities, which is fully covered and
equipped with air filters will capture the dust produced.
In the storage area too, the dust emission sprinkler system will be provided
around the coal heaps in order to maintain them in wet condition and avoid dust
generation.
2.36 Cost Estimates
The total cost of the project works out to Rs. 38,135 crores. The preliminary Bill
of quantities and cost estimates is presented in Table 2.3.
2.37 Clearances Required for the Project Implementation
The clearances required to be obtained from Government of India and
Karnataka before the implementation of the project are delineated in Table 2.4.
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.21
MAJAR E KAGAL A - T1
S AMMATU C HENDAVARA
N OR TH KANN ADA DIS TR ICT
K UMTA TALUK
Y EAR 1 871
KAR N ATAKA
V IL LAGE AGHANASHINI
Datum : W GS 84
P ro je c tion : T ra nsverse Mercator
Fig. 2.1 (a): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River.
Fig. 2.1 (b): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.22
S AMMATU GOKARNA
N OR TH KANN ADA DISTR ICT
KUMTA TALUK
Y EAR 1870
ILAKA MY SORE
V ILLAGE GOKARNA
Datum : W GS 84
P roj e c tion : T ransverse Mercator
T IKKA - 2
(1 Ce ntimeter = 39. 6 Meters or 1 :3960)
SAMMATU MAJAKURA
NORTH K ANNADA DISTRICT
KUMTA TALUK
YEAR 1875
K ARNATAKA
KASABA GOKARNA
Datum : W GS 84
Projec t i on : Tran sverse Mercator
TIK KA - 3
1. Cad as tral Map s obtaine d from Govt. of Karnataka have been
Geore fe re nc ed and vec torise d at N HO.
2. HT L and LT L have bee n de te rmined in the field and incorporatedin the maps.
3 . The offs et l ines 100m, 150m as app licable from the riverine HTL andthe 200m, 500m from the s eaward H TL , have bee n plotted using
4. Position of pillars and GCPs have be en d etermine d on the groundand inc orporate d in the maps.
5 . Limits of CR zones have be en obtaine d from the KSR SAC maps andp lotted w ith ne ce ss ary ad ju stme nts for datums.
Catrograp hic note
DEL MAR process.
Fig. 2.1 (c): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River
Fig. 2.1 (d): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.23
VI LLAGE TORKE
(1 Ce ntimeter = 39. 6 Meters or 1 :3960)
SAMMATU MAJAKURA
NOR TH KANNADA DISTRICT
K UMTA TALUK
Y EAR 1870
KAR NATAKA
KASABA GOKARNA
Datum : W GS 84
Pro jection : Tra nsverse Mercator
TIKKA - 4
Fig. 2.1 (e): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River
Source: Feasibility Report, 2011
Fig. 2.2: Area Available for the Development of Tadadi Port
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.24
4 3 2
5
6
1
7
8
Fig. 2.3: Location of the Proposed Berths
Fig. 2.4 : Typical Ship Loader
Fig. 2.5 : Typical Ship Un Loader
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.25
Fig. 2.6 : Typical Harbour Mobile Crane
Fig. 2.7 : Navigational Channel Alignment and Turning Circles
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.26
Fig. 2.8 : Typical Reclamation Area with Overflow Weir
Fig. 2.9 : Typical Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.27
Fig. 2.10 : Typical Cutter Suction Dredger
Fig. 2.11 : Typical Grab Dredger
Fig. 2.12 : Typical Back Hoe Dredger
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.28
Fig. 2.13 : Arrangement of leading lines for Tadadi Port
Fig. 2.14 : Typical 100 Tonne Bollard
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.29
Table 2.1
Design Vessels for the Tadadi Port
Type Ship Size (DWT)
LOA
(m)
Beam (m)
Draught (m)
Bulk Carriers 100,000 268.0 43.5 14.0
Multipurpose Carriers 80,000 240.0 36.5.0 14.0
Crude oil Carrier 85,000 260.0 40.0 14.0
Liquid Gas Carrier 60,000 265.0 42.2 13.5
Container Ships 80,000 260.0 42.5 14.0
Ro-Ro Vessels 50,000 287.0 32.2 12.4
General Cargo Vessels 40,000 209.0 30.0 12.5
Car Carriers 30,000 193.0 32.2 11.7
Ferriers 25,000 197.0 36.6 7.1
Passengers cruise Ship 80,000 272.0 35.0 8.0
Design Ship Size 100,000 290.0 43.5 14.0
Table 2.2
Total Quantity of Maintenance Dredging
Sr.No. Contribution from the sources Quantity (m3 / year)
1. River 3,35,000
2. Southern beach 1,85,000
3. Northern beach 95,000
4. Outer part of the channel 44,75,000
Total 50,90,000
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.30
Table 2.3
Preliminary Bill of Quantities and Cost Estimates
1. Maritime Infrastructure
1.1 Navigation Channel 11,626,270,000.00
1.2 Wharfs 5,916,000,000.00
2. Onshore Infrastructure
2.1 Dry Bulk Terminal 2,547,363,620.00
2.2 Multipurpose Terminal 736,343,950.00
2.3 Common areas 421,557,120.00
3. Facilities
3.1 Utilities 1,122,642,500.00
3.2 Pollution Control 50,000,000.00
3.3 Other Facilities 5,000,000.00
4. Equipments
4.1 Cargo Handling Equipments 9,377,978,098.16
4.2 Marine Equipments 1,450,000,000.00
4.3 Equipment foundation 30,000,000.00
5. Buildings 270,000,000.00
6. Other Expenses 1,115,000,000.00
7. Contingencies 3,466,815,528.82
Sum Total 38,134,970,816.98
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.31
Table 2.4
Clearances Required from Central / State Govt. Departments
Sr. No.
Clearance Required Agency who would
issue clearance
When required
Govt. of India Agencies
1. Company Registration Registrar of Companies Company
formation stage
2. Environmental Impact Assessment
and Environment Management plan
(EIA/EMP) in respect of the project
pursuant to section 3(1) and 3(2) (iv)
of the Environment (protection) act,
1986 and Rule 5 (3) (a) of the
Environment (protection) Rules, 1986.
Ministry of
Environmental &
Forests (MoEF),
New Delhi
Before project
implementation
3. Customs Notification of Area for
Landing and Loading Cargo
Central Board of Excise
and Customs, New
Delhi
Before start of
Port Operations
4. Customs Notification for berthing of
Foreign Ships
Central Board of Excise
and Customs, New
Delhi
Before start of
Port Operations
5. Scheme pursuant to the sec-29 of the
Electricity (Supply) Act 1948
Central Electricity
Authority (CEA)
Project Implementation
6. Fire fighting equipment Tariff Advisory
committee /PESO
Nagpur
Project Implementation
7. Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) MoEF New Delhi Before Project
Implementation
8. Height of the chimney National Airports
Authority
Project Implementation
9. Confirmation from DGTD / CCI&E that
there is automatic clearance for the
import of capital Goods and Raw
materials
Director General of
Technical
Development/ Director
General of Foreign
Trade
Project Implementation
10. Confirmation from Department of
Economic affairs, Ministry of Finance
and Financing Agreements
Ministry of Finance Project implementation
11. Confirmation of permission from RBI Reserve Bank of India Project implementation
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.32
Sr. No.
Clearance Required Agency who would
issue clearance
When required
Govt. of Karnataka Agencies (GoK)
1.2. Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) GoK, Coastal Zone Management Authority
Initial stage
13. Land comprising the project site and the Green Belt relating to the site contains no land deemed to be ‘reserved forest’ land as per Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980.
Karnataka Forest Department & Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
Before project implementation
14. Clearance under Section 18A of the Electricity Supply Act.
Government of Karnataka
Project Implementaion
15. For allocation of requisite amount of water and for abstraction of sea water
Department of Water Supply GoK / Relevant Authority
Project Implementaion
16. Permission for use of ground water Ground Water Dept. of Gok.
Project Implementation
17. Confirmation for water supply of required quantity
Karnataka Urban Water Supply and Drainage Board
Pre-Project Implementation
18. Approval pursuant to the Air (Prevention & control of Pollution) Act, 1981 in connection with emissions
Karnataka State Pollution Control Board
Pre-Project Implementation
19. Electricity to be made available under
Section 44 of Electricity (Supply) Act,
1948
Karnataka Power
Transmission Co. Ltd.
Construction period
20. Confirmation relating to project and
green belt
Deputy
Conservator/Directorate
of Town planning, GoK
Before
Construction
21. Approval of proposed design and
construction of the project pursuant to
Section 6 of the Factories Act, 1948.
Chief Inspector of
Factories, Government
of Karnataka
Before
Construction
period
22. Consent relating to Fire fighting
capability under the Factories Act,
1948
Chief Inspector of
Factories, GoK
Before Project
Implementation
23. License required for construction
Labour pursuant to Section 7 of the
Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act, 1970
Labour Commissioner Before
Commencement
of construction
24. Registration of workers pursuant to
section 2-A of the Employees state
insurance Act, 1948, to be claimed if
Labour Commissioner Before Commencement of construction
Chapter 2: Project Description
2.33
Sr. No.
Clearance Required Agency who would
issue clearance
When required
other group insurance is taken
25. Clearance for transportation of heavy
material / machinery by ships,
onroads/bridge
Relevant Authority Project Implementation
26. Clearance from Electrical inspector for
electrical installation
Chief Electrical
Inspectorate of GoK.
Construction period
CChhaapptteerr 33
BBaasseelliinnee
EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall SSttaattuuss
3.1 Background
This chapter describes the existing environmental settings in the study area and
includes the physical environment comprising air, noise, water and land, biological and
socioecological environmental components. The major objectives of the study are:
To understand the project need and environmental characteristics of the
area
To assess the existing environmental quality, as well as the environmental
impacts of the proposed developments
To identify environmentally significant factors or geographical areas that
could preclude any future development
3.1.1 Climate and Meteorology - Analysis of IMD Data
The seasonality along India’s Western coast experiences a typical monsoon
climate, with the yearly weather pattern split into four seasons.
North-east monsoon (winter) : December to February
Pre monsoon season : March to May
South-west monsoon : June to September
Post monsoon season : October and November
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.2
Long term meteorological data recoreded at IMD – Honavar (Karnataka) has
been analysed for various parameters viz. temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric
pressure, rainfall, cloud cover and wind speed. Monthly variation in chlimatological data
for the period 1951-1980 is presented in Table 3.1.1 and briefly described here.
Temperature
The winter season starts from January and continues till the end of February.
January is the coldest month with the annual mean maximum temperature at 31.0°C and
the mean minimum temperature at 20.00C. Both the day and night temperatures increase
rapidly during the onset of pre-monsoon season. During pre-monsoon the mean
maximum temperature (April) is observed at 32.9°C with the mean minimum temperature
at 20.0°C. The mean maximum temperature in the Monsoon season was observed to be
34.7°C whereas the mean minimum temperature was observed to be 17.5°C. By end of
September with the onset of Northeast monsoon (October), day temperatures decrease
slightly with the mean maximum temperature at 30.9°C and the mean minimum
temperature at 23.3°C. The highest temperature 37.8°C was recorded on March 17, 1948
and lowest 14.2°C on February 18, 1960.
Relative Humidity
The air is generally very humid in the region especially during monsoon when
the average annual relative humidity is observed around 81 % to 72% with a maximum
and minimum of 92% and 57% respectively. In the pre-monsoon period the relative
humidity is 63%. During the pre-monsoon season the mean maximum humidity is
observed at 78%, with the mean minimum humidity at 67% in the month of May and April
respectively. During winter season, the humidity is found to be in line with the values
recorded during the pre-monsoon season. The mean maximum humidity is recorded
during winter season, which is the driest part of year with an average of 75% relative
humidity.
Atmospheric Pressure
The station level maximum and minimum atmospheric pressure levels are
recorded during the winter and monsoon seasons. The annual maximum and minimum
pressure is observed in the range of 1007.8 to 1004.9 hPa, with the maximum pressure
(1010.7 hPa) occurring during the winter season in the month of January. The minimum
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.3
pressure is observed in the range of 1004.8 to 1002.9 hPa, with the minimum pressure
(1003.3 hPa) occurring during the pre-monsoon season in the month of June.
Rainfall
It is observed that the south-west monsoon is more predominant than the north-
east monsoon. The southwest monsoon generally sets in during the last week of May.
About 60% of the rainfall is received during the southwest monsoon. The rainfall gradually
decreases after September (minimum rainfall is recorded in the month of December).The
area experiences maximum rainfall (378.5 mm) in the month of June. The northeast
monsoon rains occured between October to December and contribute to 16% of the total
rainfall.
Cloud Cover
Generally light clouds are observed during winter mornings. During pre-
monsoon and the post-monsoon evenings the skies are either clear or lightly clouded. But
in post-monsoon mornings as well as in monsoon mornings, heavy clouds are commonly
observed, whereas in the evenings the skies are light to moderately cloudy. The clouds
are observed in the range of 3.7 - 4.7 oktas of sky. Generally fog does not occur in the
study area.
Special Weather Phenomenon
Thunderstorms are frequent in pre-monsoon, post monsoon and early North-
east monsoon seasons. Occasional squalls occur in association with thunderstorms in the
later pre-monsoon season.
Wind Speed / Direction
Generally, winds are light and moderate, particularly during the morning hours,
while during the afternoon hours the winds are stronger. Winds are stronger during pre-
monsoon and monsoon seasons. During the period January to May winds strengthens in
the afternoons. The minimum mean values of wind speed (5.7 kmph) are observed in the
month of October and maximum speed (9.4 kmph) during July with an annual mean
speed of 7.2 kmph. During the rest of the year, winds are north-easterly to easterly in the
mornings and blow from directions between southwest and northwest in the afternoons.
The winds are predominantly from western side.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.4
3.1.2 Micrometerology of Port Site
The study of micro-meteorological conditions of a particular region is of utmost
importance to understand the variations in ambient air quality status in that region. The
prevailing micrometeorology at project site plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion
of air pollutants released from the pollution sources. The persistence of the predominant
wind direction and wind speed at the project site will decide the direction and extent of the
air pollution impact zone. The principal variables, which affect the micrometeorology, are
horizontal transport and dispersion (average wind speed and directions), convective
transport and vertical mixing (atmospheric stability) and also topography of the area.
The micro-meteorological data recorded at the project site as well as surface
meteorological data procured from IMD corresponding to nearest available observatory
(Honawar) are appropriately used in this study. The hourly record of wind speed and
wind direction during study period was used for computing the relative percentage
frequencies of wind occurrences in various directions. The windrose for post monsoon
season is presented in Fig. 3.1.1.
The 24 hourly windrose diagram for Post monsoon season indicate that the
predominant winds are from East and West directions with speed ranging between 1.0
and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly the impact zone will be spread over West and East directions
during Post monsoon season.
Fig. 3.1.1: Windrose during Post monsoon Season at Tadadi
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.5
Table 3.1.1
Climatological Data – IMD Honavar, Karnataka (1951-1980)
Month Mean Temp. (°C)
Relative Humidity (%)
Atmospheric Pressure (hPa)
Rainfall (mm)
Wind Speed
(kmph) Max Min 0830 1730 0830 1730
January 31.9 20.0 70 58 1010.7 1007.2 0.6 6.2
February 31.5 20.5 75 63 1010.0 1006.5 0.0 6.7
March 32.2 22.9 80 65 1009.1 1005.8 1.1 6.9
April 32.9 25.2 78 67 1007.5 1004.1 17.0 7.2
May 32.5 25.8 79 70 1005.8 1003.0 171.9 8.4
June 29.5 23.9 90 84 1004.8 1002.9 1016.1 9.2
July 28.2 23.4 92 88 1004.8 1003.3 1196.0 9.4
August 28.3 23.5 92 86 1005.7 1003.8 702.7 8.4
September 29.1 23.2 91 82 1007.0 1004.4 363.1 5.9
October 30.9 23.3 86 77 1008.0 1005.1 171.1 5.7
November 32.6 22.2 72 64 1009.3 1006.1 58.6 5.9
December 32.8 21.2 64 57 1010.5 1006.9 17.1 7.0
Annual (Avg.)
31.0 22.9 81 72 1007.8 1004.9 3753.3 7.2
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.6
3.2 Air Environment
3.2.1 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
The existing quality of the air environment serves as an index for assessing the
pollution load and the assimilative capacity of any region and forms an important tool for
planning any project activity in the region and forms an important part of the project
activity. The micrometeorological data collected during air quality survey was used for
proper interpretation of existing ambient air quality status. The ambient air quality
monitoring was carried out through reconnaissance followed by air quality and
micrometeorological data collection.
The ambient air quality data are collected through a well-designed air quality
monitoring network. While designing ambient air quality monitoring (AAQM) network, the
following criteria were taken in to account.
Topography of the study area
Representation of regional background
Population and sensitive locations
Screening of maximum ground level concentrations and distance of their
likely occurrences as per climatological norms
Cross sectional distribution in downwind direction
Air quality monitoring was carried out in post monsoon (October- November,
2010). Parameters such as Particulate Matter less than 10 microns and 2.5 microns size
(i.e. PM10 and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX), Ammonia (NH3),
Carbon Monoxide (CO), Hydrocarbon (HC), Benzene were identified as significant
parameters for air quality monitoring in the study area. Particulate associated pollutants
Ni, Pb, As, and BaP were determine in the samples collected.
The technique used for ambient air qualiry monitoring is given in Table 3.2.1.
3.2.2 Baseline Status
AAQM study was conducted at 10 select locations on 24 hourly averages for two
days in a week as per the guidelines of CPCB and NAAQS. AAQM was carried out at 10
locations to determine cross-sectional distribution of air pollution parameters. The
conventional parameters such as PM10 and PM2.5, Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), and Oxides of
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.7
Nitrogen (NOx), NH3, Ozone, Benzene, heavy metals, benzopyrene (BaP), CO as well as
Hydrocarbon were monitored at each location. The detailed of sampling locations are
depicted in Fig. 3.2.1 and described in Table 3.2.2.
A temporary laboratory was setup at project site for chemical analysis of
representative air samples. The micro-meteorological data on wind speed, wind direction,
temperature and relative humidity were collected during the study period.
The concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations were
processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean, standard deviation,
minimum concentration and maximum concentration and percentile values.
The existing baseline levels in post-monsoon season with respect to PM10 and
PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, NH3. Ozone, heavy metals, Benzopyrene (BaP), HC and Benzene
expressed in terms of various statistical parameters are presented in Tables 3.2.2-3.2.5.
The statistical interpretation of observed ambient air quality data around Tadadi,
Karwar is reported in Table 3.2.3.
Status of Major Pollutants
The arithmetic mean value of 24 hourly PM10 concentrations were found in the
range of 49-62 µg/m3, whereas PM2.5 concentrations varied in the range of 23-28 µg/m3.
This may be due to unpaved road, windblown dust, and vehicular activities in the region.
The PM2.5 concentrations were observed to be below the stipulated standards of CPCB.
The arithmetic mean concentrations of SO2 and NO2 were observed to vary in
the range of 6-7 µg/m3 and 12-16 µg/m3 respectively, which are much below the
stipulated standards of CPCB (80 µg/m3 each) .
Status of Other Pollutants
Ammonia (NH3): Atmospheric ammonia is a pollutant which is highly soluble in
water, its major sink in the atmosphere is by wet deposition. The residence time of
ammonia in the lower level of the atmosphere is few hours, though in the calm
environmental condition it may exist for weeks. Ammonia is the major base present in the
atmosphere and is therefore important in neutralizing acidic species such as SO2, H2SO4,
HNO3 and HCl. To assess the levels of ammonia in air, samples were collected by
passing air through absorbing media and analyzed by wet chemical method. The
observed average concentration at all locations ranged between 20-33 µg/m3, which may
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.8
be attributed to emissions from animal waste and soil. All these values are well within the
stipulated standards (400 µg/m3).
Ozone (O3): Ozone is a secondary air pollutant formed by photochemical
reactions involving oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and VOCs, mainly hydrocarbons. In the
presence of solar radiation, nitrogen dioxide (NO2) dissociates to form nitric oxide (NO)
and an oxygen atom (O). Ozone (O3) is then formed by molecular oxygen (O2) reacting
with the oxygen atom (O). However, when hydrocarbons are present, NO is converted to
NO2, thus leaving little NOx to react with O3. This reaction leads to a build-up of O3 in the
atmosphere. Sources of NO2 and VOCs are primarily anthropogenic, generally produced
during combustion processes from automobile emissions and industrial activities.
To assess the levels of ozone in air, samples were collected by passing air
through absorbing media during day time (1000-1800 h) assuming ozone production
occurs in the presence of solar radiation, NOx and VOCs. The samples were analyzed by
wet chemical method. The observed mean value at all the locations ranged between 24-
32 µg/m3 which were much below the stipulated standards (8 h =100 µg/m3).
Particulate Matter Associated Pollutants
Levels of Pb, As, Ni and BaP were determined in PM10 samples for each
location. The values are given in Table 3.2.4 and briefly described here.
Lead (Pb): Lead is a metal found naturally in the environment as well as in
manufactured products. The major sources of lead emissions are motor vehicles (such
as cars and trucks). The industrial sources include near lead smelters, waste incinerators,
utilities, and lead-acid battery manufacturers. Depending on the level of exposure, lead
can adversely affect the nervous system, kidney function, immune system, reproductive
and developmental systems and the cardiovascular system. Lead exposure also affects
the oxygen carrying capacity of the blood. Lead is persistent in the environment and
accumulates in soils and sediments through deposition from air sources, direct discharge
of waste streams to water bodies, mining, and erosion. Ecosystems near point sources
of lead demonstrate a wide range of adverse effects including losses in biodiversity,
changes in community composition, decreased growth and reproductive rates in plants
and animals, and neurological effects in vertebrates. The observed Pb concentration at all
the locations ranged from 0.02-0.09 μg/m3 which was much below the permissible
standards (1 µg/m3).
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.9
Arsenic (As): Arsenic is a naturally occurring element widely distributed in the
earth’s crust. Inorganic forms of arsenic are found throughout the environment; it is
released into the air by volcanoes, weathering of arsenic-containing minerals and ores,
and commercial or industrial processes. Metal smelters release elevated inorganic
arsenic into the air. Other air sources of inorganic arsenic exposure include burning of
plywood treated with an arsenic wood preservative. Acute (short-term) high-level
inhalation, exposure to arsenic dust or fumes can cause gastrointestinal effects (nausea,
diarrhea, abdominal pain) and nervous system disorders. Chronic (long-term) inhalation
exposure to inorganic arsenic can cause irritation of the skin and mucous membranes
and lung cancer. The arsenic concentrations were below detectable limit (BDL) at all the
locations.
Nickel (Ni) : Nickel is a naturally occurring element and can be combined with
other metals, such as iron, copper, chromium, and zinc, to form alloys. These alloys are
used to make coins, jewellery, and items such as valves and heat exchangers. Mostly
nickel is used to make stainless steel. Nickel can be released into ambient air from oil and
coal combustion, nickel metal refining, sewage sludge incineration, and other sources.
Respiratory effects are associated with chronic exposure to nickel in the air. Workers
who breathed very large amounts of nickel compounds developed chronic bronchitis and
lung and nasal sinus cancers. The observed Ni concentration at all the locations varied
between 4.1-10.5 ng/m3 and were within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air
Quality Standards (20 ng/m3).
Benzo-a-pyrene (BaP): BaP is the most well known polycyclic aromatic
hydrocarbon (PAH) in a large group of organic compounds with two or more fused
aromatic rings. PAHs are formed mainly as a result of incomplete combustion of organic
materials during industrial and other anthropogenic activities including processing of coal
and crude oil, combustion of natural gas, combustion of refuse, vehicles traffic, cooking
and tobacco smoking, as well as natural processes such as forest fires. Motor vehicle
exhaust and their re-suspension are major sources of PAHs, including benzo[a]pyrene.
BaP tends to be incorporated onto particulates during cooling and condensation in the
atmosphere and generally exists in the particle phase at normal ambient temperatures in
the atmosphere. Particle sizes will be mostly <2.5 μm in aerodynamic diameter.
Processes governing the fate of BaP in the atmosphere are the same processes that
govern transport and removal of these small particles from the atmosphere. The observed
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.10
BaP concentration at all the locations varied between BDL - 0.06 ng/m3. This may be
attributed to low vehicular activities with petrol/diesel as fuel in the region. The levels are
within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air Quality Standards (1ng/m3).
Levels of CO, HC and VOCs
Concentration levels of other important gases like CO, HC(CH4 & Non-CH4) and
Benzene (VOC) were also determined. The results are given in Table 3.2.5.
Carbon monoxide (CO): CO is a colorless and odorless gas. It is formed when
substances containing carbon are burnt with an insufficient supply of air. The combustion
of fuels such as petrol, gas, coal and wood generate emissions of carbon monoxide. Gas
and wood can be used for cooking and heating in appliances like stoves and barbecues
add to its contributions. Apart from it, motor vehicles are also the sources of carbon
monoxide pollution in urban and sub-urban environment. In order to assess the
concentration of carbon monoxide, samples were collected in Tedlar bags and analysed
within 24 hrs by carbon monoxide analyzer based on the principle of infrared radiation at
wavelengths near 4.7 microns. Infrared radiation is passed through a cell containing
ambient air. The degree of absorption is a measure of the amount of carbon monoxide. A
gas filter correlation technique incorporated in the instrument minimizes interference from
other gases that absorb infrared radiation, ensuring that the instrument responds
specifically to carbon monoxide. The observed carbon monoxide concentration at all the
locations varied between 0.35-0.57 mg/m3. The concentrations of carbon monoxide are
within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air Quality Standards (4 mg/m3).
Hydrocarbons (HCs): A large variety of hydrocarbons are found in the
atmosphere. The atmospheric abundance of these species is found at mixing ratio
ranging from parts per billion by volume (ppbv) to parts per trillion by volume (pptv).
These species are found in significant amount over remote oceans, rural areas as also in
urban environments. Nonmethane hydrocarbons (NMHCs) are introduced into
atmosphere by fossil fuel burning, emission from vegetation and sea, biomass burning,
transportation and geochemical processes. These compounds when oxidized produce a
wide variety of oxygenated products including aldehydes, ketones, alcohols, phenols, etc.
most of which have proven toxicity. Atmosphere acts as a sink for these hydrocarbons.
The total hydrocarbon concentration at all locations was observed in the range of 1.39-
1.71 ppm whereas non-methane hydrocarbon concentration varied from 0.12-0.16 ppm.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.11
Benzene: The mono-aromatic hydrocarbon like Benzene is considered as
volatile organic compounds (VOCs). VOCs in ambient air originate from various biogenic
and anthropogenic sources. Many of these chemicals participate in photochemical
reactions and produce secondary air pollutants such as ozone, peroxyacethyl nitrate, free
radicals and nitrogen oxides. The samples were collected in Tedlar bags and analyzed by
BTEX analyzer within 24 hours. The observed concentration of VOCs reported as
benzene in the range of 0.48-0.73 ug/m3. Benzene is a carcinogenic chemical and comes
through combustion of organic matter such as wood, petroleum product etc.
National Ambient Air Quality Standards (2009) are presented in Annexure I.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.12
Sampling locations
Fig. 3.2.1: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.13
Table 3.2.1
Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Sr. No.
Parameter Unit Monitoring Technique
1. Particulate Matter size < 10 microns or PM10
g/m³ Gravimetric
2. Particulate Matter size less than 2.5 microns or PM2.5
g/m³ Gravimetric
3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) g/m³ EPA Improved West and Gaeke Method
4. Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) g/m³ Modified Jacobs-Hachheiser Method
5. Carbon Monoxide mg/m3 Non Dispersive infra red (NDIR) Spectroscopy
6. Ammonia (NH3) g/m³ Chemiluminescence
Indophenol blue method
7. Lead (Pb) g/m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000
8. Benzene g/m³ Gas Chromatography based continuous analyzer
9. Benzo(a) Pyrene g/m³ Solvent Extraction Followed by HPLC/GC Analysis
10. Arsenic(As), ng/ m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
11. Nickel (Ni) ng/ m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.14
Table 3.2.2
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations at Study area
Sr. No.
Sampling Location Direction Approx. Aerial Distance (km)
with respect to Proposed Tadadi Sea Poart
1. Hiregutti NE 6.0
2. Hittalmakki NNE 5.0
3. Mithal Gazani NE 3.0
4. Burgi ENE 5.5
5. Gokarna NW 3.5
6. Mirjan ESE 9.0
7. Gangavali NNW 8.5
8. Gudkagat SE 2.5
9. Kenkon NE 9.5
10. Koli Gudda ENE 6.5
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.15
Table 3.2.3
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring at Study Area (Post monsoon 2010)
Averaging Time: 24 hours unit: g/m3
Sr. Sampling Avg. ± S.D.
No. Location (Min - Max)
PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx NH3 O3*
1. Hiregutti 62±10 26±5 6±1 16±2 25±4 28±6 (46-79) (22-45) (5-8) (13-18) (16-31) (17-38)
2. Hittalmakki 62±13 27±6 6±1 14±3 28±6 28±5
(43-79) (23-44) (5-8) (10-20) (15-36) (19-34)
3. Mithal Gazani 52±8 23±4 6±1 15±3 33±5 32±6
(41-64) (17-29) (5-8) (11-20) (20-38) (20-38)
4. Burgi 56±8 26±4 6±1 15±3 31±4 24±8
(43-69) (21-36) (4-8) (10-20) (22-38) (12-38)
5. Gokarna 51±12 28±6 6±1 14±3 28±8 26±4
(31-64) (19-36) (4-8) (10-18) (12-36) (18-32)
6. Mirjan 51±8 25±3 6±1 12±2 20±6 28±4
(35-62) (21-31) (5-8) (10-16) (12-31) (21-35)
7. Gangavali 54±7 26±4 7±1 16±3 27±6 27±5
(43-69) (21-36) (5-9) (10-20) (18-36) (19-34)
8. Gudkagat 52±8 28±5 6±1 16±4 32±5 26±6
(35-65) (23-37) (5-8) (10-21) (21-38) (19-33)
9. Kenkon 49±8 26±5 6±1 16±3 29±6 28±6
(38-64) (19-35) (5-8) (10-21) (19-36) (16-35)
10. Koli Gudda 52±7 24±4 6±1 13±2 32±4 32±6
(41-60) (17-30) (5-8) (10-17) (20-37) (20-38)
NAAQS (2009) 24 hr 100 60 80 80 400 100*
* 8 hours ozone (O3) NAAQS = 100 µg/m3
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.16
Table 3.2.4
Levels of Particulate Associated (Pb, Ni, As and BaP) Toxic Pollutants (Post monsoon 2010)
Sr. No
Sampling location
Pb Ni As BaP
µg/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3
Particulate associated pollutants
1 Hiregutti 0.02 5.3 BDL BDL
2 Hittalmakki 0.06 10.5 BDL BDL
3 Mithal Gazani 0.03 7.9 BDL BDL
4 Burgi 0.09 8.1 BDL 0.03
5 Gokarna 0.07 5.4 BDL 0.04
6 Mirjan 0.04 6.2 BDL 0.03
7 Gangavali 0.02 4.5 BDL BDL
8 Gudkagat 0.03 6.3 BDL 0.02
9 Kenkon 0.05 4.8 BDL 0.06
10 Koli Gudda 0.08 4.1 BDL BDL
Minimum 0.02 4.1 BDL BDL
Maximum 0.09 10.5 BDL 0.06
Average 0.05 6.31 BDL 0.04
NAAQM (2009) 1.0 20.0 6.0 1.00
BDL: Below Detectable Limit
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.17
Table 3.2.5
Ambient Air Quality status of CO, Benzene and HC (Post monsoon 2010)
Spot concentration
Sr. No Sampling location
CO Benzene THC MHC NMHC
mg/m3 μg/m3 ppm ppm ppm
1. Hiregutti 0.57 0.66 1.40 1.25 0.15
2. Hittalmakki 0.41 0.63 1.48 1.32 0.16
3. Mithal Gazani 0.54 0.65 1.71 1.55 0.16
4. Burgi 0.35 0.62 1.60 1.44 0.15
5. Gokarna 0.50 0.73 1.40 1.25 0.16
6. Mirjan 0.45 0.58 1.47 1.35 0.12
7. Gangavali 0.53 0.62 1.39 1.25 0.14
8. Gudkagat 0.40 0.61 1.57 1.44 0.13
9. Kenkon 0.43 0.48 1.44 1.32 0.12
10. Koli Gudda 0.53 0.63 1.49 1.36 0.12
NAAQM (2009) 4.0 5.0 - - -
THC = Total Hydrocarbon;
MHC = Methane Hydrocarbon;
NMHC = Non Methane Hydrocarbon
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.18
3.3 Noise Environment
The objective of noise pollution survey in the study area was to assess the
impact of noise generated by the existing noise sources in the region especially on the
human settlements. The noise levels of a region can be estimated from the cumulative
noise pressure levels considering all the noise pollution sources in the region and the
prevailing environmental conditions.
A reconnaissance survey was conducted with a view to establish the baseline
status of the environment with respect to the noise levels in the region particularly with
respect to port activity in the region, Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) were measured using
precision sound level meter (Bruel and Kjaer make).
Survey was carried out in the following steps:
Reconnaissance
Measurement of background noise levels in the study area
Identification and characterization of noise sources
Measurement of prevailing noise levels due to vehicular movements
The impact of noise on the health of an individual depends on physical dose of
noise viz. noise level, frequency spectrum, annoyance etc. and human factors viz. sex,
age, health status, type of activity, occupational exposure etc. The impact also depends
on psychological and physiological status of individuals. The impact due to noise do not
undergo seasonal variations except some directional changes depending upon the
environmental wind direction.
The baseline studies for noise environment have been carried out through
reconnaissance followed by field observations to identify the major activities contributing
to noise within the study area. A Reconnaissance was conducted with a view to establish
the baseline status of the environment with respect to noise levels of the plant area,
surrounding villages and other centers of human activities.
Ambient Noise Monitoring was carried out in residential, commercial, silence
zones and roadside in the study area. There is no major industry in the study area. The
noise level monitoring locations are depicted in Fig. 3.3.1 and listed in Table 3.3.1
alongwith their direction and distance with respect to port area. All the values of noise
levels are well below the standard limits, indicating that present activity level in the study
area is very low. The results are presented in Table 3.3.2. The ambient noise stadards
are given in Annexture II.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.19
Fig. 3.3.1: Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring Locations
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.20
Table 3.3.1
Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Locations
Sr. No. Sampling Location Direction Approx. Aerial Distance (km)
with respect to Proposed Tadadi Sea Poart
1. Hiregutti NE 5.0
2. Hittalmakki NNE 5.0
3. Mithal Gazani NE 3.0
4. Burgi ENE 5.5
5. Gokarna NW 4.0
6. Mirjan ESE 9.0
7. Gangavali NNW 8.5
8. Gudkagat SE 2.5
9. Kenkon NE 9.5
10.
11.
Koli Gudda Tadadi
ENE
NW
6.0
0.2
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.21
Table 3.3.2
Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring at Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
Day Time dB(A) Night Time dB(A)
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Residential Area
1 Hiregutti 39 46 33 40
2 Hittalmakki 40 45 36 38
3 Mithal Gazani 39 42 35 38
4 Burgi 41 44 36 39
5 Gokarna 41 47 34 40
6 Mirjan 43 46 38 41
7 Gangavali 40 43 35 38
8 Gudkagat 44 48 38 41
9 Kenkon 42 47 35 38
10
11
Koli Gudda
Tadadi
41
44
43
46
37
38
40
41
Commertial Area
1 Tadadi 47 55 42 49
2 Gokarna 46 56 40 47
3 Burgi 44 54 40 48
Silence Zone
1 Gokarna (Temple) 35 40 30 35
2 Hiregutti (School) 32 36 25 29
Road Side (N.H. 66)
1 Mirjan 50 60 45 55
2 Hiregutti 48 60 42 53
CPCB Standards Day time, dB(A) Night time, dB(A)
Residential Area 55 45
Commercial Area 65 55
Industrial Area 75 70
Silence zone 50 40
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.22
3.4 Water Environment
3.4.1 Bathymetry and Geophysical Study
To carry out the sub-bottom profiling (viz. bathymetry, shallow seismic profiling)
of the area around the proposed port at Tadadi in the estuary of Aghanasini river, EGS
Survey Private Limited (EGS India) was assigned the task of doing the geophysical
survey.
From the geo physical investigation, accurate bathymetry, seabed morphology
and mapping of surfacial features from shore upto - 20 m CD depth contour in the sea
and estuary/creek was established. Soundings were taken at a grid of 100m x 100m in
deeper waters (deeper than 5 m). In shallow waters of less than 5 m depth, the soundings
were taken at 25m x 25m. Wherever rocky patches were observed, soundings were taken
at close intervals of 10m x 10m. Manual survey was also carried out at the inter-tidal
zone. Tides were also measured during the period of survey.
Two vessels M.F.B. Radhegopal II and a small boat F.B.Bhumika 2 were used
for conducting the survey within the proposed survey area. The Bathymetry and seismic
profiling work was carried out during the months of December through January 2011.
Seismic survey was done to obtain continuous profiles of the sub-seabed
around the proposed area in order to establish hard rock levels, sub-surface stratigraphy,
individual stratigraphic units and their thickness and mark the interfaces using echo-
sounding, high resolution shallow seismic profiling and side scan sonar surveys of the
area under investigation. The nature of the surfacial and sub-surface soils were also
found out from the survey which was carried out in depths upto 30 m below sea bed,
using high-resolution sub-bottom profiler. The total survey length was approximately 220
line km.
From the Bathymetric and Geophysical surveys it is noted that the offshore
area of the sea bottom is quite regular and flat with gentle slopes from 1:300 to 1:500: the
-10 mCD depth is located approximately 3,000 m from the coastline and the -20 mCD is
located at about 8,000 m from coast line. The depth of the sea bed gradually varies from
the 5m contour in the north eastern corner to 21 m on the south western boundary of the
offshore block. The maximum water depth of - 21.4 mCD is observed along the south
western boundary while the minimum water depth of - 3.9 mCD is noted in the north
eastern corner. Sea bed features include fine sediments, coarse to very coarse
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.23
sediments, boulders, cobbles and scar marks. A minor rocky patch is exposed on the sea
bed in the north east corner of the block.
The sea bed sediment grain size distribution patterns reflect the exposure of
the sea bed to winnowing process which are driven by the stress put on the sea bed by
sea, wind, tidal currents and by non – directional or oscillatory forms of winds and waves.
Soil Samples were collected along the central line of the block. The morphologic features
within the survey area indicate that there is constant reworking of sediments by the tidal
action. Fine grained clay sediments are observed on the sea floor throughout the offshore
survey blocks. The clay sediments also contain gravel fractions consisting of shell
fragments of variable sizes in some places.
At the river estuary there exist some shallow areas that emerge at the
maximum low tides. The bathymetric contours of the inner block reveal considerably
steep slope along the channel of the Tadadi port, oriented northwest- southeast within the
Tadadi creek. The sea bed exhibits a very gentle to negligible slope in the areas away
from the channel on both sides. The depth of water column varies from negative values to
5 m. The sediments vary from sand to cobbles and gravel with bioclasts.
3.4.2 Hydraulic Data
3.4.2.1 Tides
The tides at the site are semi-diurnal, which means that the tidal cycle is
approximately 12 hours, and is understood that throughout the day there are two high
tides and two low tides.
The semidiurnal range (the difference in height between high and low water
levels over about a half day) varies considerably in a two-week cycle. Thus, around new
moon and full moon, the tidal force due to the alignment of the Earth, Sun and Moon, the
tide range reaches its maximum (this is called the spring tide); on the contrary when the
Moon is at first quarter or third quarter, the solar gravitational force partially cancels the
Moon's effect and the tide range reaches its minimum (this is called the neap tide). Spring
tides result in high waters that are higher than average and low waters that are lower than
average, whereas neaps result in less extreme tidal conditions.
In the same way, the changing distance separating the Moon and Earth also
affects tide heights. When the Moon is at perigee, the range increases, and when it is at
apogee, the range shrinks. Every 7½ lunations (the full cycles from full moon to new to
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.24
full) the perigee coincides with either a new or full moon causing perigean spring tides
(known also as equinoctial spring tides) with the largest tidal range.
According to the information from the Navigation Chart Number 2024, the main
tide levels are as follows:
MHHW (Mean Highest High Water): + 1.8 m above CD (Chart Datum)
MLHW (Mean Lowest High Water) : + 1.7 m above CD
MSL (Mean Sea Level) : + 1.2 m above CD
MHLW (Mean Highest Low Water) : + 1.0 m above CD
MLLW (Mean Lowest Low Water) : + 0.4 m above CD
3.4.2.2 Currents
The general currents at the area have monsoon origin but tend to follow the
trend of the coast. In December and January, the currents are north-westerly with
velocities upto 1 kn (1 kn = 0.51 m/s). In July and August, when South-West monsoon is
well established, south-easterly currents with velocity upto 2 kn are experienced.
Exceptionally, onshore currents upto 1 kn are produced during the North-East monsoon
and upto 3 kn during the SW monsoon.
Besides this general current, the existing currents at the mouth of the
Aghanashini river (very close to the future Tadadi Port location) have a double
component or origin: the flow of the river itself and the tides.
The variations in the tidal range explained in the previous section affect not
only the height or tidal range but also the induced current velocities.
Moreover the speed of the current component due to the river depends directly
on the flow carried, getting its maximum during the rainy season.
3.4.2.3 Waves
The waves distribution along the year presents two clear periods: the calm/fair
(November-April) and the rough (corresponding to the South-West monsoon). The
significant wave height in the rough period exceeds 1 m for more than 90% of time and it
exceeds 2.5 m for 60-80% of time; during the fair period, the significant wave height
seldom exceeds 1.5 m and 80% of the time, the height is less than 1.2 m and the median
significant height is about 0.8 m.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.25
During most months, except June and July, the peaks of the distributions are
around 200- 210°, which is from the south quadrant. The dominance of the peak varies
with the month. In the monsoon and roughest season the distribution of directions have
two prominent peaks in the ranges 200-210°N and 260-270°N.
3.4.2.4 Aghanashini River: Sedimentation
One of the most usual problems in an estuary is sedimentation due to human
interferences in the estuary’s hydraulic system. Typical interferences are: construction
and operation of ports and navigation channels and related activities.
Sedimentation problems generally occur at locations where the sediment
transport capacity by the hydraulic system is reduced due to the flow speed decrease
caused by variations of the original features (with artificial measures like dredging), dead
water zones, flow separation zones, lee zones created after groins or dikes construction.
It’s important to point out that sedimentation is a basic phenomenon of nature.
Natural sedimentation areas are known as shoals, flats, banks, bars etc. Artificial
interferences in this natural sedimentation always lead to relatively large maintenance
cost and will be avoided as much as possible.
Further hydrodynamic details of the estuary are given in Chapter 11 of this
report.
3.4.3 Water Quality Status
3.4.3.1 Methodology of Water Quality Assessment
Based on the reconnaissance, the type of waterbody, its relative importance as
resource and its proximity to industry; sampling locations were identified. Sampling
procedure involved sample collection using discrete sampler. Linear polyethylene
containers leached with 2 M reagent grade nitric acid for 48 hrs at room temperature and
rinsed with double distilled water were used. Samples for hydrocarbon estimation were
collected in glass bottles of one litre capacity, pre-washed and rinsed with n-hexane.
Samples for bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized bottles and stored in
icebox. Similarly samples for biological analysis were collected by using standard
plankton net. Finally all the samples were preserved as per standard preservation
technique prior to its transportation to the laboratory. Field parameters viz. temperature,
pH, dissolved oxygen (DO) were analyzed immediately after sample collection. Selected
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.26
physico-chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for assessing the
existing water quality status in the study area.
The raw water from the various sources in the study area has been analysed
for various physico chemical, bacterology and biological parameters and compared with
the respective water quality standards, as given in Annexure III.
In order to generate the baseline coastal and estuary water quality (physico-
chemical and biological) of the region, a study was undertaken using motor boat and 8
sampling locations were identified with a Grid pattern. Surface, Middle and Bottom
samples were taken from each location except location No. 8, as there was low depth.
The sampling locations are given in Table 3.4.1 and depicted in Fig. 3.4.11.
Analysis was carried out as per standard methods for examination of water and
wastewater, and data obtained on water column for various parameters are presented in
Table 3.4.2 - 3.4.22. The results of coastal water quality in study area are summarized as
follows:
3.4.3.2 Surface Water Quality (Sea and Estuary Water of River Aghanashini)
The pH, temperature and turbidity ranged between 6.5-7.4, 26-300 C, <1-9 NTU
respectively (Table 3.4.2). The total suspended solids varied from 15-104 mg/l, whereas
chlorides were found in the range of 10598-21769 mg/l. Salinity values have been found
to vary between 18‰ & 66‰ (Table 3.4.3).
Dissolved oxygen available in water at any given time is a result of amount
consumed by aquatic organisms and replenishment through natural processes. In the
coastal and estuarine area of study region, dissolved oxygen was found in the range of
2.9 to 6.8 mg/l. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) is defined as the amount of oxygen
required by microorganisms for stabilizing biodegradable organic matter present in
wastewater under aerobic conditions. The BOD values were less than 5 mg/l in the
samples collected from study area.
Nitrogen and phosphorus compounds form major source of nutrients for growth
of phytoplankton. Forms of nitrogen involved in the biogeochemical processes in aquatic
systems are dissolved inorganic species viz. ammonia, nitrite and nitrate. Nitrate is an
essential nutrient for the growth of many photosynthetic autotrophs and has been
identified as the growth limiting nutrient. Nitrate levels in the region were found in the
range of 0.014 - 0.032 mg/l. (Table 3.4.4).
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.27
3.4.3.3 Heavy Metals in Surface Water Samples
Inorganic elements such as metals even at trace levels invite attention due to
their persistence in waterbodies. Some of the heavy metals viz. cadmium, chromium,
copper, lead are toxic at very low concentrations and can affect the prey and predator
equilibrium in waterbody. The heavy metals, viz. cadmium, chromium, lead, copper, iron,
manganese and zinc were estimated in water column and results are presented in Table
3.4.5. The results indicate that there is no pollution due to heavy metals in the region.
The overall physico-chemical characteristics indicate homogeneity in terms of
salinity and dissolved oxygen. Slight variations in nutrient values in terms of phosphate
and nitrate may be attributed to the tidal currents and flow pattern in the region. The
overall water quality in the study area is good with respect to levels of organics and heavy
metals indicating that the area is relatively free of pollution.
3.4.3.4 Ground Water Quality
To assess the ground water quality, 3 Dug well and 7 Bore well samples were
collected within 10 km radius of study area. The sampling locations are given in
Table 3.4.14 and depicted in Fig. 3.4.1.
The pH, temperature and turbidity ranged between 5.7-7.8, 28-31°C and <1-3
NTU, respectively (Table 3.4.15).
The total suspended solid varied from 1-4 mg/l, while the total dissolved solids
varied from 55-180 mg/l. Inorganic parameters, i.e. chloride, sulphate, sodium and
potassium were in the range of 4-30, 8-19, 8-59 and phosphate 1-5 mg/l, respectively
(Table 3.4.16).
Nutrient load in terms of nitrate and phosphates was found to be in the range of
ND-0.08 mg/l and 0.01-0.52 mg/l respectively. Oil and grease was not detected
(Table 3.4.17).
Concentrations of heavy metals viz. nickel, cadmium, chromium, copper, lead,
iron, manganese, zinc and cobalt were found in the range of 0.38-6.05, ND, ND-0.02, ND,
0.03-0.13, ND-7.56, ND-0.07, ND-0.26 and ND-0.15 mg/l, respectively (Table 3.4.18).
3.4.3.5 Bacteriological Characteristics
Coliform group of organisms are indicators of faecal contamination in water.
Ground water samples were analyzed for total and faecal coliforms deploying membrane
filtration technique. Bacteriological quality of groundwater is presented in Table 3.4.19.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.28
The total and faecal coliforms were found in the range of 65-145 and ND-54 CFU/100 ml
respectively.
3.4.3.6 Biological Characteristics
Biological species viz. phytoplankton and zooplankton species for a particular
environmental condition are the best indicators of environmental quality. Studies on
biological aspects of ecosystem are important in environmental impact assessment in
view of the conservation of environmental quality and safety of natural flora and fauna
including human-beings. Information about the impact (environmental stress) on the
community structure serves as inexpensive and efficient "early warning and control
system" to check the effectiveness of control measures to prevent damage to a particular
ecosystem (e.g. adjustments of emission norms, management of installations and
sanitation etc.).
The nature and quality of biological species in a water body is dependent on
various physico-chemical characteristics of water such as pH, conductivity, nutrients,
BOD, alkalinity etc. and also on the type of water body such as flowing waters (canals),
stagnant water (lakes) and saline water (sea). Thus the quality and quantity of plankton
obtained in any water body is an indicator of the physico-chemical quality of water as well
as the type of water body. The estimation of plankton community structure in water
bodies is thus helpful to assess the baseline status.
Total biomass
The total biomass (expressed as count or by weight) increases with the
increase in levels of nutrient and BOD in water and vice versa, and serves as a good
indicator of trophic status of water body.
Quality
Presence of different organisms has been listed in standard publications
according to increasing trophic levels in aquatic environment. Similarly, many organisms
have been listed to favour certain physico-chemical conditions, viz. silicates for diatoms
etc. Hence presence of certain groups is also indicative of trophic conditions.
Desmids and Diatoms indicate highly eutrophic conditions. Planktonic rotifers
are usually abundant in fresh water. It is believed that when crustacean (copepoda,
cirripedia, ostracoda etc.) and insects outnumber other groups, the situation reflects the
enriched organic condition of water. Thus presence of certain organisms helps in
classifying water body in trophic levels in knowing its physico-chemical characteristics.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.29
Diversity
Diversity of planktons depends on physico-chemical characteristics of water
especially on trophic levels. In oligotrophic water diversity of plankton is high. While with
increasing levels of pollution such as mesotrophic and eutrophic condition diversity of
planktons decreases. Shannon Weaver Index is a measure of diversity of planktons
which takes into account the total count and individual species count in a water sample.
d = - (ni/n) log2 (ni/n)
Where,
d = Shannon Weaver Diversity Index
ni = number of individual of each individual species in a sample
n = total number of individual and of all species in the sample
It should also be noted that the diversity is also susceptible to other parameters
such as turbidity, colour and flow rate particularly in hilly rivers. Thus the results should be
interpreted with caution. A widely accepted ecological concept is that communities with
large number of species (i.e. with high diversity) will have high stability that can resist
adverse environmental factors. The maximum value of Shannon Weaver Index of
Phytoplankton for clean waters has been reported to be around 6, though it may differ
slightly in different locations. Decrease in the value of index may thus be taken as
indicator of pollution.
In the present study water samples were collected from various sources. 3
sampling locations from coastal water, 5 sampling locations from estuarine zone of river
Aghnashini and 3 Ground water sampling locations from dug wells were identified. In
case of surface water, for Phytoplankton analysis surface, middle and bottom samples
were collected and for Zooplankton analysis only surface water samples were collected,
to establish diversity index to assess biological quality.
Phytoplankton
The count as number of organism per ml of coastal and estuary water varied
between 864 to 2304. Chlorophyceae was found to be the dominant group followed by
Bacillariophyceae. SWD Index varied between 0.9-1.9 indicating moderate productivity
(Table 3.4.6). The phytoplankton species identified are given in Table 3.4.7.
In case of the dug wells also, out of different groups recorded for
phytoplankton, Chlorophyceae are the dominant species. The Shannon Weiver Diversity
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.30
Index (SWDI) for phytoplankton varied from 0.9-1.5 indicating moderate productivity. The
phytoplankton population ranged from 864-1152 No/ml (Table 3.4.20).
Zooplankton
The productivity is more in open sea, which is due to uplifting of nutrients from
the bottom to surface. This is called upwelling phenomena.
The zooplankton species/groups, its population dynamics and community
composition at each sampling location are shown in Table 3.4.8. The count as number of
organisms of coastal and estuary water varied between 142-635 No/m3. Copepoda was
found to be the dominant group followed by Rotifera (Table 3.4.8). The SWD index varied
between 0.9-1.5, which indicates moderate productivity.
The number of organism water samples of ground water was in the range of
Nil-214, whereas SWD Index was in the range of 0-1.5. The dominant zooplankton
groups were observed to be Copepoda (Table 3.4.22).
Benthos
Benthos is an organism found at the bottom of an aquatic body. Many of them
are sessile while some creep over a burrow in mud. The quality and quantity of organisms
found at the bottom are related to the nature of substrate and to the depth. Their number
and distribution depends upon physico-chemical and biological characteristic of water.
The sediment samples collected from different locations of the study area were passed
through 500 micron mesh sieve and again through 45 micron sieve for segregation of
macrobenthos and meiobenthos respectively.
The count of Meiobenthos ranged between 46875-78125 No/m2, whereas
SWD Index was in the range of 1.02-2.46 (Table 3.4.10). The meiobenthos species
recorded are presented in Table 3.4.11.. The count of Macrobenthos ranged between
348-1185 No/m2, whereas SWD Index was in the range of 1.32-1.95 as shown in Table
3.4.12. The Macrobenthos species recorded are presented in Table 3.4.13. The presence
of Meiobenthos and microbenthos composition reveals highest count for forminifera than
Ostracoda and Polychaeta and Sphaeridae than Viviparadae and Pleuoceridae
respectively.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.31
Surface Water Ground Water
Fig. 3.4.1: Water Sampling Locations
SW1
SW2
SW3
EW1
EW2
EW3
EW4
EW5
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.32
Table 3.4.1
Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Sampling Locations (Summer 2010)
Sr. No. Sampling Locations Depth (m)
Surface Water
Sea Water (SW)
1. SW1 (N 14023.821’ E 740 15.047’)
Surface 0.5
Middle 9.0
Bottom 17.0
2. SW2 (N 14028.714’ E 740 17.371’)
Surface 0.5
Middle 12.0
Bottom 25.0
3. SW3 (N 14026’42.185” E 740 20’ 43.324”)
Surface 0.5
Middle 10.0
Bottom 20.0
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini (EW)
4. EW1 (N 14030.840’ E 740 21.444’)
Surface 0.5
Middle 4.5
Bottom 10.0
5. EW2 (N 14032’10.91” E 740 28.834”)
Surface 0.5
Middle 5.5
Bottom 10.5
6. EW3 (N 14030.770’ E 740 22.891’)
Surface 0.5
Middle 5.0
Bottom 10.0
7. EW4 (N 14029’28.941” E 740 24’4.658”)
Surface 0.5
Middle 4.0
Bottom 8.5
8. EW5 (N 14030.662’ E 740 24.122’)
Surface 0.5
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.33
Table 3.4.2
Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Physical Parameters (Summer 2010)
Sr. No. Sampling location
pH Temp
(0C)
Turbidity (NTU)
Total Suspended Solids (mg/l)
Surface Water
Sea Water
1. SW1
Surface 7.4 29 <1 25
Middle 7.1 27 <1 36
Bottom 7.4 26 2 31
2. SW2
Surface 7.1 30 1 76
Middle 7.3 29 1 72
Bottom 7.2 28 1 31
3. SW3
Surface 7.5 29 1 78
Middle 7.1 28 1 76
Bottom 7.4 27 1 69
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1
Surface 6.5 30 9 104
Middle 6.6 29 7 67
Bottom 7.2 28 8 63
5. EW2
Surface 7.1 30 2 36
Middle 6.8 29 1 25
Bottom 7.0 29 <1 15
6. EW3
Surface 6.7 30 1 44
Middle 7.1 29 2 54
Bottom 6.7 27 2 36
7. EW4
Surface 6.8 30 2 40
Middle 6.8 29 1 27
Bottom 7.0 27 <1 20
8. EW4
Surface 6.7 30 3 39
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.34
Table 3.4.3
Coastal & Estuary Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters
Sr. No.
Sampling locations
Total Alkalinity
as CaCO3
Chloride Sulphate Salinity
(%o) mg/l
Surface Water
Sea Water
1. SW1
Surface 114 21769 381 36
Middle 117 20665 386 36
Bottom 114 19653 384 37
2. SW2
Surface 121 19816 384 37
Middle 112 19688 384 38
Bottom 122 21334 385 39
3. SW3
Surface 118 19603 387 35
Middle 115 19517 385 35
Bottom 117 19790 382 36
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1
Surface 105 19210 385 45
Middle 106 19101 388 66
Bottom 113 19005 385 36
5. EW2
Surface 115 17315 380 31
Middle 108 17628 387 32
Bottom 113 17150 379 31
6. EW3
Surface 118 15910 388 58
Middle 111 15434 390 37
Bottom 110 15873 382 43
7. EW4
Surface 110 12162 382 22
Middle 109 12325 365 22
Bottom 117 11987 369 21
8. EW5
Surface 108 10598 342 18
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.35
Table 3.4.4
Coastal & Estuary Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters
Sr. No.
Sampling location
Nitrate as N
Total Phos-phates
DO BOD Oil &
Grease
Hydro Carbons
µg/l
(mg/l)
Surface Water
Sea Water
1. SW1
Surface 0.023 0.10 6.3 <5 8.4 1.75
Middle 0.020 0.08 5.1 <5 6.4 2.46
Bottom 0.022 0.17 2.9 <5 8.0 1.92
2. SW2
Surface 0.023 0.05 5.4 <5 7.6 1.86
Middle 0.030 0.06 4.1 <5 4.8 2.18
Bottom 0.030 0.06 2.9 <5 8.4 1.92
3. SW3
Surface 0.021 0.10 5.9 <5 6.9 2.13
Middle 0.020 0.09 4.1 <5 8.1 1.92
Bottom 0.021 0.18 3.7 <5 8.0 1.86
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1
Surface 0.023 0.14 6.3 <5 13.2 1.92
Middle 0.025 0.13 5.1 <5 12.0 1.52
Bottom 0.025 0.07 2.9 <5 8.4 0.12
5. EW2
Surface 0.015 0.08 6.8 <5 10.2 1.01
Middle 0.021 0.10 6.0 <5 8.0 1.10
Bottom 0.025 0.08 4.2 <5 9.2 0.21
6. EW3
Surface 0.022 0.06 5.9 <5 6.8 2.36
Middle 0.032 0.27 4.3 <5 9.6 1.83
Bottom 0.030 0.09 3.0 <5 9.6 1.89
7. EW4
Surface 0.025 0.09 6.2 <5 9.5 1.75
Middle 0.032 0.10 4.5 <5 8.0 1.29
Bottom 0.028 0.06 3.2 <5 8.2 0.78
8. EW5
Surface 0.014 0.16 6.2 <5 7.2 2.17
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.36
Table 3.4.5
Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Heavy Metals
Sr. No.
Sampling Stations
Ni Cd Cr Cu Pb Fe Mn Zn Co
mg/l
Surface Water
Sea Water
1. SW1
Surface ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Middle ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Bottom 0.04 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
2. SW2
Surface ND ND 0.02 0.02 ND ND ND 0.08 ND
Middle ND ND ND 0.01 ND ND ND ND ND
Bottom ND ND 0.01 0.01 ND 0.11 ND ND ND
3. SW3
Surface ND ND 0.01 0.02 ND ND ND 0.07 ND
Middle ND ND 0.01 0.01 ND 0.09 ND ND ND
Bottom ND ND ND 0.02 ND ND ND ND ND
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1
Surface 0.29 ND ND ND ND 0.78 0.01 ND ND
Middle 0.59 ND ND ND ND 0.91 0.01 ND ND
Bottom 0.40 ND ND ND ND 1.20 0.01 ND ND
5. EW2
Surface ND ND ND 0.01 ND 0.75 ND ND ND
Middle ND ND 0.01 ND ND 1.01 ND 0.01 ND
Bottom 0.05 ND 0.01 ND ND 1.21 0.01 0.01 0.01
6. EW3
Surface ND ND 0.03 ND ND 0.12 0.01 0.02 0.01
Middle ND ND 0.04 0.01 ND 0.08 0.01 ND 0.02
Bottom ND ND 0.05 ND ND 0.43 0.01 0.18 0.03
7. EW4
Surface ND 0.02 0.01 ND ND 1.15 0.01 0.01 ND
Middle 0.02 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND
Bottom 0.10 ND 0.02 ND ND 1.01 0.01 ND 0.01
8. EW5
Surface 0.26 0.02 0.09 0.02 0.30 1.35 0.11 0.04 0.07
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.37
Table 3.4.6
Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
Phyto-plankton
No/ml
Percentage Composition of Algal Group
Shannon Wiener Diversity Index
Chlorop-hyceae
Bacillari-Phyceae
Cyano-phyceae
Surface Water
Sea Water
1. SW1 864 33 34 33 1.5
2. SW2 1152 25 50 25 1.5
3. SW3 996 17 83 - 1.5
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1 1728 50 20 30 1.4
5. EW2 1985 50 50 - 0.9
6. EW3 2304 63 12 25 1.3
7. EW4 1123 33 67 - 1.9
8. EW5 864 56 22 22 1.4
(IX) Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index
1: Indicate maximum impact of pollution
1-2: Indicate medium impact of pollution
>2: Indicate lowest or no impact of pollution
Table 3.4.7
Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Samples
Bacillario- phyceae Chloro-phyceae Cyano-phyceae
Navicula sp Chlorella sp Osillatoria sp
Nitzschia sp Ulothria sp Anabena sp
Fragilaria sp
Diatoma sp
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.38
Table 3.4.8
Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
Zooplankton No/m3
Percentage Composition of Zooplankton Group
Shannon Wiener
Diversity Index Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera
Sea Water
1. SW1 142 - 50 50 1.0
2. SW2 286 25 50 25 1.5
3. SW3 326 30 60 10 1.2
Estuary Water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1 357 20 60 20 1.3
5. EW2 635 33 59 8 1.2
6. EW3 428 17 50 33 1.4
7. EW4 256 58 28 14 1.0
8. EW5 214 - 67 33 0.9
Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index
1: Indicate maximum impact of pollution
1-2: Indicate medium impact of pollution
>2: Indicate lowest or no impact of pollution
Table 3.4.9
Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples
Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera
Daphnia sp Cyclops sp Brachionus sp
Nauplius larva
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.39
Table 3.4.10
Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Meiobenthos
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
Meio
Benthos No/m2
Percentage Composition of Benthos Group
Shannon Wiener
Diversity Index
Foram-
inifera
Ostra-
coda
Poly-
cheta
Sea Water
1. SW1 72917 50 50 - 2.46
2. SW2 52083 80 - 20 1.92
3. SW3 53265 70 27 3 1.51
Estuary water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1 46875 67 11 22 1.83
5. EW2 65986 69 20 11 1.11
6. EW3 78125 67 13 20 1.88
7. EW4 48245 64 31 5 1.02
8. EW5 54875 78 20 2 1.12
Table 3.4.11
List of Meiobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples
Foraminifera Ostracoda Polycheta
Rotalia sp Macrocyprina sp Nereis criisei sp
Bolivina sp Calcarina sp
Globigerinita sp Elphidium sp
Triloculina sp
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.40
Table 3.4.12
Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Macrobenthos
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
Macro
Benthos No/m2
Percentage Composition of Benthos Group
Shannon Wiener Diversity
Index Vivipa-
ridae
Sphae-
ridae
Pleuoc-
eridae
Sea Water
1. SW1 764 32 45 23 1.52
2. SW2 348 - 70 30 1.57
3. SW3 455 25 50 25 1.92
Estuary water of River Aghnashini
4. EW1 1285 32 43 25 1.54
5. EW2 865
6. EW3 768 36 64 - 1.32
7. EW4 1124 33 67 - 1.58
8. EW5 1245 25 50 25 1.95
Table 3.4.13
Macrobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples
Viviparadae Sphaeridae Pleuoceridae
Viviparus sp Musculium sp Goniobasis sp
Hydrobia sp
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.41
Table 3.4.14
Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations Direction
Approx. Airal Distance (Km)
w.r.t to Tadadi Sea Port
Dug Well
1. Village Morbaa ENE 4.5
2. Village Hiregutti NE 5.0
3. Village Korebait NE 8.0
Bore Well
4. Village Midthal Gazni NE 3.0
5. Village Madan Geri NNE 6.5
6. Village Hhittal Makki NNE 5.0
7. Village Baloli NNE 6.0
8. Village Yennamadi NE 7.0
9. Village Horskari NNW 6.0
10. Village Kimmani ESE 5.0
Table 3.4.15
Ground Water Quality - Physical Parameters
Sr. No.
Sampling Location
(Village)
pH Temp (0C)
Turbidity (NTU)
Total Suspended
Solids (mg/l)
Total Dissolved
Solids (mg/l)
Conductivity
(S/cm)
Dug Well
1. Morbaa 5.7 29 <1 2 80 142
2. Hiregutti 6.4 31 1 2 84 150
3. Korebait 6.3 31 <1 1 70 120
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni 6.9 29 1 2 150 260
5. Madan Geri 6.5 30 3 4 100 180
6. Hhittal Makki 6.3 29 <1 2 87 150
7. Baloli 5.8 28 2 2 55 100
8. Yennamadi 6.6 28 1 2 105 180
9. Horskari 7.8 30 <1 2 180 315
10. Kimmani 6.5 30 1 3 105 180
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.42
Table 3.4.16
Ground Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters
Sr. No.
Sampling locations (Village)
Total Alkalinity
Total Hardness
Calcium Hardness Chloride Sulphate Sodium Potassium
as CaCO3
mg/l
Dug Well
1. Morbaa 11 18 12 30 9 19 3
2. Hiregutti 45 26 17 8 10 18 2
3. Korebait 42 41 21 7 8 8 1
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni 90 92 52 21 14 17 2
5. Madan Geri 48 42 22 18 12 19 1
6. Hhittal Makki 42 44 27 12 14 11 4
7. Baloli 22 24 13 11 8 10 1
8. Yennamadi 64 30 24 8 8 26 2
9. Horskari 90 16 12 27 19 59 5
10. Kimmani 78 34 22 4 8 25 2
Table 3.4.17
Ground Water Quality - Nutrient and Demand Parameters
Sr. No.
Sampling locations (Village)
Nitrate as N
Total Phos-phates
D.O. Chemical Oxygen Demand
Oil & Grease
(mg/l)
Dug Well
1. Morbaa 0.03 0.04 6.2 48 ND
2. Hiregutti 0.01 0.01 5.8 48 ND
3. Korebait ND 0.02 5.6 56 ND
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni ND 0.02 4.8 28 ND
5. Madan Geri ND 0.05 2.8 12 ND
6. Hhittal Makki 0.01 0.04 6.0 48 ND
7. Baloli 0.08 0.33 5.0 64 ND
8. Yennamadi 0.02 0.52 5.2 64 ND
9. Horskari 0.01 0.11 4.0 44 ND
10. Kimmani ND 0.23 3.8 16 ND
ND: Not Detectable
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.43
Table 3.4.18
Ground Water Quality-Heavy Metals
Sr. No
Sampling Stations (Village)
Ni Cd Cr Cu Pb Fe Mn Zn Co
mg/l
Dug Well
1. Morbaa 1.86 ND 0.01 ND 0.05 0.12 0.03 0.03 ND
2. Hiregutti 0.38 ND ND ND 0.04 0.03 0.02 ND ND
3. Korebait 1.98 ND 0.01 ND 0.09 0.17 0.02 0.02 ND
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni 4.30 ND ND ND 0.03 ND 0.04 0.03 ND
5. Madan Geri 4.30 ND ND ND 0.13 1.30 0.05 0.09 0.01
6. Hhittal Makki 0.93 ND ND ND 0.09 ND ND 0.01 ND
7. Baloli 0.55 ND ND ND 0.07 ND ND 0.04 ND
8. Yennamadi 3.53 ND ND ND 0.10 1.05 0.07 0.26 0.01
9. Horskari 4.09 ND 0.02 ND 0.10 ND 0.02 0.15 0.01
10. Kimmani 6.05 ND 0.01 ND 0.10 7.56 0.03 0.25 0.15
Table 3.4.19
Ground Water Quality - Bacteriological Parameters
Sr. No. Sampling location (Villages)
Total Coliform Faecal Coliform
CFU/100 ml
Dug Well
1. Morba 85 38
2. Hiregutti 80 29
3. Karebait 115 38
Bore Well
4. Mithal Gazni 65 06
5. Madan Geri 145 54
6. Hhittal Nakki 70 16
7. Baloli 65 ND
8. Yennamadi 80 06
9. Horskari 120 17
10. Kimmani 75 18
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.44
Table 3.4.20
Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations (Village)
Phyto-plankton No./ml
Percentage Composition of Algal Group
Shannon Wiener
Diversity Index
Chloro-phyceae
Bacillario-phyceae
Cyano-phyceae
Dug Well
1. Morba 864 67 - 33 0.9
2. Hiregutti 1152 50 25 25 1.5
3. Korebait 1440 40 40 20 1.5
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni Nil - - - -
5. Madan Geri Nil - - - -
6. Hhittal makki Nil - - - -
7. Baloli Nil - - - -
8. Yennamadi Nil - - - -
9. Horskari Nil - - - -
10. Kimmani Nil - - - -
Table 3.4.21
Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Samples
Bacillario- phyceae Chloro-phyceae Cyano-phyceae
Navicula sp Chlorella sp Osillatoria sp
Nitzschia sp Ulothria sp Anabena sp
Fragilaria sp
Diatoma sp
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.45
Table 3.4.22
Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations (Village)
Zooplankton No./m3
Percentage Composition of Zooplankton Group
Shannon Wiener
Diversity Index Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera
Dug Well
1. Morba 71 - 100 - 0
2. Hiregutti 142 - 580 50 1.0
3. Korebait 214 33 34 33 1.5
Bore Well
4. Midthal Gazni Nil - - - -
5. Madan Geri Nil - - - -
6. Hhittal makki Nil - - - -
7. Baloli Nil - - - -
8. Yennamadi Nil - - - -
9. Horskari Nil - - - -
10. Kimmani Nil - - - -
Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index
1: Indicate maximum impact of pollution
1-2: Indicate medium impact of pollution
>2: Indicate lowest or no impact of pollution
Table 3.4.23
Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples
Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera
Daphnia sp Cyclops sp Brachionus sp
Nauplius larva
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.46
3.5 Sediment Quality Assessment
3.5.1 Sediment Characterization – Baseline Status
Sediment samples were collected as per the standard procedure from six
locations to evaluate the existing status of sediment quality, as listed in Table 3.5.1 and
shown in Fig. 3.5.1.
Representative sediment samples were collected from the project site for
evaluation of the physico-chemical characteristics of sediment. Standard methods have
been followed for the analysis of sediment samples. The international pipette method
(Black, 1965) was adopted for determination of particle size analysis based on the United
States Department of Agriculture (USDA).The chemical characteristics of sediments were
determined by preparing saturated sediment paste by adding distilled water (Agri. Hand
book 60 USDA) and determine sediment reaction and salinity level. Organic carbon
content was also determined by Walkley and Black method (1973), Total nitrogen was
determined by Kjeldhal method and total phosphorus was determined by Vandomolybdo
phosphoric yellow Colour method (spectrophotometic) (Jackson ML 1967). Potassium
was determined by flame photometer (Jackson ML 1967).
Heavy metals in sediment samples were determined by extracting sediment
through Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure (TCLP) and analysed on ICP or AAS
(APHA, 1995). Oil and grease and hydrocarbon content in sediment was determined by
GSE method USEPA 1991.
3.5.2 Physical and Chemical Characteristics of Sediment
Physical characteristics of sediment samples were delineated through specific
parameters, viz particle size distribution. The data indicated that the particle size with the
respective to size of <0.00.2 mm and 0.02 -0.002mm are prominent. The particle size
distributions in terms of percentage of different size of particles are furnished in Table
3.5.2. The collected sediment samples were analysed for various chemical parameters,
viz. pH, electrical conductivity, total dissolved salt, total nutrients content, organic carbon
content, heavy metals, oil and grease and hydrocarbon in the sediments are presented in
Tables 3.5.3 - 3.5.6.
pH is an important parameter to determine the acidity or alkalinity and neutral
scale. It greatly affects the microbial population as well as the solubility of metal ions and
regulates nutrient availability. The pH of sediment was observed to be neutral to slightly
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.47
alkaline (7.10-7.83) in reaction. The soluble salts were determined from sediment extract.
The soluble salts are expressed in terms of electrical conductivity (EC). The electrical
conductivity of the sediment extract is in the range of 7.30-9.20 dS/m. The sediment
samples are strongly saline in nature. The dissolved salt in the sediment was in between
4672-5760 mg/l (Table 3.5.3).
Organic matter present in sediment influences its physical and chemical
properties. Sediment analysis shows lower to higher values of organic carbon in the
sediment which is in the range of 0.24 to 1.60 %. The total nitrogen phosphorus and total
potash varied from 0.12 to 0.34, 0.097 to 0.169 and 0.018 to 0.058 %, respectively
(Table 3.5.4).
3.5.3 Heavy Metals
The heavy metals occur in the sediment as cations and are adsorbed by the
negatively charged sediment particles. They are held strongly as complexes on the
surface of clay alumino silicates hydrated oxide and humus. In general, adsorption
increases with pH. Heavy metals pollution is a serious issue because it can persist for
many decades. The heavy metals also create problems in the nutrient utilization of
aquatic life. The total heavy metal contents in the sediments are presented in the
Table 3.5.5.
Sediment samples were also analyzed for heavy metals such as Chromium
(Cr), Zinc (Zn), Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Cadmium (Cd), Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe) and
Copper (Cu) and Cobalt (Co). Their concentrations in mg/ml are presented in Table
3.5.6.The concentration in heavy metal was determined using Toxicity Characteristics
Leaching Procedure (TCLP method).
3.5.4 Oil and Grease and Hydrocarbon
Oil and Grease were also present in the sediment samples. They were in the
range of 0.22 to 0.83 gm/kg. The hydrocarbons were also present in all the sediment
samples. The contents of the hydrocarbon were in the range of 0.14 to 0.53 mg/kg
(Table 3.5.7).
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.48
A : River; B : Estuary; C-F : Sea
Fig. 3.5.1: Sediment Sampling Locations
C
B A
D
E
F
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.49
Table 3.5.1
Sediment Sampling Locations
Sr. No.
Sampling Location Latitude Longitude
1. A River N14O 30’ 49.308” E74 O 23’ 3.048”
2. B Estuary N14O 30’ 50.895” E74 O 21’ 26.465”
3. C Sea N14O 33 29’.082” E74 O 16’ 2.266”
4. D Sea N14O 30’ 53.155” E74 O 17’ 0.610”
5. E Sea N14O 28’ 14.146” E74 O 18’ 11.691”
6. F Sea N14O 26’ 14.613” E74 O 20’ 43.479”
Table 3.5.2
Particle Size Distribution of Sediment Samples
Sr.No Sampling Location
Particle Size Distribution (%)
2-0.2 mm
0.2-0.02 mm
0.02-0.002 mm
<0.002 mm
1. A River 0.52 0.84 22.44 76.2
2. B Estuary 1.32 0.84 36.64 61.2
3. C Sea 0.44 1.72 29.04 68.8
4. D Sea 39.16 39.2 11.44 10.2
5. E Sea 0.40 0.72 26.48 72.4
6. F Sea 1.00 2.84 17.76 78.4
Table 3.5.3
Chemical Characteristics of Sediment Samples
Sr.No. Sampling Location pH EC
Total Dissolved Solids
dS/m mg/l
1. A River 7.19 9.20 5760
2. B Estuary 7.11 8.70 5568
3. C Sea 7.10 8.70 5568
4. D Sea 7.83 7.30 4672
5. E Sea 7.26 8.50 5440
6. F Sea 7.14 8.90 5696
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.50
Table 3.5.4
Organic Carbon and Nutrient Contents in Sediment Samples
Sr. No.
Sampling Location Organic Carbon
(%)
Total N
Total P2O5
Total
K2O
(%)
1. A River 0.24 0.30 0.117 0.018
2. B Estuary 0.72 0.18 0.147 0.021
3. C Sea 1.20 0.22 0.139 0.041
4. D Sea 1.60 0.12 0.097 0.058
5. E Sea 0.84 0.20 0.169 0.042
6. F Sea 0.81 0.34 0.126 0.028
Table 3.5.5
Heavy Metal content in the Sediment Samples
Sr. No.
Sampling Hg Cr As Ni Cd Pb Cu Zn
(mg/kg)
1. A River ND 96 ND 22 6.44 104 58 82
2. B Estuary ND 362 ND 38 0.82 108 66 76
3. C Sea 0.18 278 ND 48 0.82 152 84 170
4. D Sea 0.21 198 ND 56 0.66 172 68 292
5. E Sea ND 288 ND 55 1.2 168 72 281
6. F Sea 0.16 178 ND 46 0.88 144 78 278
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.51
Table 3.5.6
Heavy Metals Content in the Sediment Samples (using TCLP Method)
Sr. No.
Sampling Location
Ni Cd Cr Cu Pb Fe Mn Zn Co
(mg/kg)
1. A River 0.114 0.014 ND 0.007 ND 13.59 4.361 0.095 0.06
2. B Estuary 0.101 0.011 ND 0.025 ND 7.231 3.781 0.102 0.054
3. C Sea 0.096 0.013 ND 0.008 ND 6.66 4.216 0.077 0.056
4. D Sea 0.103 0.014 ND 0.007 ND 14.67 3.975 0.085 0.056
5. E Sea 0.105 0.011 ND 0.011 ND 18.13 4.302 0.114 0.064
6. F Sea 0.115 0.017 ND 0.011 ND 11.80 4.138 0.095 0.059
ND-Not Detected; TCLP- Toxic Characteristics Leachate Procedure
Table 3.5.7
Hydrocarbons and Oil & Grease Content in Sediment Samples
Sr. No.
Sampling Location Hydrocarbons
(mg/kg) Oil and Grease
(g/kg)
1. A River 0.14 0.22
2. B Estuary 0.28 0.45
3. C Sea 0.25 0.40
4. D Sea 0.25 0.40
5. E Sea 0.53 0.83
6. F Sea 0.31 0.50
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.52
3.6 Land Environment
The impacts of any major developmental projects on land environment generally
depend on type/category of proposed development. For example, the grass root /green
field development requires land acquisition/procurement, site grading/ construction and
operation. In such cases the impacts on land environment would be in the form of
permanent change in landuse pattern as well as direct and indirect impacts on
surrounding land due to pollution discharge in the form of flue gases, fugitive emission,
liquid and solid wastes as well as subsequent urbanization. Whereas, if the proposed
project relates to expansion / modernization / diversification / debottlenecking at already
existing project, the impacts on land environment would be limited to mainly pollution
impacts due to envisaged changes in discharges from proposed development. Apart from
the above, the importance of impacts on land environment also depends on several
factors like the project location, landuse / land cover in surrounding area, ecological or
otherwise sensitivity of the surrounding regions etc. The project under study is related to
Grass Root Development of all whether Multi-Cargo Sea Port Project. Accordingly, for
assessment of impacts, it is pertinent to study the current landuse / landcover of identified
project site as well as surrounding area and the resulting changes in landuse pattern and
the corresponding impacts and also the pollution impacts during normal operation of
proposed project depending on requirement.
The baseline (pre-project) status of land environment has been assessed
through reconnaissance in the project area and characterization of soils (physical,
chemical and microbiological properties) through field studies. The study of land use
pattern has been done through census record and also using remote sensing data.
3.6.1 Reconnaissance
The location identified for proposed development of all weather multi-cargo sea
port projects is situated near Aghnashini and Arabian Sea at Tadadi (Tadari), Taluka
Kumta, in Uttara Kannada district.
The study area lies between the latitudinal parallels of 14025’ N and 14040’N and
the longitudinal parallels of 74015’E and 74025’E. Topographyhically the study area
comes under the coastal belt which is nothing but a succession of estuarine plains
connected by narrow coastal strips, the central belt consisting of the hills and valley of the
sahyadri range and eastern table land. Broadly speaking the study area can be
categorized as essentially an upland that is a hilly malenadu. The eastern belt consists of
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.53
a narrow transition zone of undulating lands and stretches of plains as one moves further
east wards. By and large the study area is hilly in terrain and is covered by thick
vegetation including some of the most magnificient forests.
Aghanashini is also known as Tadri River and it flows in to the Arabian Sea,
near the estuarine mouth there is a narrow creek blocked by a rocky reef.
Geologically, the rock formation of the study area belongs to the most ancient
period of earth’s history and consists of Archean complex the oldest rock of the earth’s
crust. The rock formation is characterized by a system of ridges and a plateau on the
west descending rapidly into a narrow strip of low land covered by alluvial rocks. The
estern sector is hilly and consists of the Dharwars and the peninsular gneisses. The
Dharwars are represented by Chloritc Schist’s which are younger to hornblend types.
Pegmatitcs and quartz, veins also are known to occur in parts of the study area. The
Archean granites and gneisses are capped by laterite at several places. The study area is
quite rich in wealth like fish, clay, shell, sand, building materials of granite and laterite.
Study area is also rich in forest.
The forest of the study area can be categorized into evergreen and the semi-
evergreen which are rich in soft wood and packing timber yielding trees, the moist
deciduous which are rich in teak, rose wood and other timber, the scrub Jungle containing
sandle wood trees among other species of the tree growth and lastly the unwooded or
sparsely wooded forest. The fauna of the study area is also rich and varied.
The Western Ghats which lie across the path of the south west monsoons cause
heavy to very heavy rainfall over the coastal areas and moderate to heavy rains in the
hilly malenadu tracks. The elevation varies as one moves east and north and as a result
the climate also varies as one move westwards from the eastern plains through the hilly
malnad (area) and reaches the coast line. All along the year, the humidity is high
especially in the western sector. The summer season lasts from March to May and is
marked by the rising temperature. May happens to be the hottest month and at time the
maximum temperature reaches 380C.
In the coastal area however the cool sea breeze provides some relief during the
latter half of the day and early evening hours. From June to September, which marks the
monsoon or the wet season, the sky remains overcast and the day temperatures move
down to tolerable limits. During this period there would be incessant rains in most parts of
the area. This monotony is however broken by a few brief dry spells, which provide some
relief to the people. The months of October and November mark the retreating monsoon
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.54
and during this period the day temperature registers a slight increase while the night
temperature gradually moves down. Since this period is free from incessant rainfall and
the oppressive heat of the summer, one can regard these two months as most pleasant
months of the year. Winter season sets in during December and lasts till the end of
February. During this period the weather is dry with a clear bright sky and an agreeably
low temperature as well as humidity. Generally the rainfall is heavier in the coastal belt
than in the uplands towards the east and the north. July is the month which records the
heaviest rainfall. Average days of rainfall are 103, which result in 2742 mm to 3854 mm
rainfall.
The topographical and climatic features of the study area are quite suitable for
the production of agriculture crops especially rice and also horticulture crops like areca
and coconut. The soils on the study area may be divided in to clear cut zone based on
topography.
3.6.1.1 Land Form:
West coast Karnataka, Laterite of Cainozoic occurs in the study area. Soils are
also called Laterite-Pala ecoence to recent.
3.6.1.2 Agro Climate Zone:
Coastal Zone
3.6.1.3 Agro-Ecological Sub region:
West coast plain, hot humid with 240- 170 day LGP (Length of Growth Period).
3.6.1.4 Natural Vegetation:
Natural Vegetation in the study area is controlled by physiography and climate.
The evergreen, semi-evergreen and moist deciduous forest is restricted to the coastal
region. The evergreen and semi-evergreen forests include the dominant species of
Dipterocarpus indica, Calophyllum tomentomus conarium strictum, Arto carpus species,
Vateria indica and Mansifera indica, Diospuros ebemum Dysoxylum Malabarium.
Most deciduous forest includes dominant species of Tactona grandis, Dalbergia
latifalia, Terminalia tomestosa, Pterocarpus marsupium and Bombusa arundinacea.
The dry deciduous and thorn types include the dominant species of Albizia
amara chloroxylan swieteria and acacia.
3.6.2 Physiography
The study area falls in coastal plain physiography.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.55
3.6.2.1 West Coast Plain
West coast plain of the study area lies between the Western Ghat and Arabain
sea, west coast study area has been divided into a high level largely lateritized, hinterland
which is dissected by west flowing stream and a low level coastal plain with recent fluvio-
littoral formations. The hinterland near the coast consists of table lands forming iron stone
crust. Away from the coast, it is made up of dissected hills without ironstone crust. The
area is drained to the Arabian Sea by Haladi, Ganagavali, Kali and Aghanashini rivers.
3.6.2.2 Soils of Coastal Plain
The coastal plain includes valleys, beaches, marshes and back water area. Soils
of the marshes and back water area are very deep imperfectly to poor drained, clays with
stratified textures. The soils are classified as Aquic Ustifluvents; Tropaquents soils of the
beaches are very deep sandy, well drained to imperfectly drained. These soils are
classified as Aquic Ustipsamments; soils of the valleys are very deep, imperfectly drained
and sandy over loamy satisfied textures. The major crops grown in the area are rice and
groundnut. The principal plantation crop is coconut.
3.6.3 Geology
Laterites of cainoic occur in the study area, recent alluvial deposits are found in
river and stream valleys and in coastal area. In the south Deccan plateau parent material
has played a major role in the soil formation. The acidic rocks of granites, gneisses, sand-
stone and quartzite’s are the parent for red soil and basic rock like basalt, Dharwars-
Archaean to lower proterozoic, Peninsular gneiss Archaean.
3.6.4 Climate
The climate varies widely from arid and semiarid and humid tropical monsoonic
type in the west coast plain 3000 mm to 3600 mm in the west coast plain. The mean
annual temperature ranges from 20.30C to 27.60C with summer temperature ranging from
350C to 420C and winter temperature between 130C and 230C. The soil moisture regime
is Ustic in most part of the study area.
In west coast plain aquatic moisture regime is encountered in local patches. The
soil temperature regime is isohyperthermic climate plays a major role in the soil formation
irrespective of parent materials.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.56
3.6.5 Soil Type of the Study Area
1) Deep imperfectly drained sandy soils on beaches, associated with deep
imperfectly drained sandy soils with shallow water table (Mixed Typic
Ustipsamment)
2) Deep imperfectly drained sandy over loamy soils of valley with shallow water
table associated with deep, imperfectly drained, clayey over sandy soils.
3) Moderately shallow somewhat excessively drained gravelly clay soils with
hard iron stone on coastal plateau summits with moderate erosion,
associated with Iron stone crust (Clayey-Skeletal, Kaolinitic Petro ferric
Haplustuits).
4) Moderately deep, well drained gravelly clay soil with low AWC and surface
crusting on undulating upland with moderate erosion, associated with
moderately deep well drained gravely clay soil.
3.6.6 Baseline Status
Baseline data was collected to assess landuse/landcover of different villages
within 10 km radial distance from project site.
3.6.6.1 Soil Characteristics
Soil samples were collected from 13 villages, as shown in Fig. 3.6.1 and
summarized in Table 3.6.1. Representative soil samples were collected from 0-15 cm
depth and analysed for physico-chemical characteristics of soil. Standard methods have
been followed for the analysis of soil samples.
The International Pipette Method (Black, 1964) was adopted for determination of
particle size analysis. The textural diagram was generated using “SEE Soil Class 2.0
version based on United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) classification of soils.
Physical parameters such as bulk density, porosity and water holding capacity were
determined by following KR Box Method (Keen and Raczkowski, 1921).
The chemical characteristics of soil were determined by preparing soil extract in
distilled water in ratio 1:2 (as per Jackson procedure, 1967). Organic carbon was
determined by Walkley and Black method (1972). Fertility status of soil in terms of
available nitrogen was determined by Kjeldhal method and available phosphorus was
determined by Chloro slanus Reduced Molybdo Phosphorus Blue colour, Olsen’s method
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.57
(1954) and available potassium was determined by flame photometer method (Jackson
M.L. 1967).
Heavy metals in the soil were determined by digesting the soil with conc. H2SO4
and conc. HNO3 on hot plate and extracting the digested soil, followed by analysis on ICP
or AAS (APHA, 1995).
3.6.6.2 Physical Properties of Soil
Air-dried and sieved samples have been used for determination of physical
properties of soil. Particle size distribution of soil samples in terms of percentage of sand,
silt and clay are presented in Table 3.6.2. Sandy loam is the prominent textural class
followed by clay, sandy clay loam in the study area (Fig. 3.6.2). Clay content in the soil
varies from 6.20 to 45.2%.
The physical characteristics of soils viz. bulk density; porosity and water holding
capacity are presented in Table 3.6.3. The soil being of friable consistency, the bulk
density of the soil is in the range of 1.20 to 1.43 g/cm3, whereas the porosity and water
holding capacity are in the range of 38.8-48.84 % and 18.2-55.43 % respectively.
3.6.6.3 Chemical Properties of Soil
The soil samples were analysed for various chemical properties, such as pH,
electrical conductivity, soluble anions and cations, cation exchange capacity (CEC),
exchangeable cations, exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP), organic carbon content,
nutrient status and heavy metals content. The results presented in Tables 3.6.4 to 3.6.9
are briefly summarized here.
pH is an important parameter which is indicative of the alkaline and acidic nature
of soil. It severally affects the microbial population as well as the solubility of metal ions
and regulates nutrient availability. The pH of the soil samples ranges between 4.9-6.1
indicate acidic nature of soil (Table 3.6.4).
The soluble salts were determined from soil extract (1:2). The soluble salts are
expressed in terms of electrical conductivity (EC). The Electrical Conductivity of the soil
extract in the study area is in the range of 0.05 to 0.21 dS/m (Table 3.6.4). The soluble
salt content in all the soils are low (<1 dS/m). Chemical analysis shows that the soils are
normal (EC <1dS/m).
The most important cations present in soluble state are calcium and
magnesium. Calcium and magnesium were observed in the range of 0.11 - 0.36 meq/l
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.58
and 0.015 - 0.158 meq/l, whereas sodium and potassium were in the range of 0.001 -
0.007 meq/l and 0.011 - 0.196 meq/l, respectively (Table 3.6.4).
In general, the soil samples in the study area have low to high adsorption
capacity as evident from the cation exchange capacity which is found to be in the range
of 3.8 -22.2 Cmol (P+) kg-1 soil. Amongst the different exchangeable cations, calcium is
prominently present followed by magnesium. The concentrations of calcium and
magnesium varied from 2.2-3.6 cmol (P+) kg-1 and 1.2-1.8 cmol (P+) kg-1 of soil
respectively. Sodium and potassium were in the range of 0.020 - 0.18 cmol (P+) kg-1 and
0.08 - 0.70 cmol (P+) kg-1 of soil respectively (Table 3.6.5).
Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) of the soil samples varied from 0.17-
1.96. The presence of sodium in exchangeable form may have deterious effect on the
chemical and physical properties of soil. ESP range b/w 4 to 10 can be considered as
satisfactory. Soils from all the villages are normal with respect to alkalinity as
exchangeable sodium percentage of soil is below 15. The classification of soil and their
relationship with productivity and adsorption based on cation exchange capacity is
presented in Tables 3.6.6 - 3.6.7.
3.6.6.4 Fertility/Nutrient Status of Soil
Organic matter present in the soil influences its physical and chemical
properties. It commonly accounts for one third or more of the cation exchange capacity of
surface soil and is also responsible for stability of soil aggregates.
Organic carbon and available nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium of the soil
samples are found to be in the range of 0.18 - 0.75 % and 200 - 297, 10.3 - 16.5 and 113
- 118 kg/ha respectively. Soil samples are poor to medium level in organic carbon
content. Nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium content indicate that fertility of soil is poor
and need nutients supplementation for agriculture. The fertility state of soil is presented in
Table 3.6.8.
3.6.6.5 Heavy Metal Contents in the Soil
The heavy metals occur in the solution as cations and are absorbed by the
negatively charged soil particles. They are held strongly as complexes form on the
surface of clay, alumino silicates, hydrated oxide and humus. In general, adsorption
increases with pH. Heavy metals pollution is serious because it can persist for many
decades. The heavy metals also create problems in the nutrient utilization in plant and
also result in reduction in chlorophyll content.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.59
Soil samples were analysed for heavy metals such as Chromium (Cr), Zinc (Zn),
Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Cadmium (Cd), Cobalt (Co), Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe) and
Copper (Cu) and their concentrations are presented in Table 3.6.9. The presence of
heavy metals at proper pH enhances the microbial activity in soil. The concentration of
heavy metals found in the study area is normal.
3.6.6.6 Soil Microbiology
Soil organisms play a key role in nutrient transformation. Organic form is
transformed into their respective inorganic forms and plants are able to absorb them for
their growth. Physical, chemical and physico-chemical characteristics of soil and its
nutrient status influence the microbial population. Microbial population present in samples
of soil is presented in Table 3.6.10.
Various ecological cycles in the Rhizosphere zone of the plant depend upon
microbiological population. The population of bacteria, fungi and actinomycetes are the
vital components of soils and they help in maintaining their stability. Azotobactor are non-
symbiotic nitrogen fixing micro-organisms and improve soil fertility by fixing nitrogen in
soil. Fungi also constitute an important part of the microflora of normal soil. They are
active in initial stages of decomposition of plant residues and actively participate in the
process of soil aggregation. Total viable microbial population per gram of soil varied from
6x106 CFU/g to 60x106 CFU/g. Different microflora observed per gram of soil samples
were Fungi (4x104 CFU/g to 53x104 CFU/g), Actinomycetes (1x104 CFU/g to 20x104
CFU/g), Rhizobium (1 to 10x104 CFU/g) and Azotobacter (1x104 CFU/g to 12x104 CFU/g)
respectively.
3.6.6.7 Landuse Pattern
The Landuse pattern in different villages falling within 10 km radial distance from
the project site of the study area is given in Table 3.6.11. As per 2001 census, major part
of the study area is dominated by unirrigated waste land (31.89 %) followed by 27.44 %
of forest land. Area not available for cultivation is confined to 14.89 %, whereas 7.46 %
land is available for irrigation. The percentwise distribution of landuse pattern in the study
area is depicted in Fig. 3.6.3.
3.6.6.8 Cropping Pattern
Paddy is the main crop grown and other crops are grown are raggi, sugarcane,
green vegetables. The plantation of horticultural crops is also observed and they are
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.60
mangoes, banana, guava, arecanut and coconut. Maximum crops and horticulture are
observed in most of the villages.
3.6.7 Landuse/Land Cover using Remote Sensing Studies
Landuse refers to man’s activities on land, utilitarian in land whereas Landcover
denotes the Agricultural, Built-up area, Mangroves, Water bodies, River, Saltpan, Sand,
Sea, Wetland / Submerged area.
Remote Sensing technology has emerged as a powerful tool in providing reliable
information on various natural resources at different levels of spatial details. It has played
an important role in effective mapping and periodic monitoring of natural resources
including environment. With the availability of high resolution remote sensing data, newer
areas of remote sensing applications have been identified, techniques of data processing
have improved and computer based image processing systems have become more
effective.
3.6.7.1 Remote Sensing Data Used
In order to strengthen the baseline information on existing landuse pattern the
following data covering approx. 14025’-14040’N latitude and 74015’- 74025’ E longitude are
used.
Tadri (Tadadi) Karnataka
Imagery Details
IRS P6 LISS III
Path: 097, Row: 063
Date of Pass: 3 May, 2010
The steps involved in procurement and analysis of remote sensing data are:
Acquisition of Satellite data
Data loading
Data processing
Geo-referencing image
Rectification
Supervised Classification of Landuse / Landcover
Ground Truth / field checks using Global Positioning System
Masking
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.61
For mapping different agro-climatic zones, the landuse/ landcover classification
system has been standardized by Department of Space as :
1) Agriculture
2) Barren land
3) Built-up area
4) Creek
5) Fallow land
6) Forest
7) Mangroves
8) River
9) Saltpan
10) Sand
11) Sea
12) Wetland/Submerged area
Landuse / Landcover distribution in the study area has been estimated using the
above classification system and digital analysis techniques.
3.6.7.2 Landuse / Landcover Classification
Fig.3.5.4 is the LISS-III image of the proposed Development of Tadadi (Tadri)
Sea Port at Tadri Karnataka. In the image, agriculture, forest appears red, water-bodies
like sea, river, creek appear in blue color. Attributes such as color, tone, texture, shape
and size are used to interpret the image visually. The FCC image shows River
Aghnashini or Tadri flowing along the study area. The built-up area appears in light white
blue colour.
Fig. 3.5.5 represents the Pseudo-color coding of the FCC of the study area,
which has been assigned 12 different classes. The classification identifies water bodies in
blue color with changing tones (for eg. Dark blue for Sea water and light blue for rivers).
The vegetations are identified as green color with changing tones. Built-up land is
identified with magenta tone. Significant patches of mangroves have been identified in the
image. The image also highlights patches of sand and wetland/submerged area along the
coast and bank of the river. The landuse / landcover classification is given in Table
3.6.12.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.62
The land-use/ land-cover classification of the 10 km radius study area revels that
as much as 38.82% area is occupied by sea. On landside, the land-use classification is:
Agriculture: 11.44%, Forests: 15.02%, Barren land: 1.75%, Fallow land: 18.07%, Built-up
land: 0.70%, river: 4.58%, saltpans: 0.64%, creek land: 2.22%, mangrove: 0.87% and
5.77% other water bodies such as wetland/ submerged area: 5.77%.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.63
Fig: 3.6.1 : Soil Sampling Locations
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.64
Fig 3.6.2: Soil Textural Class
Fig 3.6.3: Land Use Pattern (as per Census records)
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.65
Fig. 3.6.4: False colour composite of Study Area around proposed Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.66
Fig. 3.6.5 : Landuse/Landcover Classification of Study Area around proposed Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.67
Table 3.6.1
Soil Sampling Locations
Sr. No.
Sampling Location
(Village)
Direction Approx. Aerial Distence (Km)
With respect to proposed Tadadi Port
1 Morba ENE 4.5
2 Mithal Gazni NE 3.0
3 Hiregutti NE 5.0
4 Madangeri NNE 6.5
5 Bargi Gazal E 3.5
6 Hittal Makki NNE 5.0
7 Baloli NNE 6.0
8 Yennamadi NE 7.0
9 Korebail NE 8.0
10 Khuragadde ENE 6.4
11 Hoskeri NNW 6.4
12 Kimmani ESE 5.0
13 Yettinabaij ESE 6.5
Table 3.6.2
Textural Class of Soil in the Study Area
Sr. No
Sampling Locations (Village)
Particle size distribution (%)
Textural
Class
Coarse Sand
Fine sand
Silt Clay
1. Morba 25 35 16 24 Sandy Clay Loam
2. Mithal Gazni 29 44 19 8 Sandy Loam
3. Hiregutti 35 37 21 6 Sandy Loam
4. Madangeri 30 33 19 18 Sandy Loam
5. Bargi Gazal 33 25 19 24 Sandy Clay Loam
6. Hittal Makki 22 29 24 24 Sandy Clay Loam
7. Baloli 44 21 23 17 Sandy Loam
8. Yennamadi 29 33 26 13 Sandy Loam
9. Korebail 35 31 22 12 Sandy Loam
10. Khuragadde 37 33 17 13 Sandy Loam
11. Hoskeri 17 40 19 25 Sandy Clay Loam
12. Kimmani 9 9 38 45 Clay
13. Yettinabaij 11 22.2 25 41 Clay
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.68
Table 3.6.3
Physical Characteristics of Soil in the Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations (Village)
Bulk Density (gm/cm3)
Porosity
(%)
Water holding capacity (%)
1. Morba 1.38 49 40
2. Mithal Gazni 1.38 41 25
3. Hiregutti 1.37 39 18
4. Madangeri 1.31 46 36
5. Bargi Gazal 1.33 42 40
6. Hittal Makki 1.43 45 41
7. Baloli 1.45 45 39
8. Yennamadi 1.40 39 25
9. Korebail 1.39 41 28
10. Khuragadde 1.43 41 26
11. Hoskeri 1.30 44 45
12. Kimmani 1.23 45 55
13. Yettinabaij 1.20 45 50
Table 3.6.4
Chemical Characteristics of Soil Extract in the Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations (Village)
pH
1:2
EC
dS/m
Calcium Magnesium Sodium Potassium
meq/l
1. Morba 5.9 0.10 0.11 0.018 0.007 0.170
2. Mithal Gazni 6.1 0.21 0.39 0.041 0.006 0.196
3. Hiregutti 5.8 0.18 0.30 0.015 0.001 0.156
4. Madangeri 5.7 0.15 0.28 0.041 0.004 0.020
5. Bargi Gazal 5.2 0.21 0.33 0.018 0.002 0.026
6. Hittal Makki 5.8 0.1 0.11 0.040 0.006 0.011
7. Baloli 6.1 0.14 0.22 0.036 0.006 0.012
8. Yennamadi 5.2 0.08 0.36 0.023 0.006 0.020
9. Korebail 5.9 0.11 0.13 0.021 0.006 0.143
10. Khuragadde 5.7 0.08 0.12 0.041 0.007 0.020
11. Hoskeri 4.9 0.17 0.8 0.042 0.006 0.019
12. Kimmani 5.1 0.05 0.12 0.158 0.005 0.017
13. Yettinabaij 5.7 0.11 0.13 0.036 0.004 0.017
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.69
Table 3.6.5
Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC), Exchangeable Cations Content and Exchangeable Sodium Percentage (ESP) of Soils in Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling locations (Village)
Ca++ Mg++ Na+ K+ CEC ESP (%) cmol (p+) kg-1
1. Morba 2.2 1.8 0.02 0.40 11.8 0.17
2. Mithal Gazni 2.2 1.2 0.09 0.70 4.6 1.95
3. Hiregutti 3.6 1.4 0.03 0.12 3.8 0.79
4. Madangeri 2.8 1.2 0.06 0.15 7.8 0.76
5. Bargi Gazal 3.2 1.4 0.08 0.11 11.2 0.71
6. Hittal Makki 2.6 1.2 0.09 0.29 11.8 0.76
7. Baloli 3.2 1.4 0.16 0.11 8.4 1.96
8. Yennamadi 2.2 1.6 0.06 0.18 6.8 0.88
9. Korebail 2.4 1.8 0.09 0.10 5.4 1.66
10. Khuragadde 2.8 1.4 0.06 0.08 6.4 0.94
11. Hoskeri 2.2 1.2 0.09 0.14 12.2 0.73
12. Kimmani 2.8 1.4 0.18 0.19 22.2 0.82
13. Yettinabaij 2.4 1.6 0.18 0.20 20.6 0.87
Table 3.6.6
Relationship of CEC with Productivity
CEC Range (cmol (p+) kg-1)
Productivity Location Sr. Nos.
Very low < 10 Very low 2,3,4,7,8,9,10
Low 10 - 20 Low 1,5,6
Moderate 20 - 50 Moderate 12,13
High > 50 High -
Table 3.6.7
Relationship of CEC with Adsorptivity
CEC Range (cmol (p+) kg-1)
Adsorptivity Location Sr. Nos.
Limited or low <10 Limited or low 2,3,4,7,8,9,10
Moderate 10-20 Moderate 1,5,6,11
High 20-30 High 12,13
Very High > 30 Very high -
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.70
Table 3.6.8
Fertility Status of Soils in Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling Locations
(Village)
Organic Carbon
(%)
N P2O5 K2O
Kg/ha
1. Morba 0.37 286 13.8 116
2. Mithal Gazni 0.31 256 14.5 116
3. Hiregutti 0.75 268 15.7 118
4. Madangeri 0.64 297 12.14 115
5. Bargi Gazal 0.68 213 15.0 114
6. Hittal Makki 0.69 284 13.0 113
7. Baloli 0.69 212 14.5 116
8. Yennamadi 0.65 254 16.5 116
9. Korebail 0.61 200 16.0 113
10. Khuragadde 0.63 296 14.2 113
11. Hoskeri 0.64 271 10.4 116
12. Kimmani 0.18 202 12.3 113
13. Yettinabaij 0.66 256 14.4 114
Level in poor soil <0.5 <280 <10 <110
Level in medium soil 0.5-0.75 280-560 10-25 110-280
Level in fertile soil >0.75 >560 >25 >280
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.71
Table 3.6.9
Heavy Metals Content of Soil in Study Area
Sr. No.
Sampling Location (Village)
Cd Cr Co Cu Fe Mn Ni Pb Zn
(mg/kg)
1. Morba 0.40 178 35 99 3420 644 122 32 78
2. Mithal Gazni 0.4 159 25 85 3314 592 110 36 93
3. Hiregutti 0.8 130 20 46 3353 289 54 56 173
4. Madangeri 0.1 80 31 116 3386 446 55 29 95
5. Bargi Gazal ND 115 27 89 3352 512 78 32 78
6. Hittal Makki ND 119 20 38 3356 102 66 28 33
7. Baloli ND 102 22 76 3363 302 92 23 42
8. Yennamadi ND 69 12 77 3051 184 36 10 40
9. Korebail ND 289 16 30 3217 465 45 15 37
10. Khuragadde ND 108 20 83 3239 519 48 20 70
11. Hoskeri ND 139 24 79 3384 202 44 17 55
12. Kimmani ND 128 25 96 3380 213 62 26 60
13. Yettinabaij 0.6 54 30 74 3290 50 62 27 80
Table 3.6.10
Microbiological Characteristics of Soil in Study Area
Sr. No
Sampling Location (Village)
TVC Fungl Actinomycetes Rhizobium Azotobacter
CFU/g of soil
1. Morba 15x106 13x104 4x104 3x104 1x104
2. Mithal Gazni 20x106 18x104 3x104 6x104 2x104
3. Hiregutti 60x106 22x104 3x104 2x104 3x104
4. Madangeri 10x106 8x104 8x104 4x104 1x104
5. Bargi Gazal 56x106 30x104 4x104 3x104 2x104
6. Hittal Makki 38x106 53x104 20x104 10x104 12x104
7. Baloli 11x106 10x104 3x104 6x104 1x104
8. Yennamadi 6x106 4x104 1x104 1x104 1x104
9. Korebail 9x106 7x104 5x104 2x104 2x104
10. Khuragadde 6x106 5x104 4x104 2x104 1x104
11. Hoskeri 43x106 22x104 10x104 7x104 5x104
12. Kimmani 23x106 15x104 1x104 3x104 2x104
13. Yettinabaij 8x106 7x104 4x104 2x104 1x104
TVC : Total Viable Count; CFU : Colony Forming Unit
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.72
Table 3.6.11
Land Use Pattern (as per Census Records) (in Ha)
Sr. No.
Village
Name
Total Area
Forest Area
Irrigated Area
Non-Irrigated
Area
Culturable waste land
Area not available for
cultivation
1. Hihalmakki 259 65.27 1.46 41.56 122.76 27.95
2. Hiregutt 682 149.44 18 157.76 289.22 67.58
3. Madangeri 306 87.65 2.24 60.89 116.57 38.65
4. Morba 227 36.25 3.31 21.99 132.18 33.27
5. Yennemadi 84 0 1.65 11.32 58.52 12.51
6. Aghanashini 251 90.22 31.27 55.94 16.71 56.86
7. Mugvekanvada 551 417.19 15.53 106.02 4.14 8.12
8. Kagal 530 128.51 45.68 159.95 133.5 62.36
9. Hubhangeri 132 0 13.49 77.7 28.52 12.29
10. Bargigazani 176 0 0.27 140.74 32.54 2.45
11. Betkuli 485 72.33 6.21 108.38 250.81 47.27
12. Bargi 302 101.32 15.5 116.45 30.33 38.4
13. Kodkani 253 49.03 27.58 139.88 28.32 8.19
14. Poduvani 328 93.6 3.8 67.58 126.06 36.96
15. Gokarn 1700 478.22 168.15 318.35 19.98 715.3
16. Bidrageri 84 21.08 3.67 58.61 0.59 0.05
17. Naranapur 67 0 0 0 0 67
18. Toregazani 27 4.23 4.62 17.34 0.81 0
19. Torke 248 57.54 49.45 134.6 0 6.41
20. Gonehalli 128 42.59 6.57 77.18 1.21 0.45
21. Bhavikoola 211 0 7 193.33 0 10.67
22. Nadumaskeri 381 0 59.24 177.42 143.02 1.32
23. Harumaskeri 141 0 27.61 112.75 0 0.64
24. Bankikodla 52 1.81 21.35 27.6 0 1.24
25. Hoskeri 134 34.52 25.98 72.03 0.13 1.34
26. Kadime 169 63.19 4.65 97.73 2.14 1.29
27. Hanehalli 237 19.57 83 131.45 0 2.98
28. Kolimanjagurni 386 292.76 1.61 37.1 39.56 14.97
29. Balale 217 93.8 3.9 68.65 25.2 25.72
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.73
Table 3.6.12
Land use / Land cover : Remote Sensing Data (3 May 2010)
Category Area (Ha)
Area (Sq. Km.)
Area (%)
Agriculture 3598.59 35.98 11.44
Barren Land 551.17 5.51 1.75
Built-up area 221.63 2.21 0.70
Creek 698.04 6.98 2.22
Fallow land 5685.42 56.85 18.07
Forest 4724.03 47.24 15.02
Mangrooves 273.48 2.73 0.87
River 1440.2 14.4 4.58
Salt-pan 202.02 2.02 0.64
Sand 38.69 0.38 0.12
Sea 12210.73 122.1 38.82
Wetland/Submerged Area 1816.44 18.16 5.77
Total 31460.44 314 100
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.74
3.7 Biological Environmental
The study area is located on shore line of Arabian Sea. Around half part of the
study area is occupied by the water. Therefore, out of 314 km2 area of study area only
about 191.91 km2 areas is having terrestrial habitat. The biological environment with
respect to flora and fauna is rich in this area. Fisheries and agriculture are major
occupation and source of livelihood of local inhabitants.
The state of Karnataka is one of the biodiversity hotspots of India. The state is
endowed with great diversity of climate, topography and soils. It spans the seacoast with
rich aquatic biodiversity and mangrove swamps at the mouths of estuaries. It harbours
verdant tropical evergreen forests, paddy fields, coconut and arecanut orchards on the
narrow coast flanked by the hills of Western Ghats.
Study area has deciduous woods, scrub jungles, fields of sugarcane, cotton,
groundnut, ragi and jowar in the Deccan Plateau. The different environmental regimes
support their own characteristic set of vegetation and animals. Karnataka supports 10%
of total tiger population and 25% of elephant population of the country.
3.7.1 Study Area
The study area comes under the Uttar Kannada district. The Western Ghats of
Uttara Kannada district is known for their dense forests which cover about 80% of the
area of the district. The total forest of Uttara Kannada is about 8, 29,151 ha and the per
capita forest is about 0.77 ha.
The forests of Uttara Kannada can be classified into 3 categories based on
density as partially open forest (20 40% density), medium density forest (40 80% density)
and closed forest (above 80% density). Based on this classification Uttara Kannada
district has about 1388.89 km2 of partially open forest, 1646.16 km2 of medium density
forest and 714.55 km2 of closed forest. Depending on phenological conditions and other
ecological factors, the forests of Uttara Kannada are broadly divided into two type’s
namely moist and dry types.
The moist type may be sub divided into evergreen, semi evergreen and moist
deciduous. The dry type can be divided into dry deciduous and thorny forest. In the moist
deciduous forest, tree species remain deciduous only for a short time. These forests have
semi evergreen species in the upper canopy and evergreen in the lower storey. In these
forests, some moist places have predominance of bamboo and on red soil Xylia is
present.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.75
3.7.2 Sampling Locations
Total 14 sampling locations were identified with reference to topography,
landuse vegetation pattern etc. The observations were made on forest and non-forest
area which includes agriculture field, catchment area, village wasteland etc. During
investigation the study area was explored for biological component.
The biological sampling locations are depicted in Fig. 3.7.1 and presented in
Table 3.7.1. Flora of the study area including common trees near Kumta is depicted in
Table 3.7.2. There are 145 Trees categorising in different families, present in Table and
actual number of observed Trees are 34. The list of common shrubs and climbers near
Kumta in the study area are depicted in Table 3.7.3.
Diverse number of climbers is present and densly populated. The list of commen
Bomboos and Canes near Kumta are depicted in Table 3.7.4. Dendrocalamus strictus
and Bambusa arundinacea are commonly observerd bomboos in study area.
3.7.2.1 Vegitation - Holistic Site
Gokarna
Gokarna also known as Dakshina Kashi is very popular with pilgrims as well as
tourists. Mythology says, Ravana kept the Athmalinga down on the ground against the
instructions and could not lift it again. Hence, the belief that Gokarna is Lord Shiva’s
permanent abode. Kotitheertha is the holy pond near the temple. Devotees usually take
bath in the pond before they enter the temple for pooja.
Om beach got its name because it resembles the shape of OM (a Hindu
religious symbol). Located around 11 km from Gokarna, Om beach is a clean and serene
beach. Foreign tourists are a regular here because of the privacy it offers. Adjacent to this
beach are Half Moon beach and Paradise beach. Kudle beach is another beach nearby
which is popular with foreigners. Vegetation of Gokarna beach is depicted in Fig. 3.7.2.
Cocao plantation
Cacao plantation is mostly observed near kumta and healthy plantation is
depicted in Fig. 3.7.3. Theobroma cacao (Mayan: kakaw, Nahuatl: Cacahuatl), also
cacao tree or cocoa tree, is a small (4 – 8 m or 15 – 26 ft tall) evergreen tree in the family
Sterculiaceae (alternatively Malvaceae), native to the tropical region of the America and
southern part of India Uttar kannada. Seeds of the plant are used to make cocoa powder
and chocolate.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.76
The tree is today found growing wild in the low foothills of the Andes at
elevations of around 200–400m (650–1300 ft) in the Amazon and Orinoco river basins. It
requires a humid climate with regular rainfall and good soil. It is an understory tree,
growing best with some overhead shade. The leaves are alternate, entire, unlobed, 10–
40 cm (4–16 in) long and 5–20 cm (2–8 in) broad. Poisonous and non-edible, they are
filled with a creamy, milky liquid and taste spicy and unpleasant.
The flowers are produced in clusters directly on the trunk and older branches;
they are small, 1–2 cm (1/2–1 in) diameter, with pink calyx. Cacao flowers are pollinated
by tiny flies, Forcipomyia midges in the order Diptera. The fruit, called a cacao pod, is
ovoid, 15–30 cm (6–12 in) long and 8–10 cm (3–4 in) wide, ripening yellow to orange, and
weighs about 500 g (1 lb) when ripe. The pod contains 20 to 60 seeds, usually called
"beans", embedded in a white pulp. Each seed contains a significant amount of fat (40–
50%) as cocoa butter. Their most noted active constituent is theobromine, a compound
similar to caffeine.
3.7.3 Survey Methodology
The structure and composition of vegetation was studied by quadrate method
Phyto-sociological association of vegetation in a community was studied. The quadrate
method includes laying down of a square sample of suitable size for detailed analysis of
vegetation. It may be a single sample spot or may be divided into several subspots. While
studying forest community quadrates, equivalent to one tenth ha (10 m x 10 m) were
used for studying Trees. The quadrates of smaller size (5m x 5m) were used and for
Shrubs and for low herbaceous community, the quadrates of still smaller size (1m x 1m)
were used (Rau and Wooten Environmental Impact Assessment Handbook, 1988 pp 7-
44). Diversity of the study area is rich but some patches of scrub vegetation are also
observed near Agnashini and Tadadi esturian coast and is shown in Fig. 3.7.4 and Fig.
3.7.5.
To characterize vegetation of the study area, the primary data was collected and
analyzed for describing the properties of vegetation with reference to species composition
and structural attributes expressed.
The density measurements indicate number of individuals of a species in a
sample spot. Species diversity is the best measure of community structure and it is
sensitive to various environmental stresses. Smaller value of Simpsons Diversity Index
(SDI) indicates healthy ecosystem and the higher value shows that an ecosystem is
under environmental stress. As we observe density is maximum in all 14 plots; which was
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.77
ploted in all 14 locations in all four directions. Simpson’s Diversity Index (SDI) ranges
from (0.09-0.2) which indicates good to medium diversity. The densities and IVI are
depicted in Table 3.7.5- 3.7.18 and SDI shown in Table 3.7.19.
3.7.4 Quadrate Study in the Study Area
The observations recorded at each quadrate helps to find the density, frequency
and dominace of the tree species in the proposed area (Fig 3.7.6 and Fig. 3.7.7).
The proposed study area is demarcated into hills and hillocks. The dominant
spcies observed are Terminalia tomentosa, Terminalia paniculata, Bombax malabarica,
Wrightia tomentosa, Anacardium occidentale, Garcinia sp, Mangifera indica and Ananas
comosus. Carissa carandas was the major shrub observed while Cassia tora, Pongamia
pinnata and Celosia argentia was the dominant herbs observed. Various grasses of
family Gramineae were also observed on the road side and in patches in the villages.
Secondary data on various aspects of biological environment was collected from various
sources to fortify the primary data.
3.7.5 Biodiversity in the Study Area
In the study area most of the land is agriculture land along with some private
forest land. Study area has been studied on the basis of its topography and distinct
biological features.
This flora comprises of several species of medicinal plants. However, there is no
commercial utilization of these plants. The chief reasons behind this is lack of awareness
about the medicinal value of these plants and accessibilty to market. The daily fuelwood
requirement of locals is satisfied from their orchards or nearby forests. Although pruning
and lopping are practiced yet very little felling is carried out. The people have a mindset of
raising plants rather than felling them. Almost every household is having a small to large
homestead garden comprising of vegetables, fruit trees and medicinal plants are depicted
in Fig. 3.7.7 - 3.7.10.
The evergreen plant species found in the study area are presented in Fig. 3.7.8
and Fig. 3.7.9 and are described below:
Evergreen species: Dipterocarpus indicus, Diospyros candolleana, Artocarpus
hirsutum, Vateria indica, Hoppea intergrifolia, Memecylon umbellatum, Mangifera indica,
Actinodaphne agustifolia, Holigarna grahmie, Calamus rotang
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.78
Semi evergreen species: Cinnamomum malabaricum, Holigarna arnottiana,
Dalbergia latifolia, Ficus spp., Pterocarpus marsupium, Aglaia roxbhurgiana.
Moist deciduous species: Terminalia paniculata, Terminalia tomentosa, Xylia
xylocarpa Careya arborea, Spondias spp., Tectona grandis, Lagerstroemia parviflora,
Dillenia pentagyna, Strychnos nuxvomica, Bambusa arundinaceae.
Dry deciduous species: Acacia catechu, Sepium insigne, Anoegissus
spp.,Bauhinia racemosa, Bombax ceiba.
Plantations: Tectona grandis, Areca catechu, Cocos nucifera, Casuarina
equisetifolia, Acacia auriculiformis, Acacia nilotica, Eucalyptus sp.
3.7.6 Medicinal Plant in the Study Area
Ayurveda says “There is no plant on the earth, which does not posses medicinal
property”, this means that each and every plant is equally important for its biological
activities, ecology and environment. The conservation of medicinal plants means every
species of plants in its actual habitat should be protected and preserved. Because of
continuous exploitation of medicinal plants from their natural habitats, it is required to
replant and rejuvenate them in other areas having similar habitat or environment. The
study area shows presence of medicinal plants. Out of 98 medicinal plants studied, 15
plant species are of medicinal value.
Forest floor of the study area is covered by herbaceous vegetation, which has
many Ayurvedic medicinal plants. In addition the area abounds in production of many
kinds of fruits, flowers, seeds and leaves.
The local people collect the medicinal plants from forest area, but they are not
dependent economically on collection and generation of economy from medicinal plants.
The list of medicinal plants is given in Table 3.7.20.
Typha Sp.
It is a monocotyledonous plant, growing exclusively in wetland areas. It is
commonly called Cat-tail in English. It is a tall reed and provides shelter for various faunal
species (Fig. 3.7.10).
Entada Sp.
Commonly known as Elephant Pods.These are the largest pods seen in India. It
is a woody climber (Liana) that grows in massive proportions. The seeds are commonly
called Sea beans or Sea hearts since they are found “riding the ocean currents of the
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.79
world” and their heart-shape. The seeds are tied to the neck of the cattle since they make
a sound when they hit each other – a substitute to cattle bells! This woody climber is fairly
common at the reserve and can be easily seen due to the obvious pods. The pods are
seen lying on forest floor (Fig. 3.7.11).
3.7.7 Wetland Flora
Schoenoplectus lateriflorus was the most widely occurring species followed by
Cyperus halpan, Geissaspis cristata. Cyperus halpan has 2 sub species C. halpan and C.
halpan subsp. juncoidesI. Species of Schoenoplectus and C. halpan are found in shallow
temporary waters, fringes of permanent water bodies and in slow running streams. G.
cristata occurred mostly in wet soils along the marshes, ponds and river banks and hence
it is common in many localities. These were associated with species of Lindernia,
Fimbristylis, Eriocaulon, etc. Deeper water was mostly harboured by species of
Nymphea, Nymphoides and other rooted floating species.
Cyperaceae had the highest number of species while other species are least
observed. They can also be observed in the total species count of all species in different
localities. Scrophulariaceae, Poaceae, and Eriocaulaceae also have a higher species
diversity and density. However, many of these species are not restricted only to wetlands,
but also to nearby moist soils.
In some of the permanent wetlands lot of perennial species were seen. Many fall
in either of two categories (annual/perennial) according to the wetland systems. Some of
the annuals may also show tendencies towards perenniality if the wetland is permanent.
Eriocaulaceae had the highest number of endemics. Weisneria triandra is an endangered
species found mostly in lateritic bogs of coastal areas. Many of the species such as
Cyperus rotundus, Spilanthes paniculata, Ammannia baccifera, etc., have high medicinal
value. They are regularly collected by the village healers for local use. Plants such as
Alternanthera sessilis, tubers of Colocasia esculenta, Eleocharis dulcis are eaten as
vegetables, Cyperus iria, C. pangorie, Fimbristylis dichotoma are used in making mats.
Wetlands have a large diversity of plants needing wetness of varying degrees. These
plants are accordingly adapted to the local availability of water and many show transition
between annual and perennial ness and also their type of growth forms. Large wetlands
are found in the district catering for the needs of both plants and humans. With rapid
urbanization and other land use, wetlands are rapidly dwindling in number and size.
Hence, wetlands such as lakes, streams, ponds (small or big), bogs, marshy grasslands,
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.80
etc. have to be conserved and managed suitably for the welfare of both wetland plants
and man.
3.7.8 Coastal Vegetation: Mangroove Vegetation
From Karwar Bay in the north to Gangolli in the south, fast-flowing rivers
descending from the Western Ghats to the Arabian Sea slow down as they reach the
coast and spread out into wide estuaries, lagoons and backwaters with extensive
mudflats and many small patches of mangrove forest. The mouths of most of these
estuaries and creeks are narrow and permanently open to the sea. In some cases, the
width of the mouth has been reduced by sand accretion. Many fish and prawn farms are
located in the vicinity of the mangrove areas.
Estuarine mangrove forest has 14 species of mangroves belonging to seven
families. Mangrove vegitation at Kumta are depicted in Fig. 3.7.12. Two main zones are
recognized: a moderately saline zone near the coast with sandy clay substrate,
dominated by Avicennia officinalis, A. marina, Kandelia candel, Rhizophora mucronata
and Sonneratia alba and a mesohaline zone further upstream, dominated by Aegiceras
corniculatum, Excoecaria agallocha, K. candel and Sonneratia caseolaris. Other common
mangrove species include Acanthus ilicifolius, Clerodendrum inerme and Rhizophora
conjugata. The backwaters support a variety of algae including Enteromorpha intestinalis,
Chaetomorpha lineum, Monostroma sp, Porphyra vietnamensis and Gracilaria verrucosa.
The coastal sand dune vegetation is dominated by Ipomoea pescaprae, Asparagus
dumosus, Spinifex littoreus, Cyperus aristatus, Sporobolus tremulus, Leucas aspera and
Casuarina equisetifolia on the foreshore and Vitex negundo, Pandanus sp, Duranta
repens Anacardium occidentale and Cocos nucifera on the backshore.
Mangroves shed and drop about seven and a half tons of leaf litter per acre per
year. The constantly-shed leaves are quickly broken down by bacteria and fungi and
released into the water, providing food for sea-life. Mangroves are the nesting grounds for
mammals, amphibians, reptiles, countless unique plants, juvenile fish and invertebrates,
sponges, barnacles, oysters, mussels, crabs, shrimps, oysters and many water birds
such as the great white heron, reddish egrets, roseate spoonbills, etc. Mangroves also
recharge underground water supplies by collecting rainwater and slowly releasing it.
Mangroves trap debris and silt, stabilizing the near shore environment and
clarifying adjacent open water, which facilitates photosynthesis in marine plants. The
fringing network on mangrove buffers natural forces such as hurricanes, wave action,
tidal change and run-off, preventing soil loss with its firm, flexible barrier. Beyond serving
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.81
as a refuge for juvenile marine organisms, mangroves filter sediment and buffer
coastlines against erosion and storm surge.
The major ecological role of mangroves is the stabilization of the shoreline and
prevention of shore erosion. The dense network of prop roots, pneumatophores and stilt
roots not only give mechanical support to the plant, but also trap the sediments. The
important ecological role of the mangroves is the detritus, which help in feeding and
provides breeding and nursery grounds for the juveniles of many commercially important
shrimps and fishes.
Mangrove swamps and other low-lying areas along the estuaries are generally
preferred for brackish water fish farming. The species cultivated are Liza parsia, L. tade,
Mugil cephalus, Chanos chanos, Penaeus monodon and Fenneropenaeus indicus. The
fishes lay their eggs in tangled roots of mangrove trees and later hatch and grow with
needed nutrients available.
Thus mangroves act as natural nursery grounds. Mangroves offer shelter to the
juveniles of a wide variety of marine organisms, notable among them being certain
species of penaeid shrimps. A linear relationship exists between shrimp production and
the size of the mangrove forest area. Mangroves give recreation to hunters, fishermen,
bird-watchers, photographers and others who treasure natural areas. Mangrove
vegetation showing pnematophores at Kumta and Gokarna site are depicted in
Fig. 3.7.13.
Mangroves serve as a critical nursery for young marine life and therefore play an
important role in the health of fisheries and the economic well-being of fishermen. The
ecosystem is also considered as most productive and biodiversity providing significant
functions in the coastal zones as buffer against erosion, storm surge and tsunamis.
Afforestation of mangrove areas on a large scale is the most urgent need of today, if the
coastal environment is to be brought back again to its earlier pristine glory.
3.7.9 Economic and Social Forestry
The estuarine systems support fisheries of great regional importance and the
mangrove forests provide a wide range of useful forest products. These resources are,
however, in imminent danger of being destroyed. The process of destruction can be
reversed only with an extensive programme of afforestation with appropriate mangrove
seedlings. Protection of the mangrove forest will not only lead to enhanced food
production, but would also create shelter belts to reduce the impact of cyclonic storms
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.82
and would help to stabilize the shore. Casurina equisetifolia have been planted by the
department of social forestry on the site of coast. Acacia auriculoformis plantation through
social forestry program is depicted in Fig. 3.7.14 (a, b, c, d).
3.7.10 Faunal Biodiversity
In the study area, around half of the part is terrestrial habitate. In this part, there
are chances of presence of wild life in the dense vegetation area, which provides good
residing sites for the insects, birds, reptiles and mammals.
3.7.10.1 Mammals
List of wild animals of Honnavar division, Kumata is presented in Table 3.7.21,
and some of the species are described here.
Langur
Classification of Semnopithecus sp. is given below: Gray langurs are large and
fairly terrestrial, inhabiting open wooded habitats and urban areas on the Indian
subcontinent. The name Hanuman langur is widely used in India and refers to the group
which was until recently considered a single species, Semnopithecus entellus. Now
seven distinct species are recognized though this is the matter of some debate. While the
species re-classification is well accepted, the common name of "Gray Langur" is not used
widely Indian naturalist circles. The animal is called hanuman langur in Hindi and Marathi.
Gray langurs are commonly observed in the study area and shown in Fig. 3.7.15.
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Mammalia
Order: Primates
Family: Cercopithecidae
Subfamily: Colobinae
Genus: Semnopithecus sp.
Species Simian entellus
Spotted Deer (Chital)
The chital or cheetal (axis axis), also known as chital deer, spotted deer or axis
deer is a deer which commonly inhabits wooded regions of India. They are found in small
numbers in Pakistan as well. It is the most common deer species in Indian forests. Its
coat is reddish fawn, marked with white spots, and its underparts are white. Its antlers,
which it sheds annually, are usually three-pronged and curve in a lyre shape and may
extend to 75 cm (2.5 ft). It stands about 90 cm (3 ft) tall at the shoulder and masses about
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.83
85 kg (187 lb). Its lifespan is around 20–30 years. On the way to Sirsi in the study area,
spoted deer (Chital) as shown in Fig. 3.7.16 was observed. Classification of spotted dear
is given below:
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Mammalia
Order: Artiodactyla
Family: Cervidae
Subfamily: Cervinae
Genus: Axis
Species: A. axis
Binomial name Axis axis
3.7.10.2 Avifauna (Birds)
List of common birds of Honnavar division, Kumata is presented in Table 3.5.21.
Hornbill (Bucerotidae)
Due to prevailing extreme climatic condition, sighting and recording the
presence of birds was restricted to only 55 species that included birds of prey and
common passarine species. On several occasions, instead of direct sighting, identification
of species through calls came as a more handy option. Although, presence of migratory
birds was not expected in pre-monsoon summer months, few riverine areas, particularly
close to Agnashini River showed signs of the presence of Cormorant that were not seen
in other places within the study area. Dominant birds at remaining sites are spotted Dove
and jungle Crow. Most common birds observed at various places are Cattle egret, Indian
parakeet, Nightjar and common Babbler. Most of these birds recorded in the study area
are omnivorous in habit preferring grains, insects and worms etc. as their principal food
items (Fig 3.7.17, a).
Common Swift (Apus apus)
It is a small bird, superficially similar to the Barn Swallow or House Martin. It is,
however, completely unrelated to those passerine species, since swifts are in the
separate order Apodiformes. The resemblances between the groups are due to
convergent evolution reflecting similar life styles. The scientific name comes from the
Greek απους, apous, meaning "without feet". These birds have very short legs which they
use only for clinging to vertical surfaces (hence the German name Mauersegler, literally
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.84
meaning "wall-glider"). They never settle voluntarily on the ground (Fig 3.7.17 b).
Classification is given below:
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Apodiformes
Family: Apodidae
Genus: Apus
Species: A. apus
Binomial Name Apus apus
Large Egret
The Great Egret (Ardea alba), also known as the Great White Egret or Common
Egret or (now not in use) Great White Heron is a large, widely-distributed egret.
Distributed across most of the tropical and warmer temperate regions of the world, in
southern Europe it is rather localized. In North America it is more widely distributed, and it
is ubiquitous across the Sun Belt of the United States and in the rainforests of South
America. It is sometimes confused with the Great White Heron in Florida, which is a white
morph of the closely related Great Blue Heron (A. herodias). The name Great White
Heron has occasionally been used to refer to the Great Egret (Fig 3.7.17 c).
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Coraciiformes
Family: Ardeidae
Genus: Ardea
Species: A. alba
Binomial name Ardea alba
Little cormorant
The Little Cormorant (Microcarbo niger) (Fig 3.7.17 d) is a member of the
cormorant family of seabirds. It breeds in tropical South Asia from Southern Pakistan
through India and Sri Lanka. It is resident but undertakes some limited seasonal
movements. Originally described by French ornithologist Louis Jean Pierre Vieillot in
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.85
1817, this is a common and widespread bird species. It breeds in freshwater wetlands
and on coasts. 3–5 eggs are laid in a nest in a tree or long grass.
This is a small cormorant, 55 cm in length. Its rectangular head profile and short
bill are distinct from the somewhat larger Indian Cormorant. Little Cormorant is mainly
glossy black in the breeding season, with white head plumes and a whitish throat. The
wing coverts are silvery, and it has a longish tail. The sexes are similar, but non-breeding
adults and juveniles are browner and lack the head plumes. The Little Cormorant can
dive to considerable depths, but usually feeds in shallow water. It frequently brings prey
to the surface.
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Pelecaniformes
Family: Phalacrocoracidae
Genus: Microcarbo
Species: M. niger
Binomial name Microcarbo niger
Black Headed Ibis
The Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) is a species of wading
bird of the ibis family Threskiornithidae which breeds in South Asia and Southeast Asia
from Pakistan to India. It builds a stick nest in a tree and lays 2-4 eggs. It occurs in
marshy wetlands inland and on the coast, where it feeds on various fish, frogs and other
water creatures, as well as on insects.
Adults are typically 75 cm long and white-plumaged, with some greyer areas on
the wings. The bald head, the neck and legs are black. The thick curved bill is dusky
yellow. Sexes are similar, but juveniles have whiter necks and a black bill (Fig 3.7.17, e).
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Pelecaniformes
Family: Threskiornithidae
Genus: Threskiornis
Species: T. melanocephalus
Binomial name Threskiornis melanocephalus
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.86
Cattle Egret
The Cattle Egret (Bubulcus ibis) (Fig 3.7.17 f). is a cosmopolitan species of
heron (family Ardeidae) found in the tropics, subtropics and warm temperate zones. It is
the only member of the monotypic genus Bubulcus, although some authorities regard its
two subspecies as full species. Despite the similarities in plumage to the egrets of the
genus Egretta, it is more closely related to the herons of Ardea. Originally native to parts
of Asia, it has undergone a rapid expansion in its distribution and successfully colonised
much of the rest of the world.
It is a stocky white bird adorned with buff plumes in the breeding season which
nests in colonies, usually near bodies of water and often with other wading birds. The
nest is a platform of sticks in trees or shrubs. Unlike most other herons, it feeds in
relatively dry grassy habitats, often accompanying cattle or other large mammals, since it
catches insect and small vertebrate prey disturbed by these animals. Some populations
of the Cattle Egret are migratory and others show post-breeding dispersal. The adult
Cattle Egret has few predators, but birds or mammals may raid its nests, and chicks may
be lost to starvation, calcium deficiency or disturbance from other large birds. This
species removes ticks and flies from cattle, but it can be a safety hazard at airfields, and
has been implicated in the spread of tick-borne animal diseases.
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Chordata
Class: Aves
Order: Ciconiiformes
Family: Ardeidae
Genus: Bubulcus
Species: B. ibis
Binomial name Bubulcus ibis
Based on the information obtained from the forest department the wildlife like
Bos gaurus, Canis aureus, Cervus unicolor, Felis bengalensis, Felis chaus and Herpestes
auropunctuatus have been recorded. Mangrove vegetation provides shelter for the
nesting of bird and the hiding sites for shrimps and aquatic insects.
3.7.10.3 Insect
Large diversity of insect observed in North Kannada district of Karnataka and
some of them are readily available in the study area including Kumta and Near by Tadadi.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.87
Termite species
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Arthropoda
Class: Insecta
Subclass : Pterygota
Infraclass : Neoptera
Superorder : Dictyoptera
Order Isoptera
The termites are a group of eusocial insects usually classified at the taxonomic
rank of order Isoptera (but see also taxonomy below). Along with ants and some bees
and wasps which are all placed in the separate order Hymenoptera, termites divide labour
among gender lines, produce overlapping generations and take care of young
collectively. Termites mostly feed on dead plant material, generally in the form of wood,
leaf litter, soil, or animal dung, and about 10% of the estimated 4,000 species (about
2,600 taxonomically known) are economically significant as pests that can cause serious
structural damage to buildings, crops or plantation forests. Termites are major
detritivores, particularly in the subtropical and tropical regions, and their recycling of wood
and other plant matter is of considerable ecological importance.
As eusocial insects, termites live in colonies that, at maturity, number from
several hundred to several million individuals. Colonies use decentralised, self-organised
systems of activity guided by swarm intelligence to exploit food sources and
environments that could not be available to any single insect acting alone. A typical
colony contains nymphs (semi-mature young), workers, soldiers, and reproductive
individuals of both genders, sometimes containing several egg-laying queens. Termites
Hills are observed on the way to Kumta are depicted in a Fig. 3.7.18 (a, b).
Camponotus compressus
A big ant, seen throughout Uran, several colonies were located in tree holes.
These workers were seen feeding on Prosopis sp. inflorescence. It is a species that
indicates a disturbed habitat. It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.19.
Tramea limbata (Black Marsh Trotter)
A dragonfly hard to miss, prefers perching high over a water body to get a better
view, scanning for prey. It is known to be active throughout the day. Only one individual
was seen far off in the marshes (Fig. 3.7.20).
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.88
Bark Mantis
Although visible on a leaf, is difficult to spot when resting on a bark. The Mantids
have not only mastered the art of hiding, they are the Jack of all trades. Mantids not only
camouflage and remain still; they also mimic the movements of leaves or branches
swinging in air. They rock and roll as per the leaves to match that exact shape and action.
This has given them a heightened chance of finding prey (Fig. 3.7.21).
Mantis Nymph
A Mantis Nymph rests on Calotropis gigantia flower. The nymphs are imago of
the adults, but lack wings and reproductive glands, some nymphs also mimic ants. They
feed on a variety of insects such as butterflies (even the unpalatable ones!), beetles, bugs
and ones that are considered pests too! It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.22.
3.7.10.4 Butterfly
Butterflies are good bioindicators of pollution. They sence air pollution and noise
pollution with a particular range and indicates some behavioral changes. Some of the
observed butterflies during field survey in the study area are mentioned below:
Vanessa cardui (Painted Lady)
It is a nymphalid that has global distribution. Only one individual was seen sitting
on the ground and had a weak flight. It is commonly seen during pre-monsoon and
monsoon period (Fig. 3.7.23).
Colotis amata (Small Salmon Arab)
It is a pieridae butterfly, associated with the mangroves. Many individuals were
seen near mangrove swamps. This individual was seen laying eggs on a mangrove
sapling. It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.24. The hotspots of plants and animal of Uttar
Kannada district is given in Table 3.7.23.
3.7.11 Agriculture
The chief agricultural crops in the order of importance are Paddy (Oryza sativa),
Coconut (Cocos nucifera), Ragi (Elesusine corocana), and in the interior gardens,
Betelnut (Areca catechu), Black pepper (Piper nigrum) and Cardamoms (Eleteria
cardamum). Paddy is the preinciple crop in the study area. Sandalwood carving is a
famous craft for which this tract is well known. These workers are known as Gudigars and
they carve sandalwood ivory, abony, Heddi etc., with exquisite skill. The sandalwood
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.89
carving has received international recognition in exhibitions held abroad. Forest
department supplies sandalwood at concessional rates to these artisans.
The requirement of the population consists of small timber for house
construction and other agricultural purposes. They need large quantities of brushwood,
thorns, creepers and green leaves (Soppu) for manuring their gardens and dry leaves
(darku) for rice lands. The grazing requirement of the cattle population is adequately met
by the existing minor forests and unclosed forests organized under the Plan.
3.7.11.1 Marketable Produce
The marketable produce consists of timber, firewood, bamboos and minor forest
produce such as catechu (Katha), honey and wax, shigekai pods, Hulgal Seeds, Tumri
leaves, Wild pepper, Dalchinni bark and canes, halamaddi and cashew nut etc. The most
common species of timber extracted are teak, sissum, honne, matti, nandi, kalam, kindal,
heddi, bharangi, surhonne, dhaman, neral, tare, bilakambi, and sagadi. Minor Forest
Produce is sold either annually or biannually. The system of standing sale is done away
and is replaced by departmental logging where in all the material is brought to depot and
sold in the auction sale.
3.7.11.2 Agricultural Customs
The whole track dealt with is interspersed with rice cultivation and beautiful
gardens of areca in which cardamom and pepper vine are also grown. Alush green rice
field is shown in Fig. 3.7.25. The rice is cultivated both under dry and wet types, the latter
being raised mainly in the valleys where there is perennial supply of water. Sugar cane is
also grown to some extent. The fertile valleys with ever flowing streamlets have been
converted into pretty areca gardens where in banana; cardamom and pepper are also
cultivated. The chief agricultural produce of the tract is rice, areca nut, pepper and
cardamom. This tract is the home of garden lands of North Karnataka District. The
Garcinia vegetation was observed at Morba village. At Hinegutti village the pine apple
garden were observed by NEERI team and riped jackfruit tree were observed at
Yennomodi village.
The richer class in villages builds houses using timber rather lavishly. The chief
species used are Lagerstroemia lanceolata. Terminalia tomentosa, Artocarpus hirsuta
and Artocarpus heterophyllus. Other wants of the people are small quantities of round
timber for huts, cow-sheds and other materials for agricultural implements, fire-wood for
domestic use, bamboos, thorns and fencing posts for fencing purposes and grass for
thatching and feeding the cattle. Another important requirement of the gardeners is soppu
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.90
for leaf manure. Minor forest produce like stones, earth, honey, myrobalans etc. are also
needed to a limited extent.
3.7.12 Fisheries Resources
Uttara Kannada District has a coastal line of 144 Km endowed with rich marine
resources. The fish are landed through Purse-seiners, trawlers and other mechanized
boats. The fish production plays a very important role in the district economy. There are
14-minor ports in the district. There are main 16 - fishing centers 5 fishing harbors in the
district. Mackerels, Sardines, Prawns and other export potential fishes are found in
abundance in sea. Shrimp culture has become a very good activity in the coastal area.
The fishes are marketed both inside and outside district. About 10% are utilised
for manure purposes, for coconut and other crops. The number of schemes for the
development of fishing industry is in operation in the district. The annual average fish
catching in the district is 47800 Tonnes and inland fishing is about 79 Tonnes. The details
fish catching, fishing centres and fisheries related industry.
Loligo species
Scientific Classification
Kingdom: Animalia
Phylum: Mollusca
Class: Cephalopoda
Subclass : Coleoidea
Order : Teuthida
Superorder : Dictyoptera
Family : Loliginidae
Genus : Loligo
Is a genus of squids and one of the most representative and widely distributed
group of myopsid squids.The genus was first described by Jean Baptiste Lamarck in
1798. However, the name had been used earlier than Lamarck (Schneider, 1784;
Linnaeus, 1758) and might even have been used by Pliny.
In the early nineteenth century, this generic name was often used as a grouping
for all true squids.Several species are commercially exploited, such as Loligo vulgaris and
Loligo plei. Several species, for example Loligo vulgaris, are noted for being attracted to
night light; they are therefore fished using different light attraction methods. Loligo
species are observed near Gokarna beach is depicted in a (Fig. 3.7.26 a, b).
Tadadi and Kumta are the major fish landing centres in the study area
(Fig. 3.7.27 a, b). The fish production at both the landing centres is given in the
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.91
Table 3.7.24 and Table 3.7.25. Trash fishes are used for making poultry food and
manure Fig. 3.7.28. The dominant fish species observed at market place of Kumata are
Oil Sardines, Mackerels, Carrangids, Pomfrets and Seer fishes Fig. 3.7.29.
At Kumta landing centre, the fisheries production was 3265 tonnes in the year
2006-2007, while at Tadadi landing centre the fisheries production was 389.25 tonnes
respectively.
3.7.13 Gaonkar Mines
As observed in the field survey, nearly 500 m from the tadadi jetty; sea shell
mining is presently operated by M/s Gaonkar. The basic principle behind this mining is to
drain sea shells and molluscan species found near seashore as raw material.
Crushers are placed near seashore; once shells are put in the crushers; by
mechanism of crushing, it separates dead shells on one side and dead bulbus excreata
on other side. Dead shelll are used to prepare sweet lime used in pan, panmasala,
gutakha and bulbus excreta used as poultry food, fish food. These mine players did that
voraciously; it will deplate marine biota. Therefore, these practices which damage the
environment should be stopped to protect coastal area at and around the study area.
Near the jetty at Kumta the Gaonkar mine is located (Fig. 3.7.30 a, b) which
drains the sea shells and crush them taking out the flesh and shells separated. The flesh
is used for making fish and poultry food and the shells were used for making of sweet
lime.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.92
Indicates Sampling locations.
Blue Line- Indiactes Mangroove Patch
Fig. 3.7.1: Biological Sampling Locations in the Study Area
TADADI JETTY
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.93
Fig. 3.7.2: Vegetation near the Om Beach at Gokarna
Fig. 3.7.3: Cocao Plantation (Kumta)
Fig.3.7.4: Scrub Vegetation near
Agnashini River
Fig.3.7.5: Scrub Vegetation near
Tadadi Sea Coast
Fig. 3.7.6: Quadrate Study at Kumta
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.94
Fig. 3.7.7: Quadrate Study at Tadadi
Fig. 3.7.8: Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Kumta Road
Fig. 3.7.9: Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Sirsi site
Fig. 3.7.10: Medicinal Plant
(Typha sp.)
Fig. 3.7.11: Medicinal Plant
(Entada Sp.)
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.95
(1)Acanthus ilicifolius (2) Avicennia alba (3) Aavicennia
marina (4) Aavicennia
officinalis
(5) Aegiceras corniculatum
(6)Bruguiera cylindrica
(7)Bruguiera gymnorrhiza
(8) Ceriops decandra
(9)Ceriops tagal (10 Excoecaria Agallocha
(11) Kandelia candel
(12) Rhizophora apiculata
(13) Rhizophora mucronata
(14)Salicornia brachiata 15)Dorries trifolia (16)Sesuvium
portulacastrum
(17)Sonneratia alba (18)Sonneratia apetala
(19)Suaeda maritima
(20)Suaeda nudiflora
Fig. 3.5.12(a): Mangroves Plant Species at Tadadi
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.96
Fig. 3.7.12(b): Mangrooves Vegetation Fig .3.7.13 : Mangrooves Vegetation Gokarna
(a) Acacia auriculoformis (b) Pineapple Vegetation
(C) Jack-fruit Vegetation (d) Areca Nut and Pepper
Fig. 3.7.14: Social Forestry Programme (a, b, c, d)
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.97
Fig. 3.7.15: Semnopithecus sp. (Langur)
Fig. 3.7.16: Spotted Deer
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.98
(a) Hornbill sp. (b) Common Swift
(c) Large Egret sp. (d) Little Cormorant
(e) Black Headed Ibis (f) Cattle Egret
Fig. 3.7.17: Common Birds observed in the Study Area (a, b, c, d, e, f)
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.99
Fig. 3.7.18 (a): Termite Hills Fig. 3.7.18 (b) Termite sp.
Fig. 3.7.2.19: Camponotus Compressus Fig. 3.7.20: Tramea Limbata
Fig. 3.7.21: Bark Mantis Fig. 3.7.22: Mantis Nymph
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.100
Fig. 3.7.23: Vanessa Cardui (Butter fly) Fig. 3.7.24: Colotis Amata (Butter fly)
Fig 3.7.25: Paddy Field
(a) (b)
Fig.3.7.26: Loligo sp. (Gokarna beach)
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.101
(a) (b)
Fig.3.7.27: Fishes Collection at Tadadi Jetty
Fig.3.7.28: Trash Fishes used for
Manure
Fig.3.7.29: Species of Fishes
Observed at Kumta Market
Fig. 3.7.30 (a): Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine
Fig. 3.7.30 (b): Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.102
Table 3.7.1
Details of Bological Sampling Locations with Agricultrural Crop
Sr. No.
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
(In Feet)
Sampling Location
Agricultural Description
1. N 140 32.8’ 33”
E 740 23.5’ 04” 23 Morba
Coconut, Areca nut, Mango Field
2. N 140 33.1’ 01”
E 740 22.6’ 39” 242 Mithal Gazani Coconut, Areca nut
3. N 140 33.4’ 32”
E 740 23.2’ 63” 401 Hiregutti Rice
4. N 140 31.2’ 63”
E 740 20.7’ 35” 9 Gokarna Rice, Areca nut,
5. N 140 31.4’ 87”
E 740 24.1’ 94” 205 Bargi Gazal Rice Field
6. N 140 33.7’ 26”
E 740 21.4’ 00” 411 Hittal Makki Rice Field
7 N 140 30.2’ 02”
E 740 23.8’ 79” 4 Kimmani
Arecanut, Coconut, Mango, Gauua banana etc.
8 N 140 34.2’ 25”
E 740 23.3’ 04” 13 Yennamati
Rice
Coconut, Mango
9 N 140 34.8’ 11”
E 740 24.2’ 26” 273 Korebail Areca nut, Coconut, Banana
10 N 140 32.5’ 90”
E 740 24.2’ 03” 46 Khurigadda Rice, Suger cane, Grin, Ragi
11 N 140 34.7’ 72”
E 740 19.9’ 77” 8 Haskari Rice, Mango
12 N 140 34.5’ 55”
E 740 22.6’ 03” 48 Balole
Rice, Coconut, Arecanut, Mango, Banana etc.
13 N 140 30.6’ 51”
E 740 25.1’ 67” 45 Yettinbail
Rice, Coconut, Jatropha gossipifolia, Ricinus Comunis,
14 N 140 34.5’ 69”
E 740 22.4’ 69” 27 Madangeri
Rice, Vegetable, Cabbage, Ragi
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.103
Table 3.7.2
List of Forest Flora - Common Trees of Honnavar Division (Kumta)
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name
1 *Acacia catechu Mimosaceae Kachu
2 Actinodaphne angustifolia (Actinodaphne hookeri)
Lauraceae Haggodgimara, Tudgensu
3 Adenanthera pavonina Mimosaceae Manjuti
4 Ailanthus malabarica Simaroubaceae Guggaldhup
5 Albizzia lebbeck Mimosaceae Sirsul
6 Albizzia odoratissima Mimosaceae Bilkambi, Godhunse
7 *Albizzia procera Mimosaceae Bellati, Bili-bage
8 Albizzia stipulata (Albizzia chinensis)
Mimosaceae Bagana, Kal-bage
9 Alseodaphne semecarpifolia Lauraceae Mashe, Neltare
10 *Alstonia scholaris Apocyanaceae Satwin,Maddale
11 Amoora canarana Meliaceae Pushikmara
12 *Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae Godambi, Kaju
13 Anthocephalus cadamba Rubiaceae Kadwal, Kadamba
14 Antiaris toxicaria Moraceae Ajjanpatte
15 Antidesma bunius Euphorbiaceae Jondhri
16 Aporosa lendleyana Euphorbiaceae Challe,Bidchella,Sali
17 Ardisia humilis Myrsinaceae Chitmitle-munegida, Havalad
18 Arenga wightii Arecaceae Dadasal
19 Artocarpus gomezianus (Artocarpus lakoocha)
Moraceae Wate
20 Artocarpus heterophyllus (Artocarpus integrifolius)
Moraceae Halasu
21 *Artocarpus hirsutus Moraceae Hebbalasu
22 Barringtonia acutangula Barringtoniaceae Mavinakubia, Hole-kauva
23 *Bauhinia racemosa Caesalpiniaceae Banni, Apta
24 *Bauhinia variegate Caesalpiniaceae Kanchan, Kanraj
25 Bischofia javanica Euphorbiaceae Hoka
26 *Bombax ceiba (Salmalia malabaricum)
Bombacaceae Bural
27 *Bridelia retusa Euphorbiaceae Mul-honne
28 Buchanania lanzan Anacardiaceae Char
29 Butea monosperma (Butea frondosa)
Fabaceae Muttal, Palas
30 Calophyllum apetalum (Calophyllum wightianum)
Clusiaceae Bobbi
31 Calophyllum elatum (Calophyllum tomentosum)
Clusiaceae Surhonne
32 Canarium strictum Burseraceae Rala-dhupa, Guggala-dhupa
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.104
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name
33 Caralllia brachiata (Caralllia integerrima)
Rhizophoraceae Andmurugal
34 Careya arborea Lecythidaceae Kumba, Kaval
35 Caryota urens Arecaceae Baini
36 Casaeria elliptica (Casaeria tomentosa)
Flacourtiaceae Tordal, Bili-oobina
37 *Cassia fistula Caesalpiniaceae Kakke
38 *Casuarina equisetifolia Casuarinaceae Gali-mara
39 Chionanthus malabarica (Linociera malabarica)
Oleaceae Akkarkal, Maniki-mara
40 Chukrasia tabularis Meliaceae Lal-deodar
41 Cinnamomum verum (Cinnamomum zeylanicum)
Lauraceae Dalchinni
42 *Cordia dichotoma (Cordia myxa)
Cordiaceae Bheku,Chella
43 Cordia macleodii Cordiaceae Hadang
44 Cordia wallichii Cordiaceae Bhurgund, Dhiwar
45 Corypha unbraculifera Arecaceae Tali-palm
46 *Dalbergia latifolia Fabaceae Sisum,Beete
47 *Dillenia pentagyna Dilleniaceae Kanagal
48 Dimocarpus longan (Nephelium longana)
Sapindaceae Kankindali,Kendale
49 Diospyros assimilis (Diospyros ebanum)
Ebenaceae Karimara, Ebony
50 Diospyros buxifolia (Diospyros microphylla)
Ebenaceae Dhula, Kuri-kunchal
51 Diospyros candolleana Ebenaceae Karigida
52 *Diospyros Montana Ebenaceae Tendu,Tupra
53 Diospyros paniculata Ebenaceae Kari-kumar
54 Dysoxylum malabaricum Meliaceae Bilideodar
55 *Ervatamia heyneana (Tabernaemontana heyneana)
Apocyanaceae Nagarkuda
56 *Erythrina variegata (Erythrina indica)
Fabaceae Pangara
57 Evodia lunu-ankenda (Evodia roxburghiana)
Rutaceae Kobale
58 Ficus arnottiana Moraceae Pair, Patharpod
59 *Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Aladamara
60 Ficus drupacea var.pubescens (Ficus mysorensis)
Moraceae Goli, Chungal
61 Ficus exasperata (Ficus asperrima)
Moraceae Khargas, Kharwal
62 *Ficus racemosa (Ficus glomerata)
Moraceae Atti
63 *Ficus religiosa Moraceae Arale,Pipal
64 Ficus tsjahela (tjakala') Moraceae Kal, Kelva
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.105
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name
65 Firmiana colorata (Sterculia colorata)
Sterculiaceae Bharikoi, Khavas, Khanshi
66 Flacourtia indica (Flacourtia romantchi)
Flacourtiaceae Hanumanki
67 Flacourtia Montana Flacourtiaceae Hansampige, Gudda
68 *Garcinia indica Clusiaceae Bhirand,Murgal
69 *Gardenia resinifera (Gardenia lucida)
Rubiaceae Decamali
70 Glochidion hohenackeri (Glochidion ellipticum)
Euphorbiaceae Hirachelli, Sullai
71 Glochidion velutinum Euphorbiaceae Salaimara, Showra
72 Gmelina arborea Verbenaceae Shivani
73 *Grewia tiliifolia Tiliaceae Dhaman
74 *Haldina cordifolia (Adina cordifolia)
Rubiaceae Heddi
75 Heterophyragma quadrilocularis (Heterophyragma roxburghii)
Bignoniaceae Adavi-nugge
76 Holigarna caustica Anacardiaceae Holigeru
77 Holoptelia integrifolia Ulmaceae Tapasi
78 Hopea wightiana Dipterocarpaceae Haiga
79 Hydnocarpus laurifolia (Hydnocarpus wightiana)
Flacourtiaceae Surti,Toratti
80 Hymenodictyon obovatum Rubiaceae Bogi, Hiremara
81 Knema attenuata (Myristica attenuata)
Myristicaceae Raktamara
82 *Kydia calycina Malvaceae Bhendi
83 *Lagerstroemia microcarpa (Lagerstroemia lanceolata)
Lythraceae Nandi,Nana
84 Lagerstroemia reginae (Lagerstroemia flos-reginae)
Lythraceae Hole-dasal
85 Lannea coromandelica (Odina wodier)
Anacardiaceae Gojjal
86 Lophopetalum wightianum Celastraceae Banate
87 Macaranga tomentosa (Macaranga peltata)
Euphorbiaceae Chandkal
88 Madhuca longifolia var, latifolia (Bassia latifolia)
Sapotaceae Mahua, Ippe
89 Mallotus philippensis Euphorbiaceae Kum-kum
90 Mammea nagassarium (Mesua ferrea)
Clusiaceae Nagasampige
91 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Mavu
92 Meyna laxiflora (Vangueria spinosa)
Rubiaceae Mulkare,Gobargalli, Gund-kare
93 Miliusa tomentosa (Saccopetalum tomentosum)
Annonaceae Womb, Niranji
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.106
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name
94 Mimusops elengii Sapotaceae Bakul
95 *Mitragyna parvifolia Rubiaceae Kalam
96 Myristica malabarica Myristicaceae Rampatre
97 Neolitsea zeylanica (Litsea zeylanica)
Lauraceae Bili-nisangi
98 Nyctanthes arbor-tristis Oleaceae Parijata
99 *Pandanus furcatus Pandanaceae Ran-keura
100 Persea macrantha (Machilus macrantha)
Lauraceae Gulmav
101 *Phyllanthus emblica (Emblica officinalis)
Euphorbiaceae Nelli
102 Piliostigma foveolatum (Bauhinia foveolata)
Caesalpiniaceae Basavanapad
103 Piliostigma malabaricum (Bauhinia malabarica)
Caesalpiniaceae Sadloo
104 *Polyalthia coffeiodes Annonaceae Maragowri
105 *Pongamia pinnata (Pongamia glabra)
Fabaceae Hulgal
106 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae Honne
107 Pterospermum acerifolium Sterculiaceae Kanakchampa,
Karmkara
108 Pterospermum heyneanum Sterculiaceae Kesali, Oopin
109 Radermachera xylocarpa Bignoniaceae Genasinga
110 Salix tetrasperma Salicaceae Wallunj
111 Saraca asoka (Saraca indica) Caesalpiniaceae Ashoka
112 *Schleichera oleasa (Schleichera trijuga)
Sapindaceae Sagadi
113 Semecarpus anacardium Anacardiaceae Geru
114 Spondias acuminate Anacardiaceae Kadamba
115 Spondias pinnata (Spondias mangifera)
Anacardiaceae Amte
116 Sterculia guttata Sterculiaceae Happu-savaga
117 *Sterculia urens Sterculiaceae Kandol,Bhutale
118 Sterculia villosa Sterculiaceae Savage,Chauri
119 Stereospermum personatum (Stereospermum chelanoides)
Bignoniaceae Karasing, Mukarti
120 Streblus asper Moraceae Mitli, Punje
121 Strychnos nux – vomica Loganiaceae Kasarka,Kajra,Kasaga
122 Syzigium caryophyllatum Myrtaceae Kunt-neral
123 Syzigium hemisphericum (Jambosa hemispherica)
Myrtaceae Panneral
124 Syzigium zeylanicum (Eugenia spicata)
Myrtaceae Nurkal
125 Tectona grandis Verbenaceae Sagwani, Tegu, Saga
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.107
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name
126 Terminalia alata (Terminalia tomentosa)
Combretaceae Matti
127 Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae Hole-matti
128 Terminalia bellirica (Terminalia bellerica)
Combretaceae Tare, Ghoting
129 Terminalia chebula Combretaceae Harda
130 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae Kindal
131 Tetrameles nudiflora Datiscaceae Jarmal, Bondale
132 Toona ciliata (Cedrela toona) Meliaceae Deodari
133 Trema orientalis Ulmaceae Ranmbada, Kaposhi, Kargol
134 Trewia polycarpa (Trewia nudiflora)
Euphorbiaceae Katkumbla, Tumri, Shillowri
135 Vateria indica Dipterocarpaceae Dhupa
136 Vitex altissima Verbenaceae Bharanagi
137 Vitex leuocoxylon Verbenaceae Hole-lakki
138 Wrightia tomentosa Apocyanaceae Bilekudegida
139 Xantolis tomentosa (Sideroxylon tomentosum)
Sapotaceae Kumpoli,Gomale, Suma-hale
140 Xeromphis uliginosa (Randia uliginosa)
Rubiaceae Pendari, Kare
141 Xerompis spinosa (Randia dumetorum)
Rubiaceae Kat-mangri
142 Xylia xylocarpa (Xylia dolabriformis)
Mimosaceae Jamba
143 Zanthoxylum rhetsa (Fagara badrunga)
Rutaceae Jummana-mara,Triphal
144 Zizyphus mauritiana (Zizyphus jujuba)
Rhamnaceae Bore
145 Zizyphus xylopyrus Rhamnaceae Godachi, Gorwi, Mullu-kare
Note: Botanical names in parentheses are old botanical names.
Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.108
Table 3.7.3
List of Common Shrubs and Climbers of Honnavar division (Kumta)
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name Habit
1 Acacia pennata Mimosaceae Shambi Climber
2 Acacia sinuata (Acacia concinna)
Mimosaceae Shigekai Climber
3 Adhatoda zeylanica (Adhatoda vasica)
Acanthaceae Adsal, Adsoge Shrub
4 Allophyllus cobbe (Allophyllus rheedii)
Sapindaceae Titwi Shrub
5 Apama siliquosa (Bragantia wallichii)
Aristolochiaceae Mirsagni Shrub
6 Ardisia humilis Myrsinceae Havalad Shrub
7 Atalantia racemosa Rutaceae Adavi-nimba, Kan-limbu
Shrub
8 Butea parviflora (Spatholobus roxburghii)
Fabaceae Phulsun Climber
9 Callicarpa tomentosa (Callicarpa lanata)
Verbenaceae Towdatti,Mardi,Togdatta
Shrub
10 Calycopteris floribunda Combretaceae Upsi,Bilivadi Climber
11 Carissa carandas Apocyanaceae Caranda, Kawali Shrub
12 Carvia callosa (Strobilanthus callosus)
Acanthaceae Karvi Shrub
13
Clerodendrum viscosum (Clerodendron infortunatum)
Verbenaceae Bhandira, Kari Shrub
14 Colebrookea oppositifolia
Lamiaceae Tuggigida Shrub
15 Combretum latifolium (Combretum extensum)
Combretaceae Piloka Shrub
16 Crotalaria berteroana (Crotalaria fulva)
Fabaceae Shrub
17 Croton gibsonianus Euphorbiaceae Shrub
18 Cryptolepis buchananii Periplocaceae Kurubuntanballi Climber
19 Dalbergia volubilis Fabaceae Kebbali Shrub
20 Dendrophthoe falcata (Loranthus longiflorus)
Loranthaceae Banda Shrub
21 Desmodium triquetrum Fabaceae Antbarlu Shrub
22 Diploclisia glauscens (Cocculus macrocarpus)
Menispereaceae Vetyal Climber
23 Entada pursaetha (Entada scandens)
Mimosaceae Dodda-ganapi, Gardul
Climber
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.109
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name Habit
24 Flemingia macrophylla (Flemingia congesta)
Fabaceae Dowpowla Shrub
25 Flemingia strobilifera (Flemingia bracteata)
Fabaceae Kankuli Shrub
26 Glycosmis mauritiana Rutaceae Manikyan Shrub
27 Gnetum ula (Gnetum scandens)
Gnetaceae Kadakana-balli Climber
28 Helecteres isora Sterculiaceae Kempu-kowri Shrub
29 Holarrhena antidysenterica
Apocyanaceae Kuda,Koodsalu, Korchu
Shrub
30 Ichnocarpus frutescens Apocyanaceae Gorviballi Climber
31 Indegofera cassioides (Indegofera pulchella)
Fabaceae Chimnati Shrub
32 Indegofera constricta Fabaceae Shrub
33 Ipomoea illustris (Ipomoea companulata)
Convolvulaceae Kuginiballi Climber
34 Ixora coccinea Rubiaceae Gudde - dasal Shrub
35 Ixora elongata Rubiaceae Shrub
36 Ixora lanceolaria Rubiaceae Shrub
37 Ixora nigricans Rubiaceae Lokhandi Shrub
38 Ixora polyantha Rubiaceae Climber
39 Jasminum malabaricum Oleaceae Tirgal Shrub
40 Jasminum sambac Oleaceae Mallige Shrub
41
Lantana camara var.aculeata
(Lantana camara)
Verbenaceae Chadurangi Shrub
42 Leea indica (Leea sambucina)
Leeaceae Jini, Midichi Shrub
43 Melastoma malabathricum
Melastomaceae Ankerki, Nankeri Shrub
44 Memecylon umbellatum (Memecylon edule)
Melastomaceae Harchart, Archeti, Lakonde
Shrub
45 Mucuna pruriens (Mucuna prurita)
Fabaceae Hosagunigida, Turachigida
Shrub
46 Murraya koenigii Rutaceae Karibevu, Karhepah
Shrub
47 Murraya paniculata (Murraya exotica)
Rutaceae Pandri,Kauli Shrub
48 Musseanda glabrata (Musseanda frondosa)
Rubiaceae Pathri, Hashy-gida Shrub
49 Phanera vahlii Caesalpiniaceae Chambuli,Chambu Climber
50 Piper nigrum Piperaceae Kari-menasu Climber
51 Psychotria dalzelli Rubiaceae Dutiyl, Yalakki, Shrub
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.110
Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name Habit
Shivan
52 Smilax zeylanica (Smilax macrophylla)
Smilacaceae Ghotaval Climber
53 Solanum gigantium Solanaceae Kutri Shrub
54 Thespesia lampas (Hibiscus lampas)
Malvaceae Ronbhandy Shrub
55 Ventilago denticulata (Ventilago calyculata)
Rhamnaceae Gapsandiballi, Kuriyadi
Climber
56
Vitex negundo var.negundo
(Vitex negundo)
Verbenaceae Lakki Shrub
57 Vitis indica Vitaceae Huttigeballi Climber
58 Wagatea spicata Caesalpiniaceae Wagati, Huliganji Shrub
59 Woodfordia fruticosa (Woodfordia floribunda)
Lythraceae Dhauri,Neru,Dhaiphal
Shrub
60 Zizyphus oenoplia Rhamnaceae Paragi Shrub
61 Zizyphus rugosa Rhamnaceae Sunburli Shrub
Note: Botanical names in the parentheses refer to old names
Table 3.7.4
List of Common Bamboos and Canes - Honnavar Division near Kumta
Sr.
No. Botanical Name Family Local name
Canes
1 Calamus brandisii (Calamus pseudo-tenuis) Arecaceae Halbetta
2 Calamus thwietesii var. thwietesii(Calamus thwietesii)
Arecaceae Handibetta
Bamboos
1 Bambusa arundinacea Poaceae Dowga,Bidregala
2 Dendrocalamus strictus Poaceae Shib, Medar
3 Oxytenanthera monostigma Poaceae Chiva
4 Ochlandra scriptoria (Ochlandra rheedii) Poaceae Wate
Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.111
Table 3.7.5
Characteristics of Trees - Morba Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Mangifera indica 300 4.3 0.6 11.5 0.015 7.0 23
2 Samanea saman 1200 17.4 0.8 15.4 0.033 15.8 49
3 Acacia auriculoformis 600 8.7 0.6 11.5 0.011 5.5 26
4 Terminalia paniculata 2400 34. 8 1.0 19.2 0.059 27.6 82
5 Randia dumatorium 800 11.6 0.6 11.5 0.014 6.7 30
6 Schleichera oleosa 1260 18.3 0.8 15.4 0.069 32.5 66
7 Garcinia sp. 180 2.6 0.4 7.7 0.006 3.2 14
8 Terminalia tomentosa 160 2.3 0.4 7.7 0.003 1.6 12
Total 6900 100 5.2 100 0.214 100 300
Table 3.7.6
Characteristics of Trees - Mithal Gazani Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Acacia auriculoformis 540 11.7 0.8 7.3 0.02 12.1 31
2 Randia dumatorum 380 8.3 1.0 9.1 0.01 10.0 27
3 Schleichera oleosa 160 3.5 1.0 9.1 0.01 4.7 17
4 Chloroxylon swietania 580 12.6 1.0 9.1 0.02 14.5 36
5 Anacardium occidentale
80 1.7 0.6 5.4 0.002 1.7 9
6 Terminalia paniculata 420 9.1 0.8 7.3 0.011 6.4 23
7 Syzygium cuminii 380 8.3 0.8 7.3 0.01 5.4 23
8 Terminalia tomentosa 360 7.8 0.8 7.3 0.011 6.7 22
9 Bombax malabarica 120 2.6 0.8 7.3 0.004 2.4 12
10 Grevia tiliaefolia 740 16.1 1.0 9.1 0.035 20.5 46
11 Albizza odoratissima 240 5.2 0.4 3.6 0.004 2.5 11
12 Diospyros melanoxylon
380 8.3 1.0 9.1 0.015 8.9 26
13 Embalica officinalis 220 4.8 1.0 9.1 0.007 4.1 18
Total 4600 100 11 100 0.172 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.112
Table 3.7.7
Characteristics of Trees - Hiregutti Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia paniculata 240 5.5 0.4 5.1 0.006 3.9 15
2 Mangifera indica 280 6.4 0.8 10.2 0.010 6.3 23
3 Terminalia tomentosa 480 11.0 0.8 10.2 0.015 9.0 30
4 Diospyros melanoxylon 500 11.4 1.0 12.8 0.023 13.9 38
5 Wrightia tomentosa 300 6.8 1.0 12.8 0.009 5.6 25
6 Mitragyna parvifolia 300 6.8 1.0 12.8 0.010 6.0 26
7 Chloroxylon swietania 900 20.5 1.0 12.8 0.0429 25.0 58
8 Anogeissus latifolia 700 16.0 1.0 12.8 0.030 17.5 46
9 Syzygium cuminii 680 15.5 0.8 10.2 0.021 12.7 39
Total 4380 100 7.8 100 0.171 100 300
Table 3.7.8
Characteristics of Trees - Gokarna Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Syzygium cuminii 300 6.5 1.0 13.2 0.012 7.1 27
2 Terminalia paniculata 780 16.9 1.0 13.2 0.035
3 21.8 52
3 Terminalia chebula 40 0.9 0.2 2.6 0.001
3 0.8 4
4 Anogeissus latifolia 1400 30.3 1.0 13.2 0.067 41.1 85
5 Zizyphus xylopyra 140 3.0 0.4 5.3 0.004 2.3 11
6 Stereospermum xylocarpum
260 5.6 1.0 13.2 0.005 2.9 22
7 Wrightia tomentosa 240 5.2 1.0 13.2 0.003 2.0 20
8 Terminalia tomentosa
780 16.9 1.0 13.2 0.018 11.0 41
9 Tectona grandis 680 14.7 1.0 13.2 0.018 11.0 39
10 Albizza chinensis 100 2.2 0.8 10.5 0.001 0.6 13
Total 4620 100 7.6 100 0.162 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare *RD – Relative Density * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.113
Table 3.7.9
Characteristics of Trees - Bargi Gazal Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species
Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia tonentosa
1440 43.6 1.0 7.9 0.052 48.8 100
2 Mangifera indica 300 9.1 1.0 7.9 0.0128 12.0 29
3 Anacardium occidentale
780 23.6 1.0 7.9 0.022 20.6 52
4 Bauhinia purpurea
480 14.5 8.8 69.8 0.014 13.5 98
5 Garcinia sp 300 9.1 0.8 6.4 0.005 5.1 21
Total 3300 100 12.6 100 0.107 100 300
Table 3.7.10
Characteristics of Trees - Hittal Makki Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Acacia auriculoformis 1500 54.7 1.0 26.3 0.075 60.9 142
2 Terminalia paniculata 300 10.9 1.0 26.3 0.012 9.3 47
3 Wrightia tomentosa 400 14.6 1.0 26.3 0.015 12.4 53
4 Schleichera oleosa 280 10.2 0.6 15.8 0.011 9.2 35
5 Terminalia tomentosa 260 9.5 0.2 5.3 0.01 8.1 23
Total 2740 100 3.8 100 0.123 100 300
Table 3.7.11
Characteristics of Trees - Kimmani Forest
Sr. No
Name of Species
Density
R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Mangifera indica 940 29.6 0.80 21.1 0.0265 24.2 75
2 Anogeissus latifolia 1500 47.2 1.00 26.3 0.0482 44.0 117
3 Terminalia tomentosa 600 18.9 1.00 26.3 0.0244 22.3 67
4 Garcinia sp 100 3.1 0.80 21.1 0.0034 3.1 27
5 Terminalia paniculata 40 1.3 0.20 5.3 0.0009 0.8 7
6 Bombax malabarica 340 10.7 0.80 21.1 0.0061 5.6 37
Total 3180 100 3.8 100 0.109 100 294.39
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.114
Table 3.7.12
Characteristics of Trees - Yennamadi Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm. R. Dm. IVI
1 Mangifera indica 140 8.6 0.60 27.3 0.007 10.7 47
2 Ancardium occidentale 100 6.2 0.40 18.2 0.004 5.8 30
3 Acacia ariculoformis 80 4.9 0.20 9.1 0.002 3.4 17
4 Anogeissus latifolia 1300 80.2 1.00 45.5 0.05 80.1 206
Total 1620 100 2.2 100 0.0624 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Table 3.7.13
Characteristics of Trees - Korebail Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia paniculata 800 36.0 1.0 29.4 0.031 34.4 100
2 Terminalia tomentosa 860 38.7 1.0 29.4 0.031 34.9 103
3 Schleichera oleosa 300 13.5 0.4 11.8 0.014 16.0 41
4 Anogeissus latifolia 260 11.7 1.0 29.4 0.013 14.6 56
Total 2220 100 3.4 100 0.0893 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Table 3.7.14
Characteristics of Trees - Khurigadda Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Acacia auriculoformis 1580 37.8 1.0 33.3 0.042 30.1 101
2 Mangifera indica 1200 28.7 1.0 33.3 0.046 33.3 95
3 Anogeissus latifolia 1400 33.5 1.0 33.3 0.05 36.6 103
Total 4180 100 3 100 0.138 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency; *Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.115
Table 3.7.15
Characteristics of Trees - Haskari Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm. R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia paniculata 620 22.8 0.80 25.0 0.029 25.8 74
2 Chloroxylon swietania 1200 44.1 1.00 31.3 0.052 45.0 120
3 Terminalia tomentosa 360 13.2 0.40 12.5 0.0102 8.9 35
4 Anogeissus latifolia 540 19.9 1.00 31.3 0.023 20.3 71
Total 2720 100 3.2 100 0.114 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare *RD – Relative Density * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index.
Table 3.7.16
Characteristics of Trees - Balole Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia paniculata 300 23.4 0.6 16.7 0.008 17.3 57
2 Acacia auriculoformis 660 51.6 1.0 27.8 0.032 64.5 144
3 Terminalia tomentosa 100 7.8 0.6 16.7 0.002 3.7 28
4 Bombex malabarica 220 17.2 1.4 38.9 0.007 14.5 71
Total 1280 100 3.6 100 0.048 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare *RD – Relative Density * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Table 3.7.17
Characteristics of Trees -Yettinbail Forest
Sr.No. Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI
1 Acacia auriculoformis 1080 43.9 1.0 35.7 0.016 24.6 104
2 Terminalia paniculata 360 14.6 0.6 21.4 0.017 25.8 62
3 Cassia Cyamia 100 4.1 0.2 7.1 0.003 4.2 15
4 Terminalia tomentosa 220 8.9 0.4 14.3 0.003 5.0 28
5 Bombax Malabarica 700 28.5 0.6 21.4 0.027 40.4 90
Total 2460 100 2.8 100 0.066 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare *RD – Relative Density * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.116
Table 3.7.18
Characteristics of Trees - Madangeri Forest
Sr. No.
Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm. R. Dm. IVI
1 Terminalia tomentosa 1000 32.9 1.0 27.8 0.047 42.1 103
2 Terminalia paniculata 1060 34.9 1.0 27.8 0.034 30.1 93
3 Chloroxylon swietania 600 19.7 1.0 27.8 0.022 19.2 67
4 Wrghtia tomentosa 240 7.9 0.4 11.1 0.006 5.6 25
5 Bombax Malabarica 140 4.6 0.2 5.6 0.003 3.0 13
Total 3040 100 3.6 100 0.113 100 300
*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;
*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index
Table 3.7.19
Simpson’s Diversity Index
Sr. No.
Distance of the Location from project site Trees
Tadadi near kumta Range
1. Within 5 km from the project site 0.09-0.2
2. Within 5-10 km from the project site
Ranges of SDI:
< 0.060 Very good biodiversity
0.060 –0.100 Good biodiversity
0.100 – 0.200 Medium biodiversity
> 0.200 – 1.0 Low biodiversity
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.117
Table 3.7.20
List of Medicinal Plants recorded in Conservation Area (MPCA) at Devimane - Honnavar division
Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit
1 Acacia auriculiformis Mimosaceae Tree
2 Acacia concinna Mimosaceae Tree
3 Acacia spp. Mimosaceae Shrub
4 Actinodaphne hookeri (Actinodaphne angustifolia)
Lauraceae Tree
5 Adina cordifolia (Aaldina cordifolia ) Rubiaceae Tree
6 Albizia procera Mimosaceae Tree
7 Allophylus cobbe Sapindaceae Tree
8 Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae Tree
9 Anamirta cocculus Menispermaceae Climber
10 Ancistrocladus heyneanus Ancistrocladacea Climber
11 Antidesma menasu Euphorbiaceae Tree
12 Apama siliquosa Aristolochiaceae Tree
13 Aporosa lindleyana Euphorbiaceae Tree
14 Apsargus racemosus Asparagaceae Climber
15 Artocarpus hirsutus Moraceae Tree
16 Arundinella tenella (Arundinella pumila)
Poaceae Herb
17 Asparagus gonoclados Asparagaceae Climber
18 Atalantia wightii Rutaceae Shrub
19 Barleria spp. Acanthaceae Herb
20 Bauhinia purpurea Caesalpiniaceae Tree
21 Blepharis asperrima Acanthaceae Herb
22 Bougainvillaea glabra Nyctaginaceae Tree
23 Breynia rhamnoides
(breynia vitis-idaea)
Euphorbiaceae Shrub
24 Bridelia crenulata Euphorbiaceae Tree
25 Bridelia scandens Euphorbiaceae Shrub
26 Caesalpinia pulcherrima Caesalpiniaceae Tree
27 Calamus spp. Arecaceae Tree
28 Callicarpa tomentosa Verbenaceae Tree
29 Calophyllum apetalum (calophyllum wightianum)
Clusiaceae Tree
30 Calycopteris floribunda Combretaceae Tree
31 Caryota urens Arecaceae Tree
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.118
Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit
32 Casearia esculenta (casearia ovata) Flacourtiaceae Tree
33 Cassia occidentalis Caesalpiniaceae Shrub
34 Cinnamomum malabatrum Lauraceae Tree
35 Cinnamomum zeylanicum (cinnamomum verum)
Lauraceae Tree
36 Cissus discolor Vitaceae Climber
37 Clerodendrum viscosum Verbenaceae Shrub
38 Colebrookea oppositifolia Lamiaceae Shrub
39 Connarus wightii Connaraceae Climber
40 Crotalaria pallid Fabaceae Shrub
41 Crotalaria pulcherrima
(Crotalaria pulchra)
Fabaceae Shrub
42 Crotalaria umbellate Fabaceae Shrub
43 Croton klotzschianus Euphorbiaceae Tree
44 Cyclea peltata Menispermaceae Climber
45 Cynoglossum zeylanicum Boraginaceae Shrub
46 Cyperus cyperoides (Mariscus summatrensis)
Cyperaceae Herb
47 Cyperus iria Cyperaceae Herb
48 Dalbergia spp. Fabaceae Tree
49 Derris scandens Fabaceae Tree
50 Dichapetalum gelonioides Dichapetalaceae Tree
51 Dillenia pentagyna Dilleniaceae Tree
52 Dimocarpus longan
(Nephalium longana)
Sapindaceae Tree
53 Diospyros buxifolia Ebenaceae Tree
54 Diospyros cordifolia Ebenaceae Tree
55 Diospyros ebenum Ebenaceae Tree
56 Dolichandrone crispa (Dolichandrone atrovirens)
Bignoniaceae Tree
57 Dracaena terniflora Agavaceae Shrub
58 Elaeagnus conferta Elaeagnanace Tree
59 Embelia ribes Myrsinaceae Climber
60 Emblica officinalis Euphorbiaceae Tree
61 Emilia sonchifolia Asteraceae Shrub
62 Ervatamia heyneana Apocynaceae Herb
63 Eupatorium spp. Asteraceae Herb
64 Euphorbia thymifolia Euphorbiaceae Shrub
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.119
Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit
65 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Tree
66 Ficus sp. Moraceae Tree
67 Flacourtia Montana Flacourtiaceae Tree
68 Flemingia strobilifera Fabaceae Herb
69 Garcinia Morella Clusiaceae Tree
70 Glycosmis arborea Rutaceae Tree
71 Gmelina arborea Verbenaceae Tree
72 Gnidia glauca Thymelaeaceae Shrub
73 Grewia lawsoniana Tiliaceae Shrub
74 Grewia orientalis Tiliaceae Tree
75 Grewia spp. Tiliaceae Tree
76 Grewia tiliaefolia (Grewia tiliifolia) Tiliaceae Tree
77 Helicteres isora Sterculiaceae Shrub
78 Hibiscus aculeatus Malvaceae Herb
79 Hibiscus spp. Malvaceae Herb
80 Holigarna arnottiana Anacardiaceae Tree
81 Holigarna grahamii Anacardiaceae Tree
82 Hopea parviflora Dipterocarpaceae Tree
83 Hydnocarpus laurifolia Flacourtiaceae Tree
84 Indigofera cassioides Fabaceae Shrub
85 Isonandra stocksii Sapotaceae Tree
86 Ixora brachiata Rubiaceae Tree
87 Ixora coccinea Rubiaceae Shrub
88 Jasminum malabaricum Oleaceae Climber
89 Justicia micrantha (Justicia neesii) Acanthaceae Herb
90 Knema attenuate Myristiaceae Tree
91 Kyllinga monocephala
(Kyllinga memoralis)
Cyperaceae Herb
92 Lagerstroemia lanceolata (Lagerstroemia microcarpa )
Lythraceae Tree
93 Lantana camara Verbenaceae Shrub
94 Leea crispa Leeaceae Shrub
95 Leea indica Leeaceae Shrub
96 Linociera malabarica
(Chionanthus malabarica)
Oleaceae Tree
97 Litsea deccanensis Lauraceae Tree
98 Litsea floribunda Lauraceae Tree
99 Ludwigia perennis Onagraceae Herb
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.120
Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit
100 Macaranga indica Euphorbiaceae Tree
101 Macaranga peltata Euphorbiaceae Tree
102 Maesa indica Myrsinaceae Shrub
103 Mallotus philippinensis (Mallotus philippensis)
Euphorbiaceae Tree
104 Malvastrum coromandelianu Malvaceae Herb
105 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Tree
106 Melastoma malabathricum Melastomataceae Shrub
107 Memecylon talbotianum Melastomataceae Tree
108 Memecylon terminale Melastomataceae Tree
109 Mimosa pudica Fabaceae Herb
110 Mitracarpus verticillatus Rubiaceae Herb
111 Murraya paniculata Rutaceae Shrub
112 Mussaenda laxa Rubiaceae Shrub
113 Naravelia zeylnica Ranunculaceae Climber
114 Neolitsea scrobiculata Lauraceae Tree
115 Nothapodytes foetida Icacinaceae Shrub
116 Olea dioica Oleaceae Tree
117 Persea macrantha) Lauraceae Tree
118 Piper nigrum Piperaceae Climber
119 Pittosporum floribundum
(Pittosporum nepaulense)
Pittosporaceae Tree
120 Polyalthia fragrans Annonaceae Tree
121 Pothos scandens Araceae Climber
122 Psychotria dalzellii Rubiaceae Shrub
123 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae Tree
124 Pterospermum diversifolium Sterculiaceae Tree
125 Pterospermum reticulatum Sterculiaceae Tree
126 Rotala rotundifolia Lythraceae Herb
127 Sapindus emarginatus Sapindaceae Tree
128 Scurrula cordifolia Loranthaceae Shrub
129 Scutia myrtina (Scutia circumcissa) Rhamnaceae Shrub
130 Smilax zeylanica Smilacaceae Climber
131 Solanum torvum Solanaceae Shrub
132 Sonchus oleraceus Asteraceae Herb
133 Sterculia spp. Sterculiaceae Tree
134 Strychnos nux-vomica Loganiaceae Tree
135 Symplocos racemosa Symplocaceae Tree
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.121
Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit
136 Syzygium caryophyllatum Myrtaceae Tree
137 Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae Tree
138 Syzygium jambos Myrtaceae Tree
139 Syzygium zeylanicum Myrtaceae Tree
140 Terminalia bellirica Combretaceae Tree
141 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae Tree
142 Thevetia peruviana Apocynaceae Tree
143 Trema orientalis Ulmaceae Tree
144 Trichilia connaroides Meliaceae Tree
145 Triumfetta rhomboidea Tiliaceae Herb
146 Urena lobata Malvaceae Shrub
147 Vateria indica Dipterocarpaceae Tree
148 Vernonia cinerea Asteraceae Herb
149 Vernonia indica Asteraceae Herb
150 Vinca rosea Apocynaceae Herb
151 Wagatea spicata Caesalpiniaceae Shrub
152 Xantolis tomentosa Sapotaceae Tree
153 Zingiber neesanum Zingiberaceae Herb
154 Gleichinia sp. Gleichiniaceae Herb
155 Lygodium sp. Thelypteridaceae Herb
156 Selaginella kashmiriana Selaginellaceae Herb
Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.122
Table 3.7.21
List of Common Wild Animals of Honnavar Division (Kumta)
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
1 Chital Axix axis
2 Gaur Bos gaurus
3 Jackal Canis aureus
4 Sambar Cervus unicolor
5 Leopard cat Felis bengalensis
6 Golden cat Felis chaus
7 Jungle cat Felis chaus
8 Small Indian Mangoose Herpestes auropunctuatus
9 Indian porcupine Hystrix indica
10 Hare Lepus nigricollis
11 Bonnet Macaque Macaca radiata
12 Indian panagolin Manis grassicaudate
13 Sloth Bear Melursus ursinus
14 Slow Loris Nycticebus coucang
15 Leopard Panthera pardus
16 Tiger Panthera tigris
17 Toddy cat Paradoxyrus hermaphroditus
18 Common Gaint Flying Squirrel Petanurista petaurista
19 *Common Langur Presbytis entellus
20 Malayan Gaint Squirrel Ratufa bicolor
21 Indian Gaint Squirrel Ratufa indica
22 Indian wild Boar Sus scrofa
23 Indian chevrotain(Mouse deer) Tragukus meminna
24 Small indian civet Viverriculla indica
25 Indian Fox Vulpes bengalensis
26 *Spoted deer or axis axis Cervus axis
Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.123
Table 3.7.22
List of Common Birds of Honnavar Division (Kumta)
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
1 Shikra Accipiter badius
2 Jangle Myna Acridotheres fuscus
3 Common Myna Acridotheres tristis
4 Blyth's Reed warbler Acrocephalus dumentorum
5 Common lora Aegithina tiphia
6 Yellow backed Sumbird Aethopyga siparaja
7 Small blue Kingfisher Alcedo atthis
8 Quaker Babbler Alcippe poioicephala
9 Whitebreasted waterhen Amaurornis pheonicurus
10 Pintail Anas acuta
11 Common Teal Anas crecca
12 Darter Anhinga rufa
13 Malabar pied Hornbill Anthracoceros coronatus
14 Tree pipit Anthus spp.
15 House Swift Appus affinis
16 Towny Eagle Aquila rapax
17 Little spinderhunter Arachnothera longirostris
18 Purple Heron Ardea purpurea
19 Pond Heron Ardeola grayii
20 Ashy swallow shrike Artomus fuscus
21 Spotted Owlet Athene brama
22 Ceyon Frogmouth Batrachostomus moniliger
23 Forest Eagle Owl Bubo nipalensis
24 Cattle Egre Bubulcus ibis
25 Great pied Horubill Buceros bicornis
26 Plaintive Cuckoo Cacomantis passerimus
27 Bay handed Cuckoo Cacomantis sonneratii
28 Jungle Nightjar Caprimulgus indicus
29 Longtailed Nightjar Caprimulgus macrurus
30 Coucal Centropus sinensis
31 Pied Kingfisher Ceryle rudis
32 Whiterumped Spinetail Swift Chaetura sylvatica
33 Wmerald Dove Chalcophas indica
34 Goldfronted Chloropsis Chloropsis auriforms
35 Goldmantled Choloropsis Chloropsis cochinchinensis
36 Large Goldenbacked woodpecker Chrysocolaptes lucidus
37 White necked stork Ciconia episcopus
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.124
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
38 Streaked Fantail Warbler Cicticola juncidis
39 Marsh Harrier Circus macrorus
40 Niligiri wood Pigeon Columba elphinstonii
41 Blue rock pigeon Columba livai
42 Shama Copsychus malabaricum
43 Magpie Robin Copsychus saularis
44 Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis
45 Balckheaded Cuckoo Shrike Coracina melanoptera
46 Large Cuckoo Shrike Coracina novaehollandiae
47 Jungle Crow Corvus macrorhynnchos
48 House Crow Corvus splenders
49 Indian Cuckon Cuculus micropterus
50 Common Hawk-Cuckoo Cuculus varius
51 Common Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda
52 Lesser whistling Teal Dendrocygna javanica
53 Thickbilled Flowpacker Dicaeum agile
54 Nilgiri Flowerpacker Dicaeum concolor
55 Tickell's Flowerpacker Dicaeum erythrorhynchos
56 Black Drongo Dicrurus adsimilis
57 Bronzed Drongo Dicrurus aenus
58 Whitebellied Drongo Dicrurus caerulescens
59 Haircrested Drongo Dicrurus hottentottus
60 Grey Drongo Dicrurus leucophaeus
61 Racket tailed Drongo Dicrurus paradiseus
62 Lesser Golden backed Woodkeepar Dinopium banghalense
63 Great Blackwoodkeepar Drycopus javansis
64 Jerdon's Imperial pigeon Ducula badia
65 Large Egret Egretta alba
66 Little Egret Egretta garzetta
67 Smaller Erget Egretta intermedia
68 Ashycrowned Finch Lark Erwmopterix grisea
69 Koel Eudynamys Scolopacea
70 Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus japonensis
71 Hibby Falco Subbuteo
72 Coot Fulica atra
73 Grey Jungle fowl Gallus sonneratti
74 Whitebreated laughing Thrush Garrulax jerdoni
75 Barred Jungle Owlet Glauccidium radiatum
76 Hill Myna Gracula religiosa
77 White backed vulture Gyps bengalensis
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.125
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
78 whitebreasted Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis
79 Brahmini Kite Haliastur Indus
80 Heartspotted Woodkeepar Hemicirus canante
81 Crested Tree Swift Hemiprocne longipennis
82 Pied Flycatcher Shrike Hemipus picatus
83 Black winged Stilt Himantopus humantopus
84 Dusky, Crag Martin Hirundo concolor
85 Redrumped Swallow Hirundo daurica
86 Common Swallow Hirundo rustica
87 Wiretailed Swallow Hirundo smithii
88 Pheasant Tailed Jacana Hydrophasianus chirurgus
89 Monoarch Flycatcher Hypothymis azurea
90 Yellow beowed Bulbul Hypsispetes indicus
91 black Bulbul Hyspipetes Madagascarensis
92 Greyheaded Fishing Eagle Ichthyophaga icthvaetus
93 Black Eagle Ictineatus malayensis
94 Fairy Bluebird Irena puella
95 Brown shrike Lanius cristatus
96 Grey Shrike Lanius excubitor
97 Rufousbacked shrike Lanius schach
98 Smaller Adjutant Lepotoptlilos javanicus
99 Adjutant stork Lepotoptolos dubius
100 Spotted Munia Lonchura punctulata
101 Whitebacked Munia Lonchura striata
102 Indian Lorikeet Loriculus vernalis
103 Bluethroated Barbet Megalaima asiatica
104 Crimsonbreasted Barbet Megalaima haemacephala
105 Crimsonthroated Barbet Megalaima rubricapilla
106 Small Green Barbet Megalaima viridis
107 Large Green Barbet Megalaima zelyanica
108 Chestnutheaded Bee-eater Merops leschenaultia
109 Green Bee-eater Merops orientalis
110 Bronze Winged Jacana Metopidius indicus
111 Rufous woodpecker Micropternus brachyurus
112 Pariah Kite Milvus migrans
113 Blueheaded Rock Thrush Monticola cinclorhynchus
114 Blue Rock Thrush Monticola solitarium
115 White Wagtail Motacilla alba
116 Grey wagtail Motacilla caspica
117 Forest Wagtail Motacilla indica
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.126
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
118 large Pied Wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis
119 Brown Flycatcher Muscicapa latirostris
120 Redbreasted Flycatcher Muscicapa parya
121 Verditer Flycatcher Muscicapa thalassina
122 Tickell's Blue Flycatcher Muscicapa tickelliae
123 Malabar Whistling Thrush Myiophonus horsfieldii
124 Loten's sunbird Necarinia lotenia
125 Small sunbird Nectarinia minima
126 Purple rumped Sunbird Nectarinia zeylonica
127 Purple Sunbird Nectorinia asiatica
128 White Scavenger Valture Neophorn perenopterus
129 Bluebearded Bee Oeater Nyctyornis athertoni
130 Blacknapped oriole Oriolus chinensis siffusus
131 Golden Oriole Oriolus oriolus
132 Black Headed oriole Oriolus xanthormus
133 Tailor bird Orthomotus sutorius
134 Collared Scops Owl Otus bakkamoena
135 Indian scops owl Otus scops
136 Grey Tit Parus Major
137 Yellowcheeked Tit Parus xanthogenys
138 House Sparrow Passer domesticus
139 Common Peafowl Pavo cristatus
140 Stork billed Kingfisher Pelargopsis capensis
141 Spotted Babbler Pellorneum ruficeps
142 Small minivat Pericrocotus cinnamomeus
143 Scarlet Minivet Pericrocotus flammeus
144 Crested Honey Buzzard Pernis ptilorhynchus
145 Yellowthroated Sparrow Petronia xanthocollis
146 Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger
147 Greenish leaf Warbler Phylloscopus trachilodies
148 Pigmy woodkeepar Picoides nanus
149 Mahratta Woodkeepar Picoises mahrattensis
150 Small yellownaped Woodkeepar Picus Chlorophus
151 Indian pitta Pitta brachyura
152 Baya Ploceus philippinus
153 Little Grebe Podiceps ruficollis
154 Slatyheaded Scimitar Babbler Pomatorhinus horsfieldii
155 Purple moorhen Porphyrio porphyrio
156 Franklin's Wren warbler Prinia hodgsonii
157 Jungle wren warbler Prinia sylvatica
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.127
Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name
158 Bluewinged Parakeet Psittacula columbodies
159 Blossomhheaded Parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala
160 rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri
161 Red whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus
162 White cheeked Bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys
163 Rubythroated yellow Bulbul Pycnonotus melanicterus gularis
164 Redvented Bulbul Pyconotus cafer
165 Whitespotted Fantail Flycatcher Rhipidura aibicollis
166 Small Greenbilled Malkoha Rhopodytes viridirostris
167 Blackheded Babbler Rhopoichla atriceps
168 Whitebrowed Fantail Flycatcher Riphidura aureola
169 Spotted Grey Creepar Salapornis spilonotus
170 Pied Bush Chat Saxicola caprata
171 Indian Robin Saxicolodies fulicata
172 Velvet Fronted Nuthatch Sitta frontalis
173 Crested serpent Eagle Spilornis cheela
174 Crested Kawk-Eagle Spizeatus cirrhatus
175 River Tern Sterna aurantia
176 Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis
177 Blyth's Myna Sturnus malabaricus blythii
178 Blackheaded Myna Sturnus pagadarum
179 Sirkeer Cuckoo Taccocua leschenaultii
180 Common wood Shrike Tephrodornis pondicerianus
181 Large wood shrike Tephrodornis vigratus
182 White Ibis Threskiornis aethiopica
183 Common Grey Hornbill Tockus birostris
184 Malabar Grey Hornbill *Tockus griseus
185 Common green pieon Treron phoenicoptera
186 Yellow legged green pigeon Treron phoenicoptera
187 Greyfronted Green Pigeon Treron pompadora
188 Common Sand Piper Tringa hypoleucos
189 Green Sand Piper Tringa ochropus
190 Paradise Flycatcher Trpsiphone paradisi
191 Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus
192 Rufous Babbler Turdoides subrufus
193 Hoopoe Upupa epops
194 Redwalted lapwing Vanellus indicus
195 Whitethroated Griund Thrush Zoothera citrina cyanotus
196 White-eye Zosterops palaperbrosa
Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.128
Table 3.7.23
Hotspots of Uttar Kannada District (Kumta)
Sr.No. Taluka Habitat Ecosystem Plants Animals
1 Sirsi, Siddapur, Kumta
All Evergreen Forest
Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Garcinia gummi-gutta
Amphibians
2 Honavar Dipterocarpus indicus forest
Evergreen Forest
Dipterocarpus indicus Lion-tailed Macaque
3 Karwar, Honnavar, Kumta
Estuary Estuary - Fishes, Estuarine invertebrates
4 Honnavar Evergreen Forest Evergreen Forest
Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Mesua ferrea
Lion tailed Macaque
5 Sorab Evergreen forest Sacred Groves - -
6 Honnavar Mangrove Mangrove Mangrove vegetation -
7 Haliyal Moist Deciduous forest
Moist Deciduous forest
- -
8 Siddapur, Honnavar, Sirsi
Myristica Swamps Evergreen forest
Myristica fatua, Gymnacranthera canarica, Semecarpus travancorica
Phylloneura westermanii (Monotypic damselfly)
9 Siddapur Relic Evergreen forest
Evergreen forest
Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Garcinia gummi-gutta
-
10 Siddapur, Sirsi, Yellapur
Relic Evergreen forest
Evergreen forest
Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Garcinia gummi-gutta
-
11 Siddapur, Kumta, Honnavar, Koida
Raparian Forest Evergreen forest
Evergreen flora -
12 Bhatkal, Kumta, Ankola
Rocky and sandy beach
Beach
Marine algae, spinefex, Ipomoea biloba, Canavalia, Hydrophylax maritima
Marine invertebrates
13 Kumta Rocky mountain Rocks - -
14 Kumta Sandy Beach Beach - Olive Ridley Turtle
15 Kumta Umbrella palm forest
Evergreen forest
Corypha umbraculifera -
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.129
Table 3.7.24
Fishes Production by Different Types of Boats at Tadadi Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) – Kumta
Sr. No.
Type of Fishes Type of Boats Total Qty.
(MT) Value
(Lakh Rs) P T G OM ONM
Total No. of Boats 167 613 196 0 1111 - -
1. Oil sardine 1246 21 21.5 0 15 1303.5 155.84
2. Other sardine 54 0 16.5 0 10 80.5 15.155
3. White sardine 0 0 4 0 4 8 1.16
4. Other clupedis 0 25 24.5 0 15 64.5 6.27
5. Anchovilla 0 2 0 0 7.5 9.5 1.2
6. Silver Bar 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7. Mackerel 292 0 5 0 1 298 76.45
8. Seer fish 7 0 0 0 0 7 1.65
9. Tuna 45 0 0 0 0 45 14.4
10. Lactarius 25 16 11.5 0 3 55.5 9.43
11. Carrangids 172 7 16 1 8.5 204.5 42.325
Pomfrets
12. Black Pomfrets 33 3 0 0 0 36 12.72
13. Silver Pomfrents 0 2 0 0 0 2 2
14. Silver Bellie 21 42 17 0 13 93 7.88
15. Gerrus species 0 2 1 0 1 4 0
16. Sciaenids 4 23 19.5 0 11 57.5 9.685
17. Ribbonfish 10 32.5 7 0 4 53.5 6.94
18. Flat fish 0 106 0 0 1 107 10.93
19. Soles 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.8
20. Cat fish 9 2 1 0 16.5 28.5 4.46
21. Lady fish 0 0 0 0 8 8 4.8
Mullets 0 0 0 0 18.5 18.5 5.15
22. White Prawns 0 2 0 0 0 2 3
23. Brown prawns 0 43 0 0 0 43 26
24. Kari Kadi Prawns 0 40 0 0 0 40 20.48
25. Red Prawns 0 50 0 0 0 50 27.06
26. Crabs 0 19 4 0 14.5 37.5 3.46
27. Squilla 0 181 0 0 2 183 5.81
Molluscs
28. Squids 0 154 0 0 0 154 6.75
29. Shell fish 0 0 0 0 103 103 5.89
30. Miscellaneous 82.5 38 24.5 0 23.5 168.5 18.325
Total 2001 810.5 173 1 280 3265 506.02
Source: Fisheries Department, Kumta, 2010
P : Purse seiners
T : Trawlers
G : Gillnetters
ONM : Other non-mechanized
OM : Other mechanized
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.130
Table 3.7.25
Fishes Production at Kumta Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007)
Sr.
No.
Boat type G OM ONM Total
Total no.s of boat 638 10 378 Qty.
(MT)
Value
(Lakh Rs.)
1 Sharks 2.5 0 0 2.5 0.7
2 Rays & skates 0.5 0 0.5 1 0.3
3 Oil sardine 42.4 0 19.8 62.2 8.455
4 Other sardine 4 0 1.5 5.5 0.65
6 Other clupedis 6 0 2.3 8.3 0.85
7 Anchovilla 3 0 0.3 3.3 0.33
8 Silver Bar 7.6 0 1.8 9.4 2.035
9 Mackerel 42.6 0.5 11.6 54.7 9.78
10 Seer fish 35.4 0 8.8 44.2 22.635
11 Tuna 5.9 0 0.1 6 2
12 Lactarius 8.5 0 2.9 11.4 2.91
13 Carrangids 5.3 0.5 1 6.8 3.11
14 Pomfrets
a. Black Pomfrets 1 0 0 1 0.6
b. Silver Pomfrents 1.5 0 0 1.5 1.1
15 Silver Bellie 0 0 0 0 0
17 Sciaenids 0 0 2 2 0.1
18 Ribbonfish 6.7 0 0 6.7 1.86
19 Flat fish 4 0 0 4 0.24
21 Cat fish 5 0 0 5 1.5
29 Lady fish 1.5 0 4 5.5 3.95
30 Mullets 3 0 8.8 11.8 3.16
a. Tiger Prawns 0.5 0 0 0.5 0.8
b. White Prawns 3.75 0 1 4.75 5.9
c. Brown prawns 2.75 0 1 3.75 3.8
d. Kari Kadi Prawns 2.5 0 0.5 3 1.55
e. Red Prawns 1 0 0.5 1.5 0.4
33 Lobsters 0 0 0.25 0.25 0.9
34 Crabs 12.8 0.5 11.2 24.5 3.65
35 Squilla 0 4 5.8 9.8 0.68
Molluscs
a. Squids 1.9 0 2 3.9 0.79
d. Shell fish 2 0 11.5 13.5 2.09
36 Miscellaneous 41.5 2.2 27.3 71 17.22
Total 255.1 7.7 126.45 389.25 104.045
Source: Fisheries Department, Kumta, 2010
G : Gillnetters
ONM : Other Non-mechanized
OM : Other Mechanized
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.131
3.8 Socio-economic Environment
3.8.1 Baseline Status
The study of socio-economic component incorporating various facets related to
prevailing social and cultural conditions, and economic status of the study region. The
socio-economic study includes analysis of demographic structure, population dynamics,
infrastructure resources, status of human health and economic attributes like
employment, per-capita income, agriculture, trade, industrial development etc. in the
study region.
The aesthetic component of environmental study refers to the scenic value if
any in the study area, tourist attraction and wildlife, historic and cultural monuments. The
study of these parameters helps in identification, prediction and evaluation of likely
impacts on socio-economics and parameters of human interest due to proposed project.
To assess impact on socio-economic environment latest available data has
been compiled to delineate the baseline socio- economic profile in study area. The
database thus generated in this study includes:
Demographic structure
Infrastructure base in project area
Economic attributes
Health status
Cultural attributes
Awareness and opinion of people about the proposed project
Socio economic status with reference to Quality of Life (QoL)
Out of total 40 villages falling in the study area, socio-economic survey was
conducted in 21 villages as listed in Table 3.8.1 and depicted in Fig. 3.8.1.
3.8.2 Demographic Structure
The details regarding the demographic structure of the study area were
collected from Primary Census Abstract CD-2001 of Uttar Kanada district. Study area
covers Kumta Block and Ankola of Uttar Kanada district.
Demographic details such as number of persons per household, total area,
population density, sex ratio, percentage of SC and ST population and employment
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.132
pattern are summarized in Table 3.8.2 and detailed information is given in Table 3.8.3.
The salient observations are as follows:
As per 2001 census, total population of the region is 68,390, out of which
34,539 are male and 33,851 are female.
Total number of households in the region are 13,140
Sex ratio (number of female per thousand male) in the region is 980
Out of the total population, SC and ST populations are 6.41 % and 0.06%
respectively
Total main workers are about 30.25 %, whereas 10.88 % come under
marginal worker category and 58.86 % belong to non workers category
Literacy rate in the study area is about 68.85%
3.8.2.1 Infrastructure Resource Base
The infrastructure resources base of the study area with reference to
education, medical facility, water supply, post and telegraph, transportation and
communication facility and power supply etc is presented in Table 3.8.4. The
infrastructure resources details have been abstracted from Village Directory CD 2001 of
Karnataka State and are described below:
Education
Educational facilities are available in most of the villages in the study area.
Literacy rate of the study area is quite good, that is about 68.85%. Primary, Middle and
Higher schools are available in some of the villages. College facility is available only at
Gokarna village.
Medical / Primary Health Care
Medical facility is available in the form of Primary health Center. Allopathic
Dispensary, Maternity and child welfare, Primary sub-center, Family Welfare Center, T.B
Center, Nursing Home and registered private Medical Practitioner are available in
Gokarna village. Village Nadumaskeri has health facility like Primary Health Sub- center
(PHS), Maternal & Child Welfare (MCW), Registerd Medical Practitioner (RMP). Hirgutti
village has medical facility like MCW, Primary Health Center (PHC), Family Welfare
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.133
Center (FWC) and TB Clinic. Village Kagal also has medical facility like MCW, PHC,
FWP, RMP. Number of villages are having primary medical facilities.
Drinking Water
All the villages are having adequatre drinking water facility. Mode of drinking
water supply is mainly through tap, well, tube well, tank water and hand pump.
Communication and Transportation
Transportation in the area is satisfactory. Bus service is available in most of
the villages. Some of the villages are connected through navigation route. Most of the
villages in the study area are availing the communication facility i.e. post office as well as
Telephone connections.
Power Supply
Electricity is available in the region. All villagers are using electricity for different
proposes.
Banking and Credit Societies
Most of villages are having Agricultural Credit Society, Non agricultural society,
other credit society and also Commercial banks and co-operative society for savings are
available in the region.
3.8.2.2 Economic Attributes
Economic resource base of any region mainly depends upon its economically
active group i.e. the working population involved in productive work.
Work may be defined as participation in any economically productive activity.
Such participation may be physical or mental in nature. Work involves not actual work but
also effective supervision and direction of work. It also includes unpaid work on farm or in
family enterprise.
There are different types of workers which may be classified as:
Main Workers
Those persons who had worked for at least six months or 183 days are treated
to be Main Workers.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.134
Marginal Workers
Those persons who had participated in any economic or productive activity for
less than six months or 183 days during the last one year are treated as Marginal
Workers.
Non – Workers
Those who have not worked any time at all in the year preceding the
enumeration and it includes persons engaged in household duties, dependents, retired
persons, renters, beggars etc.
The workers coming under the main and marginal workers category are;
cultivators, agricultural labors, live stock, forestry, fishing, hunting, plantations, and allied
activities, mining and quarrying, manufacturing, processing, servicing and repairs in
household industry, construction trade and commerce, transport, storage and
communication, other services etc.
The employment pattern (mian workers, marginal workers and non-workers) as
well as (cultivators, agriculturers, households and other workers) of the study area is
presented in Table 3.8.5 and depicted in Fig. 3.8.2 a, b.
Main workers in the study area are 20,689 (30.25 %)
Marginal workers are only 7,444 (10.88%)) from the total working force
People in the region are mostly engaged in other activities such as 12,847
(62.09%) persons are engaged in construction, trade and commerce,
transport, storage and communications, business and service.
Cultivators 4,731(22.86%) agricultural laborers 2,682 (12.96%) together
constitute 35.82% and the house hold is 429 (2.07 %) in the region.
Non-worker population share is more than half of the total population in the
region i.e. 40,257 (58.86%) Non-worker population includes student,
household duties, dependent, pensioner, beggar and others.
3.8.2.3 Health Status
Health of the people is not only a desirable goal, but it is also an essential
investment in human resources. As per the National Health Policy (1983), Primary Health
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.135
Care has been accepted as main instrument for achieving this goal of development and
strengthening rural health infrastructure through a three-tier system, viz., Primary Health
Center (PHCs), Sub-Centers and Community Health Center, which have been
established.
Lack of building, shortage of manpower and inadequate provision of drug
supplies are hampering the operationalization of these units. The standards to be met
according to National Health Policy are given below:
Rural Health Care System in India
Health Facility
Population Villages Covered
Average Rural area
(km2)
Infrastructure Personnel
Hilly Areas
Plain Areas
Sub-Center 3000 5000 4 21.35 1 Sub centre 1 ANM, 1 MHW
Primary Health Center
20,000 30,000 27 134.20 4 - 6 beds 1 Medical officer,
14 Para Medical Staff
Community Health Center
80,000 1,20,000 191 931.95 30 beds 4 Medical officer,
21 Para Medical Staff,
14 Other Staff
Source: National Rural Health Mission Report, Year 2005-06
Data regarding health status has been collected from taluka health office,
Kumta and PHC for Gokarna village. Vital Health Statistics of Gokarna village are
presented in Table 3.8.6 a, b.
3.8.2.4 Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes
There are various culturally and aesthetically important places in the study
area.
Gokarna
Uttar Kannada is a much sought-after pilgrimage center also, with ancient
temples revered by thousands of devotees. The famous pilgrimage center of the district
‘Gokarna’ means cow’s ear and is named so because the landscape here is formed in
that shape by the two rivers, the Agnashhini and the Gangavali on either side of the town
and the Arabian Sea at the west. It is renowned for the ‘atmalinga’ in the ancient temple
of Mahabaleshwara here. Gokarna is a great center of Sanskrit learning too.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.136
Om Beach
Shaped like the Hindu spiritual symbol of Om, this is the most famous beach in
Gokarna and has got the best waves and beach side shacks. The stay in any of these
sea side shacks can be a singular experience. Apart from OM beach, Gokarna is also
home to kudle, Hall- moon and Paradise beaches which are counted among the most
beautiful beaches in India.
Mirjan
Constructed by Diwan Mirjan Ismail and presently protected by the
Archeaology department, it is a very unique place to watch the beautiful city rivers from
this Fort.
Yana
Located amongst the evergreen forest of the Sahyadri Mountains, Yana Caves
are paradise of limestone rocks. It is a heaven for rock climbers. The area is known for its
majestic mountains, a variety of rock formations, trickling waterfalls and a holy temple.
One can also go hiking to Vibhuti Falls and camp overnight there.
Holegadde
Dhareshvar, a hamlet of this village has a temple of Mahadeva or Shiva. The
walls of this temple are well ornamented with sculptures and there are a few inscription
stones also in its precincts.
Aghanashini
The village has the temples dedicated to Kameshvara, Mahadeva and
Ganapati. Thus at this spot the river is considered to be very sacred.
Bilehoingi
Gangavali is a small port and has a temple dedicated (eighth day of Kartika) a
large number of devotees congregate at this place because the darshan of the goddess
of this day is regarded as highly rewarding.
Aversa
The village has a shipshaped shrine of Katradevi, the tutelary deity of the
Kharvis (a fishermen community of the coast). It is believed that the idol of the goddess
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.137
was recovered from the sea and then installed in the shrine. During Dasara, the goddess
is worshipped with great solemnity by the Kharvis and other Konkani speaking people of
the neighborhood.
3.8.3 Socio-Economic Survey
Sampling Method
A judgmental and purposive sampling method was used for choosing
respondents of various sections of the society i.e. Sarpanch, adult males and females,
teachers, medical practitioners, businessmen, agriculture laborers, fishermen,
unemployed group etc. Judgmental and purposive sampling method includes the right
cases from the total population that helps to fulfill the purpose of research needs.
Observations are restricted to this group and conclusions from these observations are
generalized to the total population. Judgment or purposive sampling is very precarious,
because most stronger assumption can be made about the population and sampling
procedure than required while employing probability sampling.
Data Collection Method
In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any
developmental projects on socio-economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the
apprehensions of the people in the project area. For the process of data collection
through primary and secondary sources certain methods are used among that are:
Field Survey and Observations
Field survey and observations are made at each sampling village and the
quality of life of that region is estimated. Visits are made at hospitals, primary health
centers and sub-centers to know the health status of the region. Various government
organizations such as statistical department, department of census operations are visited
to collect the population details of that region.
Interview Method
Structured interview method is used to collect data regarding the awareness
and opinion from the sample selected of the various socio- economic sections of the
community. Structured interviews involve the use of a set of predetermined questions that
includes fixed and alternative questions. The questionnaire mainly highlights the
parameters such as income, employment and working conditions, housing, food, clothing,
water supply, sanitation, health, energy, transportation and communication, education,
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.138
environment and pollution to assess the quality of life of that particular region and general
awareness and opinion of the respondents about the project.
Socio-economic survey was conducted in 21 villages within the study area
located in all directions with reference to the project site.
The respondents were asked for their awareness/opinion about the project and
also their opinion about the impacts of the project on job opportunities, education, health-
care, housing, transportation facility and economic status etc.
The salient observations recorded during survey in the study area are:
For better functioning of the villages, two – three villages gathered together
and formed a local administrative structure called as group gram
panchayat (Fig. 3.8.3 a, b)
People are mainly engaged in fish catching (Fig. 3.8.4 a, b). Fishing is also
a major earning source in the region. Major species of fisheries in the
region are surmai, pamphlet, prawns / zinga (kolim).
Detailed information on fisherman populations, households and co-
oprative societies is presented in Tables 3.8.7 a, b, c respectively.
Agricultural and its allied activities are based on monsoon season. Major
crop is rice and other crops grown are coconut and groundnuts.
Agricultural labor work is also another important income generating
economic activity in the region, for that remuneration is being given in two
ways. Firstly in the form of per day wages based on gender differences as
male worker get Rs. 100 which is high as compared to their female counter
part i.e. getting per day wages between Rs. 60-80. Secondly the profit is
divided into 2 parts i.e. half-half taken by farm owner and agricultural
laborers
Marketing is held at the taluka places and other nearest local area i.e.
Gokarna, kumta etc.
More than 50-75 % people migrate towards Mumbai, Ratnagiri and Goa,
for getting job
Power supply facility is available in almost all villages in the study area
mostly for domestic purpose
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.139
Almost all the people use wood as a main source of fuel and very few
people use kerosene and LPG for cooking purpose
Tap water and open well water are the main source of drinking water (Fig.
3.8.5). Qulity of water is salty and scarcity of water is also experienced by
some villages.
Hundred percent villages are electrified
Educational facilities (Fig. 3.8.6) are available in the form of primary and
middle schools. In some villages, it is extended up to high school. For
higher studies, people avail the facility from the nearly towns like Kumta,
Karwar
Medical facilities (Fig. 3.8.7) in terms of primary health center and primary
health sub centers in the rural areas are very less. Most of the people are
going to the nearest village which is 5 to 6 km away. The hospitals
available in Kumta taluka provide good facility to people. Doctors and
nurses visit the villages for providing medical treatment.
Bus services and water way are the main mode of transportation
Unsatisfied transportation facility is seen in the study area because the
muddy roads cover maximum portion and the roads condition are not
satisfactory (Fig. 3.8.8).
Keeping in view the working population of the villages, the co-operative
societies for cultivators and fisherman are functioning in the region ie.
Gokarna and Tadadi.
The kuccha roads covers maximum portion of the study area and the
condition of roads are not satisfactory
Sanitation facilities are unsatisfactory in the study area. There are open
drains from where the domestic waste water is disposed off.
3.8.3.1 Public Awareness and Opinion
Awareness among the people regarding the proposed Sea Port project at
Tadadi is lacking but when asked about their opinion regarding the project,
people generally gave both positive and negative responses.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.140
People believe that the project would pollute the water and air in the
environment and radiation hazards would increase the cancer prevalence
in the area. These conditions are also responsible for an unfavorable
opinion in the rural area surveyed
However, respondents have expressed favorable opinion about the
project. This favorable opinion can also be attributed to proposed
improvement in transportation and communication as well as the welfare
activities in the study area
The fishermen population involved in fish catch activities in Agnashani
River and Arabian sea gives negative opinion regarding the port because
they are the victim of losing their income source. Fish catching activity will
be disturbed due to development of port.
Employment facilities for local youth may be increased
Majority of respondents are not aware about the proposed project activity.
Negative Response
Some of the villager’s land had already been acquired between the years
1965 – 1975 but land losers are not satisfied with the compensation they
got and they registered their case in court which is under process.
Some villagers heard about acquisition of land for the proposed project but
they are not willing to confirm till date, if land has been acquired they are
not willing to give their land as they don’t want to loose their native place
and their earning source i.e. fishing activity.
Increase in traffic flow and congestion in and around the project location.
Positive Response
Development of proposed port at Tadadi will bring employment opportunity
and people think that preference shall be given to local community
because presently this region is lacking employment for educated youth.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.141
3.8.4 Quality of Life
Quality of Life (QoL) is a term, which indicates overall status of socio-economic
environment in a given area. Quality of Life (QoL) is defined as a function between
“Objective Conditions” and “Subjective Attitudes” involving a defined “area” of concern.
The “Objective Conditions” are defined as numerically measurable artifacts of a
physical, sociological event or economic event. Objective conditions may be defined as
any number, which stands for a given quantity of a variable of interest so long as it is
independent of subjective opinion.
“Subjective Attitude” is primarily concerned with affective and cognitive
dimensions. It is specifically concerned with ‘how aspects of cognition vary as objective
conditions vary’.
Once objective measures are obtained for each factor they are transformed to
a normal scale varying from 0 to 1 (value function curve) in which 0 corresponds to the
lowest or least satisfactory measure, and 1 corresponds to the highest. The weights are
assigned to each factor by ranked-pair wise technique (by the expert group) based on the
secondary data and general observations.
For each objective measure, a corresponding subjective measure is developed
for each individual of the sample population by asking him to rate his satisfaction scale
(value function curve). And, it is used such that 0 corresponds to the lowest level of
attitudinal satisfaction and 1 corresponds to the highest level of satisfaction. Weights are
assigned to each factor using ranked - pair wise comparison techniques.
The Socio-economic Indicators for QoL Assessment are:
1) Income
2) Employment and Working Condition
3) Housing
4) Food
5) Clothing
6) Water Supply
7) Sanitation
8) Health
9) Energy
10) Transportation
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.142
11) Communication
12) Education
13) Environment and Pollution
14) Recreation
15) Social Security
16) Human Rights
Subjective Quality of Life Index
QoLs = 1/p
p
j
m
i 11
QIij x Wi
Where,
QoLs = Subjective quality of life index
p = No. of respondents, j = 1, ......, p
m = No. of factors, i = 1, ......, m
QIij = Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by jth respondent
Qiij = Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by all respondents in an
area
Wi = Relative weightage of the ith factor
Objective Quality of Life
QoLo =
m
1i QIij x Wi
Where,
QoLo = Objective quality of life index
n = No. of QoL Factors
i = 1, ......, n
QIi = Satisfaction level (assigned by the expert group) for the ith
objective indicator
Wi = Normalized weight for ith factor
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.143
Cumulative Quality of Life Index
QoLc = 2
QoLsQoLo
The subjective and objective QoL indices prior to commissioning of the project
are presented in Table 3.8.8.
The average QoL index values are estimated as:
QoL (S) = 0.47
QoL (O) = 0.49
QoL (C) = 0.48
The average QoL index value for the study area is leaning towards low level of
satisfactory level due to adequate economic status like income, basic facilities, medical
facility, education, water and transportation.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.144
Sampling Locations
Fig. 3.8.1: Survey Village for Socio-economic Study
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.145
Fig. 3.8.2 (a): Employment Pattern
Fig. 3.8.2 (b): Employment Pattern
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.146
Fig. 3.8.3a: Representative of Gram Panchayat Office at Gokarna
Fig. 3.8.3 b: Data Collection in Agarvayangani Gram Panchayat Office
Fig. 3.8.4 a: Fish Caching in Study Area
Fig. 3.8.4 b: Fish Caching in Study Area
Fig. 3.8.5: Source of Drinking Water Fig. 3.8.6: Educational Institution
Fig. 3.8.7: PHC Primary Health Center at Ankola Taluka
Fig. 3.8.8: Road Condition of the Villages
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.147
Table 3.8.1
Village Location: Socioeconomic Survey
Sr.
No. Village
Direction Approx. Arial Distance (km)
w.r.t. proposed Tadadi Port
1. Hittal Makki NNE 5.0
2. Madangeri NNE 6.5
3. Baloli NNE 6.0
4. Yennamadi NE 7.0
5. Hiregutti NE 5.0
6. Morba ENE 4.5
7. Mithal Gazni NE 3.0
8. Agnnashini SSE 2.5
9. Kagal SSE 3.5
10. Bad SSE 4.5
11. Gudeangadi SSE 6.0
12. Hegde SE 9.5
13. Mirjan SE 9.0
14. Tadari N 0.5
15. Gokarn NW 3.5
16. Belehin NW 6.0
17. Horumageri NNW 8.0
18. Gangavali NW 8.5
19. Bonsire N 7.5
20. Hoskeri NNW 6.0
21. Torke N 4.0
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environmental Status
3.148
Table 3.8.2
Summary of Demographic Structure of the Study Area
Demographic parameters Details
Number of District 1
Number of Tehsil 2
Total Number of Villages 40
Total Servyed Villages 21
Total area in hectare 13,633
Total No. of households 13,140
Total population 68,390
Density of population (persons per km2) 503
Sex ratio (No. of females per 1000 males) 980
Scheduled Castes (%) 4,383 (6.41%)
Scheduled Tribe (%) 44 (0.06%)
Literate (%) 47,089 (68.85%)
Main workers (%) 20,689 (30.25%)
Marginal workers (%) 7,444 (10.88%)
Non workers (%) 40,257 (58.86%)
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.149
Table 3.8.3
Demographic Structure of Study Area
Sr. No.
Village Area in Hector
No. of Househol
d
Population Scheduled Castes
Scheduled Tribal
Literates Main
Workers Marginal Workers
Non Workers
TP M F
Ankola Taluka
1 Agragon 275 201 987 509 478 118 0 733 263 162 562
2 Hegre 47 144 723 335 388 25 0 402 239 113 371
3 Adigon 282 148 644 316 328 5 0 398 161 225 258
4 Shirur 895 319 1657 846 811 67 0 961 778 350 529
5 Sagadgeri 271 90 437 235 202 112 0 266 150 37 250
6 Andle 261 63 312 153 159 0 0 206 127 26 159
7 Takatgeri 189 6 25 14 11 0 0 19 11 0 14
8 Balale 217 213 1068 547 521 153 4 756 346 199 523
Total 2,437 1,184 5,853 2,955 2,898 480 4 3,741 2,075 1,112 2,666
9 Nadumaskeri 381 621 3373 1744 1629 116 0 2366 826 328 2219
10 Harumaskeri 141 144 723 363 360 8 0 425 210 40 473
11 Bhavikodla 211 373 2072 1030 1042 4 0 1186 732 352 988
12 Hanehalli 237 408 1796 880 916 289 0 1255 564 77 1155
13 Hoskeri 134 135 653 317 336 7 0 467 148 152 353
14 Kadime 169 164 782 390 392 6 0 372 181 117 484
15 Gonehalli 128 70 315 148 167 0 0 164 51 95 169
16 Gokarn 1,700 2532 12955 6572 6383 723 10 8773 4223 903 7829
17 Toregazani 27 38 228 110 118 0 0 136 94 11 123
18 Torke 248 261 1309 669 640 0 0 935 413 211 685
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.150
Sr. No.
Village Area in Hector
No. of Househol
d
Population Scheduled Castes
Scheduled Tribal
Literates Main
Workers Marginal Workers
Non Workers
TP M F
Ankola Taluka
19 Hittalmakki 259 73 319 155 164 0 0 238 35 88 196
20 Madangeri 306 279 1496 763 733 125 0 984 434 222 840
21 Madangeri 84 27 127 59 68 31 0 58 55 10 62
22 Hiregutti 682 596 2783 1386 1397 463 0 1972 995 218 1570
23 Morba 227 180 882 453 429 274 0 593 321 144 417
24 Aghanashini 251 579 3270 1664 1606 30 0 2246 984 479 1807
25 Kagal 530 711 4143 2091 2052 84 1 3146 1192 527 2424
26 Hubbangeri 132 354 2066 1062 1004 18 0 1683 428 158 1480
27 Baad 219 297 1493 756 737 213 0 1121 360 314 819
28 Gudeangadi 164 304 1485 722 763 0 0 1136 422 195 868
29 Holanagadde 451 673 3659 1838 1821 102 0 2674 1212 230 2217
30 Manikatta 191 13 87 49 38 0 0 54 16 23 48
31 Halkar 199 208 1090 567 523 137 0 789 243 172 675
32 Betkuli 485 316 1875 944 931 0 0 1293 494 64 1317
33 Kurigadde 446 66 291 150 141 19 0 206 66 22 203
34 Bargi 302 359 1782 895 887 29 0 1290 550 59 1173
35 Bargigzani 176 14 75 41 34 0 0 56 23 2 50
36 Hegde 1,094 1311 6913 3457 3456 932 0 4596 2156 792 3965
37 Chatrakurv 37 46 253 142 111 0 0 191 49 51 153
38 Mugvekanvadi 551 56 296 150 146 0 0 211 160 2 134
38 Yattinabail 411 118 531 279 252 0 10 425 121 21 389
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.151
Sr. No.
Village Area in Hector
No. of Househol
d
Population Scheduled Castes
Scheduled Tribal
Literates Main
Workers Marginal Workers
Non Workers
TP M F
Ankola Taluka
40 Mirjan 623 630 3415 1738 1677 293 19 2307 856 253 2306
Total 11,196 11,956 62,537 31,584 30,953 3,903 40 43,348 18,614 6,332 37,591
Grand Total 13,633 13,140 68,390 34,539 33,851 4,383 44 47,089 20,689 7,444 40,257
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka State
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.152
Table 3.8.4
Infrastructure Resource Base of the Study Area
Sr. No.
Villages Educational Institutions
Medical Facilities
Drinking Water Supply
Communication Transportation Approach
Road Bank POWER
Kannada District ,Ankola Taluka Uthar
1. Agragon S ….. W, HP, PO, TO, PTO, PH(23)
BS PR, FP ……. EA
2. Hegre P,M ….. W, HP, PH(5) BS PR, FP ACS, OCS
EA
3. Adigon P ….. W, HP, PO,PH(6) ….. MR, FP ….. EA
4. Shirur P(3) ….. W PO, PH(20) BS, NW PR, MR, FP
CP, ACS
EA
5. Sagadgeri P, ….. W PO, PH(10) BS, NW PR, MR, FP
….. EA
6. Andle P,M PHS T, W PO, TO, PTO, PH(28)
BS, NW PR, MR, FP
CP, ACS
EA
7. Takatgeri ….. ….. W ….. BS PR, MR, FP
….. EA
8. Balale P,M ….. W PO, PH(42) BS PR, MR, FP
CM, CP, ACS
EA
Kannnda District, Kumta Taluka
9. Nadumaskeri P(5),M(4), S PHS, MCW, RMP
W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(200)
BS, NW PR, MR, FP, NR
….. EA
10. Harumaskeri P,M ….. W, , HP, TW PH(10) BS, PR, MR, FP, NR
….. EA
11. Bhavikodla P,M ….. W, TK, HP PO, PH BS, NW PR, MR, FP, NR
….. EA
12. Hanehalli P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, PH(51) BS PR ….. EA
13. Hoskeri P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP TO, PTO, PH(4) ….. PR ….. EA
14. Kadime P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(4)
BS PR ….. EA
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.153
Sr. No.
Villages Educational Institutions
Medical Facilities
Drinking Water Supply
Communication Transportation Approach
Road Bank POWER
15. Gonehalli P, ….. T, W, TK, HP PH(7) BS PR ….. EA
16. Gokarn P(15),M(7), SS, C
D(3), MCW, PHC, PHS, FWC, TB,
NH(3), RMP(2)
T, W, TK, HP PO(3), PH(685) BS, NW PR,MR, FP
CM, ACS, NCS, OCS
EA
17. Toregazani P ….. T, W, TK, HP PH(5) BS PR ….. EA
18. Torke M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(50)
BS PR ….. EA
19. Hittalmakki P,M ….. T, W, HP BS PR, MR, ….. EA
20. Madangeri P(3), ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(15)
BS, RS PR, MR, FP
CM, ACS, NCS
EA
21. Yennemadi P ….. T, W, HP ….. ….. MR EA
22. Hiregutti P(3), S MCW, PHC, FWC, TB
T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(34)
BS PR, MR, FP
CP, ACS, NCS, OCS
EA
23. Morba P ….. T, W, HP PH(9) BS PR, MR, FP
….. EA
24. Aghanashini P(4),M(3) RMP W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(30)
BS, NW PR ACS, NCS
EA
25. Kagal P(5),M(3), S(3)
MCW, PHC, FWC,RMP
W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(60)
BS, NW ….. ACS, NCS
EA
26. Hubbangeri P(3), RMP W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(70)
BS, NW PR, ….. EA
27. Baad P, SS ….. W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(60)
BS PR CP, ACS
EA
28. Gudeangadi P,M ….. W, HP PO, TO, PTO, BS PR CM, EA
29. Holanagadde P(4), ….. T, W, TW, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(25)
BS PR, MR NCS EA
30. Manikatta ….. ….. W, PH ….. PR, MR ….. EA
31. Halkar ….. ….. T, W, TK, TW PO, PH(12) ….. PR, MR ….. EA
Ch
ap
ter 3
: B
aselin
e E
nviro
nm
en
tal S
tatu
s
3.154
Sr. No.
Villages Educational Institutions
Medical Facilities
Drinking Water Supply
Communication Transportation Approach
Road Bank POWER
32. Betkuli P(3), ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(20)
BS MR ….. EA
33. Kurigadde P ….. T, W, HP PH(3) ….. PR, MR ACS EA
34. Bargi M, S ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(25)
BS PR, MR ….. EA
35. Bargigazani M ….. T ….. NW MR ….. EA
36. Hegde P(11), M(4) ….. T, W, TW, HP TO, PTO, PH(150)
BS, NW PR, MR, FP
CM, CP,
ACS, NCM,
EA
37. Chatrakurve P ….. T, W PH ….. PR, MR, NR
….. EA
38. Mugvekanvadi
P ….. W, HP ….. BS PR, MR ….. EA
39. Yattinabail P ….. W, HP PO, PH(8) BS PR, MR ….. EA
40. Mirjan P(3), NH T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(18)
BS PR, MR, NW
CP, ACS
EA
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka State
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.155
Table 3.8.5
Employment Pattern in the Study Area
Sr. No.
Villages Main
Workers Cultivators
Agricultural Laborers
Household Laborers
Other Workers
Uttar Kannada, Ankola taluka
1 Agragon 263 106 28 1 128
2 Hegre 239 99 95 5 40
3 Adigon 161 102 15 12 32
4 Shirur 778 529 61 12 176
5 Sagadgeri 150 45 21 0 84
6 Andle 127 52 39 6 30
7 Takatgeri 11 11 0 0 0
8 Balale 346 63 89 8 186
Uttar Kannada , Kumta taluka
9 Nadumaskeri 826 67 259 42 458
10 Harumaskeri 210 71 64 0 75
11 Bhavikodla 732 282 48 0 402
12 Hanehalli 564 117 124 22 301
13 Hoskeri 148 86 32 0 30
14 Kadime 181 83 24 9 65
15 Gonehalli 51 23 0 0 28
16 Gokarn 4223 509 583 71 3060
17 Toregazani 94 2 0 0 92
18 Torke 413 39 108 1 265
19 Hittalmakki 35 4 0 1 30
20 Madangeri 434 115 49 27 243
21 Yennemadi 55 20 22 0 13
22 Hiregutti 995 270 76 35 614
23 Morba 321 39 57 5 220
24 Aghanashini 984 197 110 15 662
25 Kagal 1192 278 57 5 852
26 Hubbangeri 428 53 53 0 322
27 Baad 360 71 79 8 202
28 Gudeangadi 422 53 78 3 288
29 Holanagadde 1212 344 27 33 808
30 Manikatta 16 13 0 0 3
31 Halkar 243 49 5 12 177
32 Betkuli 494 83 40 0 371
33 Kurigadde 66 22 3 0 41
34 Bargi 550 245 123 0 182
35 Bargigazani 23 8 0 0 15
36 Hegde 2156 394 225 38 1499
37 Chatrakurve 49 27 0 0 22
38 Mugvekanvadi 160 90 54 0 16
39 Yattinabail 121 15 7 0 99
40 Mirjan 856 55 27 58 716
Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.156
Table 3.8.6 (a)
Health Statistics - Gokarna (2009-2010)
Sr.
No.
Disesess Kumta Taluka
1 Birth Rate 13
2 Others Death 1003
3 Total Maternal Death 1
4 Total Infant Death 0-7 Day IMR 4
5 Total Infant Death 7 to 28 Day IMR 6
6 Total Infant Death 28 day 1 Years 3
7 Still Birth 12
8 0.5 Years Children 9814
9 Maternal Mortality Rate 1
Source: Community Health Center (CHC), at Kumta taluka ,
Uttar Kannada dist. Karnataka State
Table 3.8.6 (b)
Health Statistics - Gokarna (From Jan 2010 to June 2010)
Sr.
No.
Diseases Gokarna Village
1 Birth Rate 12.5
2 Death Rate 7.8
3 Infant Mortality Rate IMR 29.5
4 Still Birth Rate 24.5
5 Child Mortality Rate (0- 4) 1.5
6 Maternal Mortality Rate 0
Source: Primary Health Center (PHC), Gokarna Village at Kumta taluka.
Uttar Kannada dist. Karnataka State
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.157
Table 3.8.7(a)
Information on Fisherman
Sr. No
Taluka Name
Village Hous-
ehold
Population Total
Active Fisherman Total
Co- operative society M F C M F
1 Ankola Taluka
16 2560 4572 5795 7013 17380 5048 1860 11222 5
2 Kumta Taluka
51 3999 7271 7684 11925 26880 5864 5358 6908 10
Source: Fisheries Department of MFRI (Marian Fish Research Institute) in Karwar District, Karnataka State
Table 3.8.7 (b)
Fisherman Household Census – 2010 (Ankola Taluk)
Sl. No.
Name of the grame panchayat
Village Habitation Name Total No. of Household
1 Aversa Harawad Harwad Sea Bird Colony 330
Gabithwada 105
2 Belekery Belekery Belekery 345
3 Bavikery Keni Harikantra Keni 337
Total 1117
Source: Fisheries Department of MFRI (Marian Fish Research Institute) in Karwar District, Karnataka State
Table 3.8.7(c)
Fisheries Co-operative Society
Sr.
No Co – operative society Place
1 Mahila Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Ltd. Tadari
2 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Tadari
3 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Dubanasesi
4 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Gangavadi
5 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Betkuri
6 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Mirjan
7 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Kumta
8 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Kagal
9 Mahila Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Lid Kumata Source: Fishery office in Kumta Taluka , Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka.
Chapter 3:
Baseline Environment Status
3.158
Table 3.8.8
Quality of Life Existing in the Villages surveyed
Sr. No.
Villages QoL(S) QoL(O) QoL(C)
1. Hittal Makki 0.56 0.53 0.53
2. Madangeri 0.53 0.55 0.54
3. Baloli 0.57 0.54 0.55
4. Yennamadi 0.52 0.52 0.52
5. Hiregutti 0.55 0.51 0.53
6. Morba 0.51 0.52 0.51
7. Mithal Gazni 0 0 0
8. Agnnashini 0.54 0.57 0.56
9. Kagal 0.48 0.49 0.49
10. Bad 0.44 0.51 0.43
11. Gudeangadi 0.53 0.51 0.52
12. Hegde 0.54 0.54 0.54
13. Mirjan 0.55 0.53 0.54
14. Tadari 0.38 0.48 0.43
15. Gokarn 0.52 0.53 0.53
16. Belehin 0.49 0.5 0.49
17. Horumageri 0.53 0.50 0.51
18. Gangavali 0.37 0.46 0.42
19. Bonsire 0.58 0.51 0.54
20. Hoskeri 0.49 0.51 0.50
21. Torke 0.36 0.48 0.42
Average 0.47 0.49 0.48
CChhaapptteerr 44
AAnnttiicciippaatteedd EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall
IImmppaaccttss aanndd MMiittiiggaattiioonn
MMeeaassuurreess 4.1 Introduction
An impact on environment is an alteration of the environmental conditions or
creation of new set of environmental conditions, adverse or beneficial, caused or induced
by the action or a set of actions under consideration.
Identification of Impacts leads to quantification and evaluation of impacts and
suggest mitigation measures. Environmental impacts are categorised as either primary or
secondary. Primary impacts are those which are attributed directly by the project.
Secondary impacts are those that are induced indirectly and typically include the
associated investment and changed patterns of social and economic activities by the
proposed action.
Although, in general, number of impacts have been identified while describing
existing environmental status, it is necessary at this stage to identify the critical impacts that
are likely to occur due to the proposed sea port for various components of the environment.
The detailed list of activities and action described have been taken into
consideration for generation of cause condition effect networks (i.e chains of events) in
recognizing the series of impacts that would be triggered by the proposed activity.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.2
The method accounts for the project activity and identifies the types of impacts,
which would initially occur. The next step related to analysis of each impact and identifies
the secondary and tertiary impacts which are induced as a result. This process is repeated
unit all possible impacts are identified. The identified impacts for various components of
environment viz. air, noise, surface and groundwater, land, biological and socio-economic
environment are presented here.
4.2 Air Environment
In order to predict the impacts on ambient air quality due to construction activities
and operational activities proposed at Tadadi port, data on emission scenario and
micrometeorology collected by NEERI within the impact zone and along with historical data
collected from Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) were used to predict Ground Level
Concentrations (GLCs) of SO2, NOX and PM10 for different temporal variations. Fugitive
Dust Model (FDM), SCREEN-3 and CALINE-4 models were used to predict GLCs.
Ships are possible sources of airborne emissions such as gases, smoke, soot and
fume. SO2 and NO2 are typical pollutants generated by ships while both manoeuvring and
berthing and may affect air pollution in the hinterland.
Air quality consists of two main elements: (a) soot and dust, measured by
particulate matter (PM10), which originate from dry bulk cargo handling and storage,
construction work on land, and road traffic; and (b) concentration of sulfur dioxide (SO2),
nitrogen dioxide (NO2), carbon monoxide (CO), and hydrocarbons (HC) emitted from ships,
vehicles and various equipments used for Port activities. The meteorological data during
Post-monsoon season of 2010 have been used for the predictions.
4.2.1 Micrometeorology
The hourly wind speed, solar insulation and cloudiness during the day and in the
night, were used to determine the hourly atmospheric stability Class A to F (Pasquill and
Gifford).
The hourly stabilities were determined based on the technique suggested by
Turner. Turner’s system used for determining the stability classes is as follows:
For day or night: If total cloud cover (TC) = 10/10 and ceiling <7000 ft NR = 0
For night-time (defined as period from one hour before sunset to one hour after
sunrise):
a) If TC<4/10, use NR = -2
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.3
b) If TC>4/10, use NR = -1
For day time: Determine insulation class number (IN)
a) If TC<5/10, use NR = IN
b) If TC>5/10, modify IN by the sum of the following applicable criteria
If ceiling <7000 ft (2134 m), modification = -2
If ceiling >7000 ft but <16000 ft (4877 m), modification = -1
If TC = 10/10 and ceiling >7000 ft, modification = -1, and let modified value of
IN=NR, except for day-time NR cannot be <+1
The 24 hourly wind rose diagram for Post monsoon season indicates that the
predominant winds are from East and West directions with speed ranging between 1.0 m/s
and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly, the impact zone will be spread over W-SE-NE-E sectors during
Post monsoon season.
4.2.2 Air Quality Models Description
The impact on air quality due to emissions from single source or group of sources
is evaluated by using of mathematical models. When air pollutants are emitted into the
atmosphere, they are immediately diffused into surrounding atmosphere, transported and
diluted due to winds. The air quality models are designed to simulate these processes
mathematically and to relate emissions of primary pollutants to the resulting downwind air.
The inputs needed for model development are emission load, meteorology and topographic
features, to predict the GLCs.
4.2.2.1 Fugitive Dust Model (FDM)
Fugitive Dust Model (FDM) is used for computing the particulate concentration
from the expected construction activities at project site due to construction activities. FDM is
a computerized air quality model specifically designed for computing concentration and
deposition impacts from fugitive dust sources. The sources may be point, line or area
sources. The model is generally based on the well-known Gaussian Plume formulation for
computing concentrations, but the model has been specifically adapted to incorporate an
improved gradient-transfer deposition algorithm. Emissions for each source are apportioned
by the user into a series of particle size classes. A gravitational settling velocity and a
deposition velocity are calculated by FDM for each class. Concentration and deposition are
computed at all user-selectable receptor locations. The model is designed to work with pre-
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.4
processed meteorological data. FDM is an analytical air quality model specifically designed
for the analysis of the dispersion of fugitive dust.
4.2.2.2 SCREEN-3 Model
The SCREEN model was developed to provide an easy-to-use method of
obtaining pollutant concentration estimates based on the screening procedures
documented by US EPA. SCREEN3 - a graphical user interface for the US EPA SCREEN3
model to obtain ground-level pollutant concentration estimates for a single source and
analyze the worst case scenarios for air pollutant concentrations. It predicts the pollutant
concentrations from various sources such as point, flare, area and volume sources. It uses
the buoyancy induced dispersion and urban or rural dispersion parameters in calculations.
It uses full meteorology option (matrix of different wind speed and stability classes), single
stability class and single wind speed and stability class for worst case meteorological
applications. The model predicts concentrations in the downwind direction at user defined
receptor locations.
4.2.2.3 CALINE-4 for Mobile Sources
The pollutants emitted due to vehicular activities are PM, SO2, CO and NOX. The
data available for estimated number of vehicles and fuel consumption in the plant premises
are used for estimation of emission of pollutants along with the emission factors as
mentioned in the CPCB guidelines for vehicles.
The impacts due to proposed Line sources i.e. vehicular emission are predicted
by using CL4 model. CL4 (Caltrans, 1989) is a dispersion model that predicts
concentrations of pollutants emitted by vehicles near roadways. CL4 is a simple line source
Gaussian plume dispersion model and predicts air pollutant concentrations for averaging
periods of 1 hour and 8 hour. The user defines the proposed roadway geometry, worst-
case meteorological parameters, anticipated, traffic volumes, and receptor positions. The
user must also define emission factors for each roadways link. CL4 divides individual
highway links into a series of elements from which incremental concentration are computed
and then summed to form a total concentration estimate for a particular receptor location.
The receptor distance is measured along a perpendicular from the receptor to the roadway
centreline. The first element is formed at this point as a square with sides equal to the line
source width. Thus, as element resolution becomes less important with distance from the
receptor, elements become larger to permit efficiency in computation. The choice of the
element growth factor as a function of roadway-wind angle (PHI) range represents a good
compromise between accuracy and computational efficiency. Finer initial element resolution
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.5
is unwarranted because the vertical dispersion curves used by CL4 have been calibrated
for the link half – width (W2) distance from the element centre point.
Each element is modelled as an “equivalent” finite line source (EFLS) positioned
normal to the wind direction and centred at the element midpoint. A local x-y coordinate
system aligned with the wind direction and originating at the element midpoint is defined for
each element. The emissions occurring within an element are assumed to be released
along the EFLS representing the element. The emissions are then assumed to disperse in
a Gaussian manner downwind from the element. The length and orientation of the EFLS
are functions of the element size and the angle (PHI, ) between the average wind direction
and highway alignment. Values of PHI = 0 or PHI = 90 degrees are altered within the
program an insignificant amount to avoid division by zero during the FELS trigonometric
computations.
CL4 treats the region directly over the highway as a zone of uniform emissions
and turbulence. This is designated as the mixing zone, and is defined as the region over
the traveled way (traffic lanes – not including shoulders) plus three meters on either side.
The additional width accounts for the initial horizontal dispersion imparted to pollutants by
the vehicle wake effect. Within the mixing zone, the mechanical turbulence created by
moving vehicles and the thermal turbulence created by hot vehicle exhaust is assumed to
predominate near the ground.
4.2.3 Air Emissions
The emissions due to various sources during the construction activity and
operational activities are discussed here. The flow chart of impact network of Air
environment is shown in the Fig. 4.2.1. The impact can be divided into three types, i.e.
primary impact, secondary impact and tertiary impact. All the three types are interlinked to
each other.
4.2.3.1 Air Emissions during Construction Phase
In the pre-construction phase the activities like site clearance, site levelling,
movement of workers and materials, construction work (i.e., labour colonies, offices,
material storage and maintenance yards etc.) and construction of haul roads for movement
of vehicles will generate dust. In the pre- construction stage dust would be the predominant
pollutant due to these activities. The important activities during the construction phase that
produce gaseous pollutants and particulate matter and affect the air quality. Emissions from
construction equipment, work vessels, trucks and other vehicles used in construction work
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.6
could be a source of air pollution. Dust from construction activities is also a possible source
of air pollution.
During the site preparation, mechanical shovels and earthmovers will be used for
site clearance, cut and fill, and other site levelling activities and trenching. The major
construction activities will involve earth work, excavation, and embankment formation,
transport of construction materials, handling, and storage terminal. These activities would
generate dust particles, which will be mobilized by wind and affect the ambient air quality.
Cranes, booms etc will be deployed for transportation. These activities would cause a
general increase in levels of suspended particulate matter in the ambient air. However, this
increase in concentration would be temporary in nature and localized. A marginal increase
in the levels of oxides of nitrogen, carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons is envisaged due to
the movement of vehicles for transportation of construction material and diesel generators
required during construction phase. Wind erosion can cause and dislodge fine soil particles
due to removal of vegetative cover. Transport of fine coarse gravel in uncovered trucks on
unpaved roads and fuel combustion, during vehicle operations, concrete mixing and
cement handling, diesel operated constructed machinery, welding activities, Asphalt
heating, mixing & laying. All these activities contribute to air pollutants like particulate
matter, Sulphur oxides, Nitrogen oxides, lead hydrocarbon, and photochemical oxidants. All
these effects are short - term effects. The particulate emissions from construction
equipments are estimated to be about 0.83 TPD (9.6 g/s) over the port construction area.
4.2.3.2 Air Emissions during Operation Phase
During the operation phase, there will be an increase in the movement of traffic
and hence, emissions from the moving vehicles will also increase. The exhaust from the
launches, diesel operated small boats, tugs, dredgers, cranes, loaders etc will enhance a
pollution load during operational phase.
Particulate matter dust generated due to spillage of dry cargo during loading /
unloading operations. Release of gases from the cargo as a result of gas leakage, dust
generated from storage yard storing uncovered dry cargo.
Ships are a possible source of airborne emissions such as gases, smoke, soot
and fume. SO2 and NO2 are typical pollutants generated by ships while both manoeuvring
and berthing and may affect air pollution in the hinterland.
The emissions of SO2, NOX and PM10 from 07 ships operating at 07 berths
simultaneously in continuous manner are estimated to be 1.76 TPD, 8.32 TPD and 0.08
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.7
TPD respectively. The emissions of SO2, NOX and PM10 from different dock/port operations
are estimated to be 0.057 TPD, 0.055 TPD and 0.1 TPD respectively. Similarly the exhaust
emissions of pollutants from the vehicles are estimated.
4.2.3.3 Impacts of Air Emissions during Construction Phase
The particulate emissions and meteorological data given in Table 4.2.1 are used
for predicting the particulate matter using the FDM during construction phase. The 24
hourly average maximum GLCs of PM10 are found to be 72.4 µg/m3. The isopleths of PM
concentrations during the construction phase are shown in Fig. 4.2.2. The maximum GLC
are less than the NAAQS for PM10 (100 µg/m3). However as construction is temporary
activity the impacts will be temporary in nature.
4.2.3.4 Impacts of Air Emissions during Operation Phase
(a) Ships /Vessels and Dock/Port Operations
The air pollution impact due to ships movement and berthing at the 07 proposed
berths in the Tadadi port on air environment is studied. The berths are designed for
operating ships with capacity ranging from 40,000 DWT to 100,000 DWT. It is assumed
that all 07 berths occupied with one ship each. Marine diesel oil (MDO) is taken as the fuel
used by ships. The pollutant emissions from the ships are estimated based on the
emission factors for the pollutants SO2, NOX and PM10 with ships having four main (> 2000
KW) and four auxiliary (600 KW) engines in operation moving with medium speed (SKM,
2007: Air quality impact assessment; DEH, 2001; National pollutant inventory emission
estimation technique manual for marine operations v1.1). The estimated emissions of SO2,
NOX and PM10 from 07 ships simultaneously berthed along with the standard stack
characteristics of ship for main and auxiliary engines are considered as given in Table 4.2.2
(SKM, 2004: Port botany upgrade EIS-Air quality impact assessment commission of
inquiry) for computing the incremental ground level concentrations of pollutants.
The maximum ground level concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 due to
simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth using ISCST model (24 hrly average
considering continuous emissions from two auxiliary engines of the ship/vessel under
operation) and different dock/port operations using hourly meteorological data during post-
monsoon season, which were on 24 hourly basis in an area of 10 km x 10 km with a grid
size of 500 m.
The 24 hrly maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3
and 3.0 g/m3 respectively due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.8
along with dock/port operations during post-monsoon season. The isopleths showing GLCs
of SO2, NOx and PM10 are presented in Fig. 4.2.3 - 4.2.5 respectively during post-monsoon
season. The predicted 24 hourly GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are found to be less than the
24 hourly concentrations of 228 µg/m3 for SO2 and 50 µg/m3 as given in ground level
impact assessment criteria (DECC, 2005; Approved methods for the modeling and
assessment of air pollutants in new South Wales, ISBN 1 74137 488 X). However, the 24
hourly concentrations of NOx are found to be higher than the ground level impact
assessment criteria of 98 µg/m3.
(b) Vehicles Movement on SH
Apart from the Ship and dock emissions the pollutants may also emit by mobile
sources such as vehicles or truck movement and fugitive emissions. Around 4000 truck
trips will be in operation per day to material transport from the proposed port on SH-63 with
existing lane (2 lanes) and the truck movement will be increased to about 12000 truck trips
per day from the proposed port on SH-63 with existing lane (with 2+2 lanes or 4 lane road).
CALINE-4, a line source model developed by California Transport Department is used to
predict the pollutant concentrations from mobile sources that transport materials, etc. It is
found that the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are 74
µg/m3, 46 µg/m3 and 76 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63 with
existing 2-lane road. However, the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10
and CO are 185 µg/m3, 115 µg/m3 and 192 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities
on SH-63 with 2+2-lanes or 4-lane road. The pollutant concentrations on 24-hourly basis
will be less than the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS).
The baseline maximum concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 were monitored to
be 8 µg/m3, 18 µg/m3 and 65 µg/m3 respectively near the proposed site. The incremental
concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and dock/port
operations would be 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3 and 3.0 µg/m3 on 24- hourly basis. The
cumulative concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and
dock/port operations superimposed over the baseline values would be 36.4 µg/m3, 144.8
µg/m3 and 68.0 µg/m3 on 24 hourly basis.
4.2.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase
The environmental pollution during construction phase is purely temporary and
localized except permanent change in local land-use and landscape at the proposed berth.
Environmental pollution in construction phase will be mainly due to site preparation, civil
works, transportation storage and handling of different kinds of materials including
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.9
flammable / hazardous materials, construction workers sanitation etc. The environmental
impacts during construction period are of shorter duration.
To control fugitive emissions following measures are recommended:
Methods for controlling dust emission are water sprinkling at the construction
site, use of proper transport methods, such as a conveyor belt for excavated
material and screens around the construction site
A plantation zone or open space between the construction site and the local
community could be an effective buffer
Temporary pavement of roads at the construction site could considerably
reduce dust emission
Trucks hauling dirt, rock or other granular or particulate material to
construction site should have their loads limited, trimmed, or wetted and
covered to prevent material from being spilled / scattered or wind blown over
public streets
Nose masks or earmuff should be provided to construction workers, while
carrying out operations that may entail potential for dust inhalation
There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any construction
activities
Engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipments will be
maintained so that exhaust emissions do not reach statutory limits (set for
that vehicle / equipment type and mode of operation by CPCB), and that all
vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with manufacturers
guidelines
The air pollution impacts during construction phase would be temporary and
contained within the project boundary
The storage and handling of soil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will be
carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and dust, e.g.,
by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets
Fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by application of water sprinkling
on unpaved roads and right of way.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.10
4.2.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase
Routine operational activities at berth would be associated with the following
potentially significant environmental impacts.
The air quality surveillance program should be undertaken for proposed
multipurpose sea port and iron ore and coal handling systems. However, the
air quality surveillance program may be strengthened properly keeping in
view the combined maximum impacts from post-project activities particularly
in critical downwind directions. Moreover, in view of the industrialization in
the region, the possibility of an integrated ambient air quality-monitoring
program together with surrounding industries may be explored in
consultation with SPCB
The estimated NOX emissions for the proposed iron ore and coal handling
trucks, dumpers would result marginal increase in PM, NOX and SO2
concentration in ambient air quality. However, the post-project ground level
concentrations would be well within the prescribed air quality standards
Natural gas will preferably be used as fuel in power generating sources.
However, standby DG sets of equivalent capacity will be made available to
meet the emergency power requirements. Engines should operate with
minimum excess air so that fuel consumption is optimized and emission of
NOX is minimized. Low NOX Burners will be utilized, wherever feasible
Engines should operate with minimum excess air so that fuel consumption is
optimized and emission of NOX is minimized. The following options shall be
considered during detailed engineering to mitigate NOX emissions from fuel
combustion:
Low NOX / tangential burners
Multistage combustion engines
Regular inspection of tank roof seals
Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipment.
Plantation development shall be implemented to mitigate impacts from
fugitive emissions. About 33% of the total area of port will be developed for
plantation
Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipments be done on regular
basis
Ambient air quality monitoring stations should be installed at four sampling
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.11
locations within the proposed project area. PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, methane
and non-methane hydrocarbons considering the proximity of the port and
other industries should be continuously monitored to establish ambient air
quality data base
Fugitive emissions should be controlled through proper maintenance
Spraying of water or some suitable chemical over the bulk material should
be done to minimize windblown dust
Bulk material should be transported in closed trucks to avoid wind
entrainment
Proper bag filters in conveyor belts must be used for collection of dust and
use of open conveyor belts should be minimized
No vehicle should be allowed without proper pollution under control
certification in the port area and highly polluting vehicles (especially heavy
trucks) should be avoided
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.12
Onshore
Development
Project
construction
Phase
Operation
Phase
Release of Air
Pollutants
Change in Air
Quality
Release of
Heat
Impact on
Visibility
Particulates
Deposition on
Soil, Water, Land
Climatic
Changes
Aesthetic
Impact
Impact on
Agricultural
Produce
Impact on Flora
& Fauna
Impact on Human
Health
Impact on
Economic Output
Impact on
Socio-Cultural
Environment
Acitvity
Primary
Impacts
Secondary
Impacts
Tertiary
Impacts
Fig. 4.2.1: Impact Network for Air Environment
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.13
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
Distance in West East Direction (m)
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
Dis
atn
ce
in
So
uth
Nort
h D
ire
ctio
n (
m)
Fig. 4.2.2: Incremental GLCs of PM10 during the Construction Phase
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Distance in West-East Direction (m)
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
Dis
tance
in S
outh
-Nort
h D
ire
ction
(m
)
Fig. 4.2.3: Incremental GLCs of SO2 due to simultaneous operation of ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.14
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Distance in West-East Direction (m)
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
Dis
tance
in S
outh
-Nort
h D
ire
ction
(m
)
Fig. 4.2.4: Incremental GLCs of NOx due to simultaneous operation of ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000
Distance in West-East Direction (m)
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
14000
16000
18000
20000
Dis
tance
in S
outh
-Nort
h D
ire
ction
(m
)
Fig. 4.2.5: Incremental GLCs of PM10 due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.15
Table 4.2.1
Meteorological Data Used for Air Quality Predictions
Hours Wind Direction
(deg)
Wind Speed (m/s)
Temperature
(K)
Atmospheric Stability
Class
Mixing Height
(m)
0100 45 1.2 295.3 5 250
0200 315 1.1 294.4 5 250
0300 270 1.3 293.5 5 250
0400 315 1.1 292.8 5 250
0500 270 1.4 292.4 5 250
0600 90 1.8 291.1 5 250
0700 90 2.8 294.8 3 500
0800 270 2.5 295.6 2 700
0900 225 2.6 299.2 2 850
1000 45 3.2 302.2 2 1000
1100 90 3 304.5 2 1100
1200 90 2.8 307.8 2 1100
1300 90 3 309.2 2 1150
1400 90 3.2 310.6 2 1200
1500 45 2.6 308.8 2 1000
1600 270 2.4 306.6 3 850
1700 270 2.2 304.8 3 650
1800 90 2.8 303.3 3 600
1900 90 1.8 302.2 5 500
2000 45 2.1 300.2 5 350
2100 225 1.9 299.4 5 300
2200 270 1.8 298.8 5 250
2300 270 1.1 297.5 5 250
2400 315 1.6 296.2 5 250
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.16
Table 4.2.2
Stack Details with Pollutant Emission rates
Sr. No.
Stack Attached to Auxiliary Engine
Stack height
(m)
Internal Diameter of Stack
(Top)
(m)
Temperature of Exhaust
Gas
(K)
Exit Velocity
(m/s)
Emission$ (g/s)
SO2 NOx SPM
1 Ship/ Vessel# 30.0 0.6 643 8
2.54 12.0 0.12
$Values for two auxiliary engines through combined stack for each vessel/ship
#The stack details and emission rates are given for one ship/vessel operating with two auxiliary engines at one berth. Same data is used for each ship/vessel at each berth (for all total 7 berths).
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.17
4.3 Noise Environment
Noise is defined as unwanted sound. Port and Harbour projects can involve short-
term impacts during construction and long-term impacts during operation due to increased
noise levels. The impacts however range from hearing damage to interference on human
activities such as sleep, communication and concentration. Construction activities may
create a problem of noise and vibration generated by construction equipment, truck traffic,
work vessels and other similar sources.
4.3.1 Noise Sources
a) Noise Due to Stationary Sources
The equipment and diesel generators at construction site can be considered as
stationary sources though they may be stationed at a particular site for few weeks. Ships
are the permanent noise-generating source (at the port) during operational phase of the
project. The flow chart of impact network for noise environment is shown in the Fig. 4.3.1.
The cumulative noise levels from the above temporary and permanent sources
during construction and operation phases have been estimated at various distances using
Wave Divergence Model, as described below:
LP = LS – 20 Log (r) + DI – 8 – Ae
Where,
LP : sound pressure level at a receptor located at radial distance ‘r’ dB (A)
LS : sound pressure level at the source, dB (A)
r : radial distance of the receptor from the source, m
DI : directivity index of the source (for hemispherical radiation DI = 3)
A6 : excess attenuation caused by environmental conditions
The cumulative impact of multiple stationary noise sources at particular project
site can be calculated by. LP (Total) is the sound pressure level due to N number of
sources.
4.3.1.1 Prediction of Noise Levels during Construction Phase
Noise level during construction phase will increase due to the activities like
movement of levelling and construction machinery and vehicles, clearing of obstructions
and trees from proposed area of acquisition, construction activities i.e., construction of
labour camp, onsite office, construction material plants etc. However these activities are not
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.18
likely to generate high noise levels. On the whole, the impact of generated noise on the
environment will not be significant, reversible and local in nature but if the construction work
continues round the clock, then continuous noise will be generated.
The major noise generating sources are DG sets, crusher, excavators, crane,
blasting, dredgers, concrete mixer etc. Typical noise levels generated by various
construction equipment are given in Table 4.3.1.2. These activities at the site are likely to
increase the background noise levels by 2-3 dB(A) at a distance of 0.5 km. The major
human settlements are more than 2.5 km away from the site. Hence there will not be any
excessive noise impact on the community.
4.3.1.2 Prediction of Noise Levels during Operational Phase
During the operation phase, noise will be generated due to the operation of the
generators, pumps, engines of boats, ships, dredgers cranes for handling of goods, cargo
and shipment vehicles.
The cumulative noise levels due to the combined operation of booster pumps and
power generating units, Ships loading / unloading, Generators (at the port) are predicted to
be 50 dB(A) at a distance of 250 m and 44 dB(A) at a distance of 500 m from the centre of
sources. Thus there will be an incremental noise level of 1-2 dB(A) over the baseline at
distance of 500 m from the proposed onshore terminals. As no major settlement is located
within 2.5 km from the port area, noise impact on the community is not envisaged.
4.3.2 Noise due to Transportation
The noise impact will occur during the construction phase due to transporting of
construction phase material and machinery to construction site. In operation phase there
will be significant number of vehicles coming to the site carrying iron ore, coal, steel and
other materials. There will be mostly light vehicles run for the transportation of men.
The equivalent noise level due to traffic is estimated using FHWA (Federal
Highway Administration) Traffic noise model, as:
Leq (h) i = Loe + 10 Log (Ni/ Si Ti) + 10 Log (15/D) (1+a) + So-13
Where,
Leq (h) i = Leq at hour h for ith vehicle type
Loe = Reference mean energy level for ith vehicle type
Ni = Number of ith type vehicle passing during time T
Si = Average speed for the ith vehicles type in km/hr
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.19
T = Duration for which Leq is desired
D = Perpendicular distance in meters from center line of the traffic
lane to the location.
a = Factor relating to absorption characteristics of ground cover
between the roadway and the observer
So = Shielding factor
Noise levels for light, medium and heavy vehicles on the roads are calculated
using the above model and cumulative effect is computed using the following model:
Leq (Total) = 10 Log (10 Leq L/10 + 10 Leq M/10 + 10 Leq H/10)
Where LeqL, LeqM, LeqH are equivalent noise levels for light, medium and heavy
vehicles respectively.
Prediction of Impact due to Transportation
It is predicted that maximum contribution of vehicles during construction period at
10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road will be about 60 dB(A) and 56 dB(A) respectively.
Considering the back ground noise levels of 60 dB(A) along the roads, the incremental
increase in noise level will be 1-2 dB(A). There will be an increase in noise levels in
residential areas situated close to the road due to movement of trucks. However the impact
of truck movements on noise levels in residential areas situated at 100 m and beyond will
be insignificant and will be below the stipulated standard of CPCB i.e. 55 dB(A) during day
time.
4.3.3 Impact of Noise on Occupational and Community Health
Equivalent sound pressure level (Leq) averaged over 8 hours is used to describe
noise exposure in work place environment. The damage risk criteria for hearing as enforced
by CPCB and OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) stipulate that the
noise levels up to 90 dB(A) are acceptable for 8 hour exposure per day. The operational
phase of the berths will have noise generation due to the loading / unloading of cargo.
Ambient Standards in respect of Noise are given in Annexure II.
4.3.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase
From the noise modeling, it has been predicted that the peak noise levels
from construction activities will be as high as 65 dB (A) at distance of 500 m
from the construction site. Since, the populated areas are located at more
than 2.5 km away from the project areas, the noise levels are considered to
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.20
have insignificant impact on community. However, the following noise
mitigation measures shall be followed:
Noise could be considerably reduced by adoption of low noise equipment or
installation of sound insulation fences
Plantation can be a good barrier
Limitation of working hours (particularly during night hours) may be a
possible means to mitigate the nuisances of construction activities
Earth movers and construction machinery with low noise levels should be
used
Transport of construction material to the site should be restricted in daytime
Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc. should
be enforced, wherever necessary
Periodic maintenance of construction machinery and transportation vehicles
should be undertaken to reduce the noise impact
Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment is likely to be
insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and mainly confined to the
day hours as sufficient noise control measures would be undertaken
4.3.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase
Either Acoustic barriers/ shelters shall be developed in noisy work places or
acoustic enclosures shall be provided for the high noise generating
equipment
Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc. should
be enforced wherever necessary
Implementation of green belt development is expected to reduce noise
impacts within the project premises and all along the port boundary.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.21
Onshore
Development
Project
Construction
Phase Operation
Phase
Noise Levels
Change in
Ambient Noise
Level
Impact on Work
Output and Efficiency
Mitigation of Birds,
Reptiles & PoputationHealth Risks
Impact on
Economic Output
Impact on
Socio-Cultural
Environment
Acitvity
Primary
Impacts
Secondary
Impacts
Tertiary
Impacts
Fig. 4.3.1: Impact Network for Noise Environment
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.22
Table 4.3.1
Typical Noise Generation from Construction Equipment & Machinery
Description Noise Levels dB(A) at 1 m
from Source
Earth Movers
Excavator 90-95
Crane 90-95
Trucks (10t and 16t) 84-88
Dozer 85-90
Dumpers 87-91
Wheel loader 89-94
Tractors 76-96
Scrapers, Graders 80-93
Pavers 86-88
Trucks 82-94
Material Handlers
Concrete mixers 75-88
Cranes (movable) 75-86
Impact Based Equipment
Pneumatic Wrenches 83-88
Cranes (derrick) 86-88
Stationary Equipment at Storage Terminals
Pumps 69-71
Generators 71-82
Compressors 74-86
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.23
4.4 Water Environment
The impacts on water environment typical to a port and Harbor project can be
divided into two broad areas: sediment transport and water quality. Both are influenced by
the oceanographic parameters like waves, tides, current and bathymetry. The sediment
transport is related to the physical alterations of the coastline such as presence of
breakwater, sea wall or reclamation, the water quality issues are related to the pollutants
generated from dredging activities, oil spills, wastewater discharges and run-off from land
areas.
4.4.1 Water Requirement for Port
The per capita consumption of water is taken as 200 liters per day. The
occupancy is taken as around 750 persons. Total consumption will be 1.5 lakh liters per
day. A reservoir of capacity 2 lakhs liters need to be provided at location of highest contour.
All the utility buildings shall be provided with individual overhead tanks in order to achieve
water supply system. The pump room will be located under the over head tank connected
with a water treatment plant (WTP) of capacity not less than 5000 liters/minute. If required,
otherwise the raw water will be directly fed to the Over Head Tank (OHT).
The pumps are so selected to fill the tank once in a day. Two (one as standby) 25
HP water supply pump with suitable pump panel is proposed. Pipe lines are spread over
the area underground/ in buildup trench and provided with outlet points wherever
necessary.
4.4.2 Source of Water
The nearest water source identified is from the river Gangavalli which is within 8
km from Tadadi port.
4.4.3 Marine Ecology
Adverse effect on marine ecology usually result from deterioration of water and air
quality, current pattern changes bottom contamination, physical loss of water area and
changes in natural land habitat. The location of port affects aquatic fauna and flora through
changes of water quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Diminution of
bottom biota is usually linked to a reduction of fishery resources and occasionally to an
increase in the No. of undesirable species.
Deterioration of water quality usually gives rise to changes in aquatic biota: a
decrease in the number of species; and an increase in the quantity of one or two species,
further deterioration may lead to the destruction of all kinds of aquatic biota. Diminution of
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.24
plants in a shore zone within enclosed water may degrade its aeration capability and
worsen water pollution. The proposed construction of berth is mainly on landward side
where the land is under water. The aquatic animal present in the inundated land may get
affected.
The impacts on water environment due to the proposed construction of berths can
be divided into two phases: construction phase and operation phase. Fig. 4.4.1 and 4.4.2
show impact network for surface water and groundwater environment. The impacts are at
three levels in each case as shown in flow chart. The issues related to construction phase
and operational phase of Tadadi port are discussed here.
4.4.4 Estuarine Environment
Estuary is a form of transition zone between river environment and ocean
environment and is subject to both marine influences such as tides, waves and influx of
saline water and riverine influences such as flows of fresh water sediment. The inflow of
both seawater and fresh water provides high levels of nutrients in both the productive
natural habitats.
Estuaries are typically classified by their geomorphological features or by water
circulation patterns and can be referred to by many different names such as bay, harbours
lagoons, inless or sounds, although sometimes these water bodies do not necessarily meet
the above criteria at an estuary and may be fully saline.
Aghanashini estuary is the populated area where more than 40% population lives
along the estuary and the coast. The estuary mouth is 180 m wide. The average annual
flow of Aghanashini is 2556 Mm3 having length of 54 Km.
As a result, estuary is suffering degradation by many factors including the
sedimentation from soil erosion due to deforestation and other poor farming practices, over
fishing, collection of Bivalve drainage and filling of wetlands, eutrophication due to
excessive nutrient, human waste, animal wastes, drinking or damming for flood control or
water diversion. A semi enclosed body of water connected to the sea as far as the tidal limit
or the salt intrusion limit and receiving freshwater runoff, however the fresh water inflow
may not be perennial, the connection to the sea may be closed for part of the year and tidal
influence may be negligible. Estuaries are a dynamic ecosystem with their connection with
the open sea through which the seawater enters accordingly to the rhythm of the tides. The
seawater entering the estuary is diluted by the freshwater flowing form river and streams.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.25
The pattern of dilution of estuary is dependent on the volume of freshwater tidal amplitude
range and the extent of evaporation from the water within the estuary.
4.4.4.1 Vertically homogenous
Tidal mixing forces exceed river output, resulting in well mixed water column and
the disappearance of the vertical salinity gradient. The freshwater, seawater boundary is
eliminated due to the intense turbulent mixing and eddy effect.
4.4.4.2 Physicochemical variation
The most important variable characteristics of the estuary water are the
concentration of dissolved oxygen, salinity and sediment load. There is extreme spatial
variability in salinity, with near zero at the tidal limit of the tributary river to 3.4% at the
estuary mouth. Sediment can also clog feeding and respiratory structure of species, and
within mudflat species. Deficiency in D.O can cause problems for life forms. Nutrient rich
sediment from manmade sources can promote production life cycles, perhaps leading to
eventual decay removing the dissolved oxygen from the water, thus hypoxic or anoxic
zones can develop.
The salinity of seawater is approximately 35‰, tending to be lower (33‰) in
coastal seas and higher (37‰) in tropical waters. The salinity of freshwater is always less
than 0.5%, thus the salinity of the estuarine water is between 0.5 and 3.5.
4.4.4.3 Implications for marine life
Estuaries provide habitats for a large number of organisms and support very high
productivity. Estuaries provide habitats for many fish nurseries, depending upon their
locations in the world, such as salmon and sea trout. Also, migratory bird populations, such
as the black-tailed godwit, Limosa limosa islandica make essential use of estuaries.
Two of the main challenges of estuarine life are the variability in salinity and
sedimentation. Many species of fish and invertebrates have various methods to control or
conform to the shifts in salt concentrations and are termed osmoconformers and
osmoregulators. Many animals also burrow to avoid predation and to live in the more stable
sedimental environment. However, large numbers of bacteria are found within the sediment
which has a very high oxygen demand. This reduces the levels of oxygen within the
sediment often resulting in partially anoxic conditions, which can be further exacerbated by
limited water flux.
Phytoplanktons are key primary producers in estuaries. They move with the water
bodies and can be flushed in and out with the tides. Their productivity is largely dependent
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.26
upon the turbidity of the water. The main phytoplankton present is diatoms and
dinoflagellates which are abundant in the sediment.
It is important to remember that a primary source of food for many organisms on
estuaries, including bacteria, is detritus from the settlement of the sedimentation.
4.4.5 Impact on Water Body
Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing since
time immemorial. The existing Tadadi port site is on the estuary of the Aghanashini River.
The Aghanashini or Tadadi River with a total length of 121 km originating from Sirsi taluka
of Uttar Kannada district in the central western ghat of Karnataka. Winding its way through
deep gorges and valleys, the river meets the tides of the Arabian Sea and forms a large
estuarine expanse 13 km long and 2 to 6 km wide in the coastal taluka of Kumta. The
estuary has its outlet into the sea between the village of Aghanashini in the South and
Tadadi in the north. An area of about 18000 hectares of estuary is created at the point
where river Aghanashini empties itself into the Arabian Sea.
Problem of sedimentation generally occurs at location where transport capacity of
the sediments by the hydraulic system is reduced due to the decrease in flow speed
caused by artificial measures like dredging etc. formation of dead water zones, flow
separation zones lee zone created due to the construction of groins or dikes. The main
water bodies are Aghanashini and Gangavalli River. Average annual flow of Aghanashini
and Gangavalli is 2556 and 4737 Mm3 and their length is 84 Km and 154 Km respectively.
These rivers are perennial. Dredging and other infrastructure may change the movement of
water but the change is temporary. The project area is covered with 14.40 Sq.km of water
bodies. Channel and port dredging can alter bottom topography, increased water depth and
change circulation pattern in the dredged area, which may increase stratification in the
water column and reduce vertical mixing. This thermal layering of water may create anoxic
or hypoxic conditions for benthic habitats. Dependent on new navigation channels may
create deep and flushed area that experience reduced light penetration and water
temperatures. Temperature influences biochemical processes and deep channels may
create zones of poor productivity that can serve as barriers to migration for benthic and
demersal species and effective fragment estuarine habitats.
Construction activities which could cause water quality impacts are dredging &
reclamation, and spill & runoff from work sites. The reclamations and the berthing
structures will cause changes in water circulation patterns and this could also have an
impact on water quality.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.27
Dredging to deeper navigational channels involves a number of environmental
effects to fishery habitats including the direct removal of burial of demurral and benthic
organism and aquatic vegetation, alteration of physical habitat, disturbance of bottom
sediment (resulting in increased turbidity) contaminant release in water column, light
attenuation, release of oxygen consuming substances and alteration in the number of living
organisms, hydrologic and temperature regimes. Dredging can degrade water quality
through re-suspension of sediments and the release of nutrient and other contaminants into
the water. Dredging may also modify long shore current patterns by altering the direction or
velocity of water flow from adjacent estuaries. These changes in water circulation are often
accompanied by changes in the transport of sediments and siltation rate resulting in
alteration of local habitats used for spawning and feeding channel. Dredging can alter the
estuarine hydrology and the mixing zone between fresh and salt water leading to
accelerated upland run-off, lowered fresh water aquifers and greater saltwater intrusion into
aquifers as well as reduction in the buffering capabilities of wetland and shallow water
habitats.
Navigational channels that are substantially deeper than surrounding area can
become anoxic or hypoxic as natural mixing is decreased and detrital material settles out of
the water column and accumulates in the channels. The concentration of anoxic or hypoxic
water can stress near shore biota when mixing occurs from a storm event. The potential for
anoxic conditions can be reduced in areas that experience strong currents or wave energy
and sediment are more mobile.
4.4.6 Water Quality
A water quality impact assessment has been carried out to identify and evaluate
the potential hydrodynamic and water quality impacts arising from the construction and
operation of the proposed Port development. Hydro geological investigations will be
undertaken to ensure groundwater abstraction. Dewatering is undertaken at lakes to
sustain local aquifers. Infrastructure will be designed to minimize impacts on ground water
flows.
4.4.6.1 Impacts on Fishing and Salt Pan
In and around the port location, there are 15 villages which are engaged in fishing
and related activities (for their livelihoods) in the Aghanashini River and in the 566 hectares
acquired for the port. It is estimated that the people in these villages would be affected
economically during the port construction and also during the port operation.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.28
People from villages like Aghanashini, Kosakote that is very close to the
Sangama region where the port will come up fear that they would lose their house. Villagers
are concerned that the relocation of their residential areas would be away from the sea and
that would make it difficult for them to continue their occupation as fishermen. More than
1000 families are from Aghanashini and Hosakote. Thoregasini, Masakal and Mudangi
villages depend solely on the Sangama region for their livelihood. As of now, a couple from
a family manages to earn a minimum of Rs. 1500/- per day by spending about 3-4 hours of
fishing and shell fishing activities. This income would stop once the construction of the port
starts at this place. The people of this area feel that they cannot engage in deep sea fishing
activity as it is an investment intensive activity. The development of the sea fishing activity
at the port will not help them to look after their livelihood.
Fishermen from villages like Madangere who depend mainly on fishing in the 566
hectares of land acquired for port feel that those land areas are like ‘Ganji Kendra’ for the
fisher men as any time throughout the year they do fishing and can get income for the
family. If the port comes up, they have no choice as they do not have other skills or have
agriculture land to get income.
During the rainy season, all the villagers, including those who depend on the sea
fishing, use the 566 hectares of land region, engage in land fishing for Prawn, Crabs and
other fish and get a good income. This will stop once the port construction starts. A
separate fishing harbour should be developed with more facilities like cold storage, space
for parking more boats, ancillary facilities and market support.
There are about 242 hectares of land used for salt production in Sanekatta (Plate
4.1 and 4.2) using the backwaters from the sea. About 350 families and more than 300
workers in the salt factory are engaged in this activity. This 242 hectares area is also
covered with the boundaries of other villages namely Mudangi, Gudkagal and Kimani all
around the estuary and the Tadari harbour. Due to the activities of port development salt
manufacturing activities will also get affected. This may result into reducing the production
of salt. If oil leakage occurs, the salinity of the water will change and the production of salt
will get affected. These families and particularly the workers do not have any idea about
other alternative livelihood activities. They assume that they may get some job in the port if
it comes up. Provision will also be made to provide sea water flows to these lands for salt
production.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.29
4.4.6.2 Mitigation Measures for Impacts of Maintenance Dredging
Maintenance dredging refers to the routine removal of accumulated sediment
from channel beds to maintain the design depths of navigation channels, harbors marinas,
boat launching vessels and port facilities. Maintenance dredging occurs mainly in artificially
dependent navigation areas.
It is estimated that the total annual average maintenance dredging volume will be
335000 m3/year (Coming from river) + 185000 m3/year (coming from the south beach) +
95000 m3/year (coming from the North) + 4475000 m3/year (accumulated at the outer part
of the channel) = 5090000 m3/year.
The main potential for environmental impact is from the disposal of the dredged
material and by the increasing quantities of suspended sediments during the dredging
process (possibly inducing dispersion of contaminants) suspended sediment problems can
however be readily controlled by careful choice of dredging equipment and procedures.
Short term increase in the level of suspended sediment can given rise to changes in water
quality which can effect marine flora and fauna. The impact of dredged material disposal
largely depends on the nature of the material viz. inorganic, organically enriched
contaminated. These problems are compounded by the need to repeat maintenance
dredging regularly, since siltation is an annual phenomena.
Alteration in the coastal or estuarine morphology, alteration in sediment path-
ways and changes in siltation patterns may affect coastal habitats and species. Many of
these channels have later required maintenance dredging i.e. the removal of sediment
which has accumulated in the bottom of the dredged channel, to ensure that they continue
to provide adequate dimensions for the movement of large vessels engaged in domestic
and international trade.
4.4.6.3 Measures for Fish and Fish Habitat Protection
Minimize the riparian area disturbed by project-related activities along the
adjacent upland
Improve the plantation activities, use existing trails roads or cut lines
wherever possible as access routes to avoid disturbance to the riparian
vegetation.
Routine maintenance dredging to protect spawning fish and incubating eggs
by adhering to specific fisheries timing windows.
If necessary, install effective sediment control measures before starting work
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.30
to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body.
Apply sediment control measures regularly to ensure they are functioning
properly, make all necessary repairs if any damage occurs.
Restrict the amount of dredging required to ensure proper navigation.
Prevent fish from being trapped within the dredging area.
Minimize the suspension on fine sediment particles into the water column.
Avoid bottom stock piling or side casting during dredging.
4.4.6.4 Measures for Ship Operations
Ports are requested to provide sufficient reception facilities to receive
residues and oily mixtures generated from ship operations according to
provisions of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
from Ships, 1973 (MARPOL, 1978) as amended by the 1978 Protocol
(MARPOL, 1973/78). Besides oily residues, reception of sewage and
garbage is also required in accordance with the needs of ships.
Appropriate connection to sanitary treatment facilities or a municipal waste
treatment system.
Provision of these facilities, promulgation of regulations on discharge of oily
residues, and proper detection are keys to successful control of ship
discharges.
Detection of spills is also important for regulating ship discharges since
accidental spills are unavoidable, recovery vessels, oil fences, and treatment
chemicals should be used with a view to minimizing dispersal.
Proper contingency plans and a prompt reporting system are keys to
prevention of oil dispersal. Periodical clean-up of floating wastes is also
necessary for preservation of port water quality.
The proposed project should have provision for recycling / reuse of
wastewater and modification of equipment for water conservation.
Biodiversity improvement programmes should be undertaken.
Treated effluent should be used for floor washings and plantation/ green belt
development etc.
4.4.6.5 Other Mitigation Measure
Monitoring of salinity concentration will be undertaken as part of the regular
water quality and biodiversity monitoring programs.
Geotechnical studies, including coring of sediments to design depth will be
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.31
undertaken as part of detailed dredging design studies, samples of cored
sediments will be sent for chemical analysis to confirm suitability for deep
sea disposal.
Suspended solid load and turbidity levels will be monitored during dredging
and disposal operations.
A sewage treatment unit will be provided on all vessels to treat sewage to
the sewage discharge standards of the Government SPCB or CPCB prior to
discharge.
Bilge water from the floating transfer vessel will not be directly released into
the surrounding environment. Instead, a holding tank will be installed to
retain any “bilge” water on board unit. It can be pumped into a waste barge
and be taken for treatment in wastewater treatment plant.
Solid and or hazardous waste will be segregated and stored in appropriate
containers on board each vessel before transfer to an appropriate landfill
site.
An awareness programme will be carried out and implemented to educate
crew about the need for water conservation and pollution control.
Regular monitoring of discharged effluent will be undertaken to ensure
compliance with CPCB standard.
4.4.7 Construction Phase
It is anticipated that during construction phase, if waste water is not properly
managed or treated then it will lead to the impact on nearby surface water body and ground
water body. Pile driving deposition of rubble, dredging, sand compactions and other
construction work in water cause re-suspension of sediment and turbid water. Re-
suspension of sediment in water leads to an increase in the level of Suspended Solids (SS)
and the concentration of organic matter, possibly to toxic or harmful levels. It also reduces
sunlight penetration. Work vessels are a possible cause of oil spills, garbage discharge and
leakage of other substances into water. Diffusion from concrete work in water and
overflows from landfills may be possible sources of water pollution.
Dredging many cause changes in current pattern and flows as well as salt wedge
intrusion into river mouth or littoral drifts in the shore zone, changes in littoral drifts lead to
beach erosion or accretion. Disposal of dredged materials on land, sea may possibly cause
leakage of harmful substances into ground water or changes in water front drainage
construction work and dredging, disturb bottom sediments and induce re-suspension,
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.32
dispersal and settlement of such sediments. Dumping of dredged material directly alters
bottom configuration and biota and may disperse toxic or harmful chemicals around the
disposal site. Dredging removes bottom habitat and may lead to a loss. But reclamation will
not cause any environmental impact by provision of suitable mitigation measures.
Two construction options have been reviewed and the associated construction
works have been investigated. One option requires extensive piling activities (fully piled). If
bored piling is adopted, this may involve discharging untreated piling water into the
surrounding marine water, and adequate mitigation measures are required in controlling the
discharge to avoid adverse environmental impacts. The other option which requires
reduced piling coupled with dredging and backfilling along the seawall would result in the
re-suspension of sediments and associated water quality impacts. For both options,
dredging will be required at the proposed approach channel and container berth which
extends into mainland waters. This would elevate the SS levels in marine waters.
As the proposed dredging sites are to be located into water and ecologically
sensitive areas, i.e. the Aghanashini River Estuary, a mixing zone will unavoidably occur.
Based on the model predictions (Mixing Zone Model), the mixing zone will be approximately
4.2 km2 (near the seabed) in size, assuming that silt curtains are not used for mitigation.
With the installation of silt curtains to reduce the extent of SS dispersion, there would still be
residual impacts over a sizeable area (approximately 3.8 km2, assuming that deployment of
silt curtains around the grab dredgers gives a maximum 75% SS reduction). Residual water
quality impacts to sensitive areas have been examined. The magnitude of the adverse
water quality impacts was considered low since predicted SS elevations would not be
expected to have direct biologically significant impacts. These water quality impacts would
occur during the dredging and backfilling works in the construction phase, and would cease
once works are completed.
Port development may result in significant change in the hydrodynamic regime of
the estuary river system. From the mathematical modeling results, it is predicted that there
will be significant changes in flow patterns and water quality in close proximity to the Port.
These changes would mainly be found in an area within approximately 5 km of the Port,
and would diminish with distance. Of the two construction options, the reclamation option
would result in more significant changes to hydrodynamics and water quality than the fully
piled option.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.33
4.4.8 Operation Phase
Possible discharges from ships that could be sources of water pollution are bilge
water, ballast water, oily wastes, sewage, garbage and other residues in a ship, spills of oil
lubricants, fuel and other oily liquid may be other sources of water pollution. Once an oil or
oily component is discharged into water, it spreads on the surface by winds and currents,
forming a thin layer. On the surface of seas in tropical or temperate zones, oil can be
polymerized gradually by biodegradation and eventually form desired particles which sink in
water.
Leakage of oils, oily wastes and mixtures may directly cause damage to fisheries
resources, aquatic biota and coastal habitat. Biodegradation of oil also generates
polymerized oil particles and toxic aromatic fraction using dissolved oxygen in the water,
which directly cause damage to bottom biota and habitat. This may seriously damage
marine and coastal ecology. Fishery resources including shell fish may be spoiled by oil
and toxic substances generated by biodegradation. Run off from raw material storage, spills
from bulk cargo handling and wind-blown dust are possible sources of contamination of port
water.
General standards for discharge of environment pollutants, Part A-Effluents
(marine coastal area standard) are given in Annexure-IV. Water Quality Standards (Natural
Coastal and Beach Water) are given in Annexure-IV (a). Tolerance limit of water quality of
Harbour region are given in Annexure IV (b). Indian Standard of Specification for Drinking
Water 15:10500-1991 are given in Annexure III.
4.4.9 Potential Impact on Surface Water
Erosion and sedimentation, freshwater flooding due to impediment of
surface water flow or increased surface water runoff.
Deterioration in water quality in nearby streams and creeks.
Increase in sediment loads due to runoff.
Wetlands and riparian vegetation will be left undisturbed.
Storm water management measures will capture and filter runoff without
significant compromising overland flows. This includes the creation of :
Erosion and Sediment Control Management Plan
Waste Management Plan
Erosion and Scouring
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.34
Detailed scour analysis and design will be executed to minimise and
erosion and scouring in the vicinity of the intersections between
waterways and Project.
All erosion and sediment control structures will be regularly inspected and
maintained when necessary.
All drainage structures will be regularly inspected and maintained when
necessary.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.35
Fig. 4.4.1: Impact Network for Surface Water Environment
Onshore Development Project
Pre-Construction Phase Operation Phase
Impact on socio-cultural Environment
Activity
Tertiary Impacts
Abstraction of Water
Secondary Impacts
Primary
Impacts
Impact on Economic Output
Release of Wastewater
Change in Surface Morphology
Impact on
Runoff/Seepage
Impact on Hydraulics of Water Course
Impact on Hydraulics of Water Course
Impact on Water Quality
Environmental Health and Aesthetic Risk
Cost of Water Treatment
Impact on Amenity/ Recreation
Impact on Aquatic Life
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.36
Fig. 4.4.2: Impact Network for Ground Water Environment
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.37
4.5 Land Environment
A Port and Harbour project usually involves acquiring significant area of land. The
monitoring of the area is under water clearing the site, soil excavation and other activities,
which affect land directly. Secondary impacts are those of induced development related to
the project, which would place a stress on the land use. Port and Harbour projects, attract
industries and could lead to rapid growth of the region.
The impact of land environment can be divided into two phases i.e. Construction
phase and Operation phase. Waste from construction activities are mainly spoils generated
by dredging, disposal of dredged materials on land may cause destruction of plants, loss of
vegetation, leakage of contaminated materials and salt, odour, an unsightly vies and other
nuisances to the local community. Fig. 4.5.1 shows impact network for land environment.
The impacts are of three types, i.e. primary impact, secondary impact and tertiary impact
which are interlinked with each other. The impacts on land environment due to construction
of berth are summarized below.
4.5.1 Littoral Drift and Impact on the Shoreline
Long shore drift (sometimes known as Littoral Drift) is a geological process by
which sediment such as sand or other material move along a beach shore. Long shore drift
is the net movement of sand and other fine particles like shell, silt, sand etc, along the coast
line. The process occurs naturally and constantly on any shoreline where waves approach
the shore obliquely. That is to say, at an angle other than 900 (because the backwash
leaves the shore at 900). This has the net effect of gradual movement of the particles along
the shore by the use of swash and backwash. Erosion on the beach works concurrently
with long shore drift to straighten the overall shape of the beach.
The littoral drift is of the major problem encountered by the shoreline harbours.
Along shore current parallel to the coast induced by oblique wave approach, is popularly
known as the ‘Littoral Currents’ and the sediment transport along shore is commonly known
as the littoral drift. However, the littoral drift along the west coast is very negligible
compared to the east coast of India and the net direction is form north to south.
4.5.2 Construction Phase
Physico-chemical changes in soil quality may occur during construction mainly
due to clearing of the site thereby causing soil erosion resulting in turbidity in surface runoff
and changes in the gradient of existing slopes. Geologic structure, soil and bed rock
properties can be affected by soil excavation, removal of vegetative covers, and root
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.38
structures can cause soil erosion. The excavation during construction removal and storage
of topsoil may lead to minor, localized and temporary changes in the top soil structure. The
movement of vehicles and heavy construction material may also result in minor
compression of top soil and subsoil. Soil contamination may take place due to movement of
vehicles or solid wastes generated from the labour camp set-up during pre-construction
stage. This impact is significant at locations of construction phase, stockyard and other
allied activities of construction. The preventive measure must be taken to avoid land
contamination. The sea bed, from where dredging is to be done, can hold heavy metals
(like zinc, cadmium, copper, mercury lead) polyaromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) hydrophobic
organics, pesticides, oil, grease and other organic matters. Once tested, one can find out a
way of proper handling and disposal of the dredged material. The solid and hazardous
wastes, if generated from ships and from port operations may contaminate land and water
bodies, if not disposed properly.
4.5.3 Operation Phase
Operational activities would comprise construction of utility buildings, laying roads,
electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated with port
development project. Therefore, any change in land use due to such activities will be limited
to the project site area. The impacts on soil can be due to land disposal of solid wastes
such as construction rubble, composite garbage and discarded topsoil. Adequate measures
will be taken to ensure that all waste generated at the construction site is collected and
disposed off at a government approved dump site.
Hazardous waste likely to be generated from proposed facilities are sludge from
waste water treatment facilities and wastes (like oil and grease from machinery) which will
be disposed off after proper treatment as per hazardous waste (management and handling)
Amendment rule 2000. Hence, no adverse impact on land environment is envisaged.
The labour camps will be constructed near the proposed site and the construction
labour will be provided water, fuel for cooking, electricity and sanitation facility. Disposal of
sewage and other wastes generated from these settlements will be done through a
package treatment plant/septic tank to avoid direct discharge into estuary/ sea.
Impacts on Land use pattern of the area
The construction and operation of the project will provide facilities for loading
and unloading of construction material and iron ore, coal, steel etc. The
project would stimulate lot of ancillary developments like shops, restaurant,
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.39
repair shops, temporary houses etc. in and around the proposed activity.
This will lead to use of land to meaningful commercial and residential
purposes. The quality of top soil shows moderate productivity which should
be protected and preserved for better use in agriculture / greenbelt
development.
Impact on Baseline Quality
The (base) soil in this region is sandy loam. Greenbelt development near the
proposed site on the bank along the route will help in improving the ecology
and aesthetic value of the site. The trees planted will absorb specific air
pollutants, reduce noise pollution, control soil temperature, help in holding
moisture and attract more birds and will thus help in maintaining the overall
environmental quality. This can be further developed as a tourist place in
future. The proposed development will not result in significant changes in the
land use and land cover pattern.
Impact due to Road and Rail Traffic
During the construction activities, there will be considerable increase in rail
and road traffic to and from the Tadadi port for transportation of manpower,
material, machinery and equipment. These would inevitably lead to
congestion in traffic and increased air and noise pollution level with
associated impacts on public life. This scenario may continue during the
operation phase also.
4.5.4 Mitigation Measures due to Dredging and Dust Emission during Iron Ore/Coal Handling
The removal of sediment from the seabed by dredging is a necessary activity in
ports, harbors and water ways either to ensure sufficient depth of water for the passage of
vessels or for the construction of new facilities (Capital dredging), and the dredge material
removed has to be properly disposed off.
The effect of a dredged or reclamation operation on the ecosystem is divided into:
Direct effect caused by the construction activities and indirect effect caused
by the release of chemical substances from the dredged or disposed
sediment.
Changes in hydraulic regime
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.40
A review of dredging in coastal area worldwide has confirmed that dredging
mostly has a short term localized impact on marine water qualities. The study on biotic
communities suggests that dredging impacts are relatively short term in regions of high
sediment mobility. In soft sediment environments, recovery of animal communities
generally occurs (relatively) quickly and a more rapid recovery of the communities has been
observed in areas.
The planning and execution of dredging works should be carried out by
drawing up a Dredging Management Plan (DMP) so as to minimize both the
direct and indirect effects.
Effective planning and execution of dredging work require knowledge about
the material to be dredged and the environmental conditions in which the
dredging plants will operate.
1. The two types of dredger are proposed namely Tailing suction dredger
and cutter suction dredger.
2. The quantity of dredged materials is estimated to be about
5,00,00,000 m3
3. The dredged material should be disposed off in low-lying areas and
barren land. If the material is not suitable for reclamation, the same is
disposed off in offshore disposal area after carrying out model studies.
During the dredging process, effect may arises due to the excavation of sediment
at the bed, loss of material during transport to the surface over flow from the dredger while
loading from the dredger or pipelines during transport.
While carrying out the dredging, effective sediment control measures are
necessary to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water
body. Inspect sediment control measures regularly to ensure proper
functioning of dredging operation.
Avoid bottom stockpiling or side casting during dredging. Operate machinery
on land or on water (i.e. from a barge or vessel) in a manner that minimizes
disturbance to the banks or bed of the water body.
Machinery is to arrive on site in a clean, washed condition and is to be
maintained free of fluid leaks. Wash, refuel and service machinery and store
fuel and other materials for the machinery away from the water to prevent
any deleterious substance from entering the water.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.41
Keep an emergency spill kit on site in case of fluid leaks or spills from
machinery.
Restore bank to original condition if any disturbances occur.
Dredge spoil should be disposed off on-site in accordance with appropriate
site for the disposal.
The planning and execution of dredging works should be carried out by
drawing up a Dredging Management Plan (DMP) so as to minimize both the
direct and indirect effects.
The proposed mitigation measures such as timing of construction, dredging
methods, selection of equipment and continuous monitoring will be effective
in containing the turbid levels and related impacts.
Coal and iron ore are the major natural resources to be used for the import and
export through Tadadi port. As the predominant wind directions are NW, W, NE and E,
there is potential for uncontrolled dust emission to be blown while handling the Iron ore and
coal. Neighboring residence towards the East side may be affected, if it is not properly
controlled. There may be the possibility of deposition of air borne dust on surface water
also. The potential impact identified can be mitigated through appropriate dust emission
control system, which will involve all material handling facilities to be under cover/enclosed,
including the Iron Ore stock pile, tipper station and conveyors. In operation area, ship
loading/unloading, the dust mitigation shall be carried out by means of hoppers with air
filters at the port cranes.
Bulk material such as iron ore and coal should be transported in closed truck to
avoid wind entrainment, conveyor belts be used for transportation of iron ore and coal from
ship to coal handling place. In the trucks/wagon loading/unloading stations area dust
mitigation is ensured as all stations will be covered and equipped with air filters to capture
dust during the fall of materials into the wagon or truck as the case may be. In case of
wagon tippers and truck unload system, an air filter system must be used. Sprinkling of
water should be done to arrest or control dust emissions.
A community liaison programme will be developed to provide information to
resident and received feedback or complaints about dust emission. Appropriate protective
respiratory equipment will be supplied to workers potentially exposed to emission
exceeding acceptable levels. A real-time environmental monitoring and management
system will be implemented that includes monitoring of meteorological parameter,
particulate matter concentrations. Wherever possible conveyors will be fitted with
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.42
removable dust covers and transfer points will be enclosed and fitted with dust
suppressions sprays.
Operational activities would comprise construction of utility buildings, laying of
road, electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated with
port development project.
4.5.5 Mitigation Measures
Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on activities
during construction phase:
The adverse effects of disposal of contaminated dredged material or other
wastes from construction activities could be offset by including them in land
reclamation. Appropriate design (according to the characteristics of the
wastes) is a basic requisite for retaining walls, settling ponds, capping of
landfills, and land use after completion
Temporary drainage channels should be provided to minimize soil erosion of
solid / hazardous waste
A record with respect to quantity, quality and treatment / management of
solid / hazardous waste shall be maintained
Centralized waste management facility is recommended to collect all wastes
during construction phase
The stockpiles, construction camps etc. during construction period will be
located to the extent possible on land, which are devoid of vegetation
Any kind of material resulting from clearing and grading should not be
deposited on temporary or permanent basis in the approach roads, streams,
ditches and any other position which may hinder the passage
On completion of construction works, all temporary structures, surplus
materials and wastes will be completely removed to avoid future land use
incompatibility
Soil quality of the project site area may be changed due to disposal of
construction debris, composite garbage and discarded top soil. However, the
impact is likely to be insignificant as the project authorities will take adequate
measures to ensure that all wastes generated at the construction site and at
the labour camp are collected and disposed off in an appropriate manner in
a dump site or recycled or reused wherever feasible. Standard construction
procedures will be followed to ensure that the impact on surface drainage
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.43
pattern and soil erosion is kept minimal. This will necessarily include
avoiding blockage of natural surface drainage and developing appropriate
drainage system in areas where it is unavoidable
Disposal of Dredged Material on Land
The material dredged will be partly used for filling or reclamation of the backup
area of port. The dredged material contains clay, silt and fine sand (soil). Hence, it can be
used for nourishment of degraded land, for reclaiming it and promoting life and vegetative
growth. The dredged material should be analyzed from the agricultural point of view when it
is used in the agricultural field.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.44
Fig. 4.5.1: Impact Network for Land Environment
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.45
4.6 Biological Environment
The ecosystem comprises of the abiotic (non-living) and the biotic (living)
assemblages. Coastal zones are considered to be the most productive ecosystems on the
earth. In rural areas or industrially undeveloped areas, the primary economic activities such
as agriculture, forestry and fisheries are based upon the living natural resources or the
biological environment. From ecological point of view, coastal area are of great importance
as they contain sensitive aquatic ecosystems.
The flow chart of impact network for biological environment for both construction
and operation phase is shown in Fig. 4.6.1 which shows that primary, secondary and
tertiary impacts are interlinked with each other.
The resilient mangroves serve the protective functions. With a great extent, it
protects the hinter land against cyclonic storms during cyclones, cyclones tidal surges and
other natural catastrophes acting as an effective shelter belt. In the unprecedented super
cyclone of October 1999, the mangroves had withstood the onslaught of cyclonic wind and
saved the life and properties of millions of people.
4.6.1 Construction Phase
The project site area does not cover any reserved or protected forest in Tadadi
Port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild animals. The danger of biota getting exposed to
pollutants released from sediment pore water, when the bed is disturbed is minimal since
the sediments of the area are free from gross contamination.
4.6.2 Operation Phase
Impact on ecological environment during operational phase is not envisaged as
there are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biological environment during the
operations.
4.6.3 Potential Impact on Marine Biology
Potential impacts on marine biological environment during the port construction
phase may be due to removal of wetland and coastal areas, which support flora and fauna.
The capital dredging operation and disposal of dredged spoil may also lead to potential
impacts due to:
Re-suspension and settlement of sediments
Increased turbidity decreasing the light penetration and photosynthetic
activity
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.46
Short-term depletion of dissolved oxygen levels
Changes in species diversity and structure of benthic communities
Loss of benthic habitats due to disturbance of the bottom sea floor
Potential Usages of Dredged Material
The removed material may be treated and used accordingly or disposed of
under strict environmental controls
Coastal protection, e.g. beach nourishment onshore/ offshore feeding
Habitat development or enhancement e.g. aquatic habitats, bird’s habitats
mudflats wetlands
Agricultural, horticulture, forestry
Dredging can have distinct economic and some time environmental
advantages in comparison to quarrying.
Amenity development or enhancement e.g. landscaping raising low-lying
area land become new land areas
Land reclamation, e.g. industrial development, housing, infrastructure.
Production of construction material e.g. bricks, clay aggregates
Construction of foundation of port
Machinery is to arrive on site in a clean, washed condition and is to be
maintained free of fluid leaks
Wash, refuel and service machinery and store fuel and other materials for
the machinery away from the water to prevent any deleterious substance
form entering the water
Restore banks to original condition if any disturbance occurs
Keep an emergency spill kit on site in case of fluid leaks or spills from
machinery
Vegetation all disturbed area, banks and riparian area by seeding and or
planting trees and shrubs in accordance with the guidance of forest
department. Cover seeded and vegetate area with appropriate measures to
prevent soil erosion and to help seeds germinate. The site should be
stabilized (e.g. cover exposed area with erosion control blankets) to keep
the soil in place and prevent erosion and maintain as per the requirement
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.47
4.6.4 Potential Impacts on Marine/Coastal Ecology
The location of a port affects aquatic fauna and flora through changes of water
quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Land reclamation from the sea
destroys bottom habitat and displaces fishery resources. Terrestrial fauna and flora may
also be altered by the location of a port.
Diminution of bottom biota is usually linked to a reduction of fishery resources,
and occasionally to an increase in undesirable species. Deterioration of water quality
usually gives rise to changes in aquatic biota: a decrease in the number of species; and an
increase in the quantity of one or two specific species. Further deterioration may lead to the
destruction of all kinds of aquatic biota.
Diminution of plants in a shore zone within enclosed water may degrade its
aeration capability and worsen water pollution. Mangroves in wetlands play an important
role in providing habitat for terrestrial and aquatic biota and indirectly recovering water
quality.
4.6.4.1 Impact on Mangrove Vegetation and Mitigation Measure
4.6.4.1.1 Mangrove vegetation
The study area is located on shore line of Arabian Sea. Out of the total 314 Km2
area of study area, only about 192 Km2 areas is having terrestrial habitat. The biological
environment with respect to flora and fauna is rich in this area. It spans the sea coast with
rich aquatic biodiversity and mangrove swamps at the mouths of estuarine. It harbours and
verdant topical evergreen forest.
From Karwar Bay in the North to Gangoli in the South, fast flowing rivers
descending from the western ghats to the Arabian Sea slow down as they reach the coast
and spread out into wide estuaries, lagoons and backwaters with extensive mudflats and
many small patches of mangrove forest. The mouths of most of these estuaries and creeks
are narrow and permanently open to the sea. In some cases, the width of the mouth has
been reduced by sand accretion. Many fish and prawn farms are located in the vicinity of
the mangrove areas.
Mangroves are woody plants that grow in tropical and subtropical latitudes along
the land sea interface, bays, estuaries, lagoons, backwaters, and in the rivers reaching
upstream up to the point where the water still remains saline. Mangroves are sources of
highly valued commercial products and fishery resources and also as sites for developing a
burgeoning eco-tourism. The mangrove forests have been shown to sustain more than 70
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.48
direct human activities, ranging from fuel wood collection to fisheries. Mangroves provide
critical habitat for a diverse marine and terrestrial flora and fauna. Study area has about 273
ha area covered under mangroves whereas within 5 km radial distance, it is covered with
217 ha.
4.6.4.1.2 Importance of Mangroves
While scientists have placed a high value on the ecological function of mangrove
ecosystems for some time, only recently has the broader community come to recognize the
multi-faceted role that mangroves play in the environment. The important roles played by
mangroves are as follows:
Coastal Protection
Economic Benefits
Ecological Services (Screening the solar UV‐B radiation, Reducing the
‘green house effects’)
Minimizing the fury of cyclones
Mitigating the fury of tsunami and flood
Sustainable fisheries and wildlife populations
Foreshore Protection
Trapping the sediments
Mangroves protection and management
Numerous mangroves and their associate’ species are proven to be effective
against human, animal and plant pathogens. Due to construction of various ports along the
coasts, the mangrove vegetation in the area is being destroyed at large scale. Therefore it
should be made compulsory for each industry to develop mangrove forest along the coast.
Mangroves are a sensitive ecosystem and are easily disturbed by human activities and
natural impacts. There is a close relationship between humans and mangrove forest
because 90% of fisheries products come from there. Three problems are very common in
most of the mangrove ecosystems and they are:
1. Over-exploitation of fishery resources,
2. Deforestation for firewood, cattle feed rehabilitation, reclamation and
conversion activities and
3. Lack of people’s awareness and participation in conservation activities.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.49
Besides the above-mentioned man-made threats, mangrove areas are prone to
cyclone, storms and flood. Unless, natural protective measures are undertaken, the
mangroves vegetation in the area will be destroyed.
4.6.5 Impact on Bivalves
The construction of port typically involves the removal of sediment by dredging
from inter-tidal and sub-tidal habitats in order to create navigational channels, turning
basins, anchorages and berthing docks for the size and types vessels expected to use the
facilities. The construction of port can change physical and chemical habitat parameter
such as tidal prism, depth, water temperature salinity, wave energy, sediment transport and
current velocity. Alterations in physical characteristics of the coastal ecosystems can cause
adverse impacts on biological parameters, such as the composition, distribution and
abundance of shellfish and submerged aquatic vegetation (SAV). These changes can
impact the distribution of near-shore habitats and affect aquatic food webs.
The area of oysters is marked in the topo-sheet. The data revealed that oyster
were found in most of the estuary system. Oysters are vegetarian and eat algae; as bivalve
mollusks they are sedentary and feed by filtering water which passes by them. A single
adult oyster can filter 30 gallon of water a day (ENVIS Technical Report: 30 Nov 2008). The
study focuses on intertidal shellfishery, especially bivalve gathering a informal small scale
fishery in the Aghanashini River estuary. Bivalves gathering have been a tradition among
the inhabitants for centuries, and it is still being practiced. Harvesting is done manually
during low tides.
The targeted bivalve species are calms Paphia malabarrica, Katelysia opima,
Meretrix Sp. and Villorita cyprinoides, mussel P. viridis and oyster’s crassostrea Sp. The
harvesters sell the bivalves to traders who approach collection area or sell to the local
consumers and in the local markets. Both men and women are involved in the harvest and
about 2370 people were dependent on bivalve fisheries, for employment.
As per the topo sheet the oyster bed area is about 1.1016 Km2 with Latitude 140
32’ 58.02” N and Longitude 740 22’ 16.06” E. The oyster bed area will be affected by the
development of port and therefore it will be desirable to transplant the existing oyster bed
elsewhere in the region.
4.6.6 Mitigation of impacts of port development
The guiding principle for ecological assessment emphasizes that areas and/or
habitats of ecological importance shall be conserved as far as possible. Proposed
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.50
ecological mitigation measures for ecology, shall be in accordance with this guiding
principle and follow, in order of priority basis:
Avoidance: Potential impacts could be avoided to the maximum extent
practicable by adopting suitable measure
Minimization: Unavoidable impacts could be minimized by taking appropriate
and practicable measures such as constraints on the intensity of works operations (eg.
dredging rates) or timing of works operations.
Compensation: The loss of important species and habitats will be compensated.
Enhancement and other conservation measures should always be considered whenever
possible.
Mitigation Measures
During construction it is ensured that activities should be confined to the
minimum areas required for the works
During construction and operation best practice shall be followed to ensure
that risk of disturbance or damage to species or habitats is minimized
A habitat has to be restored after construction works have finished
Efforts should be made to enhance existing habitats, to create new habitats
of value within the site landscaping proposals
It has to be ensured that the dredging and reclamation do not extend beyond
the designated areas
A scientific way of dredging has to be adopted
Continuous monitoring has to be conducted
Concession bid documents and agreement has to be included for better
performance specification requirements for construction of work
Considering the requirements of the National Environmental Management
Protected Areas Act (2003), Biodiversity Act (2004) and Integrated Coastal
Management Act (2008), should be considered while carrying out the
development
Considering all the relevant coastal management policies, strategies and
plans, the work has to be carried out
The measure should be provided against beach erosion, e.g. construction of
sea walls, jetties, offshore breakwaters and beach nourishment
The dumping site has to be selected carefully and systematically for dredged
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.51
material
Strict port pollution and environmental management controls will be
implemented
A port environmental management master plan will be developed which
would include ecological conservation and remediation plans also
Regular compliance monitoring would be undertaken to ensure compliance
with the port environmental management master plan and any relevant
project specific approved Environmental Management Programmes
Status of Port Environment should be reported regularly
Water quality monitoring of port water sources would be undertaken as a
measure of estuarine health on regular basis
Systematic and/or random water quality monitoring of water discharge
sources (both municipal and industrial) would be undertaken
Every effort to minimize the impacts would be made
Floral and faunal sensitivity area should be restricted
Suitable “No-go” buffer zones would be defined, created and maintained
surrounding all sensitive floral sites and habitats of sensitive fauna (e.g.
nurseries, nesting sites)
Movement of organisms would be considered along natural corridors and
their access to resources (e.g. estuaries, sand banks, wetlands) by
incorporating these aspects in the design layout and features (e.g. type of
material used on sea/estuary floor, Culvert Bridge, fence design, etc.)
Suitably qualified specialist would be appointed well in advance of
construction, to undertake the planning and management of scientific
material and floral and faunal specimen search and rescue; and where
appropriate establishment of and/or safe keeping of specimens in a
nursery/shelter/aquarium for rehabilitation /reintroduction purposes.
Flora/fauna search and rescue and/or collection of material and information
for safekeeping for future reintroduction would be facilitated.
Gathering and hunting of natural resources would be prohibited
For rehabilitation purposes, the appropriate and effective removal,
stockpiling and safekeeping of top soil would be provided.
An effective rehabilitation of all areas disturbed during the development
would be provided
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.52
Rehabilitated areas would be monitored to ensure the rehabilitation with
indigenous species and long-term sustainability
Relevant legislation and contingency plans would be enacted and prepared.
During the project activities and operational phases, all efforts would be
made to prevent the production and use of toxic substances which could
lead to further damage to the marine environment
Much of the marine pollution can be prevented if coastal states and their ports
provide adequate treatment facilities for ship-generated oily and solid wastes, sewage, toxic
cargo residues and ballast water in accordance with the international guidelines.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.53
Fig. 4.6.1: Impact Network for Biological Environment
Onshore Development Project
Construction Phase
Operation Phase
Impact on Soil Stability and Microflora
Impact on socio-cultural Environment
Activity
Tertiary Impacts
Physical
Disturbance
Removal of plants, Animals & their Habitat
Disturbance of Plants, Animals & their Habitat (Including Food Suppliers Feeding, Nesting and Breeding Areas)
Secondary Impacts
Primary Impacts
Impact on Amenity
Impact on Landscape (Visual Aspects, Landscape, Ecology)
Change in Productivity Composition of Plant & Animal Communities and Habitats
Change in Economic Use of Flora and Fauna (Agriculture, Forestry Horticulture, Fisheries etc.)
Impact on Economic Output
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.54
4.7 Socio-economic Environment
Predicting socio-economic impacts can best be done by means of scientifically
planned surveys with questionnaire to the public. This survey can helpful for knowing the
responses of the community about the project construction of berths project. The proposed
project will create certain impacts with beneficial as well as adverse effects on the socio-
economic environment. The impact network for the socio-economic environment is shown
in the Fig. 4.7.1. The impact can be divided into two phases is construction phase and
operation phase as shown in the flow chart.
Social environment refers to people and their surroundings, human beings and
their products, their property, groups, heritage etc. The effects of a project on people and
their responses may be direct and immediate or short term and long term. Estimation of the
change in the income in an area, value of structures, equipment, standard of living,
statistical information on population growth etc form socio-economic studies.
The Prediction of Qualitative Impacts on Socio-economic Environment is
described in Table 4.7.1, while the expected change in the predicted quality of life
(subjective and cumulative) after the implementation of EMP measures is presented in
Table 4.7.2.
It is necessary to identify the extent of these impacts for further planning of control
measures leading to mitigation of the adverse impacts. The impacts due to proposed
project on parameters of human interest have been assessed in term of:
Positive Impacts
New jobs will be created during construction phase mostly on temporary
basis and for skilled and unskilled workers
Commercial and industrial activity in the study area, general growth will be
increased
Proposed project is expected to contribute to improvement of quality of life in
the region
Negative Impacts
Increased transportation would lead to increased risk of accidents
Traffic flow will increase congestion around the project location
Interruption in project area due to construction activities
Increase in migrating population in the area
Health and daily life style impairment because of noise effects
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.55
Change in atmosphere of the surrounding community with the influx of
population having different culture, trends and lifestyle
Increased housing requirements for the employees
The environment will be polluted due to new industries and lots of
transporting activities , it will affect natural environment
The natural beauty and attraction of these places will get spoilt which will
affect tourist spots
4.7.1 Mitigation Measures
The following measures are recommended to mitigate the impact on socio-
economic activity during construction phase:
Preference would be given for employment of the local people during
construction phase as well as maintenance activities
Drinking water requirements during the construction phase would be met
from packaged water or water transported through tankers to the
construction sites
Adequate measures for dust suppression, adequate distance from nearest
habitation would be maintained
Separate arrangements shall be made at the construction camps for water,
power supply, sanitation and fuel facilities ensure that there will not extra
load and pressures on the local resources
4.7.2 Region / Community Development Plan
Following measures are suggested for the region / community development :
Adoption of surrounding villages and working for the improvement of quality
of life of the villagers
Provision of infrastructural facilities like construction of roads, drainage
system and community welfare Centers, digging of bore wells and tube
wells, Vocational Training Centers, building for Primary Health Centers,
Public Health etc in the surrounding villages.
Livelihood development activities by imparting scientific training for livestock
and poultry farming
Capacity building training programs for fishermen community and for
enhancing farm-based livelihoods
Creating institutions to impart vocational training for acquiring and upgrading
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.56
technical skills with a view to enhance employability. Establishing
partnerships with District Administration and various Non- Governmental
Organizations to assist gainful self- employment schemes for the
unemployed youth in the area, such programs may include:
Providing fishing net facilities to local villagers
The project authority requires labourers, colony, vehicles and other staff for
the different required works. There would be more requirements of food
grains, vegetables, milk, clothing and other grocery items. As a result,
business activities would increase in the area. The local inhabitants would
be benefited by these activities. For this purpose, Village hat (markets) can
be set up where considerable amount of locally grown commodities that can
be supplied to meet their requirements. These will be helpful in the
upliftment of local economy.
Funding to fisherman society to purchase a good quality of fishing
equipment
Environmental Care and Concern
Care should be taken for the conservation of endemic and endangered plant
species (flora) in the study area to minimize the impact of vehicular pollution
Social forestry activity should undertake the program of tree plantation like
Casuarina sp, mangrove species, coconut, etc. in a row manner near the
sea shore to avoid the effect of cyclones
Construction laborers should be prohibited from using the vegetation for fuel
wood, instead they should be provided with cooking gas/ fuel for cooking
Changes in landscape quality
Excavation and building activities, the bulk movement of materials, especially
during construction, increased electricity consumption, increased consumption of water,
increased disposal of solid and liquid waste, generation of substandard water, an increase
in occupational accidents, an increased risk of radiation, generation or use of hazardous
substances, generation of acute toxic releases, increased risk of explosions, increased risk
of fires.
Increased noise levels
Noise and vibration generated by road traffic, cargo operations, ship traffic
and other port activities also cause problem to local people.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.57
Reduction in habitat
Reduction of the dune ridge, Physical destruction or harm to vegetation,
Introduction of alien species, Changes in food webs and predator/prey relationships,
Introduction of barriers to plant and animal movement, Improved access to and from the
area, Employment for people, Increased export of goods, Improved access of the area.
Increased crime and vandalism
Increased traffic congestion
Loss or shutdown of established businesses
Increase in Waste
All kinds of wastes may be liquid or solid, are likely to be disposed of in the port
area. These wastes include dredged materials, garbage and oily mixtures discharged
from ships, wastes from cargo operations, and all types of discharges from municipal
and waterfront industry activities
4.7.2.1 Positive Impact
Small shopper and market area will be developed
Local people will get extra earning source from their houses to give the
migrants room for rent
Majority of the households blessed with various infrastructure
Increases in social vice and the development of slums activities
Improvement in the quality of education, due to increase no. of school and
institute
Insurance sector will increase in good numbers
Sharing culture and civilization with each other will boost the healthy relation
in local and migrant people
4.7.2.2 Negative Impact
Population density will be increased because of migration
Daily wage will be less because of extra manpower, unemployment or less
income due to increased competition
Population and improper sanitation will be increased which would result in to
health problems, various disease will be cause for health problem
There will be competition for daily bread in local people and migrant people
Migration can also attract criminal elements from trafficking in drugs and
criminal activities may increase in the area
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.58
Migration can become a social/political issue where racism can be used to
exploit feelings as an excuse for current woes of local population.
All stakeholders should make project developmental plan at the initial stages
in such a way that the region develops in a planned way.
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.59
Fig. 4.7.1: Impact Network for Socio-economic Environment
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.60
Table 4.7.1
Prediction of Likely Impacts on Socio-economic Environment
Parameter Local Regional Direct Indirect
Employment + + -
Income + + +
Transport + + + +
Education + + + +
Medical facilities + +
Communication + + + +
Availability of power + + +
Sanitation - -
Housing + +
Health - - -
Recreation + +
Agriculture - -
Business + + + +
Per Capita Income + + + +
Pollution - -
+: Positive Impact
- : Negative Impact
: Insignificant
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.61
Table 4.7.2
Expected Change in Subjective and Cumulative Quality of Life Before and After EMP and Welfare Measures
Sr. No.
Villages Subjective QoL Cumulative QoL
Before EMP After EMP Before EMP After EMP
1. Hittal Makki 0.56 0.60 0.53 0.55
2. Madangeri 0.53 0.56 0.54 0.56
3. Baleli 0.57 0.60 0.55 0.57
4. Yennamadi 0.52 0.54 0.52 0.54
5. Hiregutti 0.55 0.57 0.53 0.54
6. Morba 0.51 0.54 0.51 0.54
7. Mithal Gazni 0.52 0.54 0.52 0.53
8. Agnnashini 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58
9. Kagal 0.48 0.50 0.49 0.50
10. Bad 0.44 0.46 0.43 0.46
11. Gudeangadi 0.53 0.55 0.52 0.54
12. Hegde 0.54 0.57 0.54 0.56
13. Mirjan 0.55 0.58 0.54 0.56
14. Tadari 0.38 0.40 0.43 0.49
15. Gokarn 0.52 0.54 0.53 0.57
16. Belehin 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.52
17. Horumageri 0.53 0.56 0.51 0.54
18. Gangavali 0.37 0.40 0.42 0.46
19. Bonsire 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.57
20. Hoskeri 0.49 0.52 0.50 0.54
21. Torke 0.36 0.38 0.42 0.45
Average 0.47 0.50 0.50 0.53
QoL(s) = Subjective Quality of Life
Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental
Impacts and Mitigation Measures
4.62
4.8 Current Facilities at Tadadi
The facilities that currently exist at the Tadadi port are a light house structure, an
RCC jetty and a Transit Shed. Currently there are no commercial shipping activities taking
place at the port.
4.9 Sensitive (Holy) Places in the Study Area
Within 15 km of the project site, there are three temples. Karibeera temple was
noted on the north east side of Nushikot village, Babruvahana temple near Yanamadi -
Hiregutti village boundary and Nagadevatha temple is located near the small hill in the
project area.
Five worship stones were also observed in the project area. Two of those were at
north side of the area after railway track, one at Hiregutti (near coconut plantation), one in
survey No. 200 of Hiregutti village and fifth one near south boundary at Morha village.
Gokarna has been attracting visitors as it houses an ancient temple and it is the center for
Sanskrit studies. It is about 3 km from the port site. Four most beautiful beaches are
located to the South of Gokarna. They are the Kudle Beach, Om Beach, Halt-moon and
Paradise Beach.
Ch
aap
ter 5
:
En
viro
nm
en
tal M
on
iterin
g P
lan
CChhaapptteerr 55
EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall MMoonniittoorriinngg
PPllaann
5.1 Introduction
The developer should have a comprehensive approach towards the
construction activities at site and the ensuing operations. Environment, Safety and
Health (ESH) principles should be built into the design stages, which are followed
through when contracts are drafted for project management and operations and
maintenance. Whilst different agencies may be involved in executing and operating
different aspects of the project, the developer should retain overall responsibility for
the execution of the Management Plan.
With reference to these, developer should confirm that the contractor(s)
during the construction and operation phases would undertake the implementation
and adherence to plan that would address impacts and mitigation measures.
Adequate budgetary provisions should be made for fulfilling developer's obligations
arising from the implementation of these aspects.
During construction phase, the contractor(s) will have all contractual
responsibility for ensuring protection of the environment while social and health
issues will be jointly addressed. This should be ensured via well-articulated technical
specifications, work methodologies and specific monitoring activities.
Chapter 5:
Environmental Monitoring Plan
5.2
In the operation phase, the developer should ensure that the immediate,
medium and long-term impacts arising from the project are mapped and
incorporated into the Management Plan.
5.2 Environmental Monitoring
One of the main objectives of environmental monitoring is to check the
effectiveness of reducing/eliminating environmental impacts. Monitoring program
should be designed to assess the ability of EMPs to protect the environment, and to
select new or improve existing EMPs, as necessary. Monitoring involves collection of
data, including visual characteristics, odors, chemical quality, and biological
characteristics of uplands or waterways. Typically, monitoring is conducted after a
construction activity or an operation is brought on-line to determine the long-term
impacts to the surrounding environment. However, preconstruction/operations
monitoring can also be conducted to assess the baseline conditions of the study
area.
Pre- and post-construction/operations monitoring is used to select control
measures or EMPs that will prevent or reduce the degree of impact, and later to
assess the actual impacts resulting in improvements in, or revision of EMPs. The
type and extent of the monitoring program is dependent on:
Types of potential contaminants that may be discharged during or
after construction.
The species and/or habitats of concern in the surrounding
environment. This may relate to the season when monitoring is
necessary and the substances a species may be sensitive to (e.g.,
fuels, metals, air emissions, etc.)
The pathway that carries the pollutant to a sensitive species
Atmospheric conditions
Geologic and geographic conditions
Public concern
Regulatory requirements
Mitigation commitments
Chapter 5:
Environmental Monitoring Plan
5.3
Fig. 5.1 presents an overview of the process generally used to select a
monitoring program. Pre-construction/operations monitoring programs generally
require substantial forethought and careful planning including:
Identification of Potential Project Activities: If a project is
expected in the future, the types of activities and the potential
discharges to the air or water should be characterized.
Identification of Sensitive Receptors: This involves determining the
sensitive receptors that may be affected by each activity (e.g.,
endangered species). Baseline studies may assist in identifying
sensitive receptors in the neighborhood
Identification of Receptor's Sensitivity to Contaminants or
Changes: Once the species are identified, physical changes due to
emissions/release in their habitat and life cycle should be observed.
Selection of Monitoring Parameters: The selection of monitoring
parameters is dependent on the species of concern, potential
physical changes, types of releases, and known or suspected
reaction to these changes.
Development of Monitoring Plan: The monitoring plan should be
designed to determine environmental status including seasonal and
temporal fluctuations, as necessary, and to evaluate reactions to
change. The monitoring plan should be discussed with regulatory and
resource agencies, to ensure that the results will be acceptable.
Implementation of Monitoring Program, Evaluation of Results
and Reporting: Once agreement is reached, the monitoring program
would be conducted and the results will be evaluated on a seasonal,
semi-annual, or annual basis. The results/report shall be submitted to
regulatory agency as per guidelines.
The importance of monitoring is two-fold: to establish a clear
understanding of environmental conditions and trends, and to implement and
improve upon EMPs that will enhance the environmental quality in the area.
Chapter 5:
Environmental Monitoring Plan
5.4
5.3 Training
Personnel involved in the construction and operation of the project
must be trained on the hazards, safety procedures and emergency
response plan associated with their tasks in accordance with the
General health and Safety Guidelines and in the General
Environmental Guidelines.
On-site designated teams should be trained in handling oil and
chemical spills, firefighting equipment and in emergency situations.
Project developer must provide training for monitoring and mitigating
the effects of the project on environmental and socio-cultural
resources.
5.4 Summary of Impacts and Monitoring Plan
Based on the above guidelines/criteria, environmental monitoring
programme for the proposed port is suggested for different environmental
components. The monitoring plan during construction and operational phases of the
project includes the parameters to be monitored, number of sampling locations,
sampling frequency, duration, implemental agency and guiding standards, as
summarized in Tables 5.1 and 5.2 respectively.
Chapter 5:
Environmental Monitoring Plan
5.5
Fig. 5.1: Development of Environmental Monitoring Program
Operation & Construction Related
Construction Related
Need a reference
Identify Sensitivity to
Various Contaminants and Changes
Identify Potential Physical
Changes From Construction
Identify Potential
Contaminants or Releases from Construction Operations
Identify Sensitive Receptors
Identify Potential Project
Activities
Select Monitoring Parameters and
Frequency of Sampling
Requirements and Testing Procedures
Develop Monitoring
Plan
Identify Monitoring Program
Obtain Construction & Operations
Permit
Regulatory Agency Public
Review of Approval
Conduct Monitoring Program
Evaluate Results
Ch
aap
ter 5
: En
viro
nm
en
tal M
on
iterin
g
Pla
n
5.6
Table 5.1
Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan: Construction Phase
Component Parameters Applicable Standards
Location Frequency Duration
Air Quality PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx
NAAQS-CPCB 2 to 4 locations in the project impact area. Minimum 1 location in upwind side, more in downwind side / impact zone on land only.
Once a month 24 hr/day for 2 consecutive working days
Noise Levels Leq-day, Leq-night
CPCB noise standards
2 to 4 locations in the project impact area including infrastructure corridor representing different receptors/land use
Once a month 1 hour each during different hours of the day & night during the peak and normal construction period
Water Quality (Surface & Ground Water)
Physico-chemical parameters, Nutrients and Organic parameters, Heavy metals
Drinking water quality Standards
All surface water bodies and 5-10 groundwater samples from hand pumps and dug wells within 5 km radius of port site and within infrastructure corridor study area.
Once in each season
One grab sample from each groundwater source and one composite sample from each surface water body
Marine Water Quality
pH, Turbidity, SS, TDS, Salinity, Temperature, DO, BOD, Faecal coliforms and other chemical parameters monitored during pre- project baseline assessment
As per Standard Techniques (APHA et. al. 2012, CPCB guidelines) to be followed for sampling and analysis
Considering probable impact, sampling points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 5 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc,
Once in each season
One grab sample, each from different locations in the anticipated impact zone
Soil Quality Particle size distribution, Texture, pH, Electrical conductivity, CEC, Alkalinity, metals, SAR, Permeability, Water holding capacity, Porosity
Contaminant threshold level given by USEPA
At all stockyard locations, construction machinery parking / refueling / maintenance locations set-up by contractor. Exact sampling spot at the yard as directed by PMC (Pollution Monitoring Committee)
At the start and end of construction activity at the relevant location
One time sample annually till construction phase is completed
Ch
aap
ter 5
: En
viro
nm
en
tal M
on
iterin
g
Pla
n
5.7
Component Parameters Applicable Standards
Location Frequency Duration
Ecology Monitoring of tree felling during pre-construction & construction
Number of trees to be fell as laid out in project detail design
At all locations/sections where tree is fell
During tree felling
Initially
Marine Water Biology
Primary productivity, Aquatic weeds, Enumeration of phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos, Fisheries, Diversity indices, Tropics levels, Rare and endangered species
Pre-project baseline assessment values Latest Standard techniques (APHA et. al. 2012) to be followed for sampling and measurement
Considering probable impact, sampling points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 10 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc.
Once in each season
One grab sample, each from different locations in the anticipated impact zone
Traffic Volume Road Traffic volume, characteristics and speed
As per relevant IRC specifications
At all artery roads leading to construction site
Each on working and non working day in each season
Thrice in a year marking peak, medium and low construction activity at the site, hourly traffic during day & night time
Socio-economic Survey
Basic amenities and infrastructure
CSR Guidelines
At all villages within 10 km radius from the port site
Regular meeting with nearby villagers
Once in each quarter
Note: Institutional Responsibility: The monitoring work can be outsourced to MoEF/CPCB/SPCB recognized and NABL accredited agency, appointed by KSIIDC. However, the overall responsibility of supervision will lie with the PMC, Port Authority. Further, in-house monitoring capability needs to be developed in due course of time, within a year.
Ch
aap
ter 5
: En
viro
nm
en
tal M
on
iterin
g
Pla
n
5.8
Table 5.2
Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan: Operation Phase
Component Parameters Applicable Standards
Location Frequency Duration
Air Quality PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, HC
NAAQS-CPCB Minimum 4 locations in the project impact area. One in upwind side, more in downwind side / impact zone on land only.
Once a week 24/8 hrs for 2 consecutive working days
Noise Levels Leq-day, Leq-night
CPCB noise standards
2 to 4 locations in the project impact area including infrastructure corridor representing different receptors/land use
Once a month 1 hour each during day & night during the peak and normal operation period
Water Quality (Surface & Ground Water)
Physico-chemical parameters, Nutrients and Organic parameters, Heavy metals
Drinking water quality Standards
All surface water bodies and 5-10 groundwater samples from hand pumps and dug wells within 5 km radius of port site and within infrastructure corridor study area.
Once in each season
One grab sample from each groundwater source and one composite sample from each surface water body
Marine Water Quality
pH, Turbidity, SS, TDS, Salinity, Temperature, DO, BOD, Faecal coliforms and other chemical parameters monitored during pre- project baseline assessment
As per Standard Techniques (APHA et. al. 2012, CPCB guidelines) to be followed for sampling and analysis
Considering probable points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 5 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc,
Once in each season Also before and after maintenance dredging activity
One grab sample, each from different locations in the anticipated impact zone
Soil Quality Particle size distribution, Texture, pH, Electrical conductivity, CEC, Alkalinity, metals, SAR, Permeability, Water holding capacity, Porosity
Contaminant threshold level given by USEPA
All stockyard locations, Accidental spill sites impact, sampling Debris disposal sites, if any Soil quality of nearby villages
In the event of an accident Once during post monsoon season Annually
One time sample
Ch
aap
ter 5
: En
viro
nm
en
tal M
on
iterin
g
Pla
n
5.9
Component Parameters Applicable Standards
Location Frequency Duration
Ecology Survival rate of plantation
- At all locations of compensatory plantation and landscaping
Annually ---
Marine Water Biology
Primary productivity, Aquatic weeds, Enumeration of phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos, Fisheries, Diversity indices, Tropics levels, Rare and endangered species
Pre-project baseline assessment values Latest Standard techniques (APHA et. al. 2012) to be followed for sampling and measurement
Around the anticipated impact zone of dredging
Before and after each maintenance dredging/ dredge disposal work
Grab samples from different locations
Traffic Volume Rail/Road Traffic volume, characteristics and speed
As per relevant IRC specifications
At all artery roads/rail leading to port site including KSIIDC owned infrastructure corridor
Each on working and non working day in each season for 1 year
Thrice in a year marking peak, medium and low construction activity at the site, hourly traffic during day & night time
Socio-economic Survey
Socio-economic indicators of region, basic amenities, infrastructure, health, education, road etc.
Corresponding Baseline values, CSR Policy
At all villages within 10 km radius from the port site
Proportionate, stratified and random sampling once in a year
Periodic discussions with villagers for improvement in QOL of the people of the region
Note: Institutional Responsibility: The monitoring work can be outsourced to MoEF/CPCB/SPCB recognized and NABL accredited agency, appointed by KSIIDC. However, the overall responsibility of supervision will lie with the PMC, Port Authority. Further, in-house monitoring capability needs to be developed in due course of time, within a year.
CChhaapptteerr 66
EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall MMaannaaggeemmeenntt
PPllaann
6.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
An EMP is an implementation plan to mitigate and offset the adverse
environmental impacts of the project and to protect and where possible, it sets out in
detail, the process of implementing mitigation and compensatory measures, the timing of
these measures. EMP should be viewed as a legal commitment on the part of the
proponent to minimize environmental impacts. The process of Environmental Planning
Process (EPP) is shown in Fig. 6.1.
Ports should successfully integrate full consideration of environmental
resources, including mitigation of unavoidable adverse impacts, into the planning and
construction of berths at Tadadi Port.
In many instances, it has been found that successful implementation of EMP
has resulted in reduction in project costs in the long run. This is because the EMP
contains proposals for optimum usage of available resources plans to address minor
faults at the initial stage (spills, leakage etc. can be minimized using components like
safety valves, pressure relief valves). Disaster Management Plans to respond to
accidents.
Communities rely on the marine resources for their livelihood so it becomes
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.2
absolutely necessary to maintain a clean and usable waterfront. The environmental
management process consists of defining an environmental policy developing plans for
Environmental Management Implementation of the EMP Monitoring.
Environmental auditing and life cycle assessments may also be incorporated
as an integral component of the EMP. Fig. 6.2 shows component of a generic
Environmental Management Plan.
6.1.1 Environmental Policy
In principle any port should define its environmental policy and ensure
commitment to its environmental system. The policy should be displayed at prominent
points in the port so that the people visiting the area are made aware of the do's and
don'ts involved in the operation and maintenance.
Port and Harbor projects fall under activity No.7 i.e. physical infrastructure
including environment services and under Category “A” as per notification of the MoEF
No.S.O.1533 14th September 2006.
6.2 Environmental Management System (EMS)
The EMS shall be developed at the proposed project appropriately to obtain
ISO governing certification, which may also be indirectly useful for withstanding the
current open competition in global economic system. The EMS shall broadly include:
Establishment and maintenance of documented environmental objectives
and targets at all relevant levels starting from quality assurance of
feed/fuels, at each relevant operation/function at individual utilities, offsites,
power modules etc. including environmental policy matters of the
organization
Allocating responsibilities at different levels for achieving the set objectives
and targets
In order to assess the performance of environmental management system,
periodical assessment studies by an independent agency would be highly
useful
A full-fledged environmental management cell with necessary infrastructure
shall be developed at proposed project
The environment management cell comprising experienced and qualified
personnel reporting to the port incharge regarding environmental
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.3
performance and monitoring of environmental quality shall be created at
each of major industry as well as for port as a whole. The suggested
staffing pattern at each unit should be as follows :
Environmental Engineer (B.E./M.E. Environmental Engineering with 5-10
years experience)
1
Chief Chemist (Post Graduate/Ph. D. in Chemistry with 10 years of
experience in Air , Water & wastewater and Soil analysis
2
Biologist/Ecology specialist 1
Chemists (Degree in Chemistry) 3
Laboratory Technicians 3
Plant (ETP&STP) operations & Field staff for sample collection 9
6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP
Adequate budgetary provisions have to be made for executing the
environmental management plan as delineated above. The details of project cost, annual
recurring budget and capital investments to be earmarked for pollution control,
operation/maintenance, social welfare measures, and for green belt development are as
follows:
Sr. No.
Description Estimated Cost* (Rs. Crores)
1. Total Project Cost*
2. Pollution Control/Monitoring System
a) Capital
b) Recurring/annum
3. Green belt development/Waste and solid waste management waste water treatment plant
a) Capital
b) Recurring/annum
4. Social Welfare Measures/ activities including project affected people:
Health, sanitation, communication, street light, drinking water facilities, education, Transportation.
a) Capital
b) Recurring/annum
Total
* Estimated cost to be provided by the Project Developer
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.4
6.4 Construction Phase
6.4.1 Preparation of Site and Creation of Basic Facilities
Environmental pollution during construction phase will be mainly due to site
preparation and construction of bund and Berth structure for port. Terminal and conveyor
belts on port area. These activities will involve movement of substantial quantities of soil
to fill and/or raise the land height, hence during dry weather conditions it is necessary to
reduce nuisance due to dust emissions using dust suppression equipments. Further, all
disturbed slopes will be required to be stabilized before onset of monsoon. The
manpower required for these activities should preferably be employed from nearby
villages so that avenues of employment will be open to local people.
6.4.1.1 Basic Facilities
The site should be provided with sufficient and appropriate sanitary facilities in
order to maintain hygienic conditions. These facilities should be suitably designed and
well maintained so as to minimize adverse impacts. Workers engaged during construction
phase should be provided with temporary housing facilities at planned labour colonies
located preferably nearer to the project site within one km radius.
Independent facilities for drinking water and sanitation need to be provided for
each colony. The developer will be extracting water from surface water body identified
and permitted for operation, construction and operation phases of the project. No other
resources/water sources which are currently being used by the neighboring population for
the purpose of obtaining drinking water and/or water for irrigation or other purposes will
be tapped.
The only two credible sources of potential impacts arise from uncontrolled
runoffs from the labour camps and accidental spills of oil etc. into surface and
groundwater bodies. The selected contractor will be obligated to follow the procedures
detailed in the waste management plan and the waste disposal execution plan. These
measures will adequately mitigate the possibility of any negative impacts during
construction on water quality. The wastes such as, sanitary wastes will be treated in the
sewage treatment plant of appropriate size and technology.
Provision for adequate supply of kerosene and diesel will be made for workers
living in colonies as well as site in order to prevent cutting of wood.
Effect of increased noise levels during the construction stage will be negligible
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.5
on nearby villages. However, onsite workers will be provided with Personal Protection
Equipment (PPE) including noise protection devices such as ear-muffs.
To ensure that the local inhabitants are not exposed to any hazard, the site will
be secured by fencing and manned entry points. The onsite workers will be provided with
safety measures and made aware about hazard prone areas.
6.4.1.2 Construction Equipments and Waste
It will be ensured that both gasoline and diesel vehicles required during
construction are maintained properly to minimize smoke and emissions from exhausts.
The area for maintenance of vehicles will be so located that contamination of
groundwater by accidental spillage of oil could be prevented. The unauthorized dumping
of waste will be prohibited and composite waste will be burnt in a controlled manner.
Particular care will be taken to ensure that the spent chemical wastes are neutralized /
treated before disposal.
6.4.1.3 Transportation of Materials and Waste
Regulate vehicle speed, periodic maintenance of vehicles, during
transportation provide masks for workers, and ensure proper covering for
materials (like tarpaulin cover). Periodic emission check for vehicles and
ensure use of good fuel for vehicles
Material handling conveyors will be covered
Waste materials will not be openly burnt
Provide impermeable membrane to minimize the leachates
Estimation of recharge capacity and plan for procurement of water from far
away sites will be done
Construct dikes, beams for prevention for increased turbid runoff
Stockpiles of materials will be located at least 100m away from waterfront
Control sedimentation by frequent removal of dumped material from water
body / ocean
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.6
6.5 Operation Phase
6.5.1 Air Environment
Measures proposed for mitigating impact on ambient air quality during the port
operations include the following:
Continuous sources of emissions such as DG sets and boilers will be
installed with sufficient number of stacks and of sufficient height (KPCB
norms) to ensure adequate dispersion of pollutants. Further, pollution
control systems such as low NOX burners and Sulphur free fuels will be
used as a fuel.
Gas powered or low sulphur diesel and unleaded petrol in conventional
vehicles will be used within the port area and for evacuation. Where
possible, efforts will be made to use no-emission vehicles such as electric
and fuel cell powered vehicles
Burning of solid or oil wastes will be avoided, unless in appropriate
incinerators
Storage areas and conveying systems will be adequately covered during
the handling of materials, to reduce or completely eliminate fugitive
emissions. Free fall of materials will be minimized by installation of
telescoping arm loaders and conveyors, to further minimize the fugitive
dust emission
It will be ensured that transport vehicles are covered. Whenever possible
idling of vehicles will also be minimized during transport and handling
activities
On-loading/Off-loading and storage areas will be paved to reduce dust
emissions
6.5.1.1 Discharge of pollutants to the air from operation of ships will be reduced
by using the following controls:
Efforts will be taken to encourage the use of alternative fuels and fuel
mixture in ships and keep fuel control systems in proper working
conditions
Fuel leaks will be prevented from on-land equipment, vehicle fueling by
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.7
considering installation and maintenance of vapour recovery systems
where required and/or appropriate. Further, installation of leak detection
systems and conduction of leak detection tests on fuel systems will be
done including distribution lines and tanks.
6.5.1.2 Management of Ambient Air Quality
During the construction phase, chronic gaseous emissions are expected from
the diesel generator (s). All other emission sources are intermittent and include emissions
from materials transport, from heavy vehicles on site and from marine vessels. Though
the gaseous emissions are not expected to contribute significantly to the ambient air
quality, some generic measures to reduce fugitive and gaseous (pollutants) emissions
during construction phase include the following:
The storage and handling of spoil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will be
carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and dust,
e.g., by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets
Those sections of the working area with vehicular traffic will be damped by
controlled applications of water sprays (e.g. by water blowers) as
conditions dictate.
There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any construction
activities
All vehicles delivering dusty construction materials to the site or removing
spoil will be enclosed and covered to prevent escape of dust.
In areas where the soils contain large quantities of silt and fine sand, which
has a tendency to blow in dry conditions, the Contractor will be responsible
for ensuring that particular attention will be paid towards dust suppression.
Vehicles or equipments will be checked for pollutant emissions over
stipulated norms
Vehicle engines will not be left running when not in use.
The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipments will be
maintained so that exhaust emissions will not reach statutory limits (set for
that vehicle/equipment type and mode of operation by (KPCB), and that all
vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with manufactures
guidance.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.8
The exhausts of other equipment used for construction (e.g. generators)
will be positioned at a sufficient height to ensure dispersion of exhaust
emissions and meet the standards set by KPCB
6.5.2 Noise Environment
The post-project noise levels at the nearest habitation will be less than the
stipulated standards of KPCB. However, as a good operational procedure, the following
generic measures will be implemented:
Similar measures as proposed in the construction phase for DG sets and
other noise making machinery, to ensure practically low noise levels within
the work environment. The major areas of concern for noise generation will
be adequately addressed by considering it during procurement of the
machinery from vendors, project implementation stage. Further feedback
from the monitored noise levels at sensitive locations will be taken to
ensure that the impact due to high noise levels is practically minimized.
Monitor job and locations specific noise levels for compliance with HSE
regulations by verifying acceptability of noise levels caused by the project
activities and comparison with noise criteria.
Conduct periodic audiometric tests for employees working close to high
noise levels, such as the loading and unloading sections
Provision of PPE’s will be done and their proper usage will be ensured for
eardrum protection of the workers as well as visitors
6.5.2.1 Management of Ambient Noise Quality
Considering the impact scenario on ambient noise levels due to operation of
transport vehicles and construction equipments, some of the mitigation measures
proposed for noise environment protection during the construction phase are the
following:
Noise from DG set shall be controlled by providing acoustic enclosure to
DG sets area. The enclosure shall be designed for minimum 25 dB (A)
insertion loss. The performance of acoustic enclosure will be checked by
measuring noise levels in different direction at 0.5 m from the enclosure
Each item of powered machinery used on site will be properly maintained
and serviced so as to prevent unnecessary noise emissions. All items of
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.9
plant operating on the site in intermittent use will be shut down in the
intervening periods between uses
Any item of equipment found to be emitting excessive noise levels due to a
faulty silencer, broken or ill-fitting engine covers or other reasons, will
immediately be taken out of service and be adequately serviced, repaired
or replaced
The design of the port will be such that the sound pressure level in the work
area will not exceed 85 dB(A). Restricted areas will be those locations where it is not
reasonably practicable to reduce the noise level below the work area limit. Wherever
practicable, attempts shall be made to reduce the noise level below 90 dB(A). The noise
levels will not exceed 60 dB(A) at the perimeter of the port area. The equipment will be
chosen in such a way that the above noise limit should not be exceeded.
6.5.3 Water Environment
The project developer has committed not to use other water resources
available at the site during operation stage of the project as well. Water for the project will
be drawn from the Ganga Vali River.
The operations will ensure that there will be no impact on surface or
groundwater quality in the region due to disposal of untreated waste. The sewage from
the ships will be treated within the ships, in the absence of such facilities (e.g., in older
vessels, barges), the sewage will be brought for treatment in the sewage treatment plant
on land. Therefore it is not likely that there would be any risks of contamination of surface
or groundwater as a result of the effluent or waste discharge from the ships. Oily wastes
from the ships will also not affect any surface or groundwater, as ships will not be allowed
to release any oily bilge waste or ballast water within port limits. Regular monitoring of
water quality will be carried out at the port site and in nearby surface bodies to keep track
of adverse environmental changes.
6.5.3.1 Disposal of Maintenance Dredge Spoil
The disposal logistics of maintenance dredge spoil has been carefully planned
based on economic considerations and meeting acceptable standards for its disposal.
The locations identified also have low productivity will be dispose of dredged material
after knowing its quality. If necessary to install effective sediment control measures before
starting work would be adopted, so as to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.10
in the water body. Sediment control measures would be monitored regularly to ensure
that they are properly disposed. The following control measures will be followed:
Dredge on calm days to minimize the suspension of fine sediment particles
into the water column.
Dredging operation will almost always re-suspend sediments, but the level
of re-suspension and associated impact depend on the physical and
chemical characteristic of the sediment, as well as the site conditions, type
of equipment and dredging method. The impacts of dredging activities are
strongly influenced by the contamination of the sediment and local factors
like water depth, rate of flow, tidal currents, wave action, type of seabed
and sediment concentration of the water under natural circumstances, as
well as the dredging method.
Alteration of the bottom topography and hydrography and destruction of
local habituates and the risk of direct physical/mechanical stress to
species re-suspension of sediments will also increase turbidity.
6.5.3.2 Disposal of Material
Dredging
The types of dredging equipment is decided on the basis of the soil profile and
hydrodynamic conditions such as current, waves etc., The two type of dredger proposed
are Trailing suction hopper Dredger and Cutter Suction Dredger.
The dredging materials consist of sand, fine sand, silt and clay. Based on the
result of the bathymetric survey and the navigation channel dimension, the total dredging
quantity is estimated to be 50000000 m3, of which 27000000 m3 correspond to the outer
navigation channel and 23000000 m3 correspond to the inner navigation channel and
turning circle respectively. The quantities of the dredging to be carried out will be
minimized by optimization. The portion of the dredged material is proposed to be used to
for reclamation of the port land area is 18000000 m3 and remaining portion of the dredge
material viz., 32000000 m3 is proposed to disposed off in the offshore deep sea area
Fig.6.3.
The material dredged will be party used for filling or reclamation of the backup
area of the port and the balance will be disposed into the deep sea. As the material
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.11
dredged by the cutter dredger will have better geotechnical characteristics, they will be
used for reclamation purposes (18000000 m3).
In the case of the trailing suction hopper dredger, the dredged material end up
in a large onboard hold called a “Hopper”. A hopper dredger usually has doors/walves in
its bottom to empty the dredged materials, but some dredges empty their hopper by
splitting in to two halves of their hull. When the hopper is filled with slurry, the dredger
stops dredging and goes to a dump site where it empties its hopper.
In case the dredged material consists of sand which is suitable for reclamation,
the material is pumped to shore by the inboard pumps through a pipeline.
6.5.3.3 Dredged Material Management Plan
A detailed dredged material management plan will be drawn up in consultation
with the contractor.
6.5.3.4 Ship Generated Wastes
For a ship at berth, provision will be made of a specially equipped pump truck
to receive sewage and transport it to the treatment plant for further processing. Similarly,
arrangement will be required to offload solid waste from such ships for planned disposal.
The IMO stipulation requires that port/berth that regularly handles deep-sea ships should
be equipped with facilities to accept and dispose of up to 100 t of oily ballast and bilge
water.
These pump trucks will transport the wastes to the treatment facility where the
oil is separated from water in a standard grit/oil separator. The IMO guidelines permit the
discharge of water contaminated with oil, in harbour area provided the oil content is less
than 15 mg/l. Such facilities will be created at the project site and the effluent will be
released in the coastal water at the location identified for disposal of treated sewage.
Further, adequate vigilance measures and deterrents will be put in place to ensure the
adherence of ships and related regulations to prevent clandestine release.
6.5.3.5 Sediment Transport and Quality
The potential sources of impacts on sediment transport and quality during the
construction phase will be due to excavation, filling & disposal of capital dredging spoil.
The disposal of capital dredge spoil will be carried out in accordance with the
dredged disposal scheme planned based on modeling simulations so that the impact on
sediment quality is minimal. The selection and operation of dredging equipment and
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.12
coincidence of dredging schedules with low flow periods will be considered wherever
practical, to reduce turbidity and sediment re-suspension.
The sediment dispersed in the water column during construction may settle
elsewhere thereby causing minor change in the texture of the sediment. However, no
further mitigation measures are required considering the existing dynamic regime in the
project area that changes the character of the inter-tidal and near shore sub-tidal
sediment on shorter time scales.
6.5.3.6 Marine Environment
During Construction of berth, marine ecosystem will be disturbed as a result of
dredging, foundation and erection. The following measures are recommended to
minimize the impacts:
The construction of berth should be planned to minimize the number of
construction days so that the effect will be minimized.
Spillage of chemicals, paints, fuel oil etc. should be avoided
6.5.3.7 Marine Water Quality
The potential impacts on marine water quality may arise primarily due to
disposal of capital dredged spoil. The excavation and reclamation activities in the port site
areas for construction of berth would also dispose the bed sediment in water column
there by increasing the suspended solid in water. This will be mainly in the form of
increased sediment load and a certain amount of pollutants (particulate, dissolved
inorganic and organic). However, the effects of pollution are unlikely to be severe since
construction activities are not of the dimensions of operational activities or nor are likely to
be as intense and sustained. It is also likely that the high energy tidal regime may help in
rapid dispersal of the excess sediments and even carry them away from the site
proposed for development.
There is a distinct advantage of reduction in time of marine construction
operations by fabricating the structures (pre-cast structures) such as beams, modules,
slabs etc., in a yard on land and transporting them to the site for assembling. Given that
this is also economically efficient, it is expected that marine operations for construction
will be as limited and short as possible. As a part of the management strategy, it is
advantageous to coordinate various activities to avoid time-overruns, and complete the
project within an agreed time schedule.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.13
The intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the port area will be
restored to their original contours once the construction activities are completed. General
clean-up used for construction related activities, adjacent to intertidal areas, creeks etc.
will be undertaken and entire discarded materials will be removed from the site and
aesthetic quality of the surroundings restored, once the construction operations area
over.
6.5.3.8 Development of Marine Facility and Environmental Management
During construction of terminals berths and conveyor belts marine ecosystem
will be disturbed due to sequential activities viz. dredging, foundation and erection. Hence
project proponent should look into following suggestions:
Minimize onsite construction to reduce number of construction days
wherever possible using prefabricated structure
As port is to cater 4 No. of vessels of 100,000 DWT for ore/coal vessels
and 3 No. of 40,000 DWT, general cargo vessels. The width of berth is
50m. a length of 990 m has been provided for berthing 4 No. of 100,000
DWT and 550 m length has been provided for berthing 3 No. of 40000
DWT vessel. However considering the future expansion for the general
cargo, an additional two berths are proposed as an extension to the
multipurpose terminal on the North Western side. Even though the
envisaged vessel size are 40,000 DWT for the multipurpose terminal all
the berth structures have been designed to accommodate 100000 DWT
vessels considering the future expansion after the completion of the port
facilities. After completion of port with expansion there will not be any
future repetition of dredging otherwise it will disturb the aquatic
environment (bottom flora and fauna).
No wastewaters due to domestic activity will be discharged into seawater
at site of construction.
6.5.3.9 Water Facility and Site Sanitation
Water will only from approved locations
The site should be provided with sufficient and appropriate sanitary
facilities in order to maintain hygienic conditions in the camps of
construction labors
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.14
Sanitation facilities should be suitably designed and well maintained so as
to minimize adverse impacts
Provide septic tanks for collection of domestic sewage
6.5.4 Land Environment
The developer will take adequate preventive measures to ensure that there are
no disposals of solid wastes generated from port or ship operations and that there are no
unconfined spillages which may contaminate the soil. Following measures are
recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land activities during operation phase:
Development of greenbelt with carefully selected plant species is of prime
importance due to their capacity to reduce noise and air pollution impacts
by attenuation/assimilation and for providing food and habitat for local
macro and micro fauna. This not only overcomes the problem but also
enhances the beauty of area that will attract bird and insect species and by
this way ecology of the area will be maintained to great extent
Survival rate of the planted trees should be closely monitored and the trees
which could not survive should be counted and replaced by equal number
of trees
The rainwater harvesting should be done. Treated sewage and effluent in
the best combination should be used for greenbelt development. Water
scarcity should not be the reason for not expanding and strengthening
greenbelt. Provision for irrigation water should be made as part of
proposed project
6.5.4.1 Landuse/Landscape
Creation of land due to reclamation will result in changes in the landscape and
landuse in the region. No existing land is being sought for the construction of the berth.
The generic mitigation measures that will be implemented during construction phase are
presented in the following paragraphs.
The development of the berth will be done with due regard for local
development plans. It will be ensured that the proposed landuse for the berth
development is compatible with the surrounding landuse. The land use plan will be
developed with attractive rural design of the terminal operation building area to enhance
the aesthetic quality of the area. Feasible, isolated land pockets created by port
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.15
developments will be designated for specific natural uses and left undisturbed to allow
natural succession. This measure will mitigate the small change in land use caused due
to construction and future expansions.
6.5.4.2 Soil Quality
The construction of the berth will be carried out in the inter-tidal and the sub-
tidal area and hence no major impacts are anticipated on the soil quality. The solid
wastes or any other non-biodegradable wastes that have leaching characteristics will be
disposed at KPCB approved landfill sites. In the unlikely event that the soil quality is
found sensitive, contaminated soil will be removed for bio-remediation. Provision will be
made for a secure land fill site to reduce mobilization of potential contaminants into soil.
Land environment management plan will be implemented for all land-based
construction operations. In areas, where soil quality for natural vegetation is of critical
concern, loosening of soil in such areas will be done to mitigate soil compaction caused
due to operation of heavy machinery.
A storm water drainage system will be planned and implemented in and around
the areas designated for handling material to avoid penetration, seepage and drainage of
contaminated surface water and heavy metals into the soil.
6.5.4.3 Quarry Material Sources
Quarrying does change the natural topography of the area, and a reinstatement
plan suggested to quarry operator will aim at restoring the topography. One possible
beneficial use of the post quarrying area could be to use it as a catchment area for
rainwater harvesting and storage. Discussions with the local communities near the quarry
areas will help in selecting the optimal reinstatement plan.
An appropriate Occupational Exposure Limit for the quarry operations will be
identified based on the following hierarchy; in each case the most stringent limit shall be
applied:
Limits as adopted in Indian Legislative requirements, if available and
where applicable
The Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents
and Biological Indices. Issued annually and published by the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
Depending on the actual risk, protection measures may include:
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.16
Engineering controls
Suppression of dust, for instance by wetting
Enclosed driver cabins
Personal protective equipment (PPE) for the workers if the above
measures appear insufficient
6.5.4.4 Hydrology
Standard construction procedures will be implemented to ensures that the
impact on surface drainage pattern and soil erosion is kept minimal. This will necessarily
include avoiding blockage of natural surface drainage or otherwise developing
appropriate drainage system in areas, where it is unavoidable.
6.5.4.5 Morphology
The initial studies carried out on coastal morphology do not reveal erosion of
any coastal stretch.
However, due to dredging and disposal of dredged material the impact on
seabed morphology is marginal and within the realms of acceptability given the nature of
operations.
6.5.4.6 Greenbelt Development
The greenbelt development at proposed port will be of a suitable width along
the periphery of port area including residential complex, space between the units located
within the port, along the internal roads, railway sidings, the hazardous waste disposal
facilities.
Objectives
Objectives of Greenbelt development ranges from the micro level air pollution
abatement to enhancement of socio-economic status of the region.
a) The prime objective of greenbelt development is attenuation of air and
noise pollution
b) Greenbelt development can serve as a measure, to reduce the soil erosion
and aesthetic enhancement of the area
c) Greenbelt development also serves as a measure for treated waste water
utilization and CO2 sequestration
d) It generates employment avenues for local agriculture workers.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.17
Selection of Greenbelt Plant Species
For the development of greenbelt at proposed project site, suitable plant
species shall be selected based on the following criteria apart from agro-climatic as well
as existing flora characteristics of the particular project area:
The species should be indigenous
Thick canopy cover
Perennial/evergreen to the extent possible
High sink potential for major air pollutants at proposed project
Resistant to specific air pollutants, disease & Insect
Ability to tolerate the particular weather and climate as well as soil
characteristics at project site
The “Guidelines for Development of Greenbelts” published by CPCB shall be
strictly followed by project proponent. As per CPCB guidelines, the project site and
surrounding study area falls in agro-climatic zone of west-coast plains and ghat region as
well as coastal midland sub-zone with dry sub-humid & perhumid climate and Red loamy,
coastal alluvium laterite soils (Uttar Kannada district). The plant species recommended by
CPCB particularly for the project area along with the local plant species identified during
field survey are given in Table 6.1 for development of greenbelt at proposed port project
site.
Guidelines for plantation
The plant species identified for greenbelt development should be planted using
pitting technique. The pit size should be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x
60 cm, bigger pit size is preferable for marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling
the pit should be mixed with well decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the
rate of 2.5 kg for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm pits and 3.6 kg for 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size
pits on dry weight basis. The filling of plantation pits should be completed at least 5-10
days prior to actual sapling plantation. Healthy saplings of the selected species should be
planted in each pit.
Roadside Plantation
Roadside plantation plays equally important role for increasing the vegetative
cover & tree shade in project area, improvement of aesthetics and for eco-development.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.18
The approach roads to project site, colony, hospitals, etc. should be planted with avenue
trees and flowering plantation. Tadadi port site adequate care should be taken to uplift the
regional ecosystem through road side plantations, agro-forestry/waste land
afforestation/social forestry programmes in surrounding villages. The local
NGOs/voluntary organizations should take necessary initiative to encourage the massive
plantations along the roads, especially NHs & SH near study area. Trees planted on both
sides of roads are proven to increase aesthetic value as well as shady area on the roads
apart from attenuation of air pollution impacts. The species identified for roadside
plantations are:
Azadirachta indica Evergreen
Cassia fistula Deciduous
Cassia siamea Evergreen
Casuarina equisetifolia Evergreen
Dalbergia latifolia Semi-deciduous
Delonix regia Deciduous
Ficus religiosa Evergreen
Nerium indicum Evergreen
Peltophorum pterocarpum Evergreen
Polyalthia longifolia Evergreen
Thevetia peruviana Evergreen
6.5.5 Biological Environment
There are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biology during berth
operation. However, coal dust from transport system need to be properly controlled
throughout its operation.
Dredged spoil generated during the maintenance dredging will also be
disposed at the low lying sites (if suitable for reclamation). The ecology of these sites as
well as surroundings will have special significance due to the plantation of the trees
where the dredged spoils/sediment is spread to the area.
As part of the general Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Premises, it will
be ensured that the intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the project area
will be restored to their original contours, once the construction activities are completed.
General clean-up along the corridor used for construction related activities, adjacent
intertidal areas, creeks etc. will be undertaken and all the discarded materials would be
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.19
removed from the site and aesthetic quality of the surroundings is restored, once the
construction operations are over.
6.5.5.1 General Marine Ecosystem
Project area is ecologically very sensitive and spillages of material during
loading/unloading operations and other such impacts are likely to influence the marine
biological environment adversely. However, appropriate technology and contemporary
standards and procedures would be selected to minimize possibility of such an
occurrence. The guiding principle of marine environment management is to ensure that
the perturbations due to the proposed coastal activities are within the assimilative
capacity of the coastal marine environment of harbour area. A plan of actions for
mitigating the predicted adverse effects will be prepared approximately.
6.5.5.2 Fisheries
Impacts on fish or fisheries are expected as the activities of port are on estuary
of the river. However, the impacts on fish and the livelihoods of people dependent on
fishing will be closely monitored and a suitable compensation scheme will be evolved.
6.5.5.3 Terrestrial Biology
The measures enumerated earlier will be entrusted in all contractual and
procedural obligations of the contractors and owner’s team deployed at site for the
construction. This will ensure that the measures as enumerated are enforced. Otherwise,
there are no potential sources of impacts envisaged on terrestrial biology during the berth
operations.
6.5.5.4 Aquatic Biology
The impact on biological environment during the construction phase would be
due to the erection of structures, capital dredging, filling, shore protection measures on
the intertidal area etc. The impacts on marine ecology due to such activities would be
largely confined to the duration over which the activities are spread. The alterations in
marine biota would recover and regenerate over a period of time once construction
activities are completed. No mitigation measures are possible other than using
environmentally friendly construction technologies and internationally acceptable
standards of construction. Through deforestation of mangroves during construction phase
is not envisaged, any disturbance would be compensated by planting double number of
mangrove plants. All efforts should be made to reinstate the site.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.20
6.5.6 Socio-economic and Public Interest
It was observed that the awareness about the project was quite high among the
people. The respondents during survey conducted have expressed their expectations
from project authorities specifically related to increased job opportunities. While planning
for manpower requirement the expectations should be given due consideration so as to
create good will for the project.
Medical and drinking water facilities in few nearby villages were observed to be
very poor. Project management should extend their help to improve these facilities under
programmes of welfare activity. Efforts should also be made to raise social set up of the
region through subsidies.
The literacy level is satisfactory; technically qualified people would not be
available in the initial phase of the project. Hence, schemes for apprentice training could
be worked out leading to availability of technical manpower from the region.
6.5.6.1 Loss of Land, Livelihoods, Health and Safety
The construction of the port will have no socio-economic impact due to loss of
land as the entire port area is located on waterfront, inter-tidal (bin-number) land.
Similarly the fishing activities taking place today in project area are limited to offshore
area and port will be constructed in the estuarine zone. Thus, livelihood of the local
population due to this project is expected to get disturbed. Similarly nearly 500 m from the
Tadadi Jetty, sea shell mining is presently run by M/s Gaokar. They will lose their
business for selling the shell which is used for preparing sweet lime. This is used in pan,
pan masala, surka and bulbus excreta used as poultry fish food.
Typically, infrastructure projects like port/harbour bring with them a host of
opportunities in the ancillary areas of activities attached with port operations. This could
include provision of maintenance services and other service/manufacturing contracts. The
developer remains committed to maximize employment and income generation
opportunities for the local communities and will develop suitable mechanisms for the
same.
The movement of heavy equipment will be done with proper precaution to
prevent any accidents on the road. Occupational risk would be minimized at the port site
through safety measures.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.21
Safety training will be provided to all construction workers on operation of
equipment. Security and fencing during non-working hours will also be provided to ensure
that there is no uncontrolled access to the machinery and equipment.
All construction workers will be medically examined prior to recruitment. The
contractors will also be vigilant to detect workers showing symptoms of communicable
diseases. All illness and incidents shall be reported and recorded at field unit of HSE.
Co-operative and open working relations should be established and
maintained throughout the life of the project
Preventive measures should be taken for controlling the pollution, which
may arise from the project
Unsanitary conditions cause number of health problems and sanitary
facilities area inadequate in rural area so project authority must arrange
different programs for enhancing cleanliness and reducing unsanitary
conditions
Awareness programs will be arranged by the project proponent based on
the common health problems caused in the region that will help to reduce
health status of the region
6.5.6.2 Status of the Fishing activities around the Port Site and Management Plan
Tadadi village is traditionally important village for fishing and marketing of fish.
Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing. The fisherman
cooperative at Tadadi is one of the most active marketing forums for fishes in the Taluka
Tadadi in located on a picturesque estuary created by Aghanashini River. Aghanashini is
only free flowing river on the Western Ghats which joins the Arabian Sea at Aghanashini
village near Tadadi. The confluence of Aghanashini with Arabian Sea provides an
advantage to set up a port in the village. The estuary is also natural house of mangroves
area. The government has acquired about 566 hectares of land required for project, some
area of land is under water.
Tadadi being a minor port is under the administrative control of the Public
Works and Inland Water Transport Department. The existing facilities are a light house;
an RCC Jetty and transit shed with current draft of 2.5m. As per the social impact study
theoretical total population in the affected region is 5690 households representing from
different communities (refers from Social impact assessment report, January, 2012).
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.22
However, the actual number may vary as each source of information has given different
numbers of households. Group of villages depends on fishing and shell-fish collection in
Aghanashini River which is close to the port location another group of villages engaged in
fishing in the land region area is acquired for port development and some people depend
upon sea fishing through Tadadi port.
Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing.
The fishermen having corporative society at Tadadi, they have most active marketing
forums for fishes in the taluka. Most of the communities that are directly dependent on the
port for fishing. The clusters are identified based on the type of livelihood activities that
the communities depend on the port region.
There are two groups. Most of the group of villages are dependent on fishing
and shell-fish collection in Aghanashini River which is close to the port location. The
other group of villages engaged in fishing in land region that acquired for port construction
and some villages depend on sea fishing through Tadadi Port. Salt production regions
such as Sanekatta and Nagarbaillu are also an economic source of the people.
An in depth analysis of the result of the villages survey reveals that if the
proposed port development project comes up in Tadadi, about 188 fishermen household
and 98 other caste households will be affected directly and the livelihoods of about 116
people from eight villages depend mainly on the Sangama region where the Aghanashini
River joining the Arabian sea. In Tadadi about 38 household mainly depend on the land
tracts for in land fishing, which the KSIIDCL has now acquired for the port construction.
The livelihoods of 132 households from eight villages depend mainly on deep sea fishing
in Tadadi Mangalore, Malpe, Goa, Karwar and Honnavar.
Majority of fishermen depend on fishing activities like deep-sea fishing and
fishing cluster area. During the rainy season (Jun, July and August) all the fishing
communities depend on the port land region for their livelihoods as fishing in deep sea
and in the Sangama region are affected. Some fishermen also carryout fishing activity on
the land which is under sea water.
More households from the traditional fishermen community (such as Ambega
and Harikanth), who engage mainly in fishing activity, No-traditional fishermen
communities (such as Jalthar, Naik and Gowdar) who engage in fishing only partially as
they are involved in other livelihood activities as well. Due to the good income from the
fishing activities, Government scheme (Matsyaashay) and bank loan facilities, most of the
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.23
families have good house. They get good income from the fishing activity, enables to
educate their children, as their children are also engaged in fishing activity.
The major occupation of the household members from the same group are
engaged in finishing activities such as deep-sea fishing, in land fishing shell-fishing and
selling of fish dry fish in the village also the majority of the members engaged in these
activities belong to the younger group, another interesting fact is that the fishing activities
are dominated by men and selling activity by women.
Among the surveyed population 71% of them have no land for agriculture, and
a majority of them are traditional fishermen communities. The majority of the populations
are dependent on fishing for their livelihood. 23% of them have less than one acre land
and 5% of the households have 1 to 2 acres of land.
Fishermen from village like Madangere who depend mainly on fishing in the
566 hectares of land acquired for port feel that those land area like Gangi Kendra for the
fishermen as any time, throughout the year they do fishing and can get income for the
family. If the port construction comes up they have no choice as they do not have other
skill or have agricultural land to get income during the rainy season, villager those who
depend on sea fishing, such as prawns, crabs and other fish and get a good income.
6.5.6.3 Management Plan (Resettlement and Rehabilitation)
The fishing and related people in the Aghanashini River and around the area
will be definitely affected of their livelihood. People from the villages like Aghanashini
Kosakote that are very close to the Sangama region where the port will come up, they
fear that they would lose their houses, villages that are concerned may relocate from their
residential area. Which will be away from the sea and that would make it difficult to them
to continue their occupation. So far 286 fishermen house hold will be directly affected by
the port activities.
There are about 242 hectares of land used for salt production in Sanekatta
using the backwater from sea, about 350 families, and more than 300 workers in the salt
factory are engaged in this activity will affect their livelihood due to port activity.
The affected people must be given compensation as per the government
norms. The fishermen house hold will be affected from these villages:
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.24
Sr. No. Village
1. Belegan- Tadadi
2. Betakuli
3. Gangavali
4. Kimmani
5. Mirjan- Dori Bhahil
6. Morba
7. Nusikote
8. Tadadi
9. Madangere
10. Aganasi
11. Devanna
12. Devarbhavi
13. Hosakote
14. Masakal
15. Mudangi
16. Sanekatta
17. Thoraigajini
To compensate the people affected by the fishing activities a separate fishing
harbour should be constructed with more facilities like cold storage, space for parking,
and required materials like diesel, ice, fish trays etc. The harbor will be equipped with
latest technologies that assist the fishermen with satellite information about the natural
climatic location, identification of fish shoal and marketing network will be expanded
through the new sea port. The land of 1400 Acres proposed to be acquired in the
different villages are as follow:
Sr. No. Village Acres Guntas
1 Hilalmakki 288 36
2 Yemme Madi 126 26
3 Midla gazani 364 03
4 Hiregult 475 30
5 Morba 151 01
6 Torke 12 06
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.25
For the land is acquired from the farmer suitable compensation for the
Resettlement and Rehabilitation, will be paid according to the plan as per the
Government rule.
6.5.6.4 General Recommendations
Workers engaged during construction phase should be provided with
temporary housing facilities at planned labor colonies located preferably
nearer to project site
At the time of site clearance and construction, waste disposal management
plan should be implemented to mitigate the adverse impact on human
health.
Protection of workforce against dust emissions from construction and
transportation activities should be given in the form of nose caps and
masks, similarly workers doing the welding and painting job should be
provided with requisite safety equipment.
In built fire fighting to prevent emergencies developing into major threat
should be considered on top priority.
Fire siren/alarm should be provided
During transfer of the cast pre-molded blocks inbuilt safety circuits for
automatic shutdown will be provided and to maintain the limit level of
pressure or temperature parameters
Sufficient measures would be taken to ensure the workers from possible
casualties such as fallout of blocks, continuous exposure to thermal
radiations and emission from welding and VOCs from painting activities.
An operational manual would be prepared for instructions to the workers
depending on their levels and work categories.
In order to further improve the socio-economic environment, the authorities
should consider extending welfare measures to the local population under
the community development programme
Since there is a potential to accommodate operators/workers with different
trade expertise, local youths should be encouraged and supported for
training at the Industrial Training Institute (ITI), so that these locals having
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.26
minimum basic qualifications and aspiring for job opportunities can get
employment in the same region. This would reduce influx of migrating
population and stress on the existing infrastructure.
Provision of an adequate water distribution system including pier
installations for those connections to supply fresh water to ships.
Provision of adequate sewage collection, treatment and disposal systems
to serve the entire port complex including a shoreline interceptor for
receiving liquid wastes from all shoreline installations.
Special hose connections should be provided to allow ships to discharge
sewage, bilge wastes and other liquid wastes into the sewage collection
systems. Without these provisions, ships and onshore installations are
likely to discharge their wastewater directly into the port waters. Also,
provision should be made for removal of all floatable materials including oil
slicks.
Water supply and wastewater treatment system should be maintained
Regular monitoring should be carried out to identify adverse environmental
changes caused by pollution
Developing a plantation around the port, this is an effective method of
attenuation of waste residuals subsequent to pollution control measures.
6.6 Occupational Safety
The main safety hazards involve oily spills, splashes and fugitive emissions.
While handling iron ore and coal, proposed safety measures to prevent and reduce
accident among employees are:
Electrical equipment will be grounded and checked for defective
insulations
All elevated platforms, walkways, stairways and ramps would be equipped
with handrails, toe boards and non-slip surfaces
The maintenance personnel would be provided with special footwear,
masks and dust proof clothing
Keeping all walkways free from debris, cleaning up dust/plant spills and
excess water and regular inspection and maintenance would be done.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.27
Electricity supply system, and maintenance work would be carried out in
the presence of a supervisor.
The noise levels within the port development facility would be kept lower
than 90 dB(A). If possible, those working with the equipment would have
alternative in-house measures to reduce noise level below 75 dB(A).
6.6.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo
The organization structure would be well defined to ensure proper and
safe handling
Weather prediction updates from the IMD would be acquired daily during
the operation periods
The port limits should be clearly marked and the movement of other traffic
would be appropriately controlled during operations. The Department of
Fisheries needs to be notified for further information to local fishermen
Safe Operation Plans (SOP) should be prepared for every operation.
According to the SOP, a checklist should be prepared. These checklists
should be completed prior to any transfer operation. All operating crew
should be required to be familiar with such procedures. No procedure
should be by-passed to expedite unloading/loading of ships.
If barges are used, they should be double-hulled barges as per MARPOL
requirements, suitably designed for each chemical and approved by the
competent authority.
Pigging operations, flushing, washing, conditioning of pipelines, etc., will
be performed under the supervision of a qualified safety professional
Adequate security for the area should be provided to avoid risks due to
vandalism, theft, riots, etc. Efforts should be made to declare the area as a
"Prohibited Area"
Smoking at the operating areas viz., Port Area, tank farm, barge and ships
should be prohibited
All employees must wear cotton clothes. Synthetic clothing should not be
permitted. Shoes should not have nails or metallic components. But
should be provided with steel toe protection.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.28
All vehicles entering into operating areas where petroleum products/
chemicals are handled should be fitted with spark arrestors
No tools should be permitted at the location during the loading and
unloading operations. Spark proof type tools have been reported to be
ineffective.
All personnel should be trained and experienced. Annual training and
refresher training lessons/courses should be provided to re-emphasise the
need for safety procedures and handling of emergency releases.
Adequate caution boards should be prominently placed to highlight the
hazards of the Chemicals. Notices such as 'No Smoking', 'No naked lights',
'No entry to unauthorized Persons' should be placed at different locations
of the premises
The flexible hoses should be appropriately colour coded for easy
identification of products to be handled
All hoses, pipelines and fittings should be inspected and monitored during
operation by the safety officer of the port.
During slack periods, the pipelines, hoses and pipe corridors should be
inspected closely for evidence of leakage
Wireless communications between operating personnel should be
provided
First aid kits should be provided at all locations. For emergencies,
protective clothing such as neoprene gloves or boots, safety goggles, self
breathing apparatus, fire-fighting suits, safety shower and eye wash
fountain, combination units, canister gas masks for the different organic
vapour should be readily available at the location
Unauthorized persons would not be permitted in the premises under any
circumstances. Drugged or intoxicated persons will not be permitted to
enter the port premises.
No person with matches or lighters would be permitted in the area of
operation.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.29
No hot work, hammering, chipping etc., would be permitted without safety
work permit issued by the safety officer.
No flammable materials such cotton waste, canvass, bedding or similar
absorbent material would be permitted during operations or left near the
operating area.
Buoys marked as per international regulations will be positioned at the
appropriate places.
Restricted areas would be clearly marked. There would be a proper
environmental monitoring plan under the supervision of a designated
officer.
6.6.2 Safety Requirements for Port Area
Emergency Shut Down Valves (ESDV) would be provided along the
pipelines which are actuated under very low pressure (PSLL) downstream
of ESDV's
Manually Actuated Valves (MAV / SDV) would be provided for isolating
each hose in the event of emergency
Fire water hydrant and monitors would be provided in the jetty area. One
elevated fire water line with monitor would be provided to take care of fire
in the barge
Suitable fenders would be designed to prevent structural damage to the
barge/ship due to high approach velocity
The jetty would be equipped with appropriate public alarm systems,
hooters, sirens etc.
The jetty would have surface drains with required slope to drain and wash
spills. This drain should be lead into the collection pit on jetty and pumped
to the slop pit at the tank farm using a slop line
Every operation will take place only with hundred percent standby shore
personnel including shore operating officers, staff members, fire crew and
security personnel
Gas tests would be conducted using explosimeter ( use to measure the
amount of combustible gases present in a sample) periodically to ascertain
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.30
any leak
After every loading/unloading operations, equipment should be checked
and stored as per standard procedures
The control room should have blast proof glass
6.6.3 Fire-Fighting Requirements
The fire water system at the jetty end may be designed in accordance with
OISD guidelines-156 “Fire Protection Facilities for Port Oil Terminals”, to
meet the fire water flow requirements which is the single largest risk. The
facility may be classified as a high hazard ‘B’ type of occupancy
The fire-fighting system would be designed by a professional fire-fighting
consultant and frequently inspected. The system would consist of the
following basic components
Fire water system with surface type hydrants, landing valves with hose
pipes, hydrant nozzles and fog nozzles, Foam type fire extinguishers,
Portable foam tenders, Dry Powder, Carbon Dioxide
The organization structure for the fire-fighting crew would consist of
manager (Fire and Safety), fire officer, safety officer, safety inspectors,
pump-house supervisors, pump house operators, fire men and driver
The port facility must also have an arrangement with local fire-fighting
service for fire tender services. A direct line of contact for emergencies,
with the local fire-fighting service is essential. This should form a part of
Disaster Management Plan (DMP).
6.7 General Mitigation Measures Proposed
It is recognized that certain measures at a more generic level are applicable to
port and infrastructure projects. Accordingly, the developers should propose the following
additional measures:
The construction of the structures will be undertaken as per the plans
approved by the concerned local authorities/local administration, and will
conform to the provisions of the CRZ Notification and approved Coastal
Zone Management Plans of the Karnataka State.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.31
The relevant state/center guidelines for ensuring a safe environment at the
site will be followed
To tackle situations of disasters like cyclones/storm, the developers will
prepare an emergency plan and also the ways and means for minimizing
as well as mitigating (to the extent possible) the cyclone disasters
In order to carry out the post-project environmental monitoring, the
developers would provide an environmental laboratory to carry out the
testing of various environmental parameters
The project would incorporate eco-friendly waste etc., for compositing
purpose at site; manure is prepared in consultation with the local
municipal/village authorities and the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB).
The developers would use all the organic and kitchen waste etc., for
compositing purpose at site, in consultation with the local municipal/village
authorities and the State Pollution Control Board
In-built fire-fighting facilities is made to prevent emergencies threat to
consider on top priority in the terminal. It will be ensured that fire
siren/alarm are suitably allocated at site
During transfer of local to storage, inbuilt safety circuits for automatic
shutdown be provided
6.8 Cyclone Contingency Plan
There is a disaster management authority of Government of Karnataka working
at Tadadi. The port authority with cooperation of disaster management authority shall
resettle population from low laying areas to the safe building Tadadi Port. Authority has to
construct eight RCC framed buildings for cyclone shelters and for storage of food to
overcome the emergency situation. Tadadi Port Trust must have its own water treatment
and distribution system. In the event of failure of electricity this system will continue to
operate by generators. The measures shall be taken by Tadadi Port as under:
A team of officers to be nominated by port to supervise rescue and relief
operation and disposal of animal carcasses in coordination with the local
and district administration
Preventive measures for epidemics to be taken by the medical department
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.32
Water supply and electricity to be given priority. The electrical cabling
network to be checked area wise in the port township by the Tadadi Port
The Secretary Tadadi Port will remain overall incharge of the Cyclone
Coordination Centre
The Secretary Tadadi Port shall make a duty roster for the manning of the
Cyclone Coordination Centre by the officers of administrative, finance and
accounts, and material management department
The coordination centre will keep in constant touch with the local and
district administration for rendering necessary assistance
The Port Public Relations Officer will ensure announcement by the mike in
the township indicating the precautionary measures to be taken.
6.8.1 Cyclone Watch
Ships must keep a continuous watch on VHF channel
Ships at berth / mooring anchor must prepare for leaving berth/ mooring
and keep the main engines ready for use at short notice
Ships alongside may continue to load / discharge at the discretion of the
Harbour Master (HM) and maintain stability of the ship.
HM will prepare special signals and promulgate them to the masters of the
vessels, dredgers, tugs and any other crafts in the port. He will inform the
masters of all vessels at the berths to double the moorings, put out
insurance wires and to keep engine ready to proceed out to sea if situation
warrants. Decision regarding sending ships to the anchorage will be taken
depending on the strength of the wind likely to be encountered and
number of vessels in the port.
Any ships wishing to berth must first seek the approval of the HM, which
will only be given if the ship can safely enter, carry out cargo operation and
depart before the cyclonic conditions affect the port
6.8.2 Cyclone Warning
Force winds are expected to impact within 24 hours.
The Port is closed for arrival
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.33
Ships at anchorage will leave the port if required by the port authority
Ships at berth will cease cargo operation and keep the vessel ready to
vacate berth depending on the strength of wind.
Ships alongside will be unberthed as soon as possible, under the
instruction of Tadadi Port
Small craft inside the port will go to strong moorings as per the instruction
of HM
Ships at berth will be expected to have left by 12 hours before the
expected cyclone impact Tugs will be secured in the wet basin and
manned
The Port will be opened again by the port authority only after the cyclone
has passed the area and they are satisfied that it is safe to open the port
6.9 Post-Project Monitoring
In order to study the effectiveness of implemented measures suggested in
EMP, and to achieve the conditions stipulated in EC/NOC for prevention of environmental
degradation likely to occur due to proposed developmental activity, it is required to
monitor the environmental quality status during construction and operational phase of the
project. Thus, the project proponent has to form ‘Environmental Management Cell’,
operative right from construction of approach roads and site preparation and has to keep
it in full swing during operational phase of project. Air quality monitoring, recording of
meteorological data, noise level monitoring, performance evaluation of WTPs and STPs
and monitoring of surface water quality including sediments, biological environment
terrestrial and aquatic and sedimentation rate are the few activities to be initiated and
regularly monitored to submit six monthly report to the regulatory authorities. In this
regard, methods of monitoring and analysis are appended at Annexure V. Elaborative
Information of Methods of Sampling and Analysis can be gathered through reference
method and also used in the Environmental Quality Standard. Assessment of the
measures taken up to maintain biodiversity, preventive soil erosion, and restoring, social
harmony and enhancing of quality of life of the project may be carried out.
Since the Port Complex is fairly large and is highly environmental sensitive,
each department should have senior executives who shall report to their respective heads
of the department. The port complex will have an Environment Cell for the entire port and
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.34
units therein. The Environment cell should consists of environmental professionals with
experience in various aspects of Environment Management ranging from 7 years to 20
years. This Cell should be set up during the construction of the port itself and they should
have adequate expertise and competency in handling and implementing the Environment
Management systems and practices. The Environment Cell should monitor and measure
the environmental performance of each industry in terms of efficiency of pollution control
devices, and conduct regular energy and water audits. The cell should be regularly
coordinate with third party Environmental Audits. Members of the Environment Cell shall
participate in National Task Forces under CREP (Charter for Corporate Responsibility for
Environmental Protection) and in committees for reviewing National Standards for the
petroleum and petrochemical industry. The Port Environment Cell shall be an advisory
body on all environment related issues and support the Environment at the port.
Every industry within the port should in due time aim to be certified for ISO
14001 standards. The Environment cell in each industry should be responsible for
implementing and maintaining environment management systems. This industry should
co-ordinate with the Environmental Management Cell of port for establishing and
monitoring the compliance of ISO 14001. The Management Systems should be
established in compliance with the ISO 14001 standards which should be audited
internally by qualified internal auditors and externally by the certifying body as per the
stipulated frequency.
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.35
Fig. 6.1: Environmental Planning Process
Significant
Impact
Regulatory
Requirements
Environmental
Policy
Objectives
(Co comply with standards,
prevention of pollution and
continual improvements)
Viewer of
Interested Policy
Business
Consideration
Targets
(To reduce/Minimise
adverse impacts)
Environmental Management
Plans, Monitoring Programs,
corrective action and review
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.36
Fig. 6.2: Environmental Management Plan
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.37
Table 6.1
Plant Species for Greenbelt Development at Port
Sr. No.
Botanical Name (Family) Common / Local Name
Trees
1. Acacia ferruginea DC (Mimosaceae) Safed khair/Bannimara
2. Acacia nilotica (Mimosaceae) Indian Gum-Arabic/Karijauli
3. Ailanthus excelsa (Simaroubiaceae) Heaven/Hemaraheeramara
4. Albizia amara (Mimosaceae) Mar-Turgi Lalai
5. Albizia labbeck (Mimosaceae) Siris/Begamara
6. Albizia odoratissima(Mimosaceae) Black siris
7. Alstonia scholaris (Apocynaceae) Shaitan tree
8. Annogeissus latifolia (Combretaceae) Axlewood/Bejjalu
9. Artocarpus integrifolia (Moraceae) jack fruit/Halasu
10. Artocarpus lacucha (Moraceae) Monkey jack
11. Azadirachta indica# (Meliaceae) Neem/Bevinamara
12. Bauhinia malabarica (Fabaceae) -
13. Bauhinia racemosa (Caesalpiniaceae) Banne
14. Butea monosperma (Fabaceae) Flame of the forest/Mittuga
15. Caesalpinia pulcherrima (Caesalpiniaceae) White gold mohur/Kempukenjiga
16. Calophylum tomentosum -
17. Cane sp. (Palmae) -
18. Canna orientalis (Cannaceae) -
19. Cassia fistula# (Caesalpiniaceae) Golden Showers/Aragena
20. Cassia siamea# (Caesalpiniaceae) Iron Wood/Hiretangad
21. Casuarina equisetifolia# (Casurinaceae) Whistling pipe/Chabaku
22. Chlorophytum tuberosum (Liliaceae) -
23. Dalbergia sissoo (Fabaceaae) Shissu/Agaru
24. Dalbergia latifolia# (Fabaceaae) Black wood/Bite
25. Delonix regia# (Caesalpiniaceae) Gulmohar
26. Derris indica/Pongamia pinnata (Fabaceae) Honge
27. Erythrina indica Pangara
28. Eucalyptus globulus (Myrtaceae) Safeda
29. Ficus benghalensis (Moraceae ) Banyan/Ala
30. Ficus elastica (Moraceae ) Indian Rubber
31. Ficus glomerata (Moraceae ) Mal
32. Ficus hispida (Moraceae) -
33. Ficus religiosa# (Moraceae) Peepal tree/Arali
34. Garcinia indica (Gattiferae) Kokam
35. Gliricidia maculate (Fabaceae) -
36. Grevillea robusta (Proteaceae) Silky oak
37. Lagerstromia florsreginae (Lythraceae) -
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.38
Sr. No.
Botanical Name (Family) Common / Local Name
38. Lagerstromia parviflora (Lythracae) -
39. Leucaena leucocephala (Lythraceae) Subabul
40. Mallotus philippinesis (Euphorbiaceae) Kumkuma
41. Melia azedarach (Meliaceae) Persian lilac/Arebvu
42. Mimusops elengi (Sapotaceae) Bakuli
43. Peltoforum pteropcarpum# Copper pod
44. Petrocarpus marsupium (Legumineaceae) -
45. Petrocarpus santalinus (Legumineaceae) -
46. Polyalthia longifolia (Annonaceae) Putrajivi
47. Prosopis juliflora (Mimosaceae) -
48. Samanea saman (Mimosaceae) Rain tree
49. Sapindus trifoliatus (Sapindaceae) -
50. Spathodea campanulata (Bignoniaceae) Indian tulip
51. Swietenia mahagoni (Scrophulariaceae) -
52. Tabebuia rosea (Bignoniaceae) Tabebuia
53. Tamarindus indica (Caesalpiniaceae) Tamarind/Amli
54. Tectona grandis (Verbenaceae) Teak/Tega
55. Terminala alata (Combretaceae) Laurel/Sadada
56. Terminalia Arjuna (Combretaceae) Holemathi
57. Terminalia bellirica (Combretaceae) Shanthi
58. Terminalia catappa (Combretaceae) Indian Almond
59. Terminalia chebula (Combretaceae) Chebulic myroban
60. Verbena jamaicensis (Verbenaceae) -
61. Veteraia indica Saludupa
62. Zizyphus mauritiana (Rhamnaceae) Indian Jujube/Elanji
Shrubs
63. Abutilon indicum ( Malvaceae) Country mallow/Srimudrigida
64. Bougainvillea spectabilis (Nyctaginaceae) Bougainvillea
65. Calotropis gigantea (Asclepiadaceae) Gigantic swallow wort
66. Calotropis procera (Asclepiadaceae) Swallow wort
67. Clerodendrum viscosum (Verbenaceae) -
68. Dendrocalamus strictus (Poaceae) Solid Bamboo/Kiribidiru
69. Hibiscus- rosa sinensis (Malvaceae) Jasud
70. Hisbiscus cannabinus (Malvaceae) -
71. Ixora chinensis (Rubiaceae) -
72. Jatropha curcas (Euphorbiaceae) -
73. Jatropha gossypifolia (Euphorbiaceae) -
74. Lantana camara (Verbenaceae) Lantana/Natahugide
75. Lawsonia inermis (Lythraceae) Mehandi
76. Nerium Indicum# (Apocynaceae) Pink Oleander
77. Ricinus communis (Euphorbiaceae) Castor/Haralu
Chapter 6: Environmental Management
Plan
6.39
Sr. No.
Botanical Name (Family) Common / Local Name
78. Tabernaemontana divaricata ( Apocynaceae) -
79. Tecoma stans (Bignoniaceae) Koreneklar
80. Thevetia peruviana (Apocynaceae) Yellow oleaner/Kadukasi
81. Zizyphus oenoplia ( Rhamnaceae) Jackal jujube/Barige
Fruit Bearing Plants
82. Achras sapota/Manilkara zapota (Sapotaceae) Sapota/Chikoo
83. Anacardium occidentale (Aanacardiaceae) Cashew
84. Annona reticulata (Annonaceae) Bullock’s Heart/Raamaphala
85. Annona squamosa (Annonaceae) Custard apple/Seethaphala
86. Artocarpus heterophyllus (Moraceae) Jack fruit
87. Cocos nucifera (Arecaceae) Coconut
88. Emblica officinalis (Euphorbiaceae) Gooseberry/Amalaka
89. Mangifera indica (Anacardiaceae) Mango/Maavu
90. Moringa oleifera (Moringaceae) Drumstick/Nugge
91. Psidium guayava (Myrtaceae) Guava/Amrud
92. Syzygium cumini (Myrtaceae) Jamun
E : Evergreen; D : Deciduous;
# : Species suitable for roadside plantation
CChhaapptteerr 77
PPrroojjeecctt BBeenneeffiittss
7.1 Project Benefits
The Government of Karnataka has undertaken the development of the major
port called Tadadi situated in the estuary of the Aghanshini River. The backwaters of the
river Aghanashini has got vast water front at the existing port which is currently being
utilized for fishing activities alone. The government of Karnataka now sees a great
potential in developing this port with modern infrastructural facilities.
Support and development of ports and harbors contribute substantially to the
successful economic development of the community. Harbors and Ports reduce
dependence on air transportation and provide many economic benefits. Water based
transportation is the key component of many rural community economics. Good docks
and harbors are alternative to expensive air transportation and lessen transportation by
road.
The proposed project will generate direct and indirect employment
opportunities for the local people. The port will create employment for skilled as well as
semi-skilled workers directly or indirectly. Additionally, certain works like security will be
outsourced on contract basis. The secondary employment will also develop in the
neighbouring villages in the form of providing services to the employed manpower at
port/harbor.
Chapter 7: Project Benefits
7.2
Also, fishery and animal husbandry, which is already well established in the
project area will get a further boost as the demand of fish milk, meat etc. will increase due
to the influx of population related to the port activities. It will improve economic conditions
of the people and will enable them to improve their quality of life through improved animal
husbandry practices.
The port authority will also provide assistance in the development of the nearby
villages through the following:
Development of infrastructure facilities within the villages like roads,
transportation, telephones, post office, township, housing, water supply
electric power, drainage, and effluent treatment plants, improved waste
disposal system, improved environmental conditions
Setting up of primary school for the employees’ children which will also be
open for local village children
Arranging regular medical checkup camps for the employees. The facility
will also be extended to the village people
Supply of drinking water during scarcity to the nearby villages
Starting an Industrial Training Institute for the local youths will enable them
to get employment in various industries
Provision of bus service up to the nearest town for the employees and their
families. The facility will be extended to the local village population also
Promotion of fishing and related main activities like tourism, industrial,
commercial and cultural activities
Improvements in the physical infrastructure by way of ancillary industries
that may come up on account of project
Substantial enhancement in employment potential through skilled, semi
skilled and un skilled labor both during construction and operational
phases of the project with specific attention to employment opportunity to
local population. Necessary training shall be imparted to local people for
any specialized skill to the eligible for such employment in the project on a
long-term basis i.e. during operational and maintenance stages of the
project and other tangible benefits like improved standards of living, health,
education etc.
Chapter 7: Project Benefits
7.3
Revenue generation by way of royalties due to marine eco-development
Thus the proposed development of port shall help in alleviating the economic
status of the people of the region with better basic amenities leading to improvement in
quality of life of the people.
CChhaapptteerr 88
DDiissaasstteerr MMaannaaggeemmeenntt
PPllaann
8.1 Preamble
Disaster is an undesirable occurrence of events of very high magnitude that
adversely affects activities. Inspite of various preventive and precautionary measures
taken in works, the possibility of a mishap cannot be totally ruled out. An emergency
could be the result of malfunction or non-observance of operating instructions. It could, at
times, be the consequences of acts outside the control of residents / employees like
severe storm, flooding, or deliberate acts of arson or sabotage. Hence, the need to
prepare emergency plan for dealing with the incidences, which may still occur and are
likely to affect life and property in and around the port, has been identified in this plan.
During the past decade, there has been an increase in public awareness about
the actions to be taken in case of disaster like situation. It is essential to evolve a Disaster
Control / Management Plan to effectively make use of available resources. There are
many agencies viz. Civic and Government authorities, Fire Services, Civil Defence,
Medical, Police, Army, neighbouring industries, Voluntary organizations, etc which are
involved in an organized multidisciplinary approach to tackle the disaster.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.2
8.2 Objectives
Disaster is an unpleasant sudden event of such a magnitude which may cause
extensive damage to life or the property due to natural calamities like an earthquake,
flood, cyclones, landslides, lightening etc. In view of this, an approach to Disaster
Management Plan (DMP) has been delineated to tackle emergency at Tadadi Port and
nearby area. The purpose of DMP is to give an approach to detailed organizational
responsibilities, actions, reporting requirements and support resources available to
ensure effective and timely management of emergencies.
8.2.1 Purpose of Disaster Management Plan
Design contingency plan, taking into account the accident scenario and
natural disasters
Safeguard personnel to prevent injuries or loss of life by protecting them
from the hazard and evacuating from the site on short notice
Obtain early warning of emergency conditions so as to prevent impact on
personnel, assets and environment
Ensure safety of people, protect the environment and safeguard
commercial considerations
Ensure immediate response to emergency situation with effective
communication network and organized procedures
Provide guidance to help stakeholders to take appropriate action to
prevent accidents and to mitigate adverse effects of accidents that do
nevertheless occur
Minimize overall impact of the event at the port
8.2.2 Disaster Management Cycle
The Disaster Management Cycle (DMC) has a significant role to play. The four
stages of disaster management cycle have their own importance in terms of their
implementation during, after and before the occurrence of any disaster. The cycle has
been shown in Fig. 8.1.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.3
8.2.3 Different Phases of Disaster
Warning Phase
Emergencies /disasters are generally preceded by warnings during which
preventive measures may be initiated. For example, weather forecast gives warning
about formation of vapour cloud, cyclones, and equipment failure etc.
Period of Impact Phase
This is the phase when emergency /disaster actually strike and preventive
measures may hardly be taken. However, control measures to minimise the effects may
be taken through a well-planned and ready-to-act disaster management plan. The
duration may be from seconds to days.
Rescue Phase
This is the phase when impact is almost over and efforts are concentrated on
rescue and relief measures.
Relief Phase
In this phase, apart from organization and relief measures internally, depending
on severity of the disaster, external help can also be summoned to provide relief
measures (like evacuations to a safe place and providing medical help, food clothing
etc.). This phase will continue till normalcy is restored.
Rehabilitation Phase
This is the final and longest phase, during which measures required to put the
situation back to normal as far as possible are taken. Checking the systems, estimating
the damages, repair of equipments and putting them again into service are taken up.
Help from revenue/insurance authorities need to be obtained to assess the damage,
quantum of compensation to be paid etc.
8.3 Key Elements
Following are the key elements of Disaster Management Plan:
Basis of the plan
Accident/emergency response planning procedures
On-site Disaster Management Plan
Off-site Disaster Management Plan
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.4
8.3.1 Basis of the Plan
Identification and assessment of hazards is crucial for on-site emergency
planning and it is therefore necessary to identify what emergencies could arise at Port
infrastructure including various products / cargoes and their storage. Hazard analysis or
consequence analysis gives the following results.
8.3.2 Emergency Planning and Response Procedures
Emergency rarely occurs; therefore activities during emergencies require
coordination of higher order than for planned activities carried out according to fixed time
schedule or on a routine day-to-day basis. To effectively coordinate emergency response
activities, an organizational approach to planning is required. The important areas of
emergency planning are Organization and Responsibilities, Procedures, Communication,
Transport, Resource requirements and Control Centre. Offsite emergency requires
additional planning over and above those considered under onsite plans, which should be
properly integrated to ensure better coordination.
The emergency planning includes anticipatory action for emergency,
maintenance and streamlining of emergency preparedness and ability for sudden
mobilization of all forces to meet any calamity. Emergency is classified into the following
three levels.
Level 1: It is an Incident within the port and is of a minor nature with a low level of
personnel injury, interruption to work, damage level and loss of capability. The
Port Staff itself can handle it. The Emergency Management Group leader is the
Departmental Head. The examples of this level are Building/Shed Fire, Electrical
supply disruption, labour accident, vessel accidents etc.
Level 2: It is an Incident within the port area and is of a limited and moderate level of
personnel injury possible death(s), and interruption of work damage to port.
Besides Port resources, outside assistance may be required. The Disaster
Management Group leader is the Chairman of the port. The examples of this
level are Gas Leaks, Chemical/Oil Spills, Terminal Fires/ Explosions.
Level 3: It is a disaster of a severe and critical nature and could have a high level of
personnel injury (and deaths), interruption to work, damage to port and loss of
capability. It affects the port and possibly adjacent areas. Besides Port
resources, assistance from outside agencies is required. If incident is within the
port, Chairman of the port is the group leader. Information will be given to the
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.5
District Collector if the accident affects outside the port. The examples of this
level are massive Gas Leaks, Chemical/Oil Spills, Fires/ Explosions & Cyclones.
8.3.3 On-site Disaster Management Plan
Onsite Emergency/disaster is an unpleasant event of such magnitude which
may cause extensive damage to life and property due to emergencies resulting from
Natural Calamities like Flood, Cyclone and Earthquake; and deliberate and other acts of
man like Sabotage, Riot and War etc. An Onsite Disaster may occur all of a sudden or
preceded by a Major Fire. Purpose for the on-site Disaster Management Plan is:
To protect persons, property and equipments in case of all kinds of
accidents, emergencies and disasters
To inform people and surroundings about emergency if it is likely to
adversely affect them
To inform authorities including helping agencies (doctors, hospitals, fire,
police, transport etc.) in advance, and also at the time of actual happening
To identify, assess, foresee and work out various kinds of possible
hazards, their places, potential and damaging capacity and area in case of
above happenings. Review, revise, redesign, replace or reconstruct the
process, plant, vessels and control measures if so assessed.
The responsibilities and duties of the important officials are given below:
A) Fire and Safety Officer
To instruct all the security personnel to help in maintaining law and order
To ensure that systematic and proper efforts are launched to avoid chaos
or panic at site
To ensure smooth evacuation, if necessary
To close all gates except main gate, control traffic and allow only
authorized persons to enter the port
To arrange additional fire fighting aids from nearby factories and district
authorities
To cordon off the accident area
To direct external help to respective coordinators
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.6
To check or guide persons through media, through public Relations
Coordinator
To find out reasons for incident, after emergency, in co-ordination with Port
Coordinator
To ensure from Fire Officer whether all the in-plant fire fighting and safety
materials are adequate and arrange for reinforcement from other sources,
if required
To keep Chief Coordinator informed regarding status of fire, casualties,
loss of property, methods adopted to combat fire, etc
To arrange for additional fire fighting crew / equipment, if required
To inform Medical Coordinator regarding casualties, loss of life
B) Medical Coordinator
To inform hospitals regarding emergency at site and make them ready in
advance to handle casualties
To take charge of ambulances through Transport Coordinator, if required
To arrange for first aid for the injured and send them for hospitalization
To remain at site till emergency/disaster is contained.
C) Media Representatives
To assist in port evacuation in co-ordination with transport coordinator
To arrange for evacuation of neighbouring people, if warranted
To inform latest situation to Chief Coordinator and Communications
Coordinator
To receive media, government officials and consultants, and impart
information keeping the following in mind:
- Communicate directly to avoid distortion of information by others
- Impart factual information
- Only official spokesman imparts information
- Necessary facilities are made available to the media. Reasons for
restriction on media-men be duly explained to them
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.7
- Do not cover up incidences until the correct picture will finally
emerge
- Provide full information on safety measures to media for balanced
reporting
To inform insurance agency to assess damage
D) Communication Coordinator
To keep all communication equipment viz. telephone, fax, radio-telephone
(wireless), emergency mobile/cell phone with SMS and email facility etc.,
in working condition
To report to emergency site and take charge of communication equipment
To inform local authorities from whom the help be required viz. fire brigade,
hospitals, transporters, police station etc.
To act as liaison between different coordinators
To keep all communication lines free for use during emergency.
In order to handle disaster / emergency situations, an organizational chart
entrusting responsibility to various personnel of Port showing their specific roles should
be available as shown in Fig. 8.2 and conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency
Planning Process is shown in Fig 8.3.
8.3.3.1 Central Disaster Management Group
This group is formed to get better coordination between external organizations
and port authorities. Chairman or Dy. Chairman is the leader of the group with Dy.
Chairman, Secretary, FA & CAO, Chief Engineer, Traffic Manager, Materials Manager,
Chief Medical Officer, Commandant-CISF, and Commandant - Coast Guard as members.
Following are the basic functions of the group
1. Monitor and analyze reports from the onsite action team and identify the
area /population at risk
2. Activate the Response Plan and arrange the Alert siren
3. Support the Action Group with materials, equipment, information and
human resources
4. Implement changes in the current mode of action if deemed necessary
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.8
5. Adjust the Disaster classification of the incident and activate the Central
Control Room
6. Coordinate with external organizations, State Govt. as deemed necessary
7. Make the necessary arrangements and funds for evacuation transportation,
food and supplies
8. Make media statements
8.3.3.2 On-site Action Group
This group is formed to conduct search, rescue and evacuation operations.
Harbour Master /Senior Pilot is the leader of the group with Control room - Sr. Pilot, Dy.
Comdt. CISF (Fire), Executive Engineer, Dy. Chief Medical Officer, Addl. /Dy.TM, Dy.
Comdt.-CISF, Dy. Commandant - Coast Guard as members. Following are basic
functions of the group
1. Assess and classify Incident, nature-location-severity-casualties-resource
requirement -time to control.
2. Activate elements of the disaster management plan, arrange alert signal in
liaison with District Collector
3. Conduct search, rescue and evacuation operations. Provide Medical Aid
4. Manage incident operations and terminate plan, Arrange for re-entry and
restoration
Coordination between Central Disaster Management Group and On-site Action
Group is given in Fig. 8.4.
Initiation of Central Control Room
On Emergency Level II or III, Chairman of the Port would decide whether
members of the Central Disaster Management Team will operate from their respective
department control rooms and attend joint meetings at the Central Control Rooms at fixed
timings or when total central control room attendance is required. Whenever the Central
Disaster Management Team takes over responsibilities – the Onsite Action Group now
reports to the Central Control. Whenever the District Offsite Disaster Management Group
is initiated both Central Control and Onsite Action Group will continue to function under
the Port’s declared Emergency level.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.9
8.3.4 Offsite Disaster Management Plan
The off-site emergency plan is an integral part of any hazard control system. It
should be based on those accidents identified by the Port management, which could
affect people and the environment outside the port premises. Thus, the off-site plan
follows logically from the analysis that took place to provide the basis for the on-site plan,
and the two plans should therefore complement each other. The key feature of a good
off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its application to emergencies other than those
specifically included in the formation of the plan. The roles of the various parties that may
be involved in the implementation of an off-site plan are described. The responsibility for
the off-site plan will be likely to rest either with the site management or with the local
authority.
Either way, the plan must identify an emergency coordinating officer who would
take overall command of the off-site activities. As with the on-site plan, an emergency
control center will be required within which the emergency coordinating officer can
operate. An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to
people living “within range” of the accident – in particular whether they should be
evacuated or told to go indoors. Consideration of evacuation may include the following
factors:
In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage
tank), or fly rocks due to blasting only houses close to the fire are likely to
need evacuation, although a severe smoke hazard may require this to be
reviewed periodically.
But if the fire is escalating, it might be necessary to evacuate people
nearby, but only if there is time; if insufficient time exists, people should be
advised to stay indoors and shield them from the fire.
Aspects of an off-site Emergency Plan
Some of the aspects to be included in off-site emergency plan are as follows:
Organization
Details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,
emergency control centre, name and appointments of incident controller, site main
controller, their deputies and other key personnel.
Communications
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.10
Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network,
list of telephone numbers.
Special Emergency Equipment
Details of availability and location of heavy lifting gear, bulldozers, specified
fire-fighting equipment, fireboats etc.
Voluntary Organizations
Details of organizers, their addresses, person to be contacted, alternate
telephone numbers, resources, etc.
Chemical information
Details of the hazardous substances, if any, stored or processed on each site
and a summary of the risks associated with them.
Meteorological information
Arrangement for obtaining details of weather conditions prevailing at the time
and weather forecasts.
Humanitarian Arrangements
Transport, evacuation centres, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first
aid, ambulances, temporary mortuaries.
Public Information
Arrangements for
Dealing with the media-press office
Informing relatives, etc.
Assessment
Arrangements for
Collecting information on the causes of the emergency
Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the
emergency plan.
Role of the Emergency Coordinating Officer (ECO)
The various emergency services will be coordinated by an Emergency
Coordinating Officer (ECO) who is likely to be a senior police officer but, depending on
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.11
the circumstances, could be a senior fire officer. The ECO will liaise closely with the site
main controller. Depending on local arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or
prolonged off-site consequences, the external control may pass to a senior Local
Authority Administrator or even an Administrator appointed by the Central or State
Government.
Roles of major Hazard Works Managements
Where the local authority has the organization to formulate the plan, the role of
works managements in off-site emergency planning will be to establish liaison with those
preparing the plans and to provide information appropriate to such plans. This will include
a description of possible on-site accidents with potential far off-site harm, together with
their consequences and an indication of the relative likelihood of the accidents. Advice
should be provided by works managements to all the outside organizations which may
become involved in handling the emergency offsite and which will need previously to
have familiarized themselves with some of the technical aspects of the works
activities, e.g. emergency services, medical departments, etc.
Role of the Local Authority
Local Authority can appoint an Emergency Planning Officer (EPO) to carry out
all the duties as a part of the EPO’s roles in preparing for a whole range of different
emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO will need to liaise with the works to
obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. Rehearsals for off-site plans are
important for the same reasons as on-site plans and will need to be organized by the
EPO.
Role of the Police
The police normally assume the overall control of an emergency, with a senior
officer designated as Emergency Coordinating Officer. Formal duties of the police during
an emergency include protecting life and property and controlling traffic movements. The
functions include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public, identifying the dead and
dealing with casualties and informing relatives of dead or injured.
Role of the Fire Authorities
The control of a fire is normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade
officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller on
arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer may also have a similar responsibility for
other events, such as explosions and toxic releases. Fire authorities having major hazard
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.12
works in their area should have familiarized themselves with the location on-site of all
stores of flammable materials, water and foam supply points and fire-fighting
equipments.
Role of the Health Authorities
Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances have a
vital role to play following a major accident and form an integral part of any emergency
plan. For major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a
varying degree and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all, but extreme,
cases may be generally available in most hospitals.
8.4 Disaster Prevention Measures
In order to prevent disaster due to fire, explosion, electrocution and other
accidents following preventive measures shall be adopted.
Design, manufacture and construction of port and machineries building will
be as per national and international codes as applicable in specific cases
and laid down by statutory authorities.
Provision of adequate access way for movement of equipment and
personnel shall be kept.
Minimum two numbers of gates for escape during disaster shall be
provided.
System of fire hydrants comprising electrical motor division and diesel
engine driven fire pumps with electrical motor driven jokey pump for
keeping the fire hydrant system properly pressurized for all important
suspected places.
Site Emergency Control Room (SECR)
In order to control the disaster more effectively, a Site Emergency Control
Room (SECR) shall be established at the port site. The facilities proposed to be provided
are given in following sections:
Port Layout
Port Layout with inventories and locations of fuel oil/furnace oil or any
hazardous material.
Storage tanks
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.13
Hazard identification chart, maximum number of people working at a time,
assembly points etc.
Population around Port area
Internal and external telephone connections
Hotline connection to district collector, police control room, fire brigade,
hospital
Public address system
List of dispensaries and registered medical practitioners around port
Area map of surrounding villages
Note pads and ball pens to record message received and instructions
The blown up copy of Layout plan showing areas where accident has
occurred.
8.5 Action Plan for Natural Disasters
Following are the action plans for natural calamities viz. earthquake, floods,
cyclone and tsunami.
8.5.1 Earthquake
Earthquake Predictions
Local earthquakes are difficult to predict, Frequency of tremors as reported in the newspapers, TV and radio
Rattling of doors and windows on multi storied building
Falling of old and weak structures
Unusual barking of dogs and zoo animals-notably elephants
Characteristics of Earthquake
Magnitude
Focal depth
Location of quake center
Rupture orientation
Property Characteristics
Distance from focus
Soil conditions
Geology
Are buildings constructed to
Resist lateral forces
Bend rather than break
Resist sway
Are foundations in sandy soil
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.14
Relief Work after an Earthquake
Department Action
Chairman To contact the District Collector, Relief Commissioner, Army, Navy, Coast Guard
Dy. Chairman To assist the Chairman to assess relief requirements
Administration Secretary - To arrange for food, shelter and transportation.
And assist the Chairman and Dy. Chairman for all relief arrangements
Elec. & Mech. Dept. Electrical and Mechanical Engineers -To provide and hire if necessary, earthmoving equipments, cranes, forklifts, bull dozers, pneumatic hammers
Civil Eng Dept. Civil Engineer to deploy assistant engineers to direct or guide earth moving equipment and cranes to remove the debris
Traffic Traffic Manager to ensure safety of cargo in cargo sheds/tanks and at railway sidings
Marine Dy. Conservator to ensure the safety of Port Marine craft and vessels alongside
CISF Commandant CISF to organize Search and Rescue of persons trapped under debris.
CISF-Fire To assist in Search and Rescue operation.
Medical Chief Medical Officer to ensure and provide proper medical aid to the injured
If you are outdoors, find a clear spot away from buildings, trees, streetlights,
and power lines. Keep lying on the ground and stay there until the shaking stops. Injuries
can occur from falling trees, street lights and power lines, or building debris.
If you are in a vehicle, pull over to a clear location, stop and stay there with
your seatbelt fastened until the shaking has stopped. Trees, power lines, poles, street
signs, and other overhead items may fall during earthquakes. Stopping will help reduce
your risk. Once the shaking has stopped, proceed with caution. Avoid bridges or ramps
that might have been damaged by the quake. Stay inside the vehicle until the shaking
stops.
8.5.2 Floods/Cyclones
Dept Action
Marine Signal Station passes weather message to HM and DC
HM places on-site action group alert
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.15
DC apprises Chairman of weather developments who places orders to the Central Disaster Management Group
Management Group on alert, if necessary
Civil Engg. Drainage system of the port i.e. inside harbour area & out side harbour area should be cleared
Trailer mounted portable Diesel pump sets to be made standby with sufficient length of hose pipes
Sand bags to be used around sensitive areas including water supply pump stations, electric sub stations
Electrical & Mechanical Engg
All the outside installations and equipment shall be properly secured.
Cyclone field units to be made alert
Administration
To make standby arrangements for transportation to evacuate population in low lying areas to cyclone centres and relief centres & arrange food and water.
HM – Harbor Master; DC–Deputy Conservator
8.5.3 Tsunami
Characteristics:
Tsunamis are a series of enormous waves created by an underwater disturbance such as an earthquake, landslide, volcanic eruption, or meteorrite. A tsunami can move about 500 miles per hour in the open ocean. Once the wave approaches the shore, it builds in height. The topography of the coastline and the ocean floor will influence the size of the wave. There may be more than one wave and the succeeding one may be larger than the one before. Drowning is the most common cause of death associated with a tsunami. Tsunami waves and the receding water are very destructive to structures.
Warning/Confirmation
Meteorological Station
Coast Guards
TV and Radio News
Department Action
Marine Harbor Master through Signal Station informs all the ships to evacuate from the berth to open sea. Signal Station keeps in touch with all vessels on VHF and SATCOM
Crew of flotilla to move tugs and launches to safe areas or deep water anchorages
Crew to wear life jackets
Administration Dy. Secy. (G) to arrange transport to evacuate to safer inland areas
Traffic Dy.TM / Addl. Traffic Manager ensures stoppage of all
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.16
cargo operations of vessels.
Civil Engineering Department
Addl. CE to ensure sand bags is kept ready
Elec. & Mech. Department
Addl. Electrical Engineer / Mechanical Engineer to ensure proper security of the cargo handling equipment and the shore cranes.
Central Disaster Management Group
Chairman Activates Central Disaster Management Group (CDMG)
Marine Deputy Conservator to apprise the group leader of the Central Disaster Management Group of any developments and early warning Systems
Administration Secretary to keep in constant touch with state Govt.
Following additional measures may be considered in port disaster management
with respect to tsunami:
The port authorities should make arrangements with the Indian National
Centre for Ocean Information Services (INCOIS), Hyderabad for linking up
with their Early Warning System (EWS) for mitigation of Tsunami disaster.
The system has the following features:
Seismic net-worth near real time monitoring of the potential tsunami-genic
earthquakes.
Interconnected broadband seismic station for real time communication.
Bottom Pressure Recorder deployed in the deep ocean near Andaman
and Nicobar islands.
Tide gauges located in the coasts with key sensors to provide early
warning of tsunami.
Extensive mangrove plantation along the inter-tidal zone may be
undertaken to create a natural barrier along with awareness campaigns on
tsunami involving local administration and NGOs
Suitable steps on war-footing basis may be adopted to restore all the
essential services like, electricity, water and food supply, tele-
communication, transportation, etc. Proper steps should also ensure the
protection and safeguard of properties.
Tsunami monitoring and warning systems can allow sufficient lead time for
preventive measures to be taken to reduce exposure or vulnerability of
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.17
equipment. Emergency shutdown of processes that depend on pumps,
motors or materials located in areas close to the shoreline would reduce
the vulnerability that might be triggered by the tsunami.
Warning would also provide some time, if adequate emergency procedures
are established beforehand, to move materials and portable equipment out
of harm’s way to avoid water damage or water intrusion, or to secure any
objects, equipment, etc. that could become water logged and inflict debris
damage on other equipment.
A series of public awareness campaign can be launched around the port
area by various means including AIR, Doordarshan and other Media.
A network of local knowledge centers (rural/urban) should be developed to
provide necessary training and emergency communication during crisis
time
Information on tsunami hazards, evacuation routes and the actions to be
taken in case of emergency should be provided to surrounding population
by distributing pamphlets, organizing the awareness program etc.
8.6 Oil Spill Contingency Management Plan
Spills of oil to land require immediate response action to stop the source of the
discharge and to limit the spread of material. Immediate response actions and notification
procedures shall be developed. Attention must be paid to fire and safety hazards. For
terrestrial areas, selection of appropriate control and containment techniques, nature of
the substrate is dependent on the:
Slope of the terrain,
Amount of product, and
Time available to implement the response action.
The quantity and time parameters reflect the reality of constructing a barrier of
appropriate size in the time available. These factors can only be judged in the field at the
time of the incident. Should it be impossible to implement the desired method at a desired
location due to a lack of time or access, a new control point would be selected further
down the slope. If containment is still impossible and human safety is in question, the
threatened area would need to be evacuated.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.18
The spilling of oil in sea will degrade naturally but in the process may harm the
environment either by damaging amenities or by killing or injuring marine life. In an
attempt to mitigate the harmful effects of a marine oil spill it is therefore necessary to take
steps to remove oil from the sea or to accelerate the process of bio-degradation. Spills of
oil to land or sea require immediate response action to stop the source of the discharge
and to limit the spread of material. Immediate response actions and notification
procedures shall be developed. Attention must be paid to fire and safety hazards.
Marine oil spills are a problem, and invariably, a spill will create damage, the
magnitude and extent varying according to a number of factors, including, volume spilled,
location, and conditions prevailing at the time.
Spill response strategies would vary significantly attributed by the location of
the spill. Herein the spills have been envisaged in two areas as listed below:
On-Site Spills
Off-Site Spills
The various methodologies that can be adopted for spill control are described
below.
8.6.1 Response Strategies – On-Site Spills
In case of spills / leaks of hydrocarbons within the fence line of property, one of
the following techniques could be used for the control of spill.
Dikes, Berms or Retaining Walls
Dikes, berms and retaining walls are normally used in areas with the potential
for large spills, such as single or multiple above ground storage and processing tanks. To
evaluate the adequacy of a spill containment dike, the following criteria has to be
reviewed: capacity, material of construction and compatibility with tank contents, integrity,
and strength.
The slopes of earth dikes should not be steeper than 1 foot vertical to
1½ feet horizontal. On average, dikes are not to exceed an interior height of six feet.
A reinforced concrete retaining wall is used when space is not available for a
dike. Retaining walls are usually constructed of either reinforced concrete blocks or
reinforced poured concrete.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.19
Curbing
Curbs are a very effective means of secondary containment around drum
storage areas, product dispensing areas, bulk loading and unloading areas, and pump
equipment areas. Curbing can be used where only small spills are expected. Curbing can
also be used to direct spills to drains or catchment systems.
Culverts, Gutters or Other Drainage Systems
Secondary containment, such as dikes, is not always feasible; drainage
trenches, culverts, sewers, swales, or gutters that direct a spill to a retention pond or
catchment basin are acceptable alternatives. Drainage from undiked areas should, if
possible, flow into retention areas designed to retain spills or return the material to activity
properly.
Sorbents and Drip Pans
Sorbent materials, drip pans, and drainage mats are used to isolate and
contain small drips or leaks until the source of the leak is repaired. Material handling
equipment, such as valves and pumps often have small leaks where sorbents, drip pans,
or drainage mats can be used. Although sorbents are usually used to control small
isolated spills, they can also be used to contain and collect large-volume spills before
they reach a watercourse. Sorbents include clay, vermiculite, diatomaceous earth, and
man-made materials.
Drip pans are widely used to contain small leaks from product dispensing
containers (usually drums), uncoupling of hoses during bulk transfer operations, and for
pumps, valves, and fittings. Drip pans are typically 50 to 150 litres and may be plastic or
metal, depending upon the type of chemical handled. They may be single pans for
individual dispensing drums or gutter-type continuous pans built into multiple drum
dispensing racks. Drip pans must be checked regularly and emptied when necessary so
that overflow spill does not occur.
Drainage mats are sometimes used to prevent spilled product from entering
into an uncontrolled drainage or sanitary sewer system. The mat is placed over a storm
drain, sealing the drain against the entry of spilled material. Drainage mats are especially
applicable in areas where constructing a secondary containment or diversion structure is
impractical, such as a congested tanker truck unloading area. Drainage mats are typically
made of synthetic rubber materials and can be stored on site or carried on a fuel delivery
truck. The use of drainage mats is a low-cost solution for providing a degree of
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.20
containment; however, it is not as fail-safe as the other containment techniques, since it is
dependent upon the operator properly placing the mat.
Materials such as foams and gelling agents are commonly used to contain
small spills in areas where physical secondary containment is not available. Foams that
solidify to form a physical barrier or dike are highly effective forms of emergency
secondary containment.
Spill Diversion Ponds or Retention Ponds
Spill diversion or retention ponds should be constructed with an impervious
base using HDPE sheets or geo-membranes to prevent soil and / or groundwater
contamination. These ponds should not be constructed in areas prone to flooding.
8.6.2 Response Strategies – Off-Site Spills
The objective of surface containment is to prevent the spread of oil on the soil
or substrate surface and to prepare it for recovery or treatment. This usually can be
achieved using easily available materials (i.e., shovels, earth-moving machinery, trucks,
damming materials, sorbents, etc.) to construct berms, dams, barriers, and trenches to
divert and contain the flow. Containment and damming to pool the oil are important if the
oil is to be pumped and / or sucked up. Several techniques are also discussed to contain
and divert subsurface flow.
Strategies
Act quickly
Contain and control as near the source as possible
Protect resources in oil pathway
Prevent oil reaching streams, rivers, or groundwater
Use the natural features to contain and control flow whenever possible.
Strategies for Spill Fires - Ground Level
Operators should determine the source of leakage or spill immediately and
stop it, if possible. If it is a continuous leakage which can not be stopped,
the particular piece of equipment involved should be taken out of service,
depressurised and steamed, if necessary.
Blanket small fires with steam or dry powder but avoid scattering burning
materials.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.21
In case of large spill fire, direct high-pressure water fog into the source of
leakage. Protect surrounding structures with water spray. Maintain the
water flow unit the operators control the flow of fuel.
Apply foam to extinguish fires in oil pools or trenches.
Maintain adequate drainage of the fire area.
Avoid working above sewer drains or near firetraps.
8.7 Shoreline Response Operations
Most oil spills will reach the shorelines and cause visible oil pollution. When an
oil spill occurs on open water, the optimal solution is to intercept and recover the oil
before it reaches the shoreline. This is because:
The environmental damage is normally less critical in the open water
environment
The logistics of oil removal becomes more complex in the varied natural
environment of coastlines compared with the open sea.
The cost of oil recovery increases drastically when oil reaches sensitive
shorelines compared with open water operations.
Experience has shown that it is very difficult to avoid some oil reaching the
shorelines. Mechanical equipment and chemical treatment at sea are often insufficient to
recover all oil spilled at sea. When the oil reaches the shoreline, a number of different
parameters have to be taken into consideration:
Quantity of oil
Characteristics of the oil (for instance, toxicity, flammability and viscosity)
Prevailing on-site conditions (weather, season, tides, temperature)
Shoreline type or combination of types (cliffs, pebble, sand, marsh)
Site specific considerations.
8.7.1 Main Steps in Shoreline Clean-up Methods
The four main steps in a shoreline clean-up operation are
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.22
Step 1: Assessment
Determine the need to clean, setting priorities in line with this contingency
plan
Determine required degree of clean-up for each area in accordance with
priorities
Attain agreement between clean-up team, ecological experts, government
authorities
Step 2: Select Clean-up Method
Choose method appropriate to type of shoreline, access, degree of
spillage.
Minimize damage caused by choice of clean-up technique, degree of
clean-up
Address conflict of interest (e.g. needs of amenity use versus environment
or response speed versus aggressiveness)
Step 3: Clean-up Operations
Monitor clean-up, confirm choices made above, re-evaluate if necessary
Minimize disturbance of shoreline features
Minimize collection of un-oiled debris, sediments
Step 4: Termination / Monitoring
Ongoing assessment of clean-up operations
Determine when clean-up objectives have been met
Post-spill monitoring to confirm recovery of shoreline features, biota
8.7.2 Shoreline Clean-up Methods
The four main methods for shoreline clean-up are as follows:-
8.7.2.1 Pumping and Skimming Techniques
Applicable to shorelines that are heavily oiled. Often the first step is
cleaning a heavily contaminated shoreline
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.23
Preferred option because it results in fluid wastes that are relatively free of
sediments and debris, which are more easily dealt within disposal
Pumping and skimming techniques can also be used in conjunction with
flushing techniques
8.7.2.2 Flushing Techniques
Use water or steam to flush oil from the beach, and direct it to a recovery
location
Applicable to heavily contaminated beaches, and substrates that are
relatively impermeable (e.g., mud and saturated beaches, boulders, and
man-made structures) that will not allow the flushed oil to penetrate the
beach surface
Typically carried out in conjunction with a skimming operation. The flushed
oil is directed down-slope to skimmers positioned at the water's edge, with
booms deployed around the skimmers to prevent any loss of the water
Options of using low or high pressure water, and of using ambient
temperature water versus warm water or steam
Low pressure, cold water is generally the least effective, particularly with
sticky oils and emulsions, but is least harmful on the environment
High pressure water and heated water and steam are more effective, but
may remove and/or kill beach-dwelling organisms
8.7.2.3 Sediment Removal Techniques
Applicable to a variety of shoreline types, and in particular, when the
shoreline is heavily contaminated, though likely to cause the greatest
environmental impact
The requirements are access for the heavy equipment required for
transporting away oily debris and sediments for disposal and a surface
which is able to support heavy equipment
An important factor to consider is the depth of oil penetration
Important to limit the depth of material removed in order to minimise
disturbance to the beach, and to minimise disposal requirements
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.24
The best option is to use manual labour to pick up the oily sediment and
mechanical means to transport it away
8.7.2.4 Biodegradation Techniques
Generally refers to "active" bioremediation, where nutrients and/or
microorganisms are applied to enhance natural degradation
Generally suitable for areas that are lightly oiled, especially lightly oiled
salt marshes and tidal flats where the use of equipment could increase the
environmental effects by forcing oil into the substrate
It can also be used as a final clean-up step following more active efforts
8.8 Reporting Oil Spills
All Staff and Contractors must report any observation of oil or oil-like substance
on the sea or shoreline. Notification from the Public is very important. Upon receiving a
report of oil spillage, or oil on the sea, the Incident Controller will:
Verify the report
Ensure that no risk to human health and safety exists and take appropriate
actions if such a situation does exist.
Determine and record:
the name of vessel and master reporting the spill;
position of the vessel at time of observation;
Time of report.
Initiate the immediate response, if necessary
Ensure that appropriate steps have been taken to determine the source of
the spill;
Ensure that the fault, if any, is being rectified.
Preliminary Spill Assessment
The preliminary assessment of an oil spill is to be undertaken by the Incident
Controller or a trained nominee. The following parameters should be recorded.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.25
Volume
Estimates of spill volumes can often be made on the basis of the cause of the
spill and the duration the spill event. It is also possible to estimate the volume of a slick on
the basis of its appearance and area covered.
Oil Type
The type of oil spill should be recorded. It is important to differentiate between
spills of crude oils, bunkers or refined product. Spillages of refined volatile product
present distinct risks to human health and safety and the spill control
Wind Speed and Direction
Wind speed and direction at the time of a spill can assist in determining the
initial trajectory of the slick. The Duty Pilot should obtain wind speed and direction from
the anemometer at the Jetty or the Port control room.
Tides
Tidal currents are the main influence on oil movement within port limits. The
time of the spill should be noted, and current tide tables be consulted in order to
determine tidal direction and time of next change.
Waves
The direction wave height and period determine / influence movement of oil spills
in the offshore areas.
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.26
Fig. 8.1: Disaster Management Cycle
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.27
Disaster Management
Incident Command & ControlLevel III
Offsite Action
Central Disaster
Management Group
Onsite Action
Group
Level I, II & III
Legal Safety &
Environment
External LiaisonPublic Affairs &
Media
Planning Operations Logistics Finance
Safety of Life
Safety of
Environment
Safety of Port
Facility
Security
Documentation
Harbour
Port Infrastructure
Port Township
Evacuation
Communications &
Information
Man Power
Maintenance
Transportation
Equipment
Food/Shelter/
Medical Aid
Procurement of
Supplies
Funding
Administration
Accounts of Claims
Fig. 8.2 : Conceptual Plan Framework for Disaster Management
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.28
Fig. 8.3: Conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency Planning Process
Chapter 8: Disaster Management
Plan
8.29
Fig. 8.4: Onsite Port Disaster Management Organization
CChhaapptteerr 99
BBiivvaallvveess iinn
AAgghhaannaasshhiinnii EEssttuuaarryy
9.1 Introduction
India has a coastline of 7,516 km, adjoining the continental regions and the
offshore islands and a very wide range of coastal ecosystems such as estuaries, lagoons,
mangroves, backwaters, salt marsh, rocky coast, sand stretches and coral reefs, which
are unique biotic and abiotic properties and process (Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005).
Estuaries play a pivotal role in rural livelihood by providing valuable resources like fishes,
molluscs, crabs, prawns, shrimps, etc. and thus constitute an important socio-economic
entity. They are highly productive, dynamic and unique ecosystem providing food,
transport, recreation, etc. Mangroves, one of the unique ecosystems, high ranking in
productivity, are often associated with tropical and sub-tropical estuaries. These are semi-
enclosed coastal body of water, which has a free connection with the open sea, and
within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage
(Pritchard, 1967). The Karnataka coastal region, which extends between the Western
Ghats edge of the Karnataka Plateau in the east and the Arabian Sea in the West, covers
Uttara Kannada; The Uttara Kannada district located in central Western Ghats comprises
four estuaries namely Kali (Sadashivagad), Bedthi (Gangavali), Aghanashini (Tadri) and
Sharavathi (Gersoppa/Banaganga).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.2
The Western Ghats in India is one among the 34 biodiversity hotspots of the
world is a chain of mountains, stretching north-south along the western peninsular India
for about 1,600 km, harbours rich flora and fauna. Various forest types such as tropical
evergreen, semi-evergreen, moist and dry deciduous and high altitude sholas mingle with
natural and manmade grasslands, savannas and scrub, in addition to, agriculture,
plantation crops, tree monocultures, river valley projects, mining areas and many other
land-uses. Over 4,000 species of flowering plants (38% endemics), 330 butterflies (11%
endemics), 156 reptiles (62% endemics), 508 birds (4% endemics), 120 mammals (12%
endemics) 289 fishes (41% endemics) and 135 amphibians (75% endemics) (Daniels,
2003; Babu and Nayar, 2004; Dahanukar et al, 2004; Gururaja, 2004) are among the
known biodiversity of the Western Ghats. This rich biodiversity coupled with higher
endemism could be attributed to the humid tropical climate, topographical and geological
characteristics, and geographical isolation (Arabian Sea to the west and the semiarid
Deccan Plateau to the east). The four major rivers (Kali, Bedthi, Aghanashini and
Sharavathi) of Uttara Kannada district of Karnataka together account for 92 fish species
(Bhat, 2003).
9.2 Oysters
9.2.1 Occurrence
The oyster begins its life as free-floating plankton. In summer when water
temperature reaches its highest, sexually mature oysters release eggs and sperms into
the water column. A single female oyster can broadcast up to 30 million eggs in a single
season. An entire bed of oysters can produce trillions of eggs. The eggs and sperm mix in
the warm current and quickly develop into free swimming larvae. They join with the
hundreds of other immature marine organisms that together make up a vast pool of
zooplankton (very small animals). This pool of plankton is vital to the estuary, as only one
in a million larvae of any species will actually reach maturity. The rest become food for
each other and for more mature creatures. The entire food chain from the smallest crab to
largest game fish depends on this reproductive fecundity for survival. Together with
phytoplankton (very small plants) they become part of the very bottom of the food chain.
Oysters were found throughout most estuary systems. Oysters are vegetarians
and eat algae. As bivalve mollusks are sedentary and they feed by filtering water which
passes by them. A single adult oyster can filter 115 litres of water a day. The amount of
water filtered by a bed of 3 million oysters is enormous. By filter feeding on algae, oysters
keep the population of algae in check. This increases water clarity and allows light to
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.3
penetrate far deeper than without them. This in turn enhances the growth of other
submerged aquatic vegetation such as macro algae (seaweed) and eelgrass. This is vital
in estuary systems that have excessive nutrient loading. The smaller planktonic
vegetation that grow in the upper layer of the water column, quickly “bloom” on the rich
food. These populations explode and then crash, leaving vast amounts of plant matter to
sink and decay.
9.3 Molluscs
The name Mollusc (Mollusk) was derived from Latin mollus meaning soft. They
belong to the Phylum Mollusca. The first Mollusc appeared as far back as the Cambrian
period, approximately 500 million years ago. They are the second largest phylum among
the invertebrates comprising more than 100,000 species. In India, till today, 5070 species
of Mollusca have been recorded of which, 3370 species are from marine environment
(Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005), while rest from the freshwater and terrestrial
environment. They have been exploited worldwide for food, ornamentation and pearls
throughout human history. Geologic evidence from South Africa indicates that systematic
human exploitation of marine resources started about 70,000 to 60,000 years ago
(Volman, 1978).
In Molluscs, Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia), Gastropoda and
Cephalopoda are the only classes fished. The utilization of gastropods for food is very
limited, and a few important species occasionally collected for this purpose. In India,
Molluscs fishery comprises mainly bivalves such as clams, mussels and oysters. Except
for the chank and pearl-oyster beds, the most productive of which are concentrated on
the south eastern coast, the shell-fish resources of other commercial species of molluscs
are generally more plentiful on the West Coast (CSIR, 1962b).
9.4 Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia)
Bivalves are the second largest Class in the Phylum Mollusca. It has two shells
or valves join together with the help of teeth like structure called hinge and fibrous tissue -
ligament (Fig. 9.1). The shells are made up of calcium carbonate.
Most of the forms are completely sedentary remaining attached to hard substrata
(Fig. 9.2) by thread-like byssus of the foot or by one of their shell valves. A few forms
burrow into submerged timbers, and commensal and parasitic types are also known. Some
marine forms extend to a depth of 4.94 km. Life histories of bivalves pass through larval stages,
which undergo remarkable changes before attaining adult characteristics. Most commonly
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.4
utilized bivalves for food include clams (Veneridae), sea-mussels (Mytilidae) and edible oysters
(Ostreidae) (CSIR, 1962a).
Globally, commercial exploitation of bivalves for food is dominated by epifaunal taxa
such as ostreids, mytilids and pectinids. Annual harvests of bivalves for human consumption
represent about 5% by weight of the total world harvest of aquatic resources (Roberts,
1999). In India eight species of oysters, two species of mussels and 17 species of clams were
identified, but only six species of oysters, four species of giant clams, one species of window-
pane oyster are exploited extensively from marine regions. However, the Molluscan fishery is
not well organized along the Indian Coast. They are exploited in large quantities by traditional
methods and sold in live and dried conditions in the market for human consumption
(Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005; Chatterji, 2002). Rushikulya estuary, Orissa has 317
species of molluscs (Ghosh, 1992). 34 of 70 creeks of Maharashtra support clam fishery
(Mane, 1973) and clam fishery in Maharashtra is mainly dependent on M. meretrix,
Katelysia opima and Paphia laterisules (Ranade, 1964). Molluscs especially clams, are
abundant in Dakshina Kannada District, Karnataka and are harvested by traditional
methods during non monsoon period (James et al, 1975; Chatterji et al. 2002).
The CMFRI (Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute) estimate show
increasing trend with 4,583 t of bivalves (in 2006), compared to 905 t (in 1997). Total
molluscs collection in Karnataka shows similar trend with 16,225 t (in 2006) and 239 t in
1985 (http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html). Table 9.1 lists some edible species of
bivalves in India (CSIR, 1962a; CSIR, 1962b). The bivalves are rich in nutrients,
particularly proteins, fats and minerals (CSIR 1962a). The Indian edible bivalves have
protein (5-14%), fats (0.5-3%), calcium (0.04-1.84%), and phosphorus (0.1-0.2%) and
iron (1-29 mg/100 g of the fresh weight). Chemical composition of a few important edible
Indian Bivalves (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997) are given in
Table 9.2.
The role of small-scale fisheries and how they fit into the rural economy
remains poorly understood. Unlike large-scale industrial fisheries, they receive little
attention from policy-makers. Globally, this kind of informal small-scale fisheries and
fisheries-related activities (processing, trading, etc.) make an important contribution to the
nutrition, food security, sustainable livelihoods and poverty alleviation of many, especially
developing countries (Staples et al., 2004).
This study focuses on intertidal shellfishery, especially bivalve gathering - a
informal small-scale fishery in the Aghanashini River estuary situated towards the center
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.5
of South Indian West Coast, in the State of Karnataka. Bivalve gathering has been a
tradition among the inhabitants for centuries, and it is still being practiced. Harvesting is
done manually during low tides. The collectors may wade through shallow waters or use
small boats to collect in deeper water. The targeted bivalve speceis are Clams P.
malabarica, K. opima, Meretrix sp., and V. cyprinoides, Mussel P. viridis, and Oysters
Crassostrea sp. The harvesters sell the bivalves to traders who come to the collection
centres or sell to the local consumers by house to house sale or in the local markets.
Typically, harvesting is carried out in the 19 coastal villages by Harikanthra
and Ambiga fishing communities as well as by Halakkivokkals, Namdharis, and
Gramvokkals (basically farming communities). Both men and women are involved in the
harvest and about 2370 people were dependent on bivalve fisheries, for employment.
This study will provide an insight to policy and decision makers in understanding the role
of small-scale fishery and its sustainable livelihood value and enable them to conserve
such neglected, nevertheless ecologically and economically important, habitats for
posterity.
Clams are considered to be nutritious and delicious and are fished in
considerable quantities in some coastal places. Clams and other bivalves of their kind are
usually handpicked in shallow waters at low tides.
Indian waters have two species of large size mussels; they are the brown
mussel, Perna indica and the green mussel, Perna viridis Linn, belonging to Mytilidae
family usually grow over submerged rocks where they attach themselves by means of
their slimy thread like structures called byssus. The brown mussel, Perna sp., is restricted
in its distribution from south of Quilon to Cape Comorin on the West Coast and up to
Tirunelveli dist. on the East Coast. The green mussel, Perna viridis Linn, is abundant at
Cochin, Malabar and north of Kerala and distributed on both the coasts. In Bombay,
Ratnagiri and Karwar. It is reported to be rare.
The green mussel occurs not only in the coastal waters, but also in the
brackwaters. The bearded weaving mussel, Modiolus barbatus (Linn.), occurring in great
abundance in the Palk Bay and pearl bank region of the Gulf of Mannar, is also used
as food (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997). Oysters are inhabited
where brackish water is renewed by tidal flow and the substratum is suitable for their
attachment.
The backwater oyster, Crassostera madrasensis (Peterson), is commonly
found to be confined to the southern regions on the West Coast but widely distributed
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.6
in all estuaries and backwaters of the East Coast, the rock oyster, C. cucullata (Born),
from the intertidal rocky coast, of Bombay and Karwar, the Disc Oyster C. discoidea
(Gould), from the littoral zone of the coastal areas and C. gryphoides (Newton & Smith)
found in the muddy creeks, of Kutch, Dwarka, Bombay, Ratnagiri, Jaytapur, Karwar, etc.
on the West Coast, all belonging to the family Ostreidae of the class Bivalvia (CSIR,
1962a).
9.5 Economic Importance of Bivalves
Bivalves have been exploited worldwide for food, ornamentation and pearls
throughout human history. Economic importances of bivalves are:
i.) Fish bait: Molluscs like cuttlefish, squids, octopods and fingered chank shells
are used as efficient bait in fishing. Mussels, clams, and gastropods are also
often used as fish bait (CSIR, 1962a).
ii.) Medicinal uses: A number of species of Molluscan soft bodies and their shells
are used in the treatment of various diseases and preparation of medicines and
medicinal oils. Some of the medicinally useful species and their treatment in
different diseases are listed in the following Table 9.3 (CSIR, 1962a).
iii.) Ornaments and Jewellery: The Pearl Oysters and other molluscan shells
fished for decorative and ornamental purposes are of considerable
commercial importance in Madagascar, Western Australia, Philippines, Japan
and Ceylon. In India, pearl fisheries and chank fisheries have been exploited
from ancient times. Among bivalves, the shell of the Windowpane Oyster,
Placuna placenta, is used for glazing windows and verandah roofs. The
common freshwater mussel, Lamellidens marginalis, produces pearls of fair
quality in large numbers; they are collected and sold in South India. Pearls of
poor lustre are also reported from the Green Mussel, Perna viridis, from
Sonapur backwaters (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997).
iv.) Pearl fisheries: Pearls of high value are obtained from pearl-oysters of the
genus Pinctada Roding (class Bivalvia, family Pteriidae), of which several
species, viz. P. vulgaris (Schumacher), P. chemnitzi (Philippi), P. margaritifera
(Linn.), P. anomioides (Reeve), and P. atropurpurea (Bunker), occur in
Indian waters. Of these P. vulgaris is by far the commonest and the most
important and is widely distributed in the Gulf of Kutch, Gulf of Mannar and
the Palk Bay (CSIR, 1962b).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.7
v.) Shells: The calcium rich bivalve shells are mainly used for lime making and
poultry feeds. The lime is used for white-washing and for chewing with betel
pan. Lime is used for neutralizing acidic agricultural soils (CSIR, 1962a).
vi.) Lime Manufacture: The production of lime from molluscan shells
(Fig. 9.3 (a) and Fig. 9.3 (b) is an important industry in the coastal areas of
India. Shells of various species of gastropod and more especially
bivalves are gathered in large quantities from the estuaries and
backwaters. Lime produced by burning molluscan shells is of superior
quality for use in masonry construction and white washing. It is used also as
a fertilizer, prawn feed and poultry feed. The shells are directly used for the
production of high grade cement (CSIR, 1962a).The commonly used
bivalve species for lime manufacture in the Aghanashini estuarine region
are the Paphia malabarica, Meretrix meretrix, M. casta, Katelysia opima and
Vellorita cyprinoids. The death shells of these bivalves are mixed with
charcoal or outer shell of coconut then the mixture is burnt in to powder.
Burning process may continue for one to two hours depending upon the
amount of material kept for the lime making process.
vii.) Miscellaneous: The shells, of the Placuna Bruguiere, Spirula Lam., and of
cockles (Chiefly Cardiidae), are used in the manufacture of toothpastes. The
shells are collected in Tuticorin and sent to Calcutta and Madras for this
purpose (CSIR, 1962a).
9.5.1 Harmful molluscs
Marine borers belonging to the families Pholadidae and Teredinidae of
Bivalves cause substantial damage to underwater wooden construction, wooden sailing
craft and floating timber, particularly in the tropics. The sea fishing industry which depends
mainly on wooden catamarans and boats is reported to suffer an annual loss of about a
crore of rupees as a result of borer damage.
Martesia striata (Linn.) is a common burrowing pholad mollusc can bore into
floating wood up to a depth of 17 m. in the sea. Several species of teredinids of shipworms
belonging to the genera Teredo Linn, and Bankia Gray are particularly destructive. A few
important among them are: Teredo manni (Wright), T. diedrichseni Roch, Bankia carinata
Leach and B. companuellata Moll. Some species of the genus Teredo burrow in the wood
when it is tiny and continue to live in the burrow. Some species would attain a length of
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.8
1 m or more, with a diameter of 6.3 mm (CSIR, 1962a).
9.6 Morphology of Bivalves
Fig. 9.4 illustrates the typical morphology of bivalves. Some of the general
features are:
SHELL: The bivalve shell acts as a skeleton to protect against predators,
and in burrowing species. It helps to keep mud and sand out of the mantle
cavity. Its main component is calcium carbonate and is formed by the
deposition of crystals of this salt in an organic matrix of the protein,
conchiolin. Calcium for shell growth is obtained from the diet, or taken up
from seawater. The colour, shape and markings on the shell vary
considerably between the different groups of bivalves (Gosling, 2003).
Shell Formation: The shell is secreted by the mantle. The calcium ions
excreted from the blood mix with the fluid present in the mantle cavity,
forming calcium carbonate. The calcium carbonate is absorbed by
"conchiolin", a secretion of the mantle. The conchiolin crystallises into
various forms, of which calcite and argonite forms are utilised in shell
formation (Apte, 1998).
MAITLE : In bivalves the mantle consists of two lobes of tissue which
completely enclose the animal within the shell. Between the mantle and the
internal organs is a capacious mantle cavity. Cilia on the inner surface of
the mantle play an important role in directing particles onto the gills and in
deflecting heavier material along rejection tracts towards the inhalant
opening (Gosling, 2003).
GILLS: The lamellibranch gills, or ctenidia, are two large, curtain-like
structures that are suspended from the ctenidial axis that is fused along the
dorsal margin of the mantle. Generally, the gills follow the curvature of the
shell margin with the maximum possible surface exposed to the
inhalant water flow. Cilia on the gill filaments have specific arrangements
and functions. They are responsible for drawing water into the mantle cavity
and passing it through the gill filaments, and then upwards to the exhalant
chamber and onwards to the exhalant opening. In bivalves the gills have a
respiratory as well as a feeding role. Their large surface area and rich
haemolymph supply make them well suited for gas exchange (Gosling, 2003).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.9
STOMACH: The mouth is ciliated and leads into a narrow ciliated
oesophagus. Ciliary movement helps to propel material towards the stomach.
Indeed, this method of moving material is found throughout the length of the
alimentary canal, primarily because it lacks a muscular wall. The stomach is
large and ovalshaped and lies completely embedded in the digestive gland,
which opens into it by several ducts (Gosling, 2003).The digestive gland,
which is brown or black and consists of blind-ending tubules that connect to
the stomach by several ciliated ducts, is the major site of intracellular
digestion. Within these ducts there is a continuous two-way flow: Materials
enter the gland for intracellular digestion and absorption and wastes leave en
route to the stomach and intestine. Rejected particles from the stomach as
well as waste material from the digestive gland pass into the long coiled
intestine. The waste is formed into faecal pellets that are voided through the
anus and are swept away through the exhalant opening (Gosling, 2003).
FOOT: The primitive mollusc had a broad ciliated flat foot, well supplied with
mucous gland cells, and the animal is believed to have moved over the
lubricated substrate in a gliding motion, using a combination of ciliary action
and muscular contractions. In the evolution of bivalves the body became
laterally compressed. Consequently, the foot lost its flat creeping sole and
became blade-like and directed in an anterior direction as an adaptation for
burrowing. Bivalves use the foot for locomotion and burrow in to substrate
(Gosling, 2003).
GOIADS: The reproductive system in bivalves is exceedingly simple. The
gonads are paired and each gonad is little more than a system of branching
tubules, and gametes are budded off the epithelial lining of these tubules. The
tubules unite to form ducts that lead into larger ducts and eventually terminate
in a short gonoduct (ibid). In primitive bivalves, e.g. the nut shell, / ucula, the
gonoducts open into the kidneys, and eggs and sperm exit through the kidney
opening (nephridiopore) into the mantle cavity. In most bivalves the
gonoducts open through independent pores into the mantle cavity, close to the
nephridiopore. With the exception of oysters (Ostrea sp.), fertilisation is
external and the gametes are shed through the exhalant opening (Gosling,
2003).
HEART: The heart lies in the mid-dorsal region of the body, close to the
hinge line of the shell. It lies in a space called the pericardium, which
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.10
surrounds the heart dorsally and a portion of the intestine ventrally. The heart
consists of a single, muscular ventricle and two thin-walled auricles. The
circulatory system is an open system with the haemolymph in the sinuses
bathing the tissues directly. From the sinuses the haemolymph is carried to
the kidneys for purification (Gosling, 2003).
EXCRETORY ORGANS: There are two types of excretory organs in
bivalves, the pericardial glands and the paired kidneys (in Mytilus U-shaped).
The brown-coloured pericardial glands, sometimes referred to as Keber's
organs, develop from the epithelial lining of the pericardium and come to lie
over the auricular walls of the heart. Waste accumulates in certain cells of the
pericardial glands and this is periodically discharged into the pericardial
cavity and from there it is eliminated via the kidneys (Gosling, 2003).
NERVES: The nervous system of bivalves is fundamentally simple. It is
bilaterally symmetrical and consists of three pairs of ganglia and several pairs
of nerves. The cerebral ganglia innervate the palps, anterior adductor muscle,
and part of the mantle, as well as the statotocysts and osphradia. The pedal
ganglia control the foot. The visceral ganglia control a large area: gills, heart,
pericardium, kidney, digestive tract, gonad, posterior adductor muscle, part or
the entire mantle, siphons and pallial sense organs (Gosling, 2003).
9.7 Economic Valuation
Economic valuation is a tool to aid and improve use and management of
natural resources by providing a means for measuring and comparing the various benefits
of resources. The resources are quantified based on the goods and services made
possible by ecosystem's functions. The economic worth of goods or services,
generally measured in terms of what individuals are willing to pay for. The value of
the benefit is determined by its price, i.e., the amount of money for which it will be
exchanged. The value of a benefit is the price of that product in the open market and
the worth of that benefit to a potential buyer. This is measured in economic terms as
willingness to pay. In other words, the economic value of the ecosystem
services/commodity is measured by people's willingness to pay (WTP) for those
benefit (http://wgbis.ces.iisc.ernet.in/energy/water/paper/ecodoc2004.htm).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.11
Economic valuation is an effective method to understand the significance of
ecosystem goods or services provided by nature. The strength of the economic
valuation methods is that, their concept of value incorporates the relationship between
humankind and ecosystem products (Winkler, 2006).
9.8 Objective
The study will provide a basis to the planners to have a re-look at the estuary.
These ecosystems have been under constant threat due to lack of knowledge of the
benefits derived from these ecosystems and a more importantly lack of holistic approaches
in the implementation of developmental projects. Locating major projects in an ecologically
sensitive regions rather demonstrates lack of understanding of ecosystem functioning and
also services and goods on the part of regional decision makers.
Objectives of this endeavour were: i) to document the diversity of bivalves and
ii) to describe the benefits derived from them by harvesters and others who are
associated with processing and trade. This involved:
Inventorisation and mapping of the edible bivalve species of Aghanashini
estuary
Estimation of the number of people associated with bivalve collection and
trade
Methods and techniques of bivalve harvesting and
Quantification of benefits derived from bivalves: economic valuation of
bivalves
9.9 Materials and Methods
9.9.1 Study Area
The Aghanashini or Tadri River (total length 121 km) originates in the Sirsi
taluk of Uttara Kannada district in the central Western Ghats of Karnataka State. Winding
its way through deep gorges and valleys the river meets the tides of the Arabian Sea and
forms a large estuarine expanse (13 km long and 2 to 6 km wide) in the coastal taluk of
Kumta. The estuary has its outlet into the sea in between the villages of Aghanashini
in the south and Tadri in the north. The study area lies between the Lat. 14.391° to
14.585° N and Long. 74.304° to 74.516° E. Situated in the estuarine complex of the
river are about 25 villages of which people from 19 villages traditionally are associated
with bivalve harvesting (Fig. 9.5).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.12
9.9.2 Methods
The survey (both household and field) was undertaken during June 2006 to
March 2007. Diversity and distribution of edible bivalve species, was documented by field
observations. Bivalve harvesting villages were identified by interviewing people living
closer to Aghanashini estuary. In the bivalve collecting villages, household surveys were
undertaken using questionnaires. Within the identified villages we located the hamlets of
communities which have bivalve collection as major activity. The local gram panchayath
also guided us regarding bivalve collecting families. About 10% of these households of
the bivalve collecting families were surveyed primarily to estimate:
i.) Number of individuals involved in bivalve harvesting
ii.) Number of bivalve harvesting months and
iii.) Number of bivalve harvesting days per month.
In addition to these, 5% of the bivalve collecting community households in
each village was subjected to another level of survey to elicit the following information:
i.) Quantity of bivalve collection per person per day
ii.) Valuation of bivalves collected and
iii.) Expenditure incurred in collection (including local transport and
processing).
We also estimated the additional income generated from the sale of bivalve
shells as well as from dried bivalve meat, which constitute smaller components of the
economy. There is also a shell mining industry in operation which mines for deposits of
empty shells from another part of the estuary where live bivalves are not normally
available. This industry also procures from bivalve collectors, a small quantity of empty
shells incidentally gathered or disposed off after removing the meat. Employment
generated from this activity is also estimated.
9.10 Results
Fig. 9.6 gives the spatial distribution of clams, mussel and oysters in the
Aghanashini estuary. Clam P. malabarica inhabits deeper water whereas species like K.
opima, M. meretrix and M. casta are associated with the mud flats of the estuary. The
estuarine as well as fresh water bivalve species V. cyprinoides inhabits farthest part of
estuary with lower salinity in the moderately deep water region. One specimen of blood
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.13
clam Area granosa was encountered near Aghanashini village. Mussel (P. viridis)
occupies deep water rocky surface of the river mouth region, while two species of oysters
(Crassostrea sp.) occupied littoral zone of the estuary region which is often referred as
oyster bed (Fig. 9.7).
9.10.1 Distribution of Bivalves
The bivalve harvesters of Aghanashini estuary normally collect eight species of
edible bivalves. However, yet another edible species, Area granosa known as blood clam,
is rare and not of significance to the collectors. The edible bivalves are popularly
categorised as clams, mussels and oysters. Table 9.4 provides species-wise habitat and
distribution and use of these bivalves in Aghanashini estuary and also elsewhere in India.
Spatial distribution of these bivalves is given in Fig. 9. 6. Harvested bivalve species, except V.
cyprinoides are found within a distance of 4 km from the river mouth. In this part of the
estuary the summer (in April) salinity at high tide, as estimated by Bhat (2003) is almost
closer to the sea water at 32-34 ppt. Of the bivalves here the green mussel P. viridis Fig.
9.8 (a), grows on steep rocky substratum towards the river mouth in the sub-tidal zone in
close proximity to the sea. Two oyster species of Crassostrea Fig. 9.8 (b) occupy inter-tidal
zone on mud-flats mixed with sand and shell fragments. P. malabarica Figure 9.8 (c)
inhabits deeper water with sandy substratum normally not exposed during low tides. K. opima
Fig. 9.8 (d), M meretrix Fig. 9.8 (e) and M casta Fig. 9.8 (f) are associated with mud-flats of
this zone. A. granosa Fig. 9.8 (g) also occurs here. K. opima has its distribution zone
extending up to Paduvani (7 km away) where summer (in April) salinity is 31-32 ppt. The clam
V. cyprinoides Fig. 9.8 (h) inhabits the farthest part of the estuary that is 10 km away from the
river mouth (salinity 26-34 ppt; Bhat 2003)) and beyond into the freshwater zone more than 18
km away.
9.10.2 Bivalve Harvesting and Trade
Both men and women are engaged in harvesting of bivalves Fig. 9.9 (a) and
Fig. 9.9 (b), except P. viridis which only men harvest. Women normally avoid dangerously
deep waters and rocky substratum towards the interface of the sea, which is the preferred
habitat of P. viridis. Harvesting is done by hand, feet or with the aid of a small hand-held
digging stick. The collectors work for three to four hours per day during the low tides.
Bivalves are collected in cone shaped nets, baskets, plastic boxes, cement bags, etc. Small
non-mechanised crafts are normally used for collection from deeper waters and for transport
of bivalves from the collection site to the villages. The boats may be steered by men or
women. Harvesting methods, for various bivalves are briefly discussed below.
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.14
Clams: P. malabarica is most common in Aghanashini estuary followed by K.
opima, M. meretrix, M. casta and V. cyprinoides. Searching for P. malabarica
is done in shallow water by using hands or feet. K. opima, M. meretrix, M.
casta, associated with mud-flats are picked by hand or dug out using sticks,
mostly by women. V. cyprinoides is collected from shallow water, through
direct searching using hands or feet mostly by women.
Mussels: P. viridis, the only edible mussel of Aghanashini is usually found
attached to the steep sub-tidal rocky parts of the river mouth. The species
adheres to the substratum by thread like structures called byssus and is
manually picked by men.
Oysters: Crassostrea sp. form beds on the mud-flats and also attach to the
inter-tidal rocks. Usually women extract the meat by opening the oyster shell
using a knife. However it was observed from the information of fishermen that
at present there are no oysters observed within 25 Km from the coast. In high
seas oyster available in that area.
9.10.3 Processing
Dead bivalves and empty shells are removed from the collection Fig. 9.10
before marketing. These empty shells are used for making lime and poultry feed. Small
quantities of bivalves, especially P. malabarica, are boiled for couple of hours along with
shells and then meat is removed and sundried for preservation and subsequent usage.
An estimated 2,347 individuals from 1,202 households are associated with
bivalve harvesting; of these 1,738 are men and 609 are women, who belong to 19
estuarine villages, 1,202 families. The majority who harvest bivalves for trade belong to
local fishing communities such as Harikanthras and Ambigas. Halakkivokkals, Namdharis,
and Gramvokkals, who are traditionally agriculturists, also gather bivalves mostly for
domestic consumption and sometimes for trade. Bulk of the harvesters are from
Aghanashini village (35.15%) followed by Divgi (18.75%), Gokarn (9.67%), Torke (7.84%)
and Mirjan (7.63%). Aghanashini closer to the river mouth has a substantial production of
bivalves and also accounts for the largest number of harvesters (825).
Total number of bivalve collecting days in a year is 140 for male and 147 for
females. Hence, bivalve harvest in the estuary alone generates 332,843 days of human
employment per year. Bulk of the employment for men is through the collection of P.
malabarica, which is found in deeper parts of the estuary (water depth >lm at lowtide).
However, collecting P. viridis from steep and rocky parts of the river mouth being a riskier
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.15
task only a small number of men (2.11% of men collectors) venture to do it. V. cyprinoides
is collected from shallow waters by both men and women. Collection of the K. opima, M.
meretrix, M. casta and Crassostrea sp. from the mudflats is mostly woman's domain.
Village and season-wise estimated quantity of bivalves harvested per day is
listed in Table 9.7. The quantity of bivalves harvested per day is 11.17% more during
November to May. Aghanashini and Divgi village people alone contribute 67% of the
bivalve harvested per day.
Village, season and gender-wise average quantity of bivalves harvested is
given in Table 9.8 (a) and 9.8 (b). The post monsoon period of November to May is more
congenial for bivalve harvesting. Women collect bivalves from shallow regions and
mudflats compared to men who harvest from deeper regions. Bivalves are abundant in
deeper parts of estuary compared to shallow regions and mudflats. The average quantity
harvested is 65±24.78 kg/individual/day for men and 22±13.46 kg/day/individual for women.
Spot purchases of bivalves harvested are made by traders Fig. 9.11 (a) who
transport them to nearby towns and even to neighbouring states, especially to Goa. The
local marketing is usually carried out by the women of fishing communities, who make
household sales in Kumta town and nearby villages. Some female also carry the bivalves to
the local fish markets Fig. 9.11 (b). The harvesters also use small part of the collection for
domestic use. Bivalve harvested in this estuary is estimated at 22,006 t/yr, which generates
a total primary annual net income of about Rs. 57.8 million (Rs. 57,018,710 from bivalve
collection and Rs. 816,267 from supplementary products like empty shells and dried meat).
Aghanashini village, which accounts for the highest production of bivalves alone earns
about Rs. 33 million (58% of total income). More details about village, season and gender-wise
income per year is given in Table 9.9. The average income for the male was Rs. 29,129 from
140 collection days for the study year 2006-07, whereas it was Rs. 10,497 for the female
from 147 collection days. Some quantity of bivalves collected is used for the production of
dried meat, which earns marginally more profit than sale of fresh bivalves. The estimated
annual income from the sale of empty shells is Rs. 483,850 (Table 9.10) and from dried
bivalve meat is Rs. 334,983 (Table 9.11).
9.10.4 Shell Mining
Parts of the estuary are leased out for the mining of empty shells, which are
used by various industries for the production of poultry-feed, lime, fertilizers, etc. The
annual production of shells is around 80, 000 to 100,000 t and the market price ranges
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.16
from Rs. 750 to 950/t. About 600 persons (only men, especially those operating native
boats) are engaged in shell mining Fig. 9.12 (a) in addition to transporters - about 200
persons Fig. 9.12 (b). As shell mining depends largely on the deposits of dead shells, in
the long run it is not going to be sustainable. Sustainable harvest has to be limited to
procurement of shells of live bivalves and annual deposits of dead shells of unexploited
bivalves which needs further investigation. The gross annual value of the shells is about
Rs. 76.5 million.
9.10.5 Dried Meat
Clams are used in the drying process. In general, locally collected sticks,
woods or purchased wood is used for boiling the vessel containing bivalves and freshwater.
The boiling process may take about half to one and half hour or more depending on the
quantity involved in the boiling process. Then their shells are removed and flesh sun-dried
for two days. The dried bivalves Fig. 9.13 can be kept for years for human consumption. The
cost of one kolaga (approximately 1 to 1.25 kg) of dried bivalves will be Rs. 80 to 200
depending on the season and demand.
9.10.6 Valuation of estuary based only on bivalve production
The annual harvest of bivalves in Aghanashini estuary is estimated to be
22,006 t (edible portion Fig. 9.14 about 9% of fresh weight). On an average an individual
consumes 50 g of meat for about 200 days a year. Therefore the bivalves of this estuary
alone contribute substantially towards protein and mineral rich nutrition of about 198,000
people of the West Coast.
About 186 ha of the estuary, estimated to be used for bivalve harvesting
Fig. 9.15. Therefore the average annual income per year for every hectare of bivalve
harvesting area can be put at Rs. 306,552. It is an amazing yield/ha compared to any other
natural ecosystem or agricultural systems, and that too this yield is without input of any kind
into the system by humans. Majority of the 105 harvesters whom we interviewed opined that
over the years, despite the harvests, there has been hardly any change in the availability of
bivalves. However, a small number of harvesters expressed that there has been a
declining trend in recent years. It is learnt that during 2007 - 08 period over harvesting due
to rising demand from Goa has created local scarcity and spiraling of bivalve prices.
Shell mining is done in an area of 100 ha per year out of a total lease area of
809.37 ha (20 years lease period). The shells mined at prevailing market prices are worth
Rs. 765,000/ha/yr. Hence, the total value of the estuary based on live bivalve and shell
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.17
production is worth Rs. 1,071,552/ha/yr. This demonstrates the high productive potential of
the estuary compared to any other economic sectors.
This valuation does not include other goods that the estuary provides such as
production of shrimps, fish, crabs, salt, mangroves, etc. in addition to services such as fish
spawning grounds, nutrient cycling, hydrology, flood control, soil protection, sink for carbon,
etc. Estuaries are ranked among the highest productive natural ecosystems of the world.
Based on all goods and services that estuaries provide Costanza et al. (1997)
estimated the value of an estuary as USD 22,832/ha/yr. The West Coast of India is dotted
with the estuaries of numerous rivers which originate in the Western Ghats, one of the global
biodiversity hotspots. Yet there has been an almost callous neglect and misuse of these high
ranking productive ecosystems causing inestimable losses.
9.11 NEERI Work
The samples were collected from the Tadadi Port of the Aghanashini Estuary
Area by the consortium of M/s Prointek S.A. and Mir group, samples were identified in
NEERI laboratory. The Bivalves were identified as presented in the Fig. 9.16.
9.11.1 Management
Bivalve area is demarcated before construction of the port
Care should be taken while constructing the port on the Bivalve area
9.11.2 Study
A fresh study should be undertaken for the confirmation of the presence of
Oysters in the identified area and Aghanashini Estuary simultaneously, while
development of the port is also carried out.
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.18
References
1. Apte, D. 1998. The Book of Indian Shells. Bombay Natural History Society, Oxford
University Press, Mumbai.
2. Babu, K.K.S. and Nayar, C.K.G. 2004. A new species of the blind fish Horaglanis
Menon (Siluroifea: Claridae) from Parappukara (Trichur District) and a new report
of Horaglanis krishnai Menon from Ettumanur (Kottayam district), Kerala. JBNHS,
Vol. 101 (2): 296 – 299.
3. Bhat, A. 2003. Diversity and composition of freshwater fishes in four river systems
of Central Western Ghats, India. Environmental Biology of Fishes. 68:25-38.
4. Bhat, P. K. 2003. Hydrological Studies of Aghanashini Estuary, Kumta – Central
West Coast of India. Ph. D Thesis. Karnataka University, Dharwad.
5. Chatterji, A., Z. A. Ansari, B. S. Ingole, M. A. Bichurina, M. Sovetova and Y. A.
Boikov. 2002. Indian marine bivalves: Potential source of antiviral drugs. Current
Science, 82: 1279-1282.
6. Costanza, R., R. d'Arge, R. deGroot, S. Farber, M. Grasso, B. Hannon, K.
Limburg, S. Naeem, R.V. O'Neill, J. Paruelo, R.G. Raskin, P. Sutton and M. van
den Belt. 1997. The valuation of the world’s ecosystem services and natural
capital. Nature, 387: 253-260.
7. CSIR. 1962a. The Wealth of India: Raw Materials Vol. VI: L-M. National Institute
of Science Communication and Information Resources, CSIR, New Delhi, India.
8. CSIR. 1962b. The Wealth of India: Raw Materials Vol. IV Supplement - Fish and
Fisheries. National Institute of Science Communication and Information
Resources, CSIR, New Delhi, India.
9. Dahanukar, N., Raut, R. and Bhat, A.2004. Distribution, endemism and threat
status of freshwater fishes in the Western Ghats of India. Journal of
Biogeography. 31:123- 136.
10. Daniels, R.J.R. 2003. Biodiversity of the Western Ghats: An overview. In ENVIS
Bulletin: Wildlife and Protected Areas, Conservation of Rainforests in India, A.K.
Gupta, Ajith Kumar and V Ramakantha (editors), Vol. 4, No. 1, 25 – 40.
11. ftp://ftp.fao.org/docrep/fao/009/y4160e/y4160e04.pdf (Accessed on November 08,
2008).
12. Ghosh, A.K. 1992. Estuarine Ecosystem in India and Faunal Resources.
Estuarine Ecosystem series No (1) Rushikulya estuary. Zoological Survey of
India, 1-5.
13. Gosling, E. 2003. Bivalve molluscs –Biology, Ecology and Culture. Blackwell,
United Kingdom.
14. Gururaja, K.V. 2004. Sahyadi Mandooka: Western Ghats Amphibians, Sahyadri
enews: 6. http://wgbis.ces.iisc.ernet.in/biodiversity/newsletter/ issue6/index.htm.
15. http://india.gov.in/sectors/defence2.php (Accessed on January 04, 2007).
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.19
16. http://www.biodiversityhotspots.org/xp/hotspots/hotspotsscience/key_findings/Pag
es/default.aspx (Accessed on November 08, 2008)
17. http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html (accessed on July 25, 2008).
18. http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html (accessed on July 25, 2008).
19. http://www.karnataka.com/profile/physiography.html (Accessed on December 21,
2007)
20. http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusAnkolaVWP.htm (accessed on July 21, 2008).
21. James, P.S.B.R., S.L. Shanbhogue and T.R.C. Chandrasekhara Gupta. 1975.
Estuarine fisheries resources of South Kanara District, Karnataka. In: Recent
Researches in Estuarine Biology. (ed. Natarajan, R). pp. 99 – 104. Hindustan
Publishing Corporation, Delhi, India.
22. Mane U. H. 1973. Studies on the Biology, Ecology and Physiology of the Marine
Clams. Ph.D Thesis. University of Bombay, India.
23. Nagabhushanam, R. and Thompson M. 1997. Fouling Organisms of the Indian
Ocean: Biology and Control Technology. CRC Press.
24. Pritchard, D. W., 1967. Observations of circulation in coastal plain estuaries. In:
Estuaries. Ed. G.H. Lauff. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci., 83: 37-44.
25. Ranade. 1964. Studies on the Biology, Ecology and Physiology of the Marine
Clams. Ph.D Thesis. University of Bombay, India.
26. Roberts, D. 1999. Commercial exploitation of bivalves. International meeting on
Biology and Evolution of the Bivalvia, Malacological Society, London.
27. Staples D., Satia, B. and Gardiner, P.R. 2004. A research agenda for small-scale
fisheries. Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations Regional Office
for Asia and the Pacific, Bangkok.
28. Venkataraman, K. and Wafar, M. (2005) Coastal and marine biodiversity of India.
Indian J. Mar. Sci., 34 (1): 57-75.
29. Volman, T. P. 1978. Early Archeological Evidence for Shellfish Collecting.
Science, 201: 911-913.
30. Winkler, R. 2006. Valuation of ecosystem goods and services Part 1: An
integrated dynamic approach. Ecological Economics, 59: 82-93.
31. Economic valuation of Bivalves in the Aghanashini Estuary West Coast,
Karnataka ENVIS Technical report 30 November 2008.
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.20
Fig. 9.1: Paphia Malabarica
Fig. 9.2: Perna Viridis Attached to Stone by Thread-like Byssus
Fig. 9.3 (a): Bivalve Shells Burnt along with Coconut Shell to make Lime Powder
Fig. 9.3 (b): Lime Powder Packing
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.21
Fig. 9.4: General Features of a Bivalve (ftp://ftp.fao.org/)
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.22
Fig. 9.5 : Sampling Points in Aghanashini Estuary
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.23
Fig. 9.6: Spatial Distribution of Calm, Mussel and Oysters in the Aghanashini Estuary
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.24
Fig. 9.7: Oyster Bed
Fig. 9.8(a): Perna Viridis
Fig. 9.8(b): Crassostrea sp.
Fig. 9.8(c): Paphia malabarica
Fig. 9.8(d): Katelysia opima Fig. 9.8(e): Meretrix meretrix
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.25
Fig. 9.8(f): M. Casta Fig. 9.8(g): Arca granosa
Fig. 9.8(h): Vellorita cyprinoides
Fig. 9.9 (a): Bivalve collecting men
Fig. 9.9 (b): Bivalve collecting women
Fig. 9.10: Women removing empty and dead shells from the collection
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.26
Fig 9.11(a): Harvester Selling the Bivalves to the Wholesaler
Fig 9.11 (b): Women Selling the Bivalves in the Kumta Market
Fig 9.12 (a): Shell Mining People Fig 9.12 (b): Shell Transporting People
Fig. 9.13: Dried Meat Fig 9.14: Edible Portion of Bivalves
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.27
Fig. 9.15: Bivalve Harvesting and Shell Mining Areas
a) Non-identified Species b) Identified Species
Fig. 9.16 : Bivalves (Calms, mussels and oysters)
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.28
Table 9.1
Some Edible Species of Bivalves in India
Sr. No. Common Name Scientific Name
1 Bay clam Meretrix meretrix (Linn.)
2 Backwater clam M. casta (Deshayes)
3 Katelysia (Eumarcia) opima (Gmelin)
4 Black clam Velorita cyprinoids (Gray.)
5 Cockle clam Gafrarium (Gafrarium) tumidum (Roding)
6 G. (Circe) divaricatum Gmelin
7 False cockle Cardita bicolor Lam.
8 False clam Paphia malabarica (Dilwyn)
9 P. marmorata (Reeve)
10 P. marmorata (Reeve)
11 Mesodesma glabratum (Lam.)
12 Mactra corbiculoides (Deshayes)
13 Asiatic cockle Cardium asiaticum (Bruguiere)
14 Wedge-shells/clams Donax cuneatus Linn
15 D. scortum Linn.
16 Green mussel Perna viridis
17 Bearded weaving mussel Modiolus barbatus (Linn.)
18 Estuarine oyster Crassostrea madrasensis
19 Rock oyster C. cucullata (Born)
20 Disc oyster C. discoidea (Gould)
21 Giant oyster C. gryphoides (Newton & Smith)
22 Ribbed ark-shell Acra granosa Linn.
23 True scallop Chlamys senatoria Gmelin (Pectinidae)
24 Sanguinolaria (Soletellina) diphos (Gmelin)
25 S. (Soletellina) atrata (Deshayes)
26 Razor-shells Solen truncatus (Sowerby)
27 S. brevis (Hanley)
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.29
Table 9.2
Chemical Composition of a Few Important Edible Indian Bivalves
Species Edible Portion
%
Moisture %
Protein %
Fat %
Carbo-hydrates
%
Ash %
Ca% P% Iron mg/ 100 g.
Backwater clam (Meretrix castd) 7.62-17.72 73.18-84.02
5.96-12.29
0.5-1.89 - 0.67-2.31 0.06-0.37 0.11-0.20 1.42-16.56
Backwater oyster (Crassostrea madrasensis)
5.03-17.36 76.67-85.04 5.72-13.31
1.36-3.07
- 0.52-2.06 0.04-0.40 0.10-0.21 2.53-29.63
Green mussel (Perna viridis) 42.8 81.46 9.92 1.97 - 3.04 1.84 0.16 -
Freshwater mussel (Lamellidens marginalis)
79.45 14.50 1.61 2.13 2.31 0.59 0.41 -
Table 9.3
Medicinal Uses of Few Molluscs
Scientific Name Common Name Treatment
Turbinella pyrum Sacred chank Dyspepsia, piles, general debility, and some skin and lung diseases
Caked shell Demulcent and cardiac stimulant
Chank Spleen enlargement in Bengal
Cypraea moneta Linn Spleen enlargement
Pila globosa Apple snail Sore eyes in south India
Achatinafulica Ferusasc Shell is used in the preparation of medicated oils
Placuna placenta Linn Windowpane oyster Eye diseases
Pinctada margaritifera (Linn.) Black-lipped pearl-oysters
Used medicinally in the form of ash
Crassostrea madrasensis Estuarine oyster Demulcent
C. gryphoides Giant oyster Demulcent
Freshwater mussels Seed pearls are credited with invigorating properties
Sea-mussels Manufacture of vitamin products
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.30
Table 9.4
Species-wise Habitat and Distribution of Edible Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary and Elsewhere in India
Scientific Name
Common
Name
Habitat in
Aghanashini
Estuary
Distribution and Habitat in India
Uses
Paphia malabarica
False clam At water depth >1
m at low tide
East and west coasts sandy
bottom, mid-littoral
Food for humans,
lime production and
poultry feed
Katelysia opima Mud-flats or sandy
bottom
Marine and estuarine
shallow waters, mud-flats or
sandy bottom
do
Meretrix meretrix
Bay clam Mud-flats or sandy
bottom
West coast mud-flats or
sandy bottom, mid-littoral
do
Meretrix casta Backwater
clam
Mud-flats or sandy
bottom
Estuaries and backwaters of
east and west coasts, mudflats
or sandy bottom, midlittoral
do
Villorita cyprinoides
Black clam At water depth <1
m at low tide
West coast backwaters and
estuaries
do
Arca granosa Blood clam Sandy bottom
inter-tidal
Back-waters and estuaries
along the Indian coast,
sandy bottom, inter-tidal
do
Crassostrea sp. Oyster Inter-tidal mudflats
mixed with
sand and shell
fragments
East and west coast
estuaries, and backwaters
Food for humans,
lime production
fertilizer and poultry
feed
Perna viridis Green mussel
Sub-tidal: steep,
rocky areas near
river mouth
East and west coast marine
intertidal, sub tidal and
estuarine, rocky shores
Food for humans
Source: Apte 1 998; Chatterji et al. 2002; CSIR 1962a; CSIR 1962b.
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.31
Table 9.5
Taxonomic hierarchy of Paphia malabarica (Chenmitz), Katelysia opima (Gmelin), Meretrix meretrix (Linne), M. casta, Villorita cyprinoides (Gray.),
Perna viridis (Linne), Area granosa (Lamarek), Crassostrea sp.
Kingdom : Animalia
Phylum: Mollusca
Class: Bivalvai
Order: Veneroida
Family: Veneridae
Genus : Paphia Katelsia Meretrix Meretrix
Species: Malabarica (Chenmitz)
Opima (Gmelin) Meretrix (Linne) Casta (Deshayes)
Order: Veneroida Mytioids Arcoida Ostreoida
Family: Corbiculidae Mytilidae Arcidae Ostreidae
Genus: Villorita Perna Acra Crassostrea
Species: Cyprinoids (Gray)
Viridis (Linne) Granosa (Lamarek)
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.32
Table 9.6
Village-wise Estimated Number of Bivalve Collecting (BC) Households (HH) and Number of Individuals Involved in Bivalve Harvesting
Village No. of NH**
BC HH
% of BC HH
BC Men
BC Women
Total BC Persons
Hiregutti 596 1 0.17 1 1
Bargigazani 14 5 35.71 5 5
Aigalkurve 120 5 4.17 2 6 8
Bargi 359 7 1.95 7 4 11
Paduvani 331 13 3.93 3 11 14
Balale 213* 10 4.69 14 14
Betkuli 316 22 6.96 25 25
Lukkeri 280 32 11.43 34 34
Kodkani 407 29 7.13 25 10 35
Hegde 1311 31 2.36 29 19 48
Kagal 711 33 4.64 44 9 53
Madangeri 279 20 7.17 56 56
Morba 180 34 18.89 81 10 91
Toregazani 38 38 100 69 28 97
Mirjan 630 89 14.13 85 94 179
Torke 261 72 27.59 158 26 184
Gokarn 2,532 98 3.87 205 22 111
Divgi 524 323 61.64 237 203 440
Aghanashini 579 340 58.72 692 133 825
Total 9,681 1,202 12.42 1,738 609 2,347
**http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusKumtaVWP.htm
*http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusAnkolaVWP.htm
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.33
Table 9.7
Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested (Kg. wet weight with shells/day)
Village Jun-Oct % of Total Harvest
Nov-May % of Total Harvest
Hiregutti 105 0.09 105 0.07
Aigalkurve 300 0.25 300 0.20
Bargigazani 337 0.28 337 0.22
Bargi 412 0.34 412 0.27
Balale 420 0.35 420 0.28
Lukkeri 431 0.36 637 0.42
Paduvani 489 0.41 588 0.39
Betkuli 708 0.59 843 0.56
Hegde 851 0.71 2,062 1.37
Kodkani 1,275 1.06 2,175 1.45
Madangeri 1,680 1.40 1,680 1.12
Morba 2,497 2.08 3,060 2.04
Toregazani 2,551 2.13 6,014 4.01
Kagal 4,890 4.08 4,230 2.82
Torke 5,782 4.82 7,188 4.79
Mirjan 5,940 4.96 7,320 4.88
Gokarn 9,945 8.30 11,922 7.95
Divgi 23,565 19.66 30,465 20.31
Aghanashini 57,683 48.12 70,270 46.84
Total 119,861 150,028
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.34
Table 9.8 (a)
Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested by Men (in Kg. wet weight with shells/day)
Village QHD:
Jun-Oct BCD in Jun-Oct
Total harvest (kg)- Jun-Oct
QHD: Nov-May
BCD in Nov-May
Total harvest (kg)- Nov-May
Hiregutti 105 44 4,620 105 154 16,170
Bargigazani 338 32 10,800 338 64 21,600
Bargi 263 26 6,825 263 96 25,200
Aigalkurve 165 13 2,145 165 182 30,030
Paduvani 225 100 22,500 225 140 31,500
Balale 420 9 3,780 420 108 45,360
Betkuli 709 9 6,379 844 85 71,719
Hegde 638 13 8,288 1,849 120 221,850
Morba 2,475 8 19,800 3,038 78 236,925
Kodkani 1,125 10 11,250 1,875 132 247,500
Madangeri 1,680 96 161,280 1,680 168 282,240
Kagal 4,620 18 83,160 3,960 80 316,800
Toregazani 2,498 48 119,880 5,951 96 571,320
Mirjan 3,960 40 158,400 4,500 138 621,000
Torke 5,760 45 259,200 7,110 102 725,220
Gokarn 9,430 33 311,190 11,378 78 887,445
Divgi 15,960 10 159,600 21,330 90 1,919,700
Aghanashini 56,689 71 4,024,951 67,278 117 7,871,580
Total 107,058 5,374,047 132,307 14,143,159
BCD - Bivalve collecting days; QHD - Quantity harvested per day
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.35
Table 9.8 (b)
Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested by Women (in Kg. wet weight with shells/day)
Village QHD: Jun-Oct
BCD in Jun-Oct
Total Harvest (kg)-
Jun-Oct
QHD: Nov-May
BCD in Nov-May
Total harvest (kg)-
Nov-May
Morba 23 34 765 23 119 2,678
Toregazani 54 30 1,620 63 96 6,048
Torke 23 51 1,148 78 102 7,956
Aigalkurve 135 10 1,350 135 133 17,955
Bargi 150 36 5,400 150 126 18,900
Kagal 270 7 1,890 270 98 26,460
Paduvani 264 10 2,640 363 90 32,670
Hegde 214 12 2,565 214 168 35,910
Kodkani 150 10 1,500 300 126 37,800
Gokarn 516 75 38,672 545 105 57,173
Lukkeri 431 10 4,313 638 102 65,025
Aghanashini 994 49 48,694 2,993 114 341,145
Mirjan 1,980 48 95,040 2,820 161 454,020
Divgi 7,605 11 83,655 9,135 120 1,096,200
Total 12,807 289,251 17,725 2,199,939
BCD - Bivalve collecting days;
QHD - Quantity harvested per day
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.36
Table 9.9
Village, Season and Gender-wise Income per year from Bivalve Collection
Village Men Women Total (Rs.)
June-Oct Nov-May June-Oct Nov-May
Aghanashini 14,247,842 17,979,543 158,992 704,600 33,090,977
Divgi 568,830 4,428,772 291,182 2,378,217 7,667,001
Mirjan 563,418 1,422,253 328,839 967,109 3,281,619
Gokarn 969,601 1,836,715 135,472 130,651 3,072,439
Torke 795,644 1,427,533 62,813 285,116 2,571,106
Toregazani 431,482 1,333,506 86,293 201,571 2,052,852
Madangeri 588,305 672,031 1,260,336
Kagal 289,145 719,192 6,867 62,622 1,077,826
Kodkani 41,044 589,468 5,036 79,019 714,567
Hegde 29,770 515,903 9,405 86,184 641,262
Morba 60,376 425,015 36,535 77,000 598,926
Paduvani 75,219 65,406 9,579 77,161 227,365
Betkuli 21,459 150,423 171,882
Aigalkurve 7,714 69,957 4,950 43,092 125,713
Balale 13,589 105,607 119,196
Lukkeri 11,397 89,487 100,884
Bargi 14,748 22,534 19,365 43,839 100,486
Bargigazani 38,767 50,173 88,940
Hiregutti 16,848 38,485 55,333
Total 18,773,801 31,852,516 1,166,725 5,225,668 57,018,710
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.37
Table 9.10
Village-wise Income from Sale of Shell Sale (Rs./year)
Village BHH SHH No of basket (Shells) sales /
Rs. family
Rs./ basket
Income (Rs.) / family
Total (Rs.) / Village
Hiregutti 1 1 25 10 250 250
Aigalkurve 5 3 28 10 280 840
Kodkani 29 20 11 11 121 2,420
Balale 10 10 28 11 303 3,025
Paduvani 13 7 35 13 438 3,063
Hegde 31 19 16 11 176 3,344
Bargigazani 5 5 50 15 750 3,750
Madangeri 20 20 40 10 400 8,000
Mirjan 89 36 23 11 256 9,207
Torke 72 18 75 9 638 11,475
Gokarn 98 33 41 12 488 16,088
Toregazani 38 19 148 11 1,623 30,828
Kagal 33 26 118 12 1,416 36,816
Morba 34 26 143 12 1,710 44,460
Divgi 323 226 35 14 490 110,740
Aghanashini 340 139 118 12 1,416 196,824
Total 1,141 609 10,752 481,129
BHH - Bivalve collecting households;
SHH - Shell selling households
Chapter 9:
Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary
9.38
Table 9.11
Village-wise Income from Sale of Dried Meat (Rs./year)
Village BHH DHH kg sales / family
Rs. / kg Expense (Rs.)
Income (Rs.) / family
Total (Rs.)
/village
Bargigazani 5 5 2 200 300 1,500
Hiregutti 1 1 18 150 2,625 2,625
Paduvani 13 3 9 250 110 2,140 6,420
Torke 72 13 4 160 20 620 8,060
Aigalkurve 5 3 20 150 135 2,865 8,595
Kagal 33 13 6 175 200 894 11,619
Morba 34 17 8 166 88 1,159 19,709
Balale 10 5 40 100 25 3,975 19,875
Madangeri 20 20 8 175 150 1,163 23,250
Divgi 323 129 2 120 13 183 23,543
Toregazani 38 29 17 150 147 2,353 68,247
Aghanashini 340 170 8 127 175 834 141,696
Total 894 408 19,110 335,138
BHH - Bivalve collecting households;
DHH -Dried meat selling households
CChhaapptteerr 1100
TTrraaffffiicc aanndd DDeemmaanndd
SSttuuddyy 10.1 Traffic Study and Demand Assessment
M/s Prointec, Mir Projects & Consultants, has carried out Feasibility Study for
the Development of Tadadi Port, wherein Traffic load in terms of quantity of material
(import & export) to be handled through the port is projected until the year 2040-41.
Further, feasibility/options for transport of material (iron ore, coal, steel, containers,
general cargoes etc.) through existing road and rail network has been assessed and need
for developing additional road and rail network has been assessed under different
scenarios. The salient features of the final report (January 2012) has been presented
here.
The methodology adopted for the traffic study and demand assessment is
presented in Fig. 10.1.
10.2 Export of Iron Ore
Three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic scenarios have been
evaluated. The Iron ore export projected through Tadadi port for different scenarios is
presented in Fig. 10.2, which indicates that the iron ore export traffic will start after the
third year of concession (2015-16). After that the traffic will grow exponentially till 2020-21
and then further increase is expected, once the new railway line between Hubli and
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.2
Ankola is commissioned. This will cause a gradual increase in the annual iron ore traffic.
Depending on the scenario, in 2023-24, 2024-25 and 2025-26, traffic will reach its
maximum, and thereafter, the export traffic is expected to stabilize.
10.3 Import of Coal
Similar to the iron ore, three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic
scenarios have been evaluated. The Coal traffic, that would be imported by the Tadadi
port under three different scenarios is presented in Fig. 10.3, which shows that the port
will not commence until 2020-21, till commissioning of the new Railway line between
Hubli and Ankola. Subsequently, coal import traffic will increase at a faster rate and
thereafter; the traffic will stabilize to its maximum capacity by 2037-38.
10.4 Export of Steel
Similar to iron ore and coal, three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic
scenarios have been considered. The steel traffic export scenarios presented in Fig. 10.4
show that after the year 2015-16, the steel export would start at the Tadadi port and
thereafter it will rise at a rapid rate, attaining maximum export by the year 2037-38. Then,
the export of steel will stabilize at the maximum export rate.
10.5 Complementary Traffics
The following other complementary traffics were also analyzed:
General cargo and containers
Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)
Passengers
Ship yard
Only the general cargo and containers can generate enough traffic to be
considered at the new port. In this case, the hinterland area is the northern half of the
Karnataka State. Regarding LNG, NTPC intends to establish a power plant of
4200 MW adjacent to the port land. Though, establishment of a shipyard is not
contemplated at present, area south of the proposed port can be explored taking
advantage of the proposed Tadadi Port.
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.3
10.6 Analysis of Connectivity to Port
Port connectivity is a critical factor for determining the feasibility of the
proposed port at Tadadi. The capacity of existing roads and railways and the forecasts of
future extensions will determine the traffic handling capacity of the Port.
The hinterland for the main traffic is the Bellary – Hospet region, from where
the iron ore and steel products shall arrive for export, and also where iron and steel
industries using imported coal will be located.
10.6.1 Connectivity by Road
10.6.1.1 Existing connections
The road connectivity link between Bellary – Hospet and Tadadi would be via
Hubli on the National Highway NH-63 [represented with red line in Fig. 10.5]. At Hubli two
options exist for connecting to Tadadi:
Option 1: NH 63 (From Hubli region to Ankola) and NH-66 (From Ankola to
Tadadi) [represented with blue line in Fig. 10.5].
Option 2: NH-4 (From Hubli to Tadas), SH-69 – (From Tadas to Kumta),
NH-66 (from Kumta to Tadadi) [represented with green line at Fig. 10.5].
For both alternatives there is a common stretch, corresponding to the NH-63
between Bellary-Hospet and Hubli. This stretch will control the admissible road traffic
between Bellary-Hospet and Tadadi. Therefore, the National Highway NH-63 will have to
be analyzed to determine both the present capacity and the future capacity and the
number of lanes will have to be increased accordingly.
Another strategic connectivity options linking the Bellary-Hospet region with
Tadadi by road was identified as Tadadi to Hospet -Bellary via Haveri. It comprises of
NH66 (from Tadadi to Kumta), SH 69 and SH 2 (Kumta to Haveri) and NH 63 (Haveri -
Koppal-Hospet-Bellary).
Iron ore traffic
According to the report “Pre-Feasibility study for (transport) logistics
architecture in Karnataka”, carried out by iDeck in April 2010, out of the 31.9 millions
tonnes export from the Bellary-Hospet region through both the eastern and western
Indian ports, 21.52 million tonnes were transported through road (67.3 %) and 10.27
millions by railway (32.7%). Considering the same scenario, it has been estimated that
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.4
the 67.3 % of the iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi Port will arrive by road and
the rest 32.7 % by railway.
Coal Traffic
It has been assumed that all the imported coal traffic will be transported from
the Tadadi Port to the Bellary-Hospet area by railway. In order to get a greater flexibility, it
has been assumed that once the coal Terminal become operative, 10% of the traffic will
be transported by road.
Steel Products Traffic
The modal distribution of the exported steel products has been considered to
be 50 % by road and 50% by railway.
10.7 Connectivity by Railway
10.7.1 Existing connections
The existing nearest railway station is Ankola on the Konkan railway line which
does not cater to Bellary Hospet region. The connectivity of the Tadadi port by railway
can be improved by the construction of the line between Hubli and Ankola, which is
assumed to be completed by 2019-20. Till then, no railway traffic has been considered for
the Tadadi Port. In any case, the stretch of railway between Hubli and Bellary-Hospet will
have to support all the traffic to/from Mormugao and Tadadi ports.
10.7.2 Conclusions
In order to estimate the evolution of port traffic at the Tadadi Port, it would be
appropriate to select the realistic hypothesis as the most suitable scenario.
Based on the figures of the realistic scenario and taking into account the
limitations on the road traffic due to the maximum capacities of the existing roads until the
year 2019-20 and the future construction of the railway line between Hubli and Ankola,
year-wise traffics that can be operated through the port is presented in Table 10.1. It
indicates that Tadadi Port will start its activities with traffic volume of 2.87 million tonnes in
the year 2015-16. Over the following years, this volume will increase until the year 2040-
41, where it is estimated to reach 62.36 million tonnes.
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.5
10.7.3 Road and Rail Layout within the Port Area
Roadway
A four-lane road entering the port is being further redirected at the junction
towards the Dry bulk terminal and Multi -purpose terminal as shown in Fig. 10.6.
Necessary access control at the entry of the port is also provided. The road to the port is
connected to existing NH 66. There are two options suggested for this; which is also
shown in Fig. 10.6. (Option A: northern side road, and Option B: southern side road).
Rail lines
The railway tracks taking off from the Konkan rail to the port has been
bifurcated into five tracks, out of which one leads to the multipurpose berth and the rest
cater to the iron and coal berths.
10.7.4 Connectivity with the Mainland
The road to the port is connected to existing NH 66 (formerly called NH 17).
Two options were studied (option A and option B as shown in the Fig. 10.7) and finally
option A was found to be appropriate. Option B may be considered for stage 2 of the port
development. The stretch of the rail line from the port connecting to the existing Konkan
railway is also shown in the Fig. 10.7.
Fig. 10.1: Methodology Adopted for the Traffic Study and Demand Assessment
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.6
Fig. 10.2: Iron Ore Export Traffic Scenarios
Fig. 10.3: Coal Import Traffic Scenarios
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.7
Fig. 10.4: Steel Export Traffic Scenarios
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.8
Road Connection between Bellary- Hospet and Tadadi via Haveri
Fig. 10.5: Road Connections between Bellary - Hospet and Tadadi
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.9
Fig. 10.6: Road and Rail Layout within the Port Premises
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.10
Fig. 10.7: Road and Rail Connection to the Existing Rail / Road Infrastructure
Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study
10.11
Table 10.1
Projected Total Traffic Generated at the Tadadi Port (thousand tonnes)
YEAR Iron Ore
Coal Steel General Cargo +
Containers TOTAL
2010-11 0 0 0 0 0
2011-12 0 0 0 0 0
2012-13 0 0 0 0 0
2013-14 0 0 0 0 0
2014-15 0 0 0 0 0
2015-16 2870 0 0 0 2870
2016-17 4235 0 0 0 4235
2017-18 5598 0 0 0 5598
2018-19 6959 0 0 0 6959
2019-20 7503 0 0 0 7503
2020-21 21174 1967 2326 857 26324
2021-22 22818 4174 2732 913 30637
2022-23 24462 6642 3181 974 35259
2023-24 26106 9399 3678 1038 40221
2024-25 27171 10763 3920 1106 42960
2025-26 27171 11431 4178 1179 43959
2026-27 27171 12143 4453 1256 45023
2027-28 27171 12901 4746 1339 46157
2028-29 27171 13710 5058 1427 47366
2029-30 27171 14571 5391 1521 48654
2030-31 27171 15490 5746 1621 50028
2031-32 27171 16469 6124 1728 51492
2032-33 27171 17512 6527 1841 53051
2033-34 27171 18624 6956 1963 54714
2034-35 27171 19809 7414 2092 56486
2035-36 27171 21072 7902 2229 58374
2036-37 27171 22418 8422 2376 60387
2037-38 27171 23344 8779 2532 61826
2038-39 27171 23344 8779 2699 61993
2039-40 27171 23344 8779 2877 62171
2040-41 27171 23344 8779 3066 62360
CChhaapptteerr 1111
HHyyddrrooddyynnaammiicc SSttuuddyy
A detailed study on the Hydrodynamic aspects of the Aghanashini river
has been carried out during the feasibility study and is attached as Appendix – F.
CChhaapptteerr1122
SSeeddiimmeenntt DDiissppeerrssiioonn SSttuuddyy
12.0 Dispersion Study
12.1 Introduction
Engineering surveys and investigations carried out by M/s PROINTEC & MIR
Consultants on the proposed alignment of the berth and the navigation channel has
indicated that there is requirement of dredging of the sea bed, both the capital dredging
for the construction of the port (navigation channel, turning circles and berths) as well as
annual maintenance dredging to maintain the required drafts. A large volume of the
dredged material is proposed to be disposed offshore. Therefore, it is necessary to
identify a suitabale offshore location where the dredged sediments could be disposed.
Consequently, a dispersion study has been carried out to identify a well defined area
which will guarantee a complete precipitation of the sediment disposed with the least
environmental degradation.
12.2 Methodology
The methodology adopted for the study has the following stages:
Definition of the sediment
Definition of the climate conditions
Modeling
Analysis of the results
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.2
12.2.1 Definition of the Sediment
From the Subsurface investigation (Geotechnical investigation report by MIR
Consultant), the analysis of the sediment in the area of dredging was carried out. From
the results of the boreholes investigations, it is concluded that in the outer approach
channel the material of the seabed is mainly sand with some pockets of clay. Fig.12.1
depicts the average grain size distribution for the samples obtained from the boreholes
(SBH-1 to SBH-4), at four different locations at depths varying from 0 to (-)5 m CD, from
(-)5 to (-)10 m CD, from (-)10 to (-)15 m CD and below (-)15 m CD. It can be observed
that on an average, the material above (-)15 m CD is sand (material with D50 > 0.063
mm) and only the material below (-)15 m CD is clay or silt.
From the results of the boreholes investigation in the inner channel, the turning
circles as well as alongside the berths, the material of the seabed has a wider distribution
i.e. both fine sand and clay/silt. Fig.12.2 depicts the average grain size distribution of the
samples obtained from boreholes (SWBH-01 to SWBH-06), at four different depth levels:
from 0 to (-)5 m CD, from (-)5 to (-)10 m CD, from (-)10 to (-)15 m CD and below (-)15 m
CD.
It was observed that on an average the material above (-)5 m CD and below
(-)15 m CD is fine sand (material with D50 > 0.063 mm) and the material between
(-)5 m CD and (-)15 m CD is clay or silt. This result fits quite good with the classification
at the boreholes, although the soil classifications for the samples obtained above
(-)5 m CD show 4 sands (SM or SP-SM) and 4 clays (CH or CI), this is 50%-50%
between sand and clay. Therefore, an average size (D50 = 0.063) mm represents the
finest portion of the sediment to be dredged.
12.2.2 Definition of the Climate Conditions
As the sediment will be disposed off approximately 5 m below the sea surface
(at the depth equal to the draft of the dredger), the main environmental parameters that
can affect the sediment movement are the currents. Neither the direct action of the wind
(that is above the water surface) nor the waves (that at depths around 15/20 m) will have
significant influence in the sediment dispersion process. Regarding the currents, only
those generated by wind will be significant, as at this area, the tidal effect is not important
and the disposal areas will be located in open sea, where the tidal currents are
comparatively weaker. Therefore, the wind conditions at the area have been analyzed in
order to calculate the currents that can be generated. As per the “Wave Modeling and
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.3
Siltation Analysis Report”; the tide, wave and wind climate has been studied. Fig. 12.3
summarizes the wind characteristics through the annual wind rose. The frequencies for
each direction are (from highest to lowest): SSW (32 %), W (18.9 %), NW (15.9%), WSW
(13.3 %), NNW (4.4 %),S (3.7 %), SW (2.9 %), ENE (2.6 %), WNW (2.5 %), NE (1.3 %),
E (0.7 %), SSE (0.7 %), N (0.6 %), NNE (0.5 %), SE (0.1 %) and ESE (0 %), Further,
Weibull Cumulative Probability Distributions are presented for each direction, which allow
correlating the wind speed with the average annual exceedance probability.
Table 12.1 shows the value of the wind speed (m/s) for each direction and
different annual exceedance probabilities (5 %, 2 %, 1 % and 0.5 %).
12.2.3 Modeling
The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the
dredge hopper has been carried out by means of the program DUMP, developed by
PROINTEC. It is an analytical model developed specifically to analyze the sedimentation
process of solids into a fluid. It requires the following variables as input data :
Density of the water
Bottom depth
Density of the material dumped
Average size of the material dumped
Velocity of the dredge during the dumping
Direction of the dredge during the dumping
Depth of dumping
Velocity of general current
Direction of general current
Velocity of tidal current
Direction of tidal current
Wind velocity
Wind direction
The program DUMP solves the movement equation for a spherical particle
under the action of the i) gravity, ii) buoyancy and iii) friction force (in a direction opposite
to the velocity direction of the particle). The program considers the velocity induced to the
particle by the dredge movement during the dumping and by the existing current along
the water column. Three types of currents can be considered: a) general current, b) tidal
current and c) wind-induced current. The first two are introduced directly in the program
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.4
as input data, whereas the wind-induced current velocity profile is calculated by the
program using the Ekman’s approximation. The result of the program gives the horizontal
distance covered by the particle during its sedimentation since the point of dumping until
it touches the seabed. Several cases have been considered:
16 wind directions (sectors each of 22.5º)
Values of exceedance probabilities for the wind speeds (5 %, 2 %, 1 %
and 0.5 %)
Different values of the particle size
12.2.4 Analysis of the results
The results obtained for the different cases mentioned above are shown in
Fig. 12.4. The average depth considered at the dumping area is 20 m below CD.
For the strongest winds (W and WSW with an exceedance probability of 0.5 %),
the horizontal distance covered by particles with an average size of 0.064 mm is 1,078 m.
The area defined for the disposal of the dredged material from the hopper has
dimensions of 3,000 m x 4,000 m = 12 million m2. Nevertheless additional dimensions
must be included to consider the sedimentation of the sediments after having been
dumped. Depending on the wind direction these additional dimensions are different (i.e.
the horizontal displacement of the particles until touching the seabed. Fig. 12.5 represent
the enveloping of the sedimentation area for the particles (note that the longitudinal axis
of the dumping rectangle 3,000 m x 4,000 m and has the direction NW to SE). It is
concluded that the area needed including for the sedimentation of particles D50 = 0.064
mm) for the strongest winds (associated to an exceedance probability of 0.5 %) is 4,500
m x 5,300 m. This is the total area which shall be considered for the dumping site for the
proposed Port of Tadadi.
The study has finally identified two areas for the dumping of the dredged
material, one to either side of the navigation channel, with a clearance of 1,000 from the
channel (Fig. 12.6). The average depth of these two areas is (-)20 m CD and the
minimum depth (-)15 m CD.
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.5
Source: PROINTEC & (MIR
Fig. 12.1: Grain Size Distribution of Seabed in the Outer Approach Channel
Source: PROINTEC & MIR
Fig.12.2: Grain Size Distribution of Seabed at the Estuary
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.6
Source: PROINTEC & MIR
Fig. 12.3: Annual Frequency of Wind Speed by Direction
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.7
Source: PROINTEC & MIR
Fig. 12.4: Horizontal Displacements of the Particles during the Sedimentation Process
Source: PROINTEC & MIR
Fig. 12.5 : Areas of Dumping and Sedimentation
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.8
Source: PROINTEC & MIR
Fig. 12.6: Identified Areas for Dumping and Sedimentation of Dredged
Material
Chapter 12:
Sediment Dispersion Study
12.9
Table 12.1
Wind speed (m/s) Vs. Annual Exceedance Probability
P = 5 % P = 2 % P = 1 % P = 0.5 %
Direction Vw
(m/s) Direction
Vw (m/s)
Direction Vw
(m/s) Direction
Vw (m/s)
N …. N …. N …. N 2
NNE …. NNE …. NNE …. NNE ….
NE …. NE …. NE 2.5 NE 4.5
ENE …. ENE 3 ENE 5 ENE 6.5
E …. E …. E …. E 3.5
ESE …. ESE …. ESE …. ESE ….
SE …. SE …. SE …. SE ….
SSE …. SSE …. SSE …. SSE 2.5
S …. S 3.25 S 5 S 6.5
SSW …. SSW 7 SSW 7.5 SSW 8
SW …. SW 3.25 SW 7 SW 8
WSW 6.5 WSW 9 WSW 10 WSW 11.5
W 7.5 W 9.5 W 10.5 W 11.5
WNW …. WNW 3.5 WNW 6 WNW 7
NW …. NW 7 NW 8 NW 9
NNW 6 NNW 5 NNW 6.5 NNW 7.5
CChhaapptteerr1133
DDiisscclloossuurree ooff CCoonnssuullttaannttss
EEnnggaaggeedd
13.1 NEERI Profile
NEERI (National Environmental Engineering Research Institute) is a Constituent
Laboratory of CSIR (Council of Scientific & Industrial Research), India (Website:
www.neeri.res.in) was established in 1958.
13.1.1 NEERI Mission and Vision
NEERI Mission
The Institute dedicates itself in the service of mankind by providing innovative
and effective solutions to environmental and natural resource problems. It strives to
enable individuals and organizations to achieve productive and sustainable use of natural
resources on which all life and human activity depend. Highly skilled and motivated, the
Institute strives for excellence in environmental science, technology and management by
working hand in hand with its partners.
NEERI Vision
NEERI envisions a world in which
All individuals and Institutions have capacity to act in a manner that
ensures achievement of sustainable environmental and economic goals.
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.2
The natural balance is no longer threatened and all share the benefit of a
healthy environment.
NEERI would continue to strive for
Leadership in environmental science, technology and management
domestically and worldwide.
Strong and effective working relationship with its partners in ensuring
ecological health of all regions in India.
13.1.2 Mandate of NEERI
To conduct R&D studies in environmental science and engineering.
To render assistance to the industries of the region, local bodies etc. in
solving the problems of environmental pollution.
To interact and collaborate with academic and research institutions on
environmental science and engineering for mutual benefit.
To participate in CSIR thrust area and mission projects.
13.1.3 NEERI Activities
R&D Thrust Areas
Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Modeling
Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment
Environmental System Design
Environmental Biotechnology
Environmental Genomics
Environmental Policy Analysis
Advisory
Central Govt. Ministries
State Govt. Ministries
Industries
Judiciary
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.3
13.1.4 NEERI Services & Goods
Research intensive areas
Air, Water, Wastewater, Soil (Land), Solid & Hazardous Waste
Environmental Biotechnology & Genomics
Environmental Materials
Public and strategic areas
Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Policy Analysis
Socio-economic areas (urban & rural)
Drinking water
Clean Air
Environment & Health
Advice to Central & State Government Agencies
Judiciary
Industry focus
Environmental Monitoring, Management and Audit
Environmental Technology Assessment
Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment
13.1.5 NEERI Human Resources
NEERI : Human Resources Total : 331 (As on March, 2013)
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.4
13.1.6 Organisational Chart of CSIR and NEERI
CSIR, India (Organisational Chart)
CSIR-NEERI : Human Resource (Scientific) (As on March 2013)
An Autonomus R&D Society President: Prime Minister
Vice President : Minister, S&T
Governing Body Chairman: Director
General
CSIR HQrs Head : Director General
Laboratories (38) NEERI is one Amongst These Head : Director
Research Council
Performance Appraisal Board
Management Council
Advisory Board
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.5
NEERI: Organisation Chart
13.1.7 Financial Resources of NEERI
Financial Resources (2010-2013) (Rs. in Crore)
(ECF- Environmental Consultancy Fund, LRF- Laboratory Reserve Fund)
Director Research Council
Management Council
R&D Divisions/Units
• Air Pollution Control
• Environmental Analytical Instrumentation
• Environmental Biotechnology
• Environmental Genomics
• Environmental Impact and Risk Assessment
• Environmental Materials
• Environmental Systems Design and Modelling
• Geo-environment Management
• Analytical Instrumentation
• Solid Waste Management
• Wastewater Technology
Zonal Laboratories
• Chennai
• Delhi
• Hyderabad
• Kolkata
• Mumbai
Support Services (Technical)
• Construction & Maintenance
• Instrumentation Workshop
• Mechanical Workshop
• Electrical Workshop
• Photography
Support Services (Administration)
• Controller of Administration
• Finance & Accounts Officer(s)
• Administrative Officer(s)
• Bill Section
• Establishment Section
• General Section
• Personnel & Vigilance Section
• Purchase Section
• Stores Section
• Security
• Hospital/Medical Facilities
Support Services (Scientific)
• R&D Planning and Business Development
• Project Monitoring
• Information Technology
• Library & Documentation
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.6
13.1.8 Analytical Instruments, Computer Systems and Software at NEERI
13.1.8.1 Analytical Instrumentation Resource
UV-VIS-NIR Spectrophotometer : Hitachi 330
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer : GBC 904 A
Fluorescence Spectrophotometers : Hitachi F-4000 & Hitachi F-4500
Mercury Analyzers : Perkin Elmer MAS-50 A and MAS-50 B
Gas Chromatographs : Perkin Elmer Autosystem – 5 nos.
High Performance Liquid Chromatographs : Waters 204 and 501;
Shimadzu – LC10
Gas Chromatograph-Mass Spectrometer : Varian Saturn III
Liquid Chromatograph-Mass Spectrometer-Mas Spectrometer : Quattro
Ultima
Ocean related studies : ADCP, CODAR, GPS, Ekmen Dredge, Reversible
sampler, (Nishkin type) DRDF, Reversible thermometer, Tide Gauges
Doppler SODAR
Mini Sonde
Microscopes
Biolistic particle delivery system with accessories
Gene Pulser II System with accessories & consumables
Membrane Bioreactor Assembly
Wet air Oxidation High pressure reactor
Ground Penetrating Radar
Multi Electrode resistivity Imaging system
Ambient Ozone Analysers
Eight Stage Cascade Impactor
Microwave Furnace
CHNS Analyser Vario ELIII
Porosimeter Quanta Chrome PM33-7
Mercury Analyser – Milestoen DMA80
FTIR Spectrometer – Bruker Vertex 70
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.7
Catalyst Evaluation assembly with GC
Simultaneous Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometer
(for Heavy Metals ) : Perkin Elmer Optima 4100 DV
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (for Heavy Metals ) : Perkin Elmer
Analyst 800 with Auto Sampler and HGA Furnace
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) Analyser: Thermo Euroglass TC 1200
VOC Analyser : Photovac 2020 and Photovac Voyager for Analysis of
VOCs in Ambient Air
Carbon Analyser : Behr Labor Technis C-30-IRF
13.1.8.2 Computer Hardwares & Prepherials
Computer Hardware
High performance computer systems configures around RISC workstations
Sun Ultra Sparc Computer Station: Sun Ultra 1 Model 170
Silicon Graphics 02 Workstations
Silicon Graphics 2000 Workstations
HP APOLLO 90001730 Workstations
Personal Computers
Laptop Computers
Local Area Network
13.1.8.3 Supporting Software
Geographic Information Systems – ARC INFO, MAP INFO
Knowledge Based System – Prokappa
Digital Image Processing – ERDAS, EASIPACE, PCI WORKS
INGRES
CADCORE
SPSS
IMSL
COMPLIERS
GRAPHICS
MATLAB
DIVAST
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.8
Softwares for Mathematical Modeling (Available at NEERI)
Air Environment
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
PAL-DS Point (stacks), area (quarry) and line (vehicular) sources in short range
ISCST-3 Point and area sources in short range
CALINE 4 Vehicular sources close to road
RTDM3.2 Point and area sources existing at rough terrain in short range
VALLEY Point and area sources existing in valley in short range
MESOPUFF Point and area sources in long range
CDM Point and area sources in short range
RAM Point and area sources in short range
BLP Point and line sources in short range
SDM Point and area sources existing in coastal region in short range
CAL3QHC Vehicular sources close to road for Hydrocarbon Levels
ADAM Point and area sources in long range
ADMS-3 Point and area sources in long range
PANACHE Meteorological data and point, area & line sources in any range
MTDDIS Point and area sources in long range
TAPM Meteorological data and impacts due to point, area and line sources in short and long range
Noise Environment
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
FHWA Vehicular sources
Wave Divergence Stationary sources
Aquatic Environment – Ground Water
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
GMS Flow, direction, contaminant transport in saturated and unsaturated zones, subsurface solute transport with aerobic and sequential anaerobic biodegeneration, remediation
FEMWATER/
LEWASTE
Stable contaminant transport & pollution, groundwater pollution and remediation
PATRIOT Hydrology, stable contaminant transport & pollution and landuse management
PRZM3 Stable contaminant transport & pollution and landuse management, consequence of surface water pollution on groundwater
WhAEM2000 Risk of groundwater contamination, hydrology, stable contaminant transport & pollution
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.9
Aquatic Environment – Surface Water
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
MIKE 11 One dimensional model for dam break analysis, sediment transport, ecological and water quality assessments in rivers and wetlands
MIKE 21 Two dimensional model for Environmental Impact Assessment of marine infrastructure, sediment and mud transport, spill analysis
MIKE 3 Three dimensional model for various applications in different water bodies for water pollutions studies
MIKE SHE Integrated surface and groundwater modeling
ECO LAB For ecological modeling in rivers wetlands, lakes, reservoirs, estuaries, coastal waters and sea
CORMIX Software for simulation for fluid-flow mixing in different water bodies
EXAMS Aquatic Chemistry & Biology in streams and sea
GCSOLAR Photolysis, half life
HSCTM2D Hydrology, sediment & contaminant transport in river and estuary
HSPF Aquatic chemistry and biology sediment transport and deposition in rivers
OXYREF Dissolved oxygen, respiration, ventilation
PLUMES Available dilution, design of marine outfall
PRZM3 Hydrology, metals and pesticides prediction in surface water
QUAL2EU Water quality in stream, planning, non-point sources
SED3D Hydrodynamics, sediment transport, 3-D, lakes, estuary, harbour, coastal
SMPTOX3 Toxic-chemicals in streams, aquatic biology, combined sewers
SWMM Aquatic biology, combine sewers, community discharge, rivers, streams
TMDL USLE
Soil and sediment loss, watershed management
Visual Plumes
Surface water, contaminant transport
WASP Hydrodynamics, aquatic biology, toxicant dispersal, hydrology
Surface Water Runoff
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
HEC-5 Flood hydrography, runoff estimation, catchment area treatment
HSPF Hydrologic simulation in reservoir, nutrient growth
STORM Urban watershed, storage/reservoir routing, sedimentation, erosion, reservoir chemistry
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.10
Ecology
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
ECOMOD Estuary linked reservoirs, tidal action, saltwater intrusion, in-stream and in-reservoir dissolved oxygen primary and secondary productivity estimation
LAKE-I Thermal stratification primary and secondary productivity
Food Chain
Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to
EGETS Exposure levels and effects of contaminants on organisms which make food chain
LC50 Lethal concentration, LC50 toxicity levels
Multimedia
Model Useful for Predicting Impacts due to
3MRA Multimedia pathway, receptor exposure, risk assessment
MINTEQA2 Aquatic biology, multimedia pathway
MMSOILS Multimedia pathway, exposure assessment
MULTIMED (1.01)
Environmental effects of waste disposal in one media to another surface & ground water
Dam Break Analysis
Model Useful for Predicting Impacts due to
DAMBRK Downstream flow simulation consequent to dam break
Risk Assessment
Model Useful for Predicting Impacts due to
SAFETI 6.21 & 6.42V
Complete package for consequence analysis and risk analysis in onshore process engineering
PHAST 6.21 V & 6.42V
Complete package for consequence analysis in onshore process engineering
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.11
13.1.9 Clients of NEERI
13.1.9.1 Clients: International
The World Bank
Asian Development Bank
United Nations Development Programme
United Nations Environment Programme
World Health Organization
International Union of Conservation for Nature
Danish International Development Agency
Global Scan Technologies, Dubai
Global Tech Safety & Environmental Consultancy, Dubai
Dept. of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) / Environment and Social
Services Office (ESSO), Philippines
13.1.9.2 Clients: Central Government
Atomic Energy Regulatory Board
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited
Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited
Gas Authority of India Limited
Hindustan Organic Chemicals Limited
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited
Indian Oil Corporation Limited
Indian Petrochemicals Corporation Limited
Jawaharlal Nehru Port Trust
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.12
Madras Refineries Limited
Mangalore Refinery and Petrochemicals Limited
Mumbai Port Trust
National Aluminium Corporation Limited
National Hydroelectric Power Corporation
National Thermal Power Corporation Limited
Nuclear Power Corporation India Limited
Numaligarh Refineries Limited
Oil India Limited
Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited
Rashtriya Chemicals & Fertilizers Limited
Tuticorin Port Trust
13.1.9.3 Clients: State Government
Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation Limited
Gujarat Narmada Valley Fertilizers Company Limited
Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited
Gujarat State Petronet Limited
Kudremukh Iron Ore Company Limited
Maharashtra State Electricity Board
Tamilnadu Industrial Development Corporation
Chattisgarh State Electricity Board
Narmada Water Resources, Water Supply & Kalpasar Deptt.
Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd.
Steel Authority of India
13.1.9.4 Clients : Private Industries (National)
Alembic Pharmaceuticals Ltd.
Asian Paints India Ltd.
Andhra Sugars
Ballarpur Industries Ltd.
Dighi Port Pvt. Ltd.
Dony Polo Petrochemicals Ltd.
Electrosteel Castings Ltd.
ESSAR Oil Ltd.
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.13
Grasim Industries Ltd.
Gujarat Pipavav Port Ltd.
Gujarat Positra Port Infrastructure Ltd.
Hazira Port Pvt. Ltd.
Hindustan Oil Exploration Company Ltd.
Jindal Vijaynagar Steel Pvt. Ltd.
Paradeep Phosphates Ltd.
Pipavav Ship Dismantling & Engineering Ltd.
Reliance Petrochemical Ltd.
Reliance Industries Ltd.
Sahara India Pvt. Ltd.
Saurashtra Chemicals Ltd.
Search Chem Industries Ltd.
Tata Petrodyne
United Phosphorus Ltd.
Zuari Industries Ltd.
ABG Cement
NCTL Pvt. Ltd.
Amanora Park Town
Lavasa Corporation Ltd.
Nagarjuna Fertilizer and Chemicals
13.1.9.5 Clients : Private Industries (Multi-National)
British Gas International (India)
Cairn Energy India Pty. Limited
Command Petroleum, Australia
Enron Oil & Gas India Limited
Hindustan Oil Exploration Company Limited
Hindustan Oman Petroleum Company Limited
Niko Resources Limited
Petro Energy Products Company India Limited
Rio Tinto Orissa Mining Limited
Shell India Private Limited
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.14
South Asia LPG Company Limited (a JV of M/s Total Gas & Power India)
Mitsui & Company, Japan
OAO Gazprom, Russia
Mosbacher India L.L.C
13.1.10 Studies with International Funding
Construction of Middle Vaitarna Dam for Augmentation of Water
Resources and Irrigation near Mumbai (WB) (1990-1993)
Augmentation of Chennai Water Supply – a Project at New Veeranam,
Tamilnadu (WB) (1994-1995)
Construction of Aerated Lagoons and Selection of Marine Outfall Location
(Worli) off Mumbai Coast (WB) (1994-1995)
Water Quality Studies for Hyderabad Water Supply and Sanitation Project
(WB) (1995-1990)
Oceanographic Modeling Studies for Sewage Outfall Location (Bandra) off
Mumbai Coast (WB) (1995-1998)
Strengthening EIA capacity and environmental legislation in India (ADP)
(1998-2000)
Implementation off Master Tourism Plan in Andaman Islands (UNDP)
(1999-2000)
Design & Implementation of Information Network for Indian Centre for
Cleaner Technologies (WB) (1999-2002)
Planning for Coastal and Marine Environment under Gujarat State
Environmental Action Programme (WB) (1999-2000)
Development of National Guidance Manual & Support Manual on EIA
Practices for Enhancing the Quality & Effectiveness of Indian EIA’s (WB)
(2002-2004)
Water needs of Brahmani & Sabrmati river basins (ICID) (2002-2004)
Technical Assistance to ESSO to Enhance the Management of Social and
Environmental Safeguards for DPWH Projects, Manila, Philippines (WB)
(2005-2007)
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.15
13.1.11 US-AEP AWARD TO NEERI
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.16
14.1.12 Conformity to ISO 9001:2008
14.1.13 Contact Persons
DIRECTOR : Dr. S.R. Wate
Phone : +91 712 2249999 Fax : +91 712 2249900 GSM : +91 98231 10987
Email : [email protected]
SCIENTIST& HEAD: Dr. S.K. Goyal
Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment Division Phone : +91 712 2247844 Fax : +91 712 2249896 GSM : +91 9423400470 Email : [email protected]
Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants
Engaged
13.17
V.1
Annexure V
Methods of Monitoring and Analysis
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes (Also Please
Refer CPCB Guidelines on Methods of Monitoring and Analysis)
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
A. Air Environment Network Frequency
Meteorological IS 5182 Part 1-20
· Wind speed Minimum 1 site 1 hourly Mechanical/automatic Site specific primary data is
· Wind direction in the project continuous weather station essential
· Dry bulb temperature impact area
· Wet bulb temperature
· Relative humidity Rain gauge Secondary data from IMD,
· Rainfall
As per IMD specifications New Delhi
· Solar radiation
As per IMD specifications
· Cloud cover
CPCB guidelines
· Environmental Lapse Rate
Mini Sonde/SODAR
Pollutants 10 to 15 locations 24 hourly twice a Gravimetric (High-Volume)
Monitoring Network
· SPM · Minimum 2 locations in
in the project week upwind side, more sites in
impact area (Please refer downwind side / impact
National Ambient Gravimetric (High-Volume
zone
· RPM · All the sensitive receptors
Air Quality with Cyclone) need to be covered
Standards, CPCB EPA Modified West & Gaeke
· SO2 Notification dated Measurement Methods
11 th April, 1994) method
· NOx
Arsenite modified Jacob & As per CPCB standards for
Hochheiser NAQM, 1994
· CO 8 hourly twice a NDIR technique
week
· H2S*
24 hourly twice a Methylene-blue
· NH*3
week Nessler’s method
· HC* Infra Red analyser
· Fluoride* Specific Ion meter
· Pb*
*Project Specific
Note: For Rapid Environmental Impact Assessment one complete season data except monsoon is adequate while the comprehensive
Environmental Impact Assessment Resources coverage of three seasons
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Remarks
Method
B. Noise Network Frequency
· Hourly equivalent noise Identified study area Once in each Instrument : Noise level IS:4954-1968 as adopted by CPCB
levels season meter
· Hourly equivalent noise Inplant (1.5 metre Once Instrument : Noise level CPCB/OSHA
levels from machinery) meter
· Hourly equivalent noise Highways Once in each Instrument : Noise level CPCB/IS:4954-1968
levels season meter
· Peak particle velocity 150-200m from Once PPV meter
blast site
V.2
C. Water
Parameters for water · Set of grab Diurnal and Samples for water
quality samples during Season wise quality should be
· pH, temp, turbidity, pre and collected and analysed
magnesium hardness, post-monsoon as per :
total alkalinity, chloride, for ground and · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5)
sulphate, nitrate, fluoride, surface water for methods for
sodium, potassium, 10 km distance sampling and testing
salinity of Industrial
· Total nitrogen, total ·
effluents
phosphorus, DO, BOD, Standard methods
COD, Phenol for examination of
· Heavy metals water and
· Total coliforms, faecal wastewater analysis
coliforms published by
· Phyto plankton American Public
· Zoo plankton Health Association.
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
For River Bodies
· Total Carbon · Standard · Yield of water sources to be Samples for water quality Data should be collected
· pH methodology measured during critical should be collected and from relevant offices such
· Dissolved Oxygen for collection of season analysed as per : as central water
· Biological Oxygen surface water · River Stretch within project · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) commission, state and
Demand (BIS standards) area be divided in grids (say 1 methods for sampling and central ground water
· Free NH4 km length and 1/3 width) and testing of Industrial board, Irrigation dept.
· At least one samples should be from each effluents
· Boron
grab sample per grid at a time when the · Standard methods for
· Sodium Absorption
location per wastewater discharged by examination of water and
Ratio
· season other sources of pollution is wastewater analysis
Electrical
expected to be maximum published by American
Conductivity Public Health Association.
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
Parameters for wastewater · In plant · Diurnal and Samples for water quality All plant sources categorised as : characterisation sources season wise should be collected and · Process wastewater · Temp, colour, odour, · Grab and variation analysed as per : · ETP wastewater
turbidity, TSS, TDS composite · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) · Domestic/sanitary wastewater · pH, alkalinity as CaCO3, sampling methods for sampling and
p value, M value, total testing of Industrial
hardness as CaCO3, effluents chloride as Cl sulphate as Standard methods for
SO4, Nitrate as N O3, examination of water and Fluoride as F, Phosphate wastewater analysis
as PO4, Chromium as Cr. published by American
(Hexavalent, total) Public Health Association. Ammonical Nitrogen as
N, TKN, % sodium, BOD
at 20°C, COD, DO, total
residual chlorine as Cl2, oil and grease, sulphide,
phenolic compound
V.3
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
D. Land Environment
Soil One surface Seasonwise Collected and analysed as
· Particle size distribution sample from each per soil analysis reference
· Texture village, (soil book, M.I.Jackson and soil
· pH samples be analysis reference book by
· Electrical conductivity collected as per C.A. Black
BIS specifications)
· Cation exchange capacity
· Alkali metals
· Sodium Absorption Ratio
· (SAR)
Permeability
· Water holding capacity
· Porosity
Land use/Landscape At least 20 points Global positioning system
· Location code along the
· Total project area boundary Topo sheets
· Topography
· Drainage (natural) Satellite Imageries*
(1:25,000)
· Cultivated, forest,
Satellite Imageries*
plantations, water bodies,
(1:25,000)
roads and settlements
*Project specific
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
Solid Waste
Domestic Waste Grab and Seasonwise Guidelines
· Per capita contribution composite IS 9569 : 1980
· Collection, transport and disposal samples IS 10447 : 1983
system IS 12625 : 1989
· Process waste IS 12647 : 1989
· Quality (oily, chemical, biological) IS 12662 (PTI) 1989
Quality Grab and Seasonwise Analysis
· Loss on heating composite IS 9334 : 1979
· pH samples IS 9235 : 1979
· EC IS 10158 : 1982
· Calorific value, metals etc.
Hazardous Waste Grab and Analysis
· Permeability and porosity composite IS 9334 : 1979
· Moisture pH samples IS 9235 : 1979
· Electrical conductivity IS 10158 : 1982
· Loss on ignition
· Phosphorous
· Total nitrogen
· Cation exchange capacity
· Particle size distribution
· Heavy metal
· Arsenic
· Fluoride
V.4
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
E. Biological Environment · Considering probable Season wise Standard techniques · Seasonal sampling for aquatic
Aquatic impact, sampling points (APHA et. al. 1995, Rau biota
· Primary productivity and number of samples and Wooten 1980) to be · One season for terrestrial
· Aquatic weeds to be decided on followed for sampling and biota, in addition to
· Enumeration of phyto personal judgement measurement vegetation studies during
plankton, zoo plankton and within 10/25 km radius monsoon season
benthos ·
from the proposed site · Preliminary assessment
· Fisheries Samples to collect from · Microscopic analysis of
· Diversity indices upstream and plankton and me bents,
· Trophic levels downstream of studies of macro fauna,
· Rare and endangered species discharge point, nearby aquatic vegetation and
· Marine Parks/ Sanctuaries/ tributaries at down application of indices, viz.
stream, and also from
Shannon, similarity,
closed areas /coastal regulation
dug wells close to
dominance IVI etc.
zone (CRZ)
activity site
· Point quarter plot less
Terrestrial
· Vegetation-species list, method for terrestrial
economic importance, forest vegetation survey
produce, medicinal value
· Importance value index (IVI)
· of trees
Fauna
Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement
Method Remarks
Network Frequency
· Avi fauna · For forest studies, · Secondary data to collect from
· Rare and endangered species direction of wind Government offices, NGOs,
· Sanctuaries / National park / should be published literature
Biosphere reserve considered while · Plankton net
· Migratory routes selecting forests · Sediment dredge
· Depth sampler
· Microscope
· Field binocular
F. socio-economic
· Demographic structure Socio-economic survey Minimum for two Primary data collection Secondary data from census records,
· Infrastructure resource base is based on phases of the through questionnaire statistical hard books, topo sheets,
· Economic resource base proportionate, stratified project health records and relevant official
· Health status : Morbidity and random sampling records available with Govt. agencies
method
pattern
·
Cultural and aesthetic
· attributes
Education
Annexure I National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(November 2009) Sr.
No.
Pollutant Time
weighted
Average
Concentration in Ambient Air
Industrial,
Residential,
Rural and
Other Area
Ecologically
Sensitive Area
(notified by Central
Government)
Methods of Measurement
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1. Sulphur Dioxide
(SO2), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
50
80
20
80
- Improved west and Gaeke
- Ultraviolet Fluorescence
2. Nitrogen Dioxide
(NOx), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
40
80
30
80
- Modified Jacob & Hochheiser
(Na-Arsenite)
- Chemiluminescence
3. Particulate Matter
(size less than 10 m
or PM10), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
60
100
60
100
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
- Beta attenuation
4. Particulate Matter
(size less than 2.5
m or PM2.5), g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
40
60
40
60
- Gravimetric
- TOEM
- Beta attenuation
5. Ozone (O3), g/m3 8 hours*
1 hour**
100
180
100
180
- UV photometric
- Chemilminescence
- Chemical Method
6. Lead (Pb), g/m3 Annual*
24 hours**
0.50
1.0
0.50
1.0
- AAS/ICP method after sampling
on EMP 2000 or equivalent filter paper
- ED-XRF using Teflon filter
7. Carbon Monoxide
(CO), mg/m3
8 hours*
1 hour **
02
04
02
04 - Non Dispersive Infra Red (NDIR)
spectroscopy
8. Ammonia (NH3),
g/m3
Annual*
24 hours**
100
400
100
400 - Chemiluminescence
- Indophenol blue method
9. Benzene (C6H6),
g/m3
Annual* 05 05 - Gas chromatography based
continuous analyzer
- Adsoprtion and Desorption
followed by GC analysis
10. Benzo(a)Pyrene
(BaP), particulate
phase only, g/m3
Annual* 01 01 - Solvent extraction followed by
HPLC/GC analysis
11. Arsenic (As), ng/m3
Annual* 06 06 - AAS/ICP method after sampling
on PM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
12. Nickel (Ni), ng/m3 Annual * 20 20 - AAS/ICP method after sampling
on PM 2000 or equivalent filter paper
* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform
intervals
** 24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2% of the
time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring
I
Ambient Standards in Respect of Noise
Area Code Category of Area/Zone Limits in dB(A) Leq* ------------------------------------------------ Day Time Night Time
(A) Industrial Area 75 70 (B) Commercial Area 65 55 (C) Residential Area 55 45 (D) Silence Zone 50 40
Notes :
1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.
2. Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.
3. Silence zone is defined as an area comprising not less than 100 meters
around Hospitals, Educational Institutions and courts. The silence zones are
zones which are declared as such by the competent authority.
4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four
abovementioned categories by the Component Authority.
* dB(A) Leq denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels
on scale A which is related to human hearing
"A", in dB(A) Leq, denotes the frequency weighting in the measurement of noise
and corresponds to frequency response characteristics of human ear
Leq : It is an energy mean of the noise level over a specified period
Annexure II
III-1
Indian Standards/Specifications for Drinking Water IS : 10500 - 1991
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Essential Characteristics 1. Colour, Hazen unit 5 Above, consumer 25 4 of 3025, 1983 Extended upto 25 acceptance only if toxic substances decreases are not suspected in absence of alternate source 2. Odour Unobjectionable - 5 of 3025, 1983 a. Test cold and when heated b. Test at several dilutions 3. Taste Agreeable - - Test to be conducted only after safety has been established
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
An
nexu
re III
III-2
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4. Turbidity, NTU 5 Above, consumer 10 8 - acceptance decreases 5. pH value 6.5-8.5 Beyond this range No 8 - the water will affect relaxation the mucous membrane and/or water supply system 6. Total hardness, 300 Encrustation on water 600 - - mg/L as CaCO3 supply structure and adverse effects on domestic use 7. Iron (as Fe), mg/L 0.3 Beyond this limit, 1.0 32 of 3025, 1964 - taste/appearance are affected, has adverse effect on domestic uses and water supply structures, & promotes iron bacteria
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
III-3
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 8. Chlorides (as Cl)m 250 Beyond this limit, 1000 32 of 3025, 1988 - mg/l taste, corrosion and palatability are affected 9. Residual free 0.2 - - 26 of 3025, 1986 To be applicable only chlorine, mg/L when water is chlorinated Tested at consumer end, When protection against viral infection is required, it should be min 0.5 mg/L
Desirable Characteristics
10. Dissolved solids, 500 Beyond this 2000 16 of 3025, 1984 mg/L palatability decrease and may cause gastrointestinal irritation 11. Calcium (as Ca), 75 - 200 40 of 3025, 1984 mg/L
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
III-4
________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 12. Copper (as Cu), 0.05 Astringent, taste 1.5 36 of 3025, 1964 mg/L discoloration of pipes, fitting and utensils will be caused beyond this 13. Manganese (as Mn), 0.1 Astringent taste, 0.3 35 of 3025, 1964 mg/L discoloration of pipes, fitting and utensils will be caused beyond this 14. Sulphates, 200 Beyond this 400 24 of 3025, 1986 May be extended upto (as SO4), mg/L causes gastro 400 provided (as Mg) intestinal irritation does not exceed 30 mg/L when magnesium or sodium are present 15. Nitrates (as 45 Beyond this 100 - - NO3), mg/L methaemoglobinemia takes place
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
III-5
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 16. Fluoride (as F), 1.0 Fluoride may be kept 1.5 23 of 3025, 1964 - mg/L as low as possible. High fluoride may cause fluorosis 17. Phenolic substances, 0.001 Beyond this, it may 0.002 54 of 3025, 1964 mg/L (as C6H5OH) cause objectionable taste and odour 18. Mercury (as Hg), 0.001 Beyond this, the water No see note mercury To be tested mg/L becomes toxic relaxation ion analyser when pollution is suspected 19. Cadmium (as Cd), 0.01 Beyond this, the No see note mercury To be tested mg/L water becomes toxic relaxation ion analyser when pollution is suspected 20. Selenium (as Se) 0.01 Beyond this, the No 28 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when mg/L water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected 21. Arsenic (As), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No 37 of 3025, 1988 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
III-6
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 22. Cyanide (CN), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No 27 of 3025, 1986 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected 23. Lead (Pb), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No See note 86 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution plumbosolvency is suspected 24. Zinc (as Zn), mg/L 5 Beyond this limit 15 39 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when it can cause astringent pollution is suspected taste and an opalescence in water 25. Anionic detergents, 0.2 Beyond this limit, 1.0 Methylene blue To be tested when mg/L (as MBAS) it can cause a light extraction method pollution is suspected froth in water 26. Chromium (as Cr+6), 0.01 May be carconogenic 0.05 28 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when mg/L above this limit pollution is suspected 27. Polynuclear aromatic - May be carcinogenic - - - hydrocarbons (as PAH), mg/L
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
III-7
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 28. Mineral oil, mg/L 0.01 Beyond this limit 0.03 Gas chromatographic To be tested when undesirable taste method pollution is suspected and odour after chlo- rination takes place 29. Pesticides, mg/L Absent Toxic 0.001 58 of 3025, 1964 - 30. Radioactive materials a. Alpha emitters Bq/L - - 0.1 - - b. Beta emitters pci/L - - 1.0 - - 31. Alkalinity 200 Beyond this limit 600 13 of 3025, 1964 - (as CaCO3), mg/L taste becomes unpleasant 32. Aluminimum (as Al), 0.03 Cumulative effect 0.2 31 of 3025, 1964 - mg/L is reported to cause dementia 33. Boron (as B), mg/L 1 - 5 29 of 3025, 1964 - ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Note : Atomic absorption spectrophotometric method may be used
ANNEXURE IV
ENVIRONMENTAL (PROTECTION) THIRD AMENDMENT RULES, 1993
SCHEDULE-VI
General Standards for discharge of Environmental Pollutants-Part A. Effluents
(Marine Coastal area Standards)
Sr. No.
Parameter Standards for Effluent Disposal to Marine Coastal Areas
1. Colour and obour Efforts to remove colour and odour
2. Suspended solids mg/l Max a) For process waste water 100
b) For cooling water effluent 10 percent above total suspended matter of influent
3. Particle size of suspended solids a) Floatable solids
b) Settleable solids max. 850 microns
4. Dissolved solids (inorganic) mg/l ---
5. Ph value 5.5 to 9.0
6. Temperature
Shall not exceed 50C above the receiving water temperature
7. Oil and grease mg/I, Max 20
8. Total residual chlorine, mg/I Max 1.0
9. Ammonical nitrogen (as N) mg/I, Max. 50
10. Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as NH3) mg/I, Max 100
11. Free ammonia (as NH3) mg/I, Max. 5.0
12. Biochemical oxygen demand (5 days at 20°C)
100
13. Chemical Oxygen demand, mg/I, Max 250
14. Arsenic (as As) mg/I, Max. 0.2
15. Mercury (As Hg) mg/I, Max 0.01
16. Lead (as Pb) mg/I, Max. 2.0
17. Cadmium (as Cd), mgll, Max. 2.0
18. Hexavalent chromium (as Cr+6) mg/I, Max.
1.0
Sr. No.
Parameter Standards for Effluent Disposal to Marine Coastal Areas
19. Total chromium (as Cr) mg/l, Max. 2.0
20. Copper (as Cu) mg/l, Max 3.0
21. Zinc (as Zn) mg/I, Max. 15
22. Selenium (as Se) mg/l, Max. 0.05
23. Nickel (as N) mg/l, Max. 5.0
24. Cyanide (as CN) mg/l, Max. 0.2
25. Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max. 15
26. Sulphide (as S) mg/l, Max. 5.0
27. Phenolic compounds (as C6HsOH), mg/l Max.
5.0
28. Radioactive materials
a) Alpha emitters uC/ml, Max.
b) Beta emitters uC/ml, Max.
10-4
10-4
29. Bio-assay test
90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent
30. Manganese (as Mn) 2 mh/l
31. Iron (as Fe) 3 mg/l
32. Vanadium (as V) 0.2 mg/l
33. Nitrate Nitrogen 20 mg/l
Source: MoEF
ANNEXURE IV (a)
Water Quality Standards
(Natural Coastal & Beach Water)
Sr. No.
Characteristics Tolerance limit for bathing,
recreation commercial fish
culture and salt manufacture
1. Colour and obour No noticeable colour or
offensive odour
2. Floating material No visible floating matter or sewage or industrial waste origin
3. Suspended solids No visible suspended solids of sewage or industrial waste origin
4. Ph value 6.5 to 8.5
5. Free ammonia (as N) mg/I, Max. 1.2
6. Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH), mg/I, Max. 0.1
7. Dissolved oxygen, min.
40 percent saturation value or 3 mg/I whichever is higher
8. Biochemical oxygen demand (5 days at 20 degree centigrade) mg/lit. Max.
5
9. Coliform Bacteria, MPN inder per 100 ml. Max. 1000
ANNEXURE IV (b)
Tolerance Limits of Water Quality of Harbour Region
Parameter Tolerance Limit
pH 6.5 to 8.5
Temperature 320 C
Dissolved Oxygen <4-5
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (5 days-200C) 4
Chemical and grease 180
Oil and grease 1
Ammonical Nitrogen 1.2
Cadmium 0.3
Chromium (hexavalent) 0.2
Copper 1.5
Nickel 0.3
Iron 0.3
Lead 0.1
Zinc 1.5
Phenolic Compounds 0.005
Total Coliform MPN/100 ml 100
APPENDIX – I
Monitoring Shedule (Octomber-2010)
Sr. No. Locations I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 Hiregutti 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31
2 Hittalmakki 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31
3 Mithal Gazani 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31
4 Burgi 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31
5 Gokarna 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31
6 Mirjan 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1
7 Gangavali 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1
8 Gudkaghat 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1
9 Kenkon 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1
10 Koligudda 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1
Monitoring Shedule (November-2010)
Sr. No. Locations I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 Hiregutti 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30
2 Hittalmakki 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30
3 Mithal Gazani 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30
4 Burgi 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30
5 Gokarna 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30
6 Mirjan 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1
7 Gangavali 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1
8 Gudkaghat 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1
9 Kenkon 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1
10 Koligudda 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1